The One and Only World

Once upon a time there was a person named Hugo Steler. He was a thief and one day, he stole a purse from an old lady that had a library card so she could rent books from the public library. So he went to the library and picked out a random book. He didn’t know how it worked so he took a book and went outside, but the owner never saw so he was free. He read the whole thing and thought, “This isn’t anything important.” Then he read one page that told him about a world that was always green and exploded two trillion years ago. And so he thought, “I can make a new world, and I can live there. I can put my house there and I’ll have the biggest house in the world.” So he went looking for some clues to how to rebuild the world. He took one more book from the library. He read on one page that said if he finds a certain book, it will have a formula that creates a person that will tell him how to make the world again. So Hugo looked around and found all the ingredients. He needed a really, really special color that was called babu and then he also needed a really really really small bookcase that could fit into a glass. He put them all into a small container and he shook it and also put in a little bit of water, and after that it made a really really light yellow. Then, a little part of it exploded out so Hugo  went away and took a rag to clean it up, but it burned the rag! So he took the formula and put it in a secret container and then after a week, a new person came. That person told him everything to make the new world.

To make the new world, he had to get the best drawing in the whole world, and a piece of grass. So he was looking in the museum when he saw a giant painting but it wasn’t a painting; it was more like a scribble. It said, “The Best Painting in the World.”

But he hadn’t read the end of the directions, which was the most important part. That was, “The Best Painting in the World…for the stupid people.” SO Hugo took the painting but the guards saw him. They said, “No one can take the painting!” Then they said, “You can take that. That’s just a dumb drawing.”

Hugo said, “No, it’s the best painting in the world.”

The guard said, “That’s the best painting in the world for the stupid people!”

Hugo said, “Ohhhhh.” He looked in every single museum but he never found the Best Painting in the World. There was only the best picture for dumb people, or the best picture for people who never shut up. So, he just went to a chamber and said, “Why did I look here? It doesn’t seem important.” But there was a secret room. “Maybe it’s in here!” He walked and opened the door. It was so smelly! He almost passed out. But right in the middle of it was the painting. “If I can get past that wall of stinkiness, I can just use a portal.” So he ran to a bank and said “Can I have all your money, stupid person?”

One of the stupid bank people was writing a stupid report of how bad their bank was and there were nothing but baby stories all about the horrible bank. Hugo thought that the bank was actually the best. But they called it the Bad Bank. That was the name of that awesome place, but Hugo never was able to get money there. They were so mean, but it was an awesome place. So he ran to another place, but he had no idea where he was, so he just randomly went into a store and looked to see if there was a bank but there were none, and he went into a house and asked them for money but he was never able to find anything. So he just went to a random place that he never knew if it was even a place. It wasn’t a place. It was nothing. He started falling and falling and falling but then land came into view. But there were a million trampolines where he was. He went through 999 of them but then he started bouncing as high as the empire state building. He bounced so high he went right through all the trampolines. He crashed through the dirt and then he started falling again and there was nothing again. Then another land came into view and it was Heaven.

In Heaven, he got as much money as he wanted to buy diamonds to make a portal. The bad thing was, the only thing he needed after diamonds was impossible to get. Unless he killed  kill a million zombies! He never thought he could defeat them, but he got armor and a massive sword and so and so. Then he started looking for zombies but there were no more. So he gave up and went back to another world through a really small elevator and that world was the building world. So he just found a random house with a bed in it and went to sleep. When he woke up, he found a fake person in the room. He still didn’t feel like looking so he just opened the door. And there was the owner of the building right in front of him. But when the owner got so angry he fell onto the ground and turned into a zombie!

And then he yelled “7bytfgyrudhnygtfj8d3huyfrgrtefhiduh!”

After he said that, a million zombies rose from the earth. But Hugo wasn’t armed. The armor and the sword were on the other side. He thought, “If they look over there, then I can run.”

So he said “Hey, look, zombies!” He found the decoy on the edge of the door so he ran to get it and threw it as hard as he could. Since the zombies weren’t that smart, they thought that was him. So they ran after the decoy and jumped on the decoy. But there was one zombie that was smart enough to not run after that decoy. So, Hugo just took a grenade he found under his bed. He knew zombies in this world were really quite like dogs. So he just threw the grenade and the zombie ran and tried to get it and when he did he exploded. And then Hugo ran as fast as he could to the other side. Then he took his suit of armor that was laying on the door and put it on as fast as he can and got the sword. And when the zombies weren’t looking, he swiped his sword and since they were all bunched up he chopped off every zombie’s head.

He got the piece of paper that the ancient artist made. The piece of paper just appeared in the sky, falling down like a butterfly that had been shot by a gun. But then an evil dentist that had super shoes that let him jump super high appeared, and then he took the piece of paper and ran off.

But Hugo always had a gun in his pocket so he shot the dentist and won. That meant he could make the new world.

The Adventures of Cig and Pow

1:

Cig and Pow were best friends. Cig got hurt many times, so Pow hurt himself because he felt bad for his friend. They liked Minecraft. They were awesome, so they didn’t die, but they were wounded. Cig and Pow wanted to go inside the Volcano of Doom and they wanted to get random Pokemon cards that nobody uses anymore. The Demon of Fire, the Big Shield of Awesomeness, the Big Mountain of Trains, the Big Toy Store of Thomas, and Alice the Duck-land were all in their way!

So first they played played Minecraft for a while, and killed skeletons and stuff like that. Then they died in Minecraft because of a zombie pig man. Then they decided to go fight the Demon of Fire with their diamond swords and armor. Cig and Pow were doing this in real life, not Minecraft. They had to walk miles without water or food. When they got there…

 

2:

They didn’t see any sign of the Demon of Fire. All they saw were My Little Ponies. But when they opened the gate, the My Little Ponies formed to turn into the demon. It was 50 feet tall and 100 feet wide with 70,000,000,000 wings.

Cig and Pow were so freaked out that they almost peed their pants. But they didn’t. But they almost did. They took out their diamond things and slashed the demon in half. Then Cig and Pow slashed down the gate.

“Go, move,” they hissed at each other.

They wanted to get to the Big Shield of Awesome soon. The Big Shield of Awesome seemed like it was 1,000,000,000,000 miles away.

 

3:

With no food, Cig and Pow were melting (because they were in the desert).

 

4:

They were praying so hard that they would find some food that they were melting even more.

 

5:

After they went through the desert, they fainted.

So after they got back up, they ran as fast as they could to try and find the Big Shield of Awesome. They found it on the top of a mountain that was called Cuckooland.

After they found it, they decided they should use it to go inside the Volcano of Doom to find random Pokemon cards that nobody uses anymore.

After that, they had to travel two trillion more miles to get to The Mountain of Trains.

When they got there, the trains were coming at them like crazy people. And they had bow and arrows and they were trying to shoot Cig and Pow. The trains wanted to stop them because they knew if Cig and Pow got the Pokemon cards, they could control them with it. The trains didn’t want that. So they attacked Cig and Pow with their bows and shot both of them in the chest.

 

6:

Cig and Pow were unconscious for three hours. They were lying in the train land. They were looking around and all the trains were blurry.

“jslibodg  ueiieojeoj,” said Cig.

“Dnbdjggdwiwhdj,” said Pow slowly.

Everything got better eventually.

“Dkejduoowwyy; Fhhdddhhdj hhhhi uHhg,” they both said.

“Poop,” Pow said. “I don’t think we should be talking because I think the trains will come back.”

 

The End.

Biography – Scars

I must admit, it still hurts.  Every day, I feel it a bit, in my legs, arms, and face. I wanna scream but I just sigh and sit down – I guess I’ve gotten used to it.

What am I talking about?  Let me introduce myself. I am Rebecca Lugeva, and I am currently 78 years old. This is my story of how I got to where I am today.

 

July 16th, 1946

 

Right now I am nine. I lived in Turnsdale, Ohio and loved farming with my father, Bill. We were going to Florida where we were going on a rollercoaster past live lions! I was so excited!

We arrived in Florida at noon, a bright sun shining on me. I couldn’t wait to see those beautiful lions! As we arrived at the front gates, we were greeted by a tall man in a bright green outfit.

“Greetings family of Lugeva, we have been expecting you!” he said, as Father gave him some money. “Today we will be doing a beautiful tour of trained lions, so do not worry. And, as always, don’t lean out of the roller coaster.”

Filled with excitement, my family and I boarded the coaster, the man in green getting in the driver’s seat. I wonder what colors the lions are, I thought. Soon the engine roared to life and the roller coaster slowly took off, making a chugga-chugga sound. Soon, we were in a wonderful plains with a bunch of large, brown lions.

“They’re fabulous!” I cried out.

I leaned out to see them closer. At last minute I remember what the man in green had said: “Don’t lean out of the roller coaster.”

But it was too late. I fell off, landing on the grass. Then, I saw a lion charge at me, and everything went black.

 

July 20th, 1946

 

I woke up in a gray bed. It was long and uncomfortable. I noticed Father and Mother standing over me.

“You’re awake!” called Mother.

“W-what happened?” I asked groggily.

“You were bitten by a lion,” Father said. “Dumb Park Ranger! He said they were trained! You were in a coma for four days. We were very worried. Luckily the doctors have helped a lot.”

 

September 5th, 1953

 

Now, as I am 18, it is affecting my life greatly. The scars all over me made people afraid of me. It hurts all the time.  And today, I was sick of it.

I stared at my college roommate, the only person who supports me. Her name was Melissa Termella.

“What’s wrong?” she asked.

“Just thinking back to the incident.”

“Don’t!” she said. “That’s the past. Think about this moment.”

 

December 31, 1957

 

After college, Melissa and I stayed in touch. I moved into a small house in Ohio, my home state. I tried to get back into farming – maybe that will make me happier. Nope. The farming motions just made the pain worse. I told Melissa this, and she decided to help me.

“What do you mean, help?” I asked over the telephone.

“I’ll come over tomorrow. You’ll see.”

 

January 1, 1958

 

“Happy new year,” said Melissa as she entered my house.

“To you too,” I said, then grunted; my scars hurt as I closed the door.

I led my only friend into the living room, where we sat down on my soft chairs. Melissa began to speak.

“So…lets start,” she said, “I am going to help you lighten your spirits. The more happy you are, the better your scars will get.”

I sighed, “Okay. Lets start.”

“Good,” Melissa said. “First, what is your favorite thing to do?”

“Farming. That didn’t work.”

“Ah! Don’t say that. We’re going now.”

“What – ?”
“Do you trust me?”

“Yes.”

“Then come on.”

With a large smile on her face, she ran out of the living room and into the backyard. I ran after her, so confused, that I momentarily forgot my pain.
“What are you doing?!” I asked, when we were both outside.

“I’m farming, genius!” Melissa said as she picked up a shovel and hoe.

She began to dig. All she was doing was digging, occasionally looking into the holes she was digging.

“You don’t know how to farm, do you?  I laughed.

“No clue,” Melissa said, as she turned to me. “But you do!  Get over here.”
I jogged over and picked up the shovel, “This, is how the master does her thing.”

I leaned down to the grass and got so into my farming and planting, I forgot about the scars, the lion, everything…

“Jeez,” said Melissa.  “You’re great!”

In ten minutes, a new plant was beginning to sprout.

“Boom!” I said. “How’s that?”

“I’m better at teaching,” shrugged Melissa.

We smiled and went inside. We walked over to the front door, and Melissa turned to me.

“I guess I’ll be going,” she said. “Think about what we did. Did you even feel those scars while you farmed?”

“No.”

“Great,” she said happily. “I’ll be back in two days.”

 

May 7, 1960

 

Now, three years later, Melissa is still teaching me, and I am very grateful for her. I relate myself to the plants I farm – getting taller and taller, better and better, as time goes on.

My scars are getting much better. Farming is getting more fun than it ever was. And I am closely listening to everything Melissa teaches me about: social skills, chatting skills, distractions, and more. Where would I be if I had gone to a different college? Thank goodness I found her–I might still be that secluded woman who weeps all the time.

Every year on Melissa’s birthday I go to her house, hug her, and tell her how thankful I am for her. And the hugging does not hurt my scars.

 

April 17th, 2015

 

Ah, present day. As I said, it still hurts. But not nearly as much as it used to. I am old, so that might make it worse. But I’m happy now. I think of Melissa who I still see sometimes. I have a nice husband named Rick and I have learned to be super thankful. I never took Thanksgiving “thankful speech” seriously–until I met Melissa.

Thank you for reading my story. Maybe I can inspire you to rise up and be a hero.

Rae Raspberry

Right in our world, there is a land you will only see if you look closely: tiny people live in fruit, and their fruit. This is their story.

Rae watched the sunset in their small apartment while Mom and Dad argued. The gooey raspberry substance made a good cushion, as she had been sitting there for hours. Rae sighed. Ever since Mom came back, things had been hard, there was more arguing and fighting. Rae finished watching the sunset that looked pink from the raspberry.

“Dinner,” yelled Mom.

Rae sighed again. She was just glad to have Mom back. Mom’s new raspberry had an infestation of mold. Mom had only come back a few months ago. She’s so mean. Is that why? Rae wondered.

Raspberry quiche is my favorite!!!” Rupe said.

“What’s wrong?” said Rae.

Her parents looked at each offer.

“Your mother and I have decided we’re going to move to a body,” said Dad. She liked her little room even if she did have to share it with Rupe. Rupe said he really did not want to move. She thought of running to her room, but the house suddenly had a strange emptiness to it. Rupe was not sad about moving, though.

“Cool!” their Dad said. “Rupe is super happy and outgoing.”

A few days later, Rae finally had the courage to tell Willa and Grace that she was moving. She felt like her world was turning upside down. Everything was now packed up in little pink boxes that said, “Rheina Raspberry” or “Rupert Raspberry” or “Rupert Senior Raspberry” or “Rochelle Raspberry.” Before she knew it, it was time for Rae and her family to move.

Rae and her family climbed out onto the raspberry carton. Rae was still giving her parents the silent treatment. It was 2am. It was cold and scary, but Rae felt determined. She was so scared, having to take A bus and C bus. They had to jump over the ledge when Sam, the grocery store cat walked by.  She was not happy to be there with few other families and a guide.

“1,2,3! JUMP!” he yelled.

She jumped.

 

2:45 a.m.

Rae was tired. So tired that everything sounded like mumbling. She caught snatches of a conversations: I’m telling you. Caaaaa Siiick. Those hoodlums will pay! A high fever…

But most of all, Rae heard a young woman sing to her baby, only because she was next to her, as she was singing quietly, “If all of my misery was swept by a wave, I wouldn’t have to hide in a cave, my love, my only sweetheart.”

Just then Rae noticed that the woman, certainly quite young, had no baby, or child for that matter was with her. She must be crazy, thought Rae…

“All OFF! Last stop!” said the conductor, Hank.

“Rae, honey, wake up,” said Mom.

“Uuughhh,” said Rae.

Five hours later, the man at the Fruit Service Immigrant Center said, “Here are your seed costumes! You have to wear them when you board your raspberry! So if the humans see you, you will be safe.”

“WHAT?!” said Rae. It was a big white suit with a big white middle. It was the ugliest thing Rae had ever seen. She would never wear that. Her friend Grace would have said, “It would not have gone with her complexion.” She tried that–it didn’t work.

The man said, “Sorry kiddo.”

She was wearing a white undershirt. They went to their raspberry. It wasn’t like theirs–it was fatter, and you had to board the fruit that you were born with. “Now you are stuck with raspberries.”

She was disgusted. She was over ripe. Rae was so nervous, she didn’t want to get bitten. She didn’t want to get her leg bitten off like Willa’s dad. The carton was pretty, but she was so embarrassed about having to be in that costume, she tried to hide under the raspberry gel, but it did not work. She sat down. Her little brother Rupe was busy laughing. He thought he looked amazing in his suit. Mom and Dad looked so proud of him. “Thank you, Rupe, for being responsible and wearing it, even if you don’t want to,” said Dad with a glance at Rae.

“Grace and Willa would never be caught dead with that,” Rae said.

“WE’RE GOIN’ IN!!!” was heard all over.

Gosh, thought Rae, my neighbors were quieter than that. WERE quieter than that. WERE hit her like a pang in the chest. They were never going back, and she didn’t know what came ahead…

She woke to a sudden jolt to the shoulder. “Rae!!! Wake up, we’re going in!!!” said Mom.

“Rae, it’s time to gooo!!!” whined Rupe.

“OKAY! OKAY!” said Rae. She and Rupe got their bags and joined their parents at the edge of the gel. Instinctively, she crouched.

“Rae, hold on to your luggage,” said Mom.

“How do you know so much about this?” said Rae.

“I study,” said Mom. Just then, they felt themselves being lifted up.

“AAAHHH!!!” screamed Rae. Rae noticed she wasn’t the only one screaming–the whole Raspberry seemed to be shrieking in terror. Rae screamed along with them.

“BE QUIET,” came a voice that seemed to be coming from Rae’s stomach. “BE QUIET OR THEY WILL HEAR A MURMURING FROM THEIR FOOD!”

“Oh!” gasped Rae.

“Dont worry,” said Mom, “Everyone heard that. It came from the suit, that is what Mayor Fruitsy says.”

Rae had never been more scared in her life. “Mom and Dad, that was so close!!!” Chomp…Rae was aware of being put in the mouth. She vaguely saw Rupe. She saw teeth. She saw a person directing people, sitting on top of the uvula. She dived, like Mom and Dad had taught her. Mom and Dad…what happened? Chomp…oops, so close to my leg. She was just starting to get her courage back, when…she fell.

She was just falling down the tongue, and fast! She wanted to scream but bit her lip instead. Ooohhh! Cushiony! She tripped and fell onto a bridge. Clonk! Clonk! Her two pink bags fell on her head. ”Ooff!” she said.

“All in all, not such a smooth landing,” smirked a girl about her age, and then walked away. All Rae saw was long blond hair…

They said, “What’s wrong?”

“That girl was  mean!” She looked up at her, pained with tears in her eyes. This is not the future she wanted.

“Rae, we moved here for a new start…we needed to sort things out,” said Mom.

“RUPE!” yelled Dad.

“NO!” said Rae. She didn’t know why she didn’t want the girl to see her crying. Just then, Rupe arrived. But something was wrong. Rupe was clutching his hand and crying. His luggage fell on him too, but he didn’t seem to notice. Dad knew instantly what was wrong. “Rochelle! Take Rae to our house!” says Dad. “Our NEW house. I need to take Rupe to the emergency room. I know my way around here better than we did when we lived in our raspberry.” And with that, Dad and Rupe were gone.

To Rae, it looked like they had just disappeared from the ground. But she found out later that there was actually a series of tubes that once you stamped your foot in a certain place, and tapped in your ID, a bunch of manholes that led to the tubes that were all around the body that would take Dad and Rupe to the hospital. Along the sides of the greenish river, Rae noticed little beach houses. They were more like huts with a straw roof. They were small, but Mom said that it would fit them and they would live there.

They walked inside the hut and Rae noticed it was alright. Just no raspberry furniture. But she could get used to it and she had her own room. Just then, Dad popped out of the ground with Rupe.

“OH MY GOSH!!!! screamed Mom and Rae. “Whathappendtorupeisheokaywhatsup!” said Mom.

“He’s ok, it was just a graze. I’ll tell you later, Ro,” said Dad, using Mom’s nickname that meant something was wrong.

That night, Rae could not sleep in her new bed. To her it was uncomfortable, and made her sneeze. After the 10000000000th sneeze, she crept downstairs so she could ask Mom to make Mom’s special raspberry, but stopped when she heard her name.

“…AND dragging Rae to start over with a new brother, too!!!” She crouched under the stairs listening.

“Rupe…dead?” thought Rae. “Is that why he was in Mom and Dad’s bed?” She didn’t like Rupe but she didn’t hate him. Now she felt so guilty and tired that she lay down in bed, cried all night and didn’t sleep at all. Maybe that was why she was so grumpy the next day…

Rae had unpacked but something was still nagging at her. Raspberries tend to be real worrywarts. The first day of school was drawing nearer, but on the promising side, Dad was going to take them to his work on the brain.

 

Rae wrote this:

 

Some bad things in my life: Mom and Dad are fighting more, school starts soon!!! There is something wrong with my brother, my Dad bought him a device that he has to bring with him everywhere. Even at dinner or the bathroom. That is what Mom and Dad are fighting about now, but if it beeps when he has to go to work, it means something is wrong. I don’t like this…

 

Rae decided, right there on the very first day of school, to change “Rae” to “Rheina,” her given name. But then she changed it back to “Raina,” because it was better, and in her favorite book, that was the main character’s name.

Then realized she just liked Rae better.

When she arrived at the school, she looked at the class. It was so plain. She wished she’d gotten to go to the private raspberry school. Back when they lived in their old raspberry, there were two options. Go to a private school for just raspberries, or a school of mixed fruits. They were called Can Schools and Private Can Schools. She had originally gone to a private one, but after Mom moved out the first time when she was five, she switched to a Mixed Can School, and met Willa and Grace. Rae’s mother had moved out twice. The first time Rae’s mother came back because she had felt bad that she had taken her one-year-old son and not her five-year-old daughter. Rae was still mad at her about that. But she didn’t say anything, because it was too awkward. There are just some things you couldn’t tell her.

She pushed open the door, and…

“Here is the calculus of the numbers 2 4 6 8.” Oops. It was also Rae’s first time in middle school. She had gone to elementary school back in Raspberry Ville, but now the fifth grade school was a middle school. She had no idea what the teacher was talking about, but that didn’t really matter, because the teacher stopped right where she was as soon as she heard the door creak. “And here is our new student, Rheina Raspberry! Would you tell us a little bit about yourself, Rheina?”

Rae just stood there, so the teacher gave her a prompt. “Where are you from?”

Finally Rae got her courage. “Raspberry Ville,” she whispered.

“Great! Is there anything else you’d like to tell us about?” the teacher repeated, with that same amount of sarcasm they often use.

“Yes,” Rae said, repeated in a louder voice. “My name is Rae, not Rheina.”

The teacher looked for her for a moment and sat down. She told her to sit down next to a boy. He must have been a raspberry, Rae thought, because he has curly hair, like mine, but a darker shade of pink. The teacher was saying, “Richard, would you like to give Rae a tour?” Richard nodded.

First he showed her the bathroom, (awkward, because he was a boy and could not go in). Then he started talking: “my sister Riley is just like you, a girl with a love of nail projects. But I also have a brother named Roger, oh, and a baby named Reggie, another named Robbie, and everyone calls me Rich.”

Then he was silent. When they got back to class, the both of them were blushing, Rae from the lies she had told, and Richie from, well, everything.

“Good, now join Beryl, over there, Beryl, raise your hand!”

A pretty girl with blue hair tied into a bun and purple glasses raised her hand. “Yes, Miss Kiwi?” said Beryl.

She looks wimpy, thought Rae. She sat down next to Beryl and they worked on the math. However, the girl next to Beryl sneered and glared at Rae.

“Don’t mind her, that’s just Liviah. She’s mean.”

By the end of the lesson, they were talking about movies and recess. When the bell rang, Beryl asked Rae if she wanted to hang out with Beryl’s friends. Rae was happy to have this invitation so fast.

Just then, about five million girls came up. They all started telling Rae their names. All Rae heard was, “I’m Stella Strawberry,” and “I am Limona Lime,” and “I am Carina Cranberry,” and much more…everyone except for Liviah Lemon. Just then, Beryl pulled her away.

“Here, my friend,” she said. “Those are the twins Ollie and Ophelia Orange.”

“Hii!!!” said the girl named Lucy. “Let’s do a makeover on you, your lips are so dry.”

Rae touched the lips Mom always told her to put cream on, just as Stella said, “Oh my gosh, Luce, you are being so mean to this poor girl Rea, remember your first day?”

“Actually, its Rae,” said Rae softly, not wanting to upset one girl that was nice to her.

“Ahh! So sorry!” she said .

“S’okay,” said Rae. Just then, Liviah walked in.

“Hey Rae, you’re not okay, your Dad is dumb, your Mom should be dead, and I bet you wet the bed”.

Then she pushed Rae hard smack dab onto the ground. Her new friends helped her up, whispering words of comfort.

Recess ended. School was okay, classes were good, middle school was fine. That is what she told her mother, but here is a diary entry she wrote:

 

Dear Diary,

 

I hate this! The kids are okay, but it is so awful. I hate how the teachers are so boring and drone on. I hate that awful Liviah, she is so mean! Some of the kids are mean, and some are quiet, like Bart Blackberry in science, or Lola Lime. But it is so…bland, not like a mixed can should be.

 

Love,

R

 

Rae was excited about school. By the end of the week, she had forgotten that her father would take her and Rupe to the brain. He reminded her at dinner on Friday, but was interrupted by yet another phone call.

Her mother said, “Maybe that will give you a chance to see how busy your father is.” Then she cleared the dishes. Rae now relied more and more on her diary.

 

Dear Diary,

 

So nervous for the brain! Rupe seems to be feeling better, but he looks like he is running a 120 degree fever. I’m feeling sleepy, even though it is only 7:00. And today that Liviah pushed me against the lockers and spread the rumor that I wet the bed. One of my friends believed it! Aaaahhh!!

-R

 

On the day of the brain, Rae found a note scrawled for her by her mother. It read:

 

Rae’s father woke him up. At the gym–left out your clothes. Help Rupe get dressed–don’t forget he’s coming, too. Daddy is making breakfast.

 

Love, Mom

 

Rae looked at the clock. 6:00 a.m.! “Yeah, that’s when I get up,” said Dad.

He handed her a microwave waffle, still frozen. She gestured to it, and Dad shrugged.

“It’ll warm up while we walk.”

Mumbling something about too warm weather, he went to get his shoes. Then Rae remembered: Rupe! She woke him up, and they both got dressed, Rupe in a suit, and Rae in a frilly dress. They left, walked two blocks, and took a different subway.

They walked some more uphill, and Dad had to carry Rae and Rupe across some icky mud.

“Thank you, my lovely prince,” Rae said, and kissed him on the cheek. Rupe smiled.

When they finally got to the brain, both kids were tired, and Rupe had some mud trailing off his suit. Dad slapped a card in front big brass doors. A robotic voice said, “Hello, and welcome to the brain,” and after a brief pause, “Mr. R. Rasberry. Thank you for coming to work today.” Then it began to play the fruit national anthem. Oh say can you see, by the fruitily light…

Rae’s father opened the doors by punching in a code. The brain was full of light and energy. It was circular, and there was a rope to hold so you could not go in the sections. At each section, there was a door. Everything was bursting with activity. “Hiya, Brendon!” Dad said to a worker. “Brenny, these are my kids, Rae and Rupe.” Brendon barely nodded. Dad motioned to his head and made the crazy sign, which Rae thought was rude, as even crazy people have feelings too.

Their father had asked Rae to take Rupe to the fancy bathroom. (She made him go in the ladies room). But as they were walking back, Rae saw a familiar face: Brendon. “Hi, Brendon!” she called. He dismissed Rupe and Rae waving by just walking straight ahead. Rae shivered.

The rest of the brain was cool, but all Rae could think about was Brendon, and his distant yet cold look. Brendon was a blackberry. He looked like he used to have black hair, but thinning, and turning gray and white, like a grandfather. However, unlike a grandfather, there was no telltale twinkle in his cold, blue-gray, and, in this light, black eyes. So you can imagine just how happy Rae was to see her mother, out of the marble bathroom and long empty-spaced brain. Rae practically collapsed into her bed, meaning to think about Brendon, but she was so tired, she was asleep before the name Brendon ever entered her brain.

“Dinner, Rae? Are you feeling well?” her concerned mother said as she entered her room.

“Huh?” Rae was shaken awake by her mother’s voice. “I guess so.”

She joined her family at dinner, though not her father, as he had yet another business call. She hastily ate her dinner, even though it tasted bland and gross to her. “Now I’ve got a special surprise,” her mother said. “Raspberry pie!”

“Yay!!! cried Rupe.

“Hooray,” said Rae weakley.

“I hope you’re up to eating it,” her mother began, and to Rae’s horror, started to give a long speech about the importance of listening to your body, and only eating if you feel like it, even if it does look so good. But then somehow, the raspberries bubbling away smelled sugar-sweet, and sickly gross, and suddenly she just hated the color pink, and well…being a raspberry! And then everything went black.

She woke up with an apple doctor peering over her. “Yep, a touch of colitisofruito,” said the doctor, whose nametag read Dr. Antonio Apple, also bearing the slogan: “An Apple a day keeps the doctor away!” Her mother peered down on Rae, as the doctor began a long and dull conclusion.

“It must have been moving to a new place with new germs, or direct human contact.” He shuddered. “She will be fine in a few days. Just take this Rasberrio antibiotics. Stay home from school for a week though.“ Rae signed and fell asleep.

When she woke up, her head, throat, and stomach hurt. There was a pamphlet on her desk. It read:

 

Are you suffering from fruit month long mono?

Tips: Watch TV

Sleep

Raid the fridge

Have a long relaxing bubble bath

Read a book

Rest

Feel better!!!

 

Rae groaned and went back to sleep.

When her mother came home, Rae was sitting up, face flushed with fever. She called, “Mama!” and she came pestering Rae with a billion questions “Areyouokay? Whathappened? Howareyoufeeling? Doyouwantsomethingtoeat? Todrink?”

“Oh, Mama, right before I fainted, I thought the pie smelled gross, and I well, hated being a raspberry,” blurted Rae.

“Oh, baby!” she said. “You were sick, and I know you love being who you are. Just remember that, no matter what. Be who you are.”

Two weeks later, Rae felt fine, but as she put it to an email to her BFF’s, Rae was right. There was a huge storm coming. Outside, the wind blew hard. “”Rae, can you stay home alone?”

“Yeah,” said Rae, wearing trackpants and a sweatshirt.

“BYE,” Mom yelled. Rae flipped on the TV.

“Huge storm warning.” FLICK.

“We think it is caused by the baseballitusuioras germs, but can’t be sure.” FLICK.

“Dora, lets go explora.” FLICK.

Rae turned the TV off. How boring. She fell asleep.

It must have been dismissal time thought Rae, looking at the clock which read 2:45. “Wow,” thought Rae. “I have been asleep for hours! What woke me up?” she wondered.

Outside, the wind howled, and a branch smashed against the window. Despite what her mother said about not going near the window during a storm, Rae peered out, and saw rain, branches, and Mom and Rupe!!!??? Rae ran outside, trodding on fallen bits of tree, but despite her thousands of splinters on her sensitive raspberry feet, ran to her mother and brother.

“Mooom, Ruuupe!” she yelled.

“Rae!!!” yelled Mom. “Open the door!”

Rae ran back into the house and flung open the door. Mom and Rupe rushed in. She was holding an unconscious Rupe in her hands. Rae slammed the door. Mom put Rupe on the table, and poured some liquid onto his body. “He’ll be fine,” said Mom.

Rae looked doubtfully at her little brother. “Oh Rupe!” cried Rae. “Oh Mom! I heard you and Dad talking…and I don’t want a new brother! And why does Rupe look so sick?!”

“Oh, baby,” her mother said, “Your Dad’s specific job in the brain is called a brother. WE were thinking of divorce again…” She paused, seeing Rae’s horrified expression. “But now we won’t, hon. Rupe is like this because, well, the boys at school beat him up.”

“What!!!” cried Rae.

Before her mother could answer, Rupe sat up and groggily stared around.

“Mama!” he sobbed.

“Oh Rupie,” Mom said. “Come on! Off to beddy byes.” She scooped him up and carried him upstairs. Rae sat on the sofa, hoping that everything would be normal by tomorrow.

 

Three days later, the Raspberries were eating dinner, raspberry glazed pork chops with creamed raspberries, when Dad got another call, but this time on his regular cell. He walked off to answer it. Rae heard:

Dad: Hello? This is Rupert Raspberry.

Other Person: Hi…

Dad: Oh, hey Brendon. What’s up?

Brendon: Listen. My place is flooded, and I have a new home, but I need to crash somewhere tomorrow.

Dad: Hey–that’s too bad. How about you come over to our place?

Brendon: Um…

Dad: My family won’t mind.

Brendon: Family? Well, okay.

Dad: Okay…I have to go.

Brendon: See you tomorrow.

Dad: Bye.

Brendon: Bye.

 

When he came out, he announced, “Okay, it’s settled then. Tomorrow night, my work pal, Brendon, will be coming over for dinner. He lost his home, but is getting a new one, but needs a place to stay tomorrow.”

Even though she had to pretend she had not heard, Rae’s mother did have an argument.

“Darling, that’s all very wonderful, but what about Rupe? He is still injured, you know.”

“No he isn’t,” said Dad. “All that happened was that a huge branch crushed his foot, giving him welts and a fever.”

Mom sighed, but looked like she was going to say more. Rae quickly excused herself to “use the bathroom,” or actually wait out the fighting.

“AND HOW COULD YOU WITHOUT TELLING ME???!!!”

“…a friend, I owe him huge, come on, Rochie…”

“He couLD BE PSYCHO!!!!!”

“JUST GO PUT THE BABY TO BED, dearest angel!“

Rae tiptoed back to her room, and cried herself to sleep even though it was only 7:42.

The next day was filled with cleaning, Dad (trying) to cook, Rae doing her homework and avoiding people, and Rupe looking pale and sickly. Everyone had perked up, especially Rupe, by dinnertime.

Then Brendon was there.

“Come in! Come in!” Dad pretended that he had a happy, healthy family. Rae wondered if Brendon would fall for it. He looked unhappy. Rae’s mom came through the door.

“Hello. You must be Brendon. I’m Rochelle,” said Mom. Then Rae knew that she should say hello. “Hi…” What should I say? “I’m Rae and this is my little brother Rupe…”

Then they sat down to dinner. Rae ate her gross Dad-made turkey and salad. Rupe gagged it down. No one spoke, so Rae did not tell about how Liviah had taunted, teased, and accused her of crying and hurting her friend, even though Rae didn’t. She was so worried that Liviah would tell her parents, though Brendon’s eyes always softened to the raspberry children, while turned forever steely on the adults.

After dinner, Brendon was ready to leave. Rae’s parents were a bit disappointed that he was leaving, but got him his coat and said goodbye and thank you. Just as Brendon was picking up his coat, something fell out. Rae picked it up. “Brendon?” she said, but her family and Brendon had already gone. She thought, I can always give it to Dad to give it to him. On her bed, the wallet fell open. A picture of two young blackberry children came out, one older girl, one younger boy. Both were happy and laughing. It made Rae happy to see, although the older one looked semi-sad. I didn’t know that Brendon had kids, she thought. She then hid the wallet and the picture in her shirts drawer, underneath her Ming Hui’s ice cream shop shirt, and in her Lizzyhead island sweatshirt pocket. Good, she thought, running off. As she brushed her teeth, she thought about Brendon. Why is he so mysterious? Are those his kids? Why didn’t he tell us? Why do the kids look so familiar? Rae’s head swam with questions. Rae blocked all these thoughts and fell asleep.

 

The next morning, Rae ran off to school, only to find Liviah standing at the gate.

“I told Mr. Galvin the principal. How dare you be such a bully,” she said in a mock baby voice.

Mr. Galvin came out. ”Rae Raspberry! How dare you bully sweet Liviah. Come.”

Rae couldn’t take it. “I…I…” She ran the five blocks home.

“Mama!” she called, running in.

“Rae! Are you sick?”

Rae told her everything while crying. In Kiwigarten, she’d run out after missing the bus. One phone call to the principal was all it took, and Rae went back to school with her Mom. After the drop off and apologies, the principal told Rae he was busy, but she had to stand up to Liviah. It was recess, and the tables were turned. The whole school was watching. Liviah was being bullied-bullied by Simone, her frenemy, but she realized that Liviah was protecting Bart Blackberry from Simone’s teasing. What happened to the rude girl who would say to her boyfriend before he’d brush her off, “Lemon and lime were meant to be together!” with a sugary sweet voice and lips. Just then, Rae knew…she did not know how it happened, but she recognized the children from the photo: Bart Blackberry and Liviah Lemon. At the same time, her friends Willa Watermelon and Gemma Grape visited. Gemma ran right past her…hmph! Willa also looked hurt, but said that Grace missed her too much.

 

“Beryl, psst, Beryl,” Rae said. She then told her everything. When she finished, Beryl’s eyes were wide, and her mouth open. She was also just as shocked. This was a very strange playdate, thought Rae. The next day at school, Rae decided to confront Liviah.

“Liviah…I know your secret,” she blurted. Liviah broke away from her group of friends, and then they went to the garden. Liviah grabbed Rae by the shirt.

“How do you know?” her words came out sobbing, her mascara running.

“I got plastic surgery because of the divorce and the fight and the Limes let me stay with them, and now they are trying to be together but I’m too ashamed to come home.”

One hour later, Rae realized that the crazy lady she’d seen on the bus was Lizzi Lime with her daughter from another marriage, Libby Penelope Lemon-Pineapple. Wow, thought Rae. Then, imagine everyone’s shock and surprise as Rae walked in, friends with Liviah.

“You have to go to them today,” said Rae. “Text me.”

And they traded numbers, leaving Rae to explain, “Listen, she had some rough changes in her life. She is very nice, if you get to know her.” No one asked her anything else when Liviah ditched her own friends and sat at their lunch table. Rae felt at peace with the world at last.

 

Ggrapie: I’m sorry about what I said, I’m your friend…

WW: Me too.

RR: Forgave GTG bye friend calling

 

Llemon: THEY SAID YES!!! OMG THEY LOVE ME MY NEW NAME IS BELLA BLACKBERRY!!!

RR: that’s AWESOME

BellaB: FYI don’t get plastic surgery it HURTS and sucks 😀

RR: bye miss you Dad and rupe and me are going to a ball game

BellaB: Okay have fun TTYL bye

 

Rae logged off and went out the door with Dad and Rupe, and the game was immune system VS strep throat. They all cheered for IS, and they won. Rae cheered and almost dropped her hot dog. Rae’s friend Beryl was here, and Rae’s Mom came to take her family home, but then Mom looked flushed and ran up to Dad and kissed him, and from the looks in their eyes, Rae knew they were happy together. Suddenly, Rae felt happy and knew that whatever changed her life, whether divorce, moving, or enemies, Rae could take it on.

Milkshakes

Once upon a time, there was a girl named Carley. She was famous because she had powers. Ice powers, to be exact. She didn’t like being famous because she had no privacy. Every time she went to her favorite restaurant, The Ice Palace Burgers, the paparazzi came and took pictures of her when she had her mouth full of cheeseburger. So she decided to make her own restaurant which is new and improved and also called the The Ice Palace Burgers so no one would bother her. Unless, of course, they were her family. She had a little sister named Anna who always came to the restaurant and ordered a large chocolate shake. She had at least three a day, which was starting to make her a little chubby. So Carley decided to change the password to only let in the rest of her family and not Anna. She built a new gym for her to exercise and lose weight.

“Why are you being so mean to me, Carley? I just really like to eat chocolate shakes all day long!” said Anna.

“I’m not being mean to you, I’m doing it for your own health. So you should be happy because until you lose weight a lot, I’ll tell you the password but you shouldn’t eat a lot of shakes because you’ll have to go back to the gym. Also, if you don’t do that, you’ll have to go to the old restaurant and you’ll have to pay a lot. And I won’t help you anymore!”

“Well, I guess that’s reasonable. What if I only have one shake a day? And then I’ll go to the gym and do 100 pushups? And I will be there for eight hours every day.”

“Okay, Anna. But if you drink more than that, you’ll be in serious trouble.”

“Okay. I promise to not drink more than one shake a day.”

The next day came and Anna went to the restaurant. She went to the counter and asked for one shake. And a large cheeseburger and some Sprite. She went to the table and ate it all. Then she went straight to the gym. She did 50 pushups and was there for one hour before she got hungry again.

“Hmm… I could really use a big chocolate shake right now,” she thought to herself.

“But I shouldn’t! I know! I’ll get a super duper large cheeseburger extra bacon and a Sprite. I’ll eat it and come back to the gym. That way I won’t break my promise.”

She left the gym and went to the restaurant. She ordered a super duper large cheeseburger with extra bacon and a Sprite. But while she was ordering, Carley came up next to her and ordered a large chocolate shake. It looked so delicious! Anna went straight to the bathroom to hide. After Carley left, Anna went back to her table and started eating really fast. But since she waited too long to eat it, her burger was cold and the Sprite was flat.

“Wow! That was not very tasty. But if I order any more, my sister will be mad. What should I do? I’m going to trash all this and go to the gym. Look at the time! I spent nine hours at the restaurant! I better get back really soon.”

When Anna got back to the gym, Carley was waiting for her.

“Where were you? I’ve been waiting here for hours. Were you drinking a milkshake?”

“No! I wasn’t.”

“What were you doing then?”

“I was eating at the restaurant.”

“What did you eat?”

“I ate super duper large cheeseburger with extra bacon and a huge Sprite.”

“Anna!”

“What? I didn’t break your promise.”

“Still, you ate too much! You need to exercise. How much time did you spend at the gym?”

“Um… one hour.”

“How many push ups did you do?”

“Fifty.”

“Okay. Since you broke your promise, I already changed the password to the restaurant. So now you can’t eat with me anymore.”

After saying that, Carley left Anna alone outside the gym.

Anna followed Carley and she found out that she went into the restaurant. Carley had used her ice powers to freeze the whole place but made a new restaurant called True Food Kitchen. At the moment she saw Anna, she erased her memory of the scene of Carley freezing the first restaurant and making a new one.

The next thing Anna knew, she was back in the gym doing push ups. She didn’t know why she was doing pushups, but decided to keep doing them anyway. After she finished her 100 pushups, she went to the restaurant to get a huge chocolate milkshake, but she realized it was frozen! But luckily, there was another restaurant. It was called True Food Kitchen. She went inside and ordered the chef’s special. But the chef said that a new customer has to be always blindfolded. It was a beautiful salad, but she couldn’t see it because her eyes were blindfolded. She took a bite.

“Mmmm! This is so delicious! But it’s not as delicious as my chocolate milkshake. I’ll get a drink! Waiter! I would like to order the milkshake special.”

She waited for her milkshake. When it came, it was green! But she didn’t see it because she was still blindfolded. She took a sip and it was better than the chocolate milkshake. Then she took of her blindfold. She saw Carley come through the door and go behind the counter.

“Carley, Carley, Carley!!! Sis, sis, you were right all the time. eating healthy is better for me.”

“Excellent, you learned your lesson that eating healthy is good for you!!!!”

The sisters lived happily ever after.

 

The End

Sun or Moon: The Connection Skyway

CHAPTER  1: THE SKYWAY THAT LEADS DOWN

 

Daniel Star Palomino sat on the couch in his medium-sized apartment. His mother ran to him shouting “Get dressed, Mister! It’s almost time for school!” Daniel slowly got up from the brown couch and started walking to his bedroom. He looked in his mirror, his black hair looked distraught-like, like every morning, his blue-green eyes looked tired still, and his face expression looked so unhappy. He got dressed into a short blue T-shirt, dark blue short jeans, nice black high-tops, and a L.A. Dodgers baseball hat. He ran out of Coco Road (the street he lived on) and ran to the apartment across from him to walk with his friend Joshua Nilgin. You see, Joshua’s and Daniel’s families were cousins of sort. That was because Daniel’s great-grandpa married Joshua’s great-grandma. But there is technically another reason why. Also, because both Joshua and Daniel’s family were part of the Moon side on the star they call home, and not the Sun side. What I mean by “on the star they call home” is that they live on star called the Farler Star. And there is only one way down to Earth, and that is too risky to risk. But anyway, he ran to number eight (he was number ten) and knocked hard. A tall boy with hazel-gold hair and sparkly green eyes stood there, waiting for him to talk.

“Hey, Joshua,” Daniel finally said.

“Hey, come in.” He made his way into the wood door with Daniel following. “You know about the Open Skyway, right?”

“Yeah, but…” started Daniel.

“The one that leads to Earth. Yes,” he said. “And the Moon King is telling to the Moon people that we are going to have Eclipse War I with the Sun people because Sun people want to keep the skyway open and the Moon people want the connection closed.”

“Why in this world would the sun people want a human to find out about us? If that happened, our world would be in ashes because we can’t even stand more than ten humans in our world!” explained Daniel.

You see, we’re not aliens, we look like normal humans, but humans are so annoying. Daniel was shaking his head. Joshua’s little sister Mary came over to the two boys.

“Joshua, today is Saturday! Why are you up so early!?” she asked in a tired tone. Her green eyes looked like they were going to burst out of her head. She didn’t have the patience to hear Joshua’s answer.

“Never mind. Today we’re going to the Skyway Museum. Do you want to come too, Daniel?” (Mary had a crush on Daniel, even though Daniel was four years older than her).

“Why not,” replied Daniel. A grin spread on his face. “Not like there’s going to be an asteroid falling in the middle of the museum. Am I right?” Nobody laughed at Daniel’s joke. “Well, sorry for trying it to be funny.”

“WEIRDO IN THE HOUSE,” yelled Mary. She giggled. She thought she was the queen of everything.

“SHHHH!” Joshua whispered harshly. “Don’t wake up Mom and Dad. You know they’re sound sleepers.” Joshua sighed. Sometimes for him, having a little sister was the WORST.

“Time to go to school,” said Daniel.

“Oh yeah,” Joshua said and the two boys ran to John Moon Middle School. John Moon was the son of Matthew Moon (who is King Moon) in History of the Moon Kingdom.

Halfway on the trip to John Moon Middle School, Daniel stopped and said, “Joshua, I forgot, it’s Saturday! I’m pretty sure Mary told us that, but I stopped listening to her years ago ”

“Oh, you’re right. Let’s just go to the Ten Street Park,” said Joshua. They walked to the Ten Street Park, which was really on Northwest Avenue.  Jackson Anderson, the bully of the whole Moon Kingdom, was at also at Ten Street Park.

“Hey losers,” said Jackson. “You know Darren Milky Way (the mayor of Moon City which was in the moon side), turns out he’s my great uncle. So now, I might be related to the Moon King, since mayors are usually related to Matthew Moon.” Jackson was such a bragger. Can’t he just shut up?

“That’s not fascinating at all!” explained Joshua. “You see Jackson, maybe something like, a new roller coaster is coming up or there’s no school for the week is interesting.”

Jackson closed up to Joshua. “Are you sassin’ me punk! Because if you are, then it ain’t good.”

Just before Jackson could pound Joshua, Daniel grabbed his arms and ran to 597 East Half Street (it was the border of the Moon kingdom, and Cocoa Road was very close to the border, not to mention Ten Street Park was very close to the border, too).

“What do you think you’re doing?!” asked Daniel in amazement. “You could’ve gotten a black eye or injured yourself!”

“But I didn’t!” said Joshua. Joshua gazed away and saw something that caught his eye. “Look, something shiny.”

He ran over to the spot while Daniel was following him. He found a rockpile and started to pull something shiny out. And then, a jewel made of rubies and emeralds was in the palm of Joshua’s hand. And it on it was a carving of a crescent moon, overlapping with a sun. Daniel also looked inside the rockpile and found a letter. It read:

Dear founders of the jewel,

This my diary of the eclipse. It started like this: I was a regular boy named Salis San Palo. I was looking around when I found a jewel, the same one you found. And it was a dangerous jewel. It was wanted for the eclipse, to destroy or open the skyway. And eventually, it killed me, not to mention my brother, John Jr. Moon. (the son of John Moon). And Katherine Sun (the princess of Sun) also died. So beware this jewel, and beware the——– family.”

 

“Salis San Palo, that sounds familiar. But anyway, what does he mean by ‘And I’m still alive, but in a different place’? I need to know. And what does this jewel do?” All these things were in Daniel’s head, but the most important one he forget about.

“And which family we need to beware!” said Joshua. “The Sun family probably. And what does this jewel do to destroy most of the Farler Star. Do you think we need to go to the Redren Star?”

The Redren Star was a star planet that lead to the world of Eclipse, also the place where the portal to places unknown was. The Redren Star was a dangerous place, and Daniel wasn’t letting his best friend go there. “Are you crazy! The last person who went to the Redren Star ended up going into the portal unknown, and then nobody knows what happened to him!”

“You forget one thing. The Redren King knows everything, including what the jewel could do,” said Joshua.

Joshua was right, the Redren King did know everything. Daniel didn’t want to face it, but they were going to the Redren Star.

CHAPTER 2: THE REDREN KINGDOM

 

Daniel and Joshua went on a bus to the Redren Connection Way, where they found Emilia South, just sitting there. She had blonde hair, a dark red dress, and seaweed-colored eyes. Then she walked up to Daniel.

“What are you up to today, Dan?” asked Emilia, sounding like she knew everything about Daniel.

“Nothing, Emma,” Daniel replied in a soft tone.

“I want in!” Emilia whispered as harsh as she can. “If you don’t let me in then I’ll take the jewel from you.”

“You’re in!” said Joshua. Nothing or nobody could take something that important. “Sorry, Daniel. And how do you know about the jewel?”

“I was spying on you the whole day,” answered Emilia. “Wasn’t it obvious?” Emilia was such a little diva.

“Here we are, stopping right in front of the Redren Connection Way – get off if this is your stop,” announced the bus driver who seemed to be quite happy at the moment.

So Emilia, Joshua, and Daniel got off the bus and started walking up the Redren Connection Way. It took about five or ten minutes to get to the top. And on the Redren Star, the ground was blue, the grass was a violet, they had no flowers, and everybody who lived there was red, even the Frosties, but all people from the stars wouldn’t think it’s a big deal. Luckily, Daniel knew somebody who could take him to the Redren King, but it wouldn’t be easy. He lives in East County, but they came from the west, and the Frosties live in the East County. The Frosties were known to have ice power. Anyway, they started taking their buses, just Emilia, Daniel, and Joshua were riding on a bus until we got to Middle County, the center of the Redren Star. And the rest was walking. They walked for one day, and began to rest. In the morning, they would see the Frosties boy who knows Daniel.

 

It was now the crack of dawn, and in front of them was a door that just stood there. There was nothing on the sides or the back of the door. And on the door was a snowflake. So they opened it and found a whole different world. The snow was harsh. Everybody who lived there looked something like little blue elves. They had pointy ears, a very light lime-green eye color, and the men had scars on their faces with aqua colored blood coming out of them. The houses and buildings were the color cobalt blue, amaranth, debian red, eton blue, scarlet, or azure. The reason why the South Country’s houses and buildings were either blue or red was because red and blue were the South Country’s Honorful Colors.

“Guys, were supposed to go to the castle, not the mansion!” Daniel yelled so loud that the whole neighborhood could probably hear him. Emilia and Joshua then started to walk to the castle. Daniel knocked hard on the door.

“Who is it?” asked a man from inside the gates.

“Daniel Star Palomino, friend of Prince Icee” The doors opened for the three kids. “Told you I was friends with a Frostie boy.”

They went inside to this huge corridor made entirely out of crystals. Everything was transparent and beautiful in every way imaginable. Icee was waiting for them. Icee had sky blue hair, dark blue skin, the regular color of Frosties’ eyes.

“Daniel! What do you need?” asked Icee.

“Icee, I need your help to get connection with the Redren King. We have a special item to ask him about.”

“OK! Take a bus to the Middle County. The Redren King will be pleased to meet you,” Prince Icee got up and walked to the desk made out of ice. “Let me write you a note that will get you in the Redren Castle.” Prince Icee wrote a quick note. “Here.” He stuck out a hand to Emilia.

“Thanks,” she took the note from his hand.

Emilia’s blonde hair shined in the white snow. The three kids had to get out of Frostie County, or they would freeze to death.  They took the bus to Donut Woods (where the jello monster lives), which is also the border between Middle County and Frostie County. The bus came in under two minutes and took them straight to Redren Castle. The forest was huge, almost the size of the whole Moon Side. They saw the jello monster chasing them a little while. No one really cared because the jello monster was actually super sensitive, so Joshua yelled at him and he stopped chasing them. When they got to Redren Kingdom, they saw that it was booming. It seemed that more people from New York City and Los Angeles combined were there. The castle was huge, maybe the size of the Shanghai Tower, or bigger. Joshua saw the top: it was a statue of a star. The whole castle was the color rose. The exterior was only rose, except the gate, which was peachish. The gate was big for a gate. It was probably 555 feet, the minimum. The gate was marble, pure marble, like the Washington Monument – actually, they were the same size as the Washington Monument. When they were outside of the gate, they knocked. A voice that sounded like a tiger and a hyena combined asked, “Who’s there?”

“Me, Joshua Nilgin, Emilia South, Daniel Star Palomino, here to see the Redren King.” Joshua slid the note under the thick gate. On the bus, the kids read the note. It said:

 

Dear Redren King,

 

I am Prince Icee, prince of the Frostie County. My friends, Joshua Nilgin, Emilia South, and Daniel Star Palomino, have an important discovery to ask you about. These young kids are from the Moon Side of the Farler Star. Hope you can live happily in your big castle.

 

Love, Prince Icee

 

The doors creaked open, but it sounded like a million dogs howling. At least if anyone was asleep, they would wake up in ten seconds tops. The floors of the main hallway were made entirely out of bright rubies. When you walked into the main hallway, it would look like you were flying in a red, very red, paradise. There was a huge mural of the Redren King. He was a red-head, which Emilia thinks is cute. They walked around in that grand hallway. In the hallway, they saw runaway (from Earth) green honeycreepers, a type of bird, flying above their heads. Star people sometimes let pretty animals from earth come up into the stars. A tall man with turquoise eyes, straight red hair, and a fancy suit walked in.

“Hello, children! I am Quincy Redren, The Redren King. I am so happy you could come!” said the very cheerful and graceful Redren King. “You said you have an important discovery?”

Joshua got out the letter and the gem. The Redren King took the gem and note. “Be back in a starburst (‘hurry’ in Staranian). Did you know Staranian were ancient star people or ‘aliens’ top language?” The kids yawned to make sure he would stop teaching them. He went and came back in a nanosecond. “I found that the gem dates back to the Skyway Dynasty, where the Sun people and Moon people argued about the skyway for five centuries, five hundred years. The note belonged to Salis San Palo, whose nearest relative today is Logan Star Palomino.”

“That’s my grandpa!” screamed Daniel. “I’m the relative of Salis San Palo and John Moon Jr.”

“Wow! Oh, by the way you want to know which family to beware?” Emilia, Daniel, and Joshua’s eyes lit up like a thousand diamonds sparkling on a full moon. “You need to beware the Redren family, so that is my family!” King Redren made an evil grin. The three kids wondered what was going and if that question was going to be the end of him. “My great great grand daddy actually created the Skyway Dynasty to get the sun people and moon people hate each other. Redrenians hate people from the Farler Star, which used to be one whole star, not divided in half by the sun and moon.”

 

CHAPTER 3: BATTLE TO THE DEATH

 

“Children, I am very evil indeed. You see, girl, I believe your name is Emilia South, you are actually the great great granddaughter of Katherine Sun.” King Redren then put an angry face. He pointed at Joshua. “And you, you’re not Daniel Star Palomino’s cousin, for sure!” Joshua and Daniel looked confused. Emilia was jumping up and down seeing she was Sun royalty. Daniel didn’t care about royalty, but Joshua not being his cousin was huge to him. “My brother, Benjamin Redren, was your real father! Benjy, a real stupid guy. He wanted me to be good!” King Redren made an evil laugh. “So I killed him, like what I’m going to do to you!”

Joshua tried to sound valiant, but he felt like a baby crying because someone took his candy. “None of the things you’re saying are true!” But, Joshua knew some things he said were true, and he knew Benjamin Redren was one of them.

“It doesn’t matter because you don’t have powers, just like me!” shouted Emilia.

“And me!” shouted Daniel.

“And me!’ shouted Joshua.

“That is so, but I have weapons.” King Redren pressed a button and in his gun appeared a Redrenian gun, which has the pressure of ten waterfalls hitting you at the same place. “Say goodbye, Joshua Redren!” The second he said so, he shoot him with the gun. Joshua lay dead on the floor. The room was silent for a minute.

Daniel’s eyes and cheeks became red. He ran and punched King Redren like no tomorrow, because if he didn’t hurt him, there might be no tomorrow. His gun fell on the floor, so he was powerless.

“Emilia, shoot this bozo!” King Redren’s eyes stared at him. Daniel was jumping on his back so he couldn’t move an inch.

“Say goodbye, King Redren!” Emilia mimicked King Redren’s voice. When she shoot him, Daniel jumped off just in time not to be dead. King Redren lay dead on the floor, next to his nephew.

Daniel and Emilia had no choice but to go back home. Though, they told the story to the head guard and made decisions. He went to Joshua and King Redren where he got blood of King Redren mixed with a milk-looking drink and spilled it on Joshua. Joshua rose up. Emilia and Daniel gave him a hug for ten minutes straight, not moving. Since Joshua is technically the nearest relative to King Redren, he took over the Redren Star, and became known as Joshua Redren. The head guard, Quincy, and his wife, Brooke, said they’ll take care of little Joshua. The mayor, Darren Milky Way, was replaced with no one, because once they killed King Redren, the connection skyway and border of the sun and moon sides disappeared. So there was only one more thing to do, and that was to rub being a relative of royalty to Jackson Anderson. One day, Emilia, Joshua, and Daniel met on the border of the Redren Star and the Farler Star. It was a beautiful night. Emilia brought a picnic basket, Daniel brought some Farlanian food, and Joshua brought Redrenian food. You could see Earth, the Moon, the Sun, Mars, Jupiter, et cetera. Then they saw something special. It was a special type of shooting star called the Kirby Rainbow Star, which could destroy any planet very quickly, and the three kids saw this one hurtling toward the Redren and Farler Star, which could kill both planets. The Kirby Rainbow Star looked like a falling rainbow.The three kids knew what they had to do, and that was warn everyone about the Kirby Rainbow Star.

 

The End…..For Now

Happy Home Becomes Horror House

Meera Alasiad and her family owned a summer house on Golden Moon Beach, next to the Pacific Ocean. Meera was 15 at the time. She loved this house, and whenever she went there, she would spend as much time as she could in the ocean. This particular summer, the summer of 1998, was different.

When Meera got to the house, it was dark and gloomy. The house, named Happy Home, was full of cobwebs and old trash. When she stepped onto the front porch, it squeaked like a dying mouse. The front door was open, which was very unusual. As she stepped into the house to put down her luggage, her mother screamed. A scream so high-pitched that the birds in the trees out front flew away. An extra-large, extra hairy, Black Widow spider sat on the porch railing. Its beady little eyes followed Mrs. Alsiad’s frightened movements as she tried her very best to walk into the house. Mr. Alasiad cried out as the largest murder of crows the family had ever seen flew overhead. Meera didn’t notice any of this. She was busy staring with goggled eyes at the creature sitting right in her path.

It was a kitten! The kitten was the cutest thing she had ever seen. How could this poor creature be sitting here innocently in the house filled with horrible things?

“Mom, can we keep this adorable kitten, sitting here like nothing is happening?” Meera said in her sweetest voice.

“Y-y-yee-e-e-esss-s-s de-d-dea-r,” Mrs. Alasiad replied, still frightened of the spider.

“Dad, can I?” she asked in a tone that sounded like a puppy begging.

Still staring at the sky, Mr. Alasiad replied. The kitten was hers! She stooped over to grab the kitten, so she could pick him up and pull him close to her chest. All she wanted to do now was pet that cat’s soft looking fur, and pull him tight to her chest to give him a strong, loving hug.

But when she got her hands close to the cat, he dashed further into the house and up the rickety wood stairs. “Come back!” cried Meera as her hopes of cuddling the cat were dashed. Thump, thump, thump. Deep-sounding noises, too loud for a cat, passed above her head. Whatever in the world could that noise be? thought Meera. There it is again! she thought.

Thump. Thump. Thump. THUMP! The noise was getting louder, quicker, and closer. That was for sure not her tiny cat, who, when he had run up the stairs, had made hardly any noise at all. Thump. “What is that noise?” Meera thought as she heard a final thump. Then, all of a sudden, the noises stopped. Meera’s cat was softly treading down the stairs now.

Mr. and Mrs. Alsiad finally got over their fright when the crows and spider had suddenly taken off to who knows where. “Dear, what has happened to your new cat?” asked Mr. Alasiad. “And what in the world shall you name him? Or her? My oh my, do you even know what to do while taking care of a cat?” Meera was not listening. Who could while holding this cat? This cat held her attention for so long, because he was so sweet.

A week and a half later, after the house was all cleaned up, the cat still didn’t have a name. Meera was lying on her back, trying to think of names. “Puffy, Cheese Doodle, Evil Maniac, Cat.” She had thought of many names but was poo-pooing them all. And, somehow, her cat was able to understand her. The cat had made a head shaking motion to every name. “Happy?” Meera miserably shouted at her cat. “I am not allowed to go to the beach until I name you.” The cat nodded. “Happy? Is that the name you want?” Again, another nod. And it was decided, the cat was named Happy.

Meera picked her cat up and started dancing with him. Then, she walked out the door to her room. When she was closing the door, she saw a message. The message looked like it was written in a hurry, and the last letter of the last word went all the way to the floor. The message read: The Cat Is Evil.

Meera didn’t know what cat the sign meant, but she took a guess and thought that it meant her cat. But she knew, or at least thought, that her cat was the perfect one.

On the Friday of the very same week she named her cat, Meera was swimming at Clear Water Point, a calm, clear, secluded, well known area of the beach. Meera’s cat was at home, not even allowed out of the house for fear he would get rabies. Well, she was swimming with her friend, having so much fun, splashing and treading and just swimming laps. Then, all of a sudden, Meera’s friend fell into a drop off of the small current. Even though the current was small, a drop off at Clear Water Point feels like being caught in a net. Meera tried to dive under and save her friend, but all she found was the friendship bracelet Meera had made her. Rumors were true – the quickest way to drown was at a drop off in Clear Water Point.

Meera tried to swim away from her grief, like a racer would run away from their competitors. But it tailed her like a leash. I could have saved her if only if I had been looking, I could have saved her. I wish we hadn’t gone swimming in the first place. Then she wouldn’t have drowned. She will go to a better place, at least. Meera began to feel better.

At home, Meera couldn’t find her parents at all. She looked around for them, searching everywhere. She couldn’t seem to find them, or a note, or Happy. Meera went to do another check of the house when she saw it, another note. This was quickly scrawled in sharpie on the coffee table. This one ending in a dropped letter, and the sharpie lying there, uncapped. This note read: Kill the cat!

Again, Meera couldn’t understand the message. What cat? Why would this person want to kill a cat? Why is the pen uncapped? Where is the person? All of these thoughts ran through her head like a speeding locomotive rushing to its next destination. All of a sudden her thought train fell off a cliff as Happy sauntered into the room.

Meera ran at the cat and grabbed him in her hands before he ran away. She pulled him up to her face and for some reason smelled his fur. It smelled sort of like blood, and death. What is that smell? thought Meera uneasily, trying to identify it like she would guess a math problem, which was her worst subject. And why does Happy smell like that? Meera dropped Happy in surprise when he hissed in her direction. Probably just out hunting birds, Meera thought as she tried to make herself feel better.

Hours later, her parents still weren’t home. Meera plopped on the couch began to shiver. She shivered like it was sub-arctic, then like someone was running her nails down a blackboard. But her shivers were always partly caused by the feeling that someone was watching her.

Eventually, Meera fell into a sleep full of nightmares and shivers. In her dream, Meera was running from something. But every step she took made it harder to take another step, until finally her feet were stuck fast, like a fly in honey or a spoon in molasses. When the beast was about to catch her, her dream changed to all of her friends and family drowning in the drop off, and then the rest of people on Earth. Nobody was left and it was just Meera standing there, when Happy popped out of the water and dragged her down into the depths of the ocean. But Meera couldn’t drown, so she was just watching everybody dying. All of a sudden she started to choke on water. Her dream ended as abruptly as a wall begins.

Meera looked up and saw her mother pouring water into a glass, her father making coffee, and Happy sleeping. Everything was as it should be, and, wait, how did her parents get here? Mr. and Mrs. Alsiad were alright, in front of her. When did they get back, from where?

“Mom, Dad. Where were you? When did you get back? Why didn’t you leave a note? Dad, why didn’t you take me up to bed, or at least cover me with a blanket? What is for breakfast? I am starving. Is it French toast? Or cinnamon buns? Perhaps crepes, or chocolate pancakes? Blueberry pancakes or just regular ones? Tell me, tell me, tell meee!!!” Meera rushed all of her sentences, so they sounded like one continuous one.

Instead of answering any of her questions, Meera’s parents just stood there. They seemed a little like they were paralyzed, or frozen, or wax statues. Meera’s mind ran through all of the possible things that could have happened to them.

“Mom! Dad!” Meera screamed on the top of her lungs, like she was trying to break glass.

Finally they moved. It was so sudden. It was like the end of the book that you had been reading for so long that it seemed like a miracle that it had ended. They jerked from their “freezing” poses into more natural positions. Meera sighed, inhaled, then sighed again. She threw herself off the couch and rushed at them. She hugged both of them, trying to fit her arms around their stomachs.

“Honey, no need for this madness. You just went to the beach, for a couple of hours. It isn’t even breakfast time, more like time for snack,” Meera’s mother stated matter of factly. “We didn’t go anywhere; we were here the whole time. I don’t know when you got back, and I didn’t even realize you had laid down and taken a nap. You are a snorer. And you must have put that blanket on yourself, because I did not touch it.” Meera’s father laughed.

“But when I got home, you weren’t here. When I went to sleep, there was no blanket on me. You left no note and nothing for dinner. The cat smells like blood. My best friend drowned. And, I had nightmares. You are making coffee, Mom – how does that not signify it is morning? By the way, who let the cat out?” Meera angrily retorted.

“Well I never. Who knew? Last thing I was holding was air. And that cat ain’t allowed outside. You must be smelling things.”

Meera was very worried. Her parents had gone missing, came back, and didn’t even remember it. Her cat had killed something, and something was moving other things. There was something wrong with Happy Home.

Meera was up in her room bouncing a ball a couple hours later. Her mind could only hear and see the ball. Boing. “Three hundred fifty nine.” Boing. “Three hundred sixty.” She kept counting and bouncing the ball. Nothing eventful had happened since the morning. Her parents still hadn’t remembered anything about last night. Boing. “Three hundred sixty one.” Meera paused, thinking she had heard commotion from downstairs.

Meera raised her arm to toss the ball against the wall again. She was about to throw when she froze. Chills began to run down her back like water in a shower. She heard the click-clack of her mother’s high heel shoes, but instead of the leisurely sounding noise her mother usually made, they were hurried, and sounded like they were running.

Thump! A human-sounding thump flew up from the downstairs. More like a Meera’s Mom sound. Meera eyes widened. Her Mom had fallen, and most likely wouldn’t be able to get back up. She was kind-of chubby, and always had a hard time of getting back up. Better help her, Meera’s mind called to her.

Meera rushed down the stairs, and when she was halfway there, she stopped short. She saw a hideous beast that somewhat resembled Happy.

It had its long, sharp fangs dripping blood on her mother. The teeth were as long and sharp as knives, and would be able to rip through flesh in a second. The eyes were as red as tomatoes. Its claws were long, pointy, and as sharp as swords. These would be able to pierce stone. And her mother’s chest. The fur on the beast’s back was streaked with blood. It was a peachy-white color which looked soft to the touch. It was almost Happy. But with all of the qualities that made it beast-like.

Suddenly, it hit her. The blood smells in his fur when he wasn’t allowed outside; the messages about Happy, always ending abruptly, with no one there to have written it; the strange thumping sound that Meera had first heard from him; and the times when he was missing. Maybe this cat was also connected to the drowning of her friend; the disappearance of her parents; their return, which was so sudden; and the things at the beginning of the summer, the things that had terrified her parents. This cat was a monster, and it would stop at nothing to reach its goal. Though Meera did not know what it was.

Thankfully, the cat had not noticed her yet. It was about to claw her mother’s neck, when Meera ran out of luck. She whimpered like a sick puppy, echoing around the almost silent room, making it sound as loud as a clap of thunder.

Happy looked up. He saw her and narrowed his eyes. He got into a crouching position and pounced.

THE CONCLUSION HAS COME.

The Grandfather Clock

There was a knock on my office door.

“Come in!” I said.

An old man with gray hair and a cane walked in. He was limping and his clothes were all battered.

“Mr. McKeever,” said the old man, “I need your help. My grandfather clock got stolen. Can you help me find it?”

“Tell me what happened,” I said.

“I was getting ready to go to bed when I heard footsteps. I thought it was my cat. I went into the kitchen. The pantry was open and everything inside it was thrown out. I ran to the front door and saw that it was open. Then there was a smash. I ran to the kitchen and I saw that my prized grandfather clock had been stolen! I ran outside and saw darkness. I looked at my watch. It said 12:14 a.m. Then there was a gunshot. Pain burst into my leg. I saw blood spilling from my leg. I climbed painfully inside. I called an ambulance. In a matter of two minutes, I heard sirens.  They took me out on a stretcher. The next thing I knew I was in the hospital. My leg wasn’t hurt. In a few days I was let out. Then I came straight to you,” said the old man.

“Okay, what did the robber look like?” I asked.

“I don’t know, it was too dark to see,” said the old man.

“Can you take me to your house?” I asked.

“Yes,” the old man said.

I led him outside. There was a shiny new Ferrari parked against the curb.

Why was this man in battered clothes and owned a Ferrari? I thought. I got in the back seat and said, “Nice car.”

The old man ignored me. He started the car. He took off.

“You’re going too fast,” I said.

Again, he didn’t respond.

We pulled up to barred gates. The old man typed something in on a meter-ish thing. The gates opened. He drove inside. There was a fountain. Behind the fountain there was a huge tan-colored mansion. The old man parked the car. I got out. I went inside. There was a long hall.

“Show me where your grandfather clock was,” I said.

The old man walked to where his grandfather clock was.

There were many gunshots.

I dived out of the way. Then I saw somebody run past me. I grabbed his leg. He tripped. He was a 15-year old boy with many freckles. “What is your name, son?” I asked.

“L-Luke,” said the boy trembling.

“Well, you’re going to be arrested,” I said. I forced him up and put handcuffs on him. Then I went outside to look for the old man. He was nowhere to be seen.
“Where is that old man?” I thought. I looked inside his car. He wasn’t there. I asked the boy, “What did you do to that old man?”

“What old man?” asked Luke.

“Never mind,” I said. I looked up and down the street. Then, I heard the door bang shut. Suddenly, the boy broke free from his handcuffs. He dashed away.

“Boy, get back here!” I yelled angrily. I dashed after him. I got a glimpse of the boy jumping over the barred gates. I ran after him.  I hopped the fence and cut my hand on one of the barbed wires. I almost fell off the fence. I finally managed to get down from the gate. I ran after the boy. Then I saw an idling motorcycle. I hopped on the motorcycle and pressed the gas pedal. It zoomed into the street. Then I saw the boy. I sped up. I caught him by the shirt.

“You better not run away again!” I yelled. I forced him on the motorcycle and zoomed to my office. When I got there, I saw a wreck inside. I quickly went inside, the boy on my heels. There was the old man.

What, why is the old man here? I thought.

“Well, good job, Luke, here’s the money,” said the old man. The old man pulled out $8,000 dollars.

“Why are you giving him money? Are you working for him, Luke?” I asked. The old man ran for the door. I punched him hard on the nose. He backed away. Then I locked the door.

“Explain to me why you are paying Luke money!” I yelled at him.

“Well, I said to Luke that I would pay him if you were kidnapped, and now you are,” he said. Luke jumped at me and grabbed my wrist. The old man tied me to a wall. Then they went to open the door but it was locked.

“Give me the key,” commanded the old man.

“Never,” I snarled. I took out my knife and cut the rope. I rolled and jumped up and snatched Luke’s gun.

“You’re under arrest,” I said pointing Luke’s gun at them. I pulled the trigger. A jet of blue light shot out from the gun and shocked them both. They fell to the ground. I called 911. A few minutes later the police showed up. They took them both.Then the mayor showed up. “Good work, detective. You caught one of the most skilled criminals in the U.S. I will award you $50,000 dollars,” said the mayor. The mystery was solved!

Excerpt from Different

 

Chapter Eleven

Peter

 

Peter flipped down the hill and landed hard on his backside. He grunted and stood up, wobbly. He limped a couple paces until being knocked to the ground by an irresistible force. He felt a cloth being placed over his mouth. Peter’s eyes darted around looking for anyone to signal to. Lathan and Scarlett were nowhere to be found. Peter strained to look behind him and saw Chews Abel standing over him, holding his hands in the air.

 

“Yes Peter, I’m Different.

 

Electricity and light flew off of his hands, burning Peter, making him jolt and spaz.

 

“Chews.” He lifted his head. “Stop.” Chews slapped his hands to his sides and smiled.

 

“Ah Peter, so weak. So… pathetic,” Chews whispered. Chews fell to his knees and stared into Peter’s eyes. Wind rushed around Peter’s head, making his hair curl and flop. His blonde bangs flew into his face, making his vision blurry. He rubbed his eyes and took deep breaths, making his heart beat slow. Chew’s eyelid twitched and his stood up. Peter’s hair fell back into place, and he attempted to pull himself up. He used all his strength to sit up, but then immediately fell back down. He opened his mouth, ready to demand reason, but no words came out. He tried again, only to get the same results.

 

“Want to know what I’ve done? Oh, nothing much. Just something so that you will suffer until the end of your days. I’ve taken your strength, taken your sound, your words, your voice. Yes, Peter,” Chews breathed. “Differents can do more than you know.” He plodded up the hill, but then turned back. “Oh, and your friends? Don’t worry about them, they’re in good hands,” he simpered and left. Peter could hear his boots pounding against the grass as he climbed up the steep hill. Peter could feel his heart pounding in his ears. Sweat dripped down his cheeks and landed in the muddy grass before him. Peter thrust his hands towards the mud. Sweat poured down his face, making a bigger puddle. Peter placed his hand shakily in the puddle and moved his hand in a circular motion.

 

“I. Will. Get. Him,” Peter mouthed. He pulled his hands furiously to the side. Then a bird swooped down and landed on his back. Peter shrieked and then blacked out.

 

——————————————————————————————-

 

“I LAY! Searching through the shreds, the horror, the blood, the cuts, the the debris, the dross…the pain, the agony, the terror-”

 

“Si!”

 

“Shut up, Chika!” Tears slid down her face. “Don’t you understand? We’re ruined. Ruined! Dead! Killed! Stabbed! Murdered!” She let her cranium hit the floor and she lay, motionless, on the wooden ground of the lobby.

 

“Si!” she felt a hard slap across the back of her head. Her lip was pushed into the hard cement and her jaw suddenly felt numb and she jumped to her feet.

 

“Who did that!” she looked around. Hibikee stood, towering over her. Si raised her hand in a fist, but he grabbed it and flung it backwards.

 

“If we want to survive we have to stick together. We can’t be over dramatic,” he stared at Si. “Scared, frightened, worried, and we can not think the worst. Understood?” They nodded. “Good!”

 

“But Hibikee! Our crest was just broken! We are weaker, powerless, de-”

 

“Si! We understand! You have made yourself clear! But as long as we work together, and try the best we can, we can be amazing!” Hibikee yelled. She watched as Hibikee waved his hand in the air, and grinned from ear to ear. Si felt defeated, angry, in pain. She growled and raised her lip up and down, her eyebrows furrowed. Then suddenly she stopped. Her head became clear of thought. She stared deep into Hibikee’s eyes and tilted her head, thinking.

 

“Just think…” Hibikee murmured. She suddenly felt infatuated with his courage and bravery. She hid her smile and stared at the shattered glass before her.

 

“So what should we do first?” Araki questioned.

 

“Well, we could head towards that small piste.” Chika indicated to a snowy peak. “We could see if there is civilization! We could ask for help!” They headed down the road.

 

“Is that part of the community?” Araki jumped in the air, trying to get a glimpse over the hill.

 

“Araki! Araki!” Si held him down. “Calm down, you’re not going see anything.” The tramped up the slope, Si wearing her “beautiful” pajamas, Hibikee sporting a blue onesie covered in Superman fan art, Chika’s shirt displayed her cosplay of Spider Woman, Araki wearing a long sleeve shirt with the worlds “Marvel” printed neatly in bold typing, and black slacks that seemed to be thrown on. Araki adjusted his leather belt and latched his hand onto a rock in the snow.

 

“What’s with the superhero, superheroine theme today?”

 

“I guess it’s just a coincidence!” They stopped when they reached the top of the hill and looked down. The hill went downward, it wasn’t steep, but it wasn’t easy to climb down. Si felt something slimy touch her ankle. She turned and gasped. There sat a dog, a small white puppy with a black spot around his tail. His eyes were large, brown, and adorable. Si slowly took a seat in the snow and pat the puppy gently on his head.

 

“What the…” Araki joined her, and soon they were all crowded around the dog. “Where is he from?”

 

“Probably somewhere down there.” They stared down at the multiple houses and lights that shined everywhere. “He’s so…so nummy!” They turned and saw throngs of children and adults hiking up the slope, carrying lanterns, and sticks.

 

“Hello!” they greeted them.

 

“Where did you — ” they recoiled and started to head hurriedly back down the hill. Questions filled their minds. Are they Different? Are they safe? Are they…human?

 

“We come in peace,” a man shouted. “And we have come to help!”

Strawberry’s Journey

Chapter One

It’s Just The Beginning

 

“Ma, why can’t I go outside?” I asked.

“Because outside the tunnels there is, there is, uhhh…you cannot go outside, you have to stay inside,” Ma replied.

“Ma, you are confining me in these stupid, putrid, horrible tunnels! Just let me go outside!” I said sadly.

“No. You can’t. Inside is best for me,” Ma said.

“We are talking about me not you, I want to go outside!” I yelled.

“Well, you can’t,” Ma said.

“Ma, you are ruining my life!” I yelled. I sat down on the bench. I felt the hardwood underneath me. I was really angry. I hit the wood really hard. That calmed me for a moment but not fully. I thought about what I knew about outside.

Elder Clover always told stories to us about sunshine, grass, trees, flowers, berries, rain, snow, and other animals, but what I loved most were the horror stories he told us of the people with guns that wanted to kill us bunnies. The stories seemed real, like these things actually existed.

“Ma, I am going to the water hole,” I said as I hopped through the hole in the wall. I ran down the path. The dirt clung on to my paws. I stopped. I brought my paws up to my face. They were covered in dirt, I put them back down on the smooth, soft ground and it felt almost comforting. I kept on sprinting.

I finally got there. The water hole is a pool of water inside of a cave. The rock walls were shiny and smooth. There were little orange fish swimming in the water. I went to the edge of the water, but I was careful not to fall in. I hate water, so does everyone I know.

I looked in the water. I saw myself. My long ears were drooping down on my face, my strawberry colored fur gleamed in the water.

“Strawberry, Strawberry!” The voice behind me came closer and closer. The pawsteps boomed in my ears. Blackberry came up behind me.

“What now, BB?” I said, sounding really annoyed. Blackberry is my little brother. He has black fur and black eyes.

“Ma needs you!” he said.

I hopped up and started to sprint. “Beat you there!” I said and gave myself a head start. Blackberry started to hop, but he was too late. I had already burst through the hole in the wall.

The dirt walls were gleaming. The dirt ground was smooth and soft underneath my back paws.

“Strawberry, clean your room! Then help me with Blueberry, Pa should be back soon,” Ma said. I groaned. Blackberry came through the hole in the wall. I saw him smirk as I hopped into my room.

The walls were covered with things I had found, like dead bugs such as lady bugs, beetles, flies, and other things that were extremely rare in the tunnels.

I cleaned up my leaves. The bottom leaf is what I sleep on, the top leaf is what covers me when I am put on my leaf.

Elder Clover told us that humans use a so called “pillow,” but we use sparrow feathers instead.

The floor is grass brought from the outside by other messengers from different community tunnels.

We have small jars found by messengers on the ground. Each room in every tunnel is required to have a jar with at least one firefly in it to light it up. My firefly’s name is Outside because I’ve always wanted to go outside.

“Ma, my room is cleaned! I am going back to the water hole. When I come back we will have a fresh jar of water. See you soon!” I called.

Once again I made my short journey to the water hole. I passed Hazel’s room, Sky’s, Land’s, Dream’s, Joy’s, and my bestest friend of them all, Snow’s room. I stopped abruptly, and hopped back a few paces. I hopped inside Snow’s room.

“Hi Mrs. Winter, I was just wondering if Snow was here.”

Before Snow’s Ma could answer, Snow’s little sister, Frost, came and said, “She went out this morning, put three carrots in a bag and told us she would be back by the evening meal. So basically, Snow is not here,” she concluded.

“Sorry for bothering you! Bye!” I said as I hopped out the hole.

I hopped down to the water hole. I looked in the water again. I saw my own reflection. Then I also saw a bunny hopping towards me. She looked strangely familiar. Very familiar. It seemed a little weird. White fur, blue eyes, ears tied back by strands of grass in “pigtails” as Elder Clover calls it.

Then I realized it was Snow! How could I be so stupid?! It seemed weird that I didn’t recognize her. Huh. I’ll think about that later.

“Strawberry, Strawberry!” Snow cried.

“What?” I asked as she came up next to me.

“Have you ever thought about escaping the tunnels and going outside?” she asked me.

“Yeah, I think I am going to soon. Do you want to come?” I asked.

“Yes! I would love to! I was going to ask you the same thing but you said it first!” she said, hopping up and down. “Oh, wait a minute, Ma told me to pick up Sled from his classes. I have to go,” Snow said glumly. She sat up and started to hop away.

“Wait! Snow!” She turned around. “Ma also told me to pick up Raspberry from her classes of history and the outside and her insect after-class,” I said.

“So what does that have anything to do with it?” she said with an annoyed tone.

“That means I can hop with you!” I said hopefully.

“I have to go to get him from the after-class room somewhere up the tunnel. Where do you go?” she asked, sounding hopeful.

“I have to get Razzy from there too. Let’s go!” I said with a smile. Snow smiled back. We hopped together up the tunnel to the after-class room.

By the time we got there, Sled and Raspberry were already waiting at the wall.

“Strawberry, where were you? You are like a billion years late!” Raspberry asked, obviously annoyed.

“Geez, Razzy, stop exaggerating. I was only a couple minutes late,” I said back.

I looked behind me. Snow and Sled had already gone down the tunnel. When I got back, Ma was waiting.

Chapter Two

Just About Ready

 

“Why are you so late, Strawberry Rose Berry!?” Ma screamed. I could tell she was angry. She never uses my full name.

“Uh-oh!” Raspberry said.

“Someone’s in trouble,” a voice said as he hopped out of his room. It was Blackberry. How could I not have known? Obvious.

“Shut your paw hole, BB!” I said through clenched teeth.

“Strawberry, again, watch your language young rabbit. Now why are you late? No lying,” Ma said.

“Uggghhhh! Fine. I was at the water hole and Snow came. We talked for a bit. Then she said that she had to get Sled then I remembered about Raspberry so we went to pick them up. Finally we came here,” I concluded.

“Okay, I will let you off this time. But promise you won’t be late again,” Ma said.

“Fine,” I said.

The next morning I packed a bag full of carrots, cabbage, and my firefly.

I hopped to Snow’s place. She was waiting outside her hole. She had a bag full of the same things I did.

“You ready?” I asked.

“Yup. Lets make a hop for it,” Snow said excitedly.

We went into my room and dug up until we got to the “outside.” Ma never enters my room so it was pretty easy, the tunnel was about a foot underground so it didn’t take very long to get outside.

 

Chapter Three

The Outside

 

“Wow!!! It’s just like Elder Clover’s stories! I never thought they were actually true! The sunshine is beautiful!” Snow said.

She was right, it was a whole new world, the color was so much sharper, the sunlight was warming, it was also a lot brighter. I was amazed.

I was amazed, then suddenly there was a whistle.

“Get ‘em!” Soldier Rabbit cried. He and his army armed with toothpicks came rushing at us.

Snow screamed. It was a high piercing shriek. All the soldiers fell to the ground trembling.

“HOP!!! Hop while they are down!” I screamed. Then Snow and I hopped away into the woods.

“We need a place to hide and live,” Snow suggested. “How about that place inside that tree, it could be the entrance hall, we can dig down to make more rooms and OH over there, we can make a city, and OH MY GOD…” She kept on talking.

“Snow, Snow, Snow! The bigger problem is THAT WE WILL NEVER BE ABLE TO GO HOME!!!” I screamed.

“Oh, right.” Snow looked at the soft grassy ground underneath us.

 

**************************************************************

 

IN THE TUNNELS…

 

“Pa, honey, do you think Strawberry is going to be okay?” Ma asked

“I think she is going to be just fine. She can fend on her own. Let’s send more soldiers to look for her,” Pa said.

“Ok, I trust you, Honeybumkin,” Ma said as she smiled.

 

**************************************************************

 

BACK TO THE FOREST…

 

“Wait, SB, why can’t we go back to the tunnels?” Snow asked.

“We would be executed by Elder Clover!! He shows no mercy when it comes to breaking the rules!!!” I yelled at her.

“Oh wow, we are NOT going back,” Snow said quietly.

“Yeah, so let’s focus. How are we going to live? Most importantly WHERE are we going to live? How are we going to get food?” I said, almost ripping my ears out.

“We are going to live in that tree, as I already said,” she said waving her hands around with a smile. “We will eat grass and lettuce and carrots and the apples that fall from trees!”

“Ok, I call that tree to live in!” I screamed and hopped to the tree.

I hopped inside. The hollow trunk smelled like cinnamon and hazelnut. There was a soft coat of grass on the ground.

I hopped outside. Snow was filling birds nests with snow to put on the ground of her place. The fresh air felt chilly on my face. It was all new, trees, sky, clouds, snow, bushes, real grass, flowers, birds, and other animals. My mind was blown.

Then there was the sunset. I gathered a feather, no it wasn’t a sparrow feather like in the tunnels, it was a robin feather. I had only seen sparrow feathers.

I loved being out of the tunnels. Being inside for my whole life would make me depressed. Being outside felt like I was a bird. Spreading out my wings and flying free and no one could stop me. I felt like a new bunny.

I grabbed two leaves, one to sleep on and one to cover myself.

I hopped back into my tree. I placed the leaf, then the feather, then another leaf.

I went back outside to get some wood and something to eat. There was a shadow, it was a bunny, but it wasn’t anyone I knew.

The shadow got bigger and bigger.

“Hey! You seem new around here! I am Thalia. Our names aren’t based on things like yours, Strawberry. I know all about you. Everyone in the village I come from is a messenger, well, almost,” Thalia said. Bunnies came out of bushes, tunnels, and the other trees. “Join our village!” Thalia finished.

“We will join your village. Snow will too. Right, Snow?” I called.

“Right! I want friends!” Snow cried from somewhere in the dark, but then I heard a scoop so I now knew that she was still scooping snow.

“So…let’s get to the leaf, we are only bunnies, but you are rabbits, we need our rest, bye!” I squeaked and hopped into my tree.

I woke up in my tree. I hopped outside. Thalia was giving orders. I would have to listen to her because she scared me to death. I bet she could rip me right apart with a squeeze of a paw. She could kill a fox with a flick of the hind paw. I bet she could gnaw down a tree. I think she could crush a skull in one swishing motion. I would always obey her.

 

Chapter Four

Becoming a Part of Message

 

“You there,” Thalia pointed at me, “and Snow, we are having the welcoming ceremony, and also the adoption ceremony, but also the naming ceremony.”

All the rabbits and bunnies gathered around.

“We gather together today to welcome two new members of the community. They will be renamed and adopted. Strawberry will now be Gabby and will be adopted by Will and Bella! Snow will now be Izzy and will be adopted by Ben and Marin! Thank you all for gathering here today and welcoming Gabby and Izzy to our village!” Thalia concluded.

My new parents came up to greet me.

“Hello, we are your new parents. Call me Ma, and him Pa. We will care for you more than anyone else, we promise. We will always love you, even after we die.” Right after she said that, I trusted them with my life, I would love them forever. I couldn’t believe it after hearing that wonderful speech, it just clicked. We were bound forever until death. We walked to my tree and brought all my things to theirs. There were six empty leafs.

“Pa, what are the extra leaves for?” I asked.

“They are going to be for your new brothers or sisters. I know you are wondering why I am not at work, but when your wife is about to have her litter, you have to stay and help her out.”

 

TWO DAYS LATER

 

“Gabby, your Ma just had her litter, she wants you to help carry them to the meeting place. They are all healthy. Three males and three females. Hurry. The rabbit birthing six bunnies doesn’t usually live very long after giving birth,” Ben said hopping to my tree with me hopping behind.

“Ma, are you ok? You are turning white,” I said. Pa and I gathered close.

“I am afraid I am going to have to say goodbye. I am so sorry for leaving you this soon, Gabby, I love you all, goodbye Will, I love you I will always love you, goodbye,” Ma said then her arms went limp and her eyes rolled to the back of her head.

“I love you too, Ma,” I whispered.

CLUNK. “Waaahhh!”

“Oh no! Ma let go of a bunny!” I cried and bent over to pick it up. When it was safely in my arms, it wasn’t hurt the slightest bit.

“Wow, this bunny is really strong!” I said as a cradled the gold bunny.

“We have to bring them to the ceremony,” Pa told me, his face still wet with tears. Tears didn’t come to my eyes, I didn’t know why.

“Yes, we should,” I agreed. I picked up the females and Pa picked up the males. We carried them together to the ceremony.

We handed Thalia the bunnies. “We gather here today to welcome Will and Bella’s new bunnies! Let’s now do the naming ceremony. This will be Skylar, this will be Maddie, this will be Bella, this will be Achillies, this will be Asher, and this will be Nick.” Thalia finished and handed us back the bunnies.

Skylar was grayish blue and had blue eyes. She reminded me of Blueberry, home, and the family I left because of my own curiosity. A tear trickled down my furry face.

“Gabby darling, are you ok? Why are you crying?” Pa asked.

“Call me SB. I am crying because I am so happy! These are tears of joy that the bunnies we born!” I said. Pa seemed to buy it.

Thalia handed us a HUGE bird’s nest. I remembered that you were supposed to put the young in it. I have a fuzzy memory of Elder Clover, if that was even his name, saying that humans called this a stroller.

I think we use human words around here. I am not sure. I’ll catch on at some point.

“Thanks, Thalia! Can you help me put the bunnies in the stroller?” I asked.

“Sure,” Thalia said and put the golden bunny with the golden eyes, the one Ma had dropped, Achilles, I think, into the stroller. Then Maddie, the light pinkish one like raspberry, Bella the whitish one, Asher the black one like BB, then Nick, the spotted one, then Skylar, the blue one, like Blueberry.

Pa and I pushed the stroller back to our tree. We fed them each mashed carrots and apples, then we put them to sleep.

“We are going to have to take them to the daycare, you are going to have to be messenger, and I have to go back to my job, being the food collector,” Pa told me.

Chapter Five

Being a Messenger

 

The next day, Pa left early for work, so I mashed carrots and fed it to the six for their “breakfast.” I put leaves and feathers in the strollers to make them feel comfy, then one by one I put them each in the stroller.

I pushed the stroller through the village passing Thalia who was giving orders to men who were painting the ground blue with mashed blueberries.

Finally, we got to the huge tree where I saw bunnies hopping everywhere. “This is the place,” I told them.

I saw a female rabbit and some others scrambling about feeding bunnies, bringing bunnies to the hole to do their business, burping bunnies, helping crying bunnies who had fallen, and breaking up fights between toys.

“Um, hello, can I drop off these little bunnies?” I asked a rabbit who was sitting on a log burping a little bunny. Her eyes widened.

“SIX MORE? I am so sorry, we can only take four of your six for everyday, are you their mother?” she asked.

“No, their older sister,” I turned to look at the bunnies. “Who wants to stay here and play with other bunnies?”

Skylar raised her paw, so did Bella, so did Asher, and so did Nick.

“It is decided. Skylar, Bella, Nick, and Asher will be staying with you. I will take the other two. Then Pa will pick them up before dinner, if that is what you call it,” I said. I waved my paw at the four who were staying and hopped away.

“Hey guys, we are going to go to other villages and give them things,” I told Maddie and Acki. The gold bunny, Acki, replied with a nod and grabbing a stick as if to be saying or else. Maddie smiled showing her big white teeth.

I let Maddie and Acki hop around. Acki hopped back to me with a jar. “Here go,” he said as I took the jar and put it in my bag. Maddie was by the flowers lifelessly staring and then quickly moved to something else then repeated the cycle over again.

We got to the next community. This one was above ground unlike my first community. I walked down the road, putting things on the houses that were marked with the same mark on each package. Maddie and Acki were looking at the package, then hopping down the marked path looking for the right tree to put the package. I handed them the packages and they delivered them. They are really good helpers.

Next village. Underground this time. It was my old village. I gave Maddie and Acki all the packages and told them to go in and come out when all the packages were delivered. I waited outside.

 

TEN MINUTES LATER

“Back,” Acki said.

“All gone,” Maddie said and showed her paws to prove that there were no packages left. I picked them up and set them on my back and walked back to my village.

 

Chapter Six

Back Home With My New Family

 

When we got back to the village, we went straight to the daycare place. Asher, Skye, Nick, and Bella were waiting. “Gabby! Homey!” Nick cried.

I placed them on my back and hopped to the tree. I put them all on their leaves and prepared their mashed carrots.

Pa came and sat down at the stick and waited for dinner. Each one of the bunnies came up and sat on the bench with Pa.

I placed the mashed carrots at each of the bunnies seats. For Pa I put out apples, cabbage, and carrots. I put out for me apples and cabbage.

We talked all night until the sun set on the hills. We gathered together on the stick. This was the first time I actually felt at home. I was with new my family. No, my old family wasn’t my family at all, my new family is a true family. I was free. Finally. Forever.

Going to Find the Ghoulians

Chapter One

 

Once upon a time, two kids named Sam and Jack were reading a book and they found out that there were people living on Mars. But you had to go through a 78 square mile maze with trick things like a half man half ___ and a square mile of raining tanks, but they thought they could do it so they asked their mom and dad to work at the government. They printed money for 600 days and collected $500 a day so they could buy a spaceship deluxe and a driver for $300,000. They got $200,000 and then the president came and they fell down and the president saw people not printing money, but stealing it, so they went to jail.

So the two kids had to buy a spaceship minus for $200,000 but then they had to get someone to drive the spaceship because there were 27 explode buttons and 13 drive buttons so they said that they were poor and homeless and they got $22. And then they bought a spaceship minus driving book and then they got in the spaceship minus and they saw a photograph of the correct spacesuits. So they snuck into another spaceship minus and got the correct spacesuits and got in their spaceship minus and started. Then they almost got to the maze but Sam fell on an explode button and then the ship exploded. But lucky for them, they landed on the maze 56 ninety ninths through.

Just then, it rained 500 pound weights, then it rained super hot spikey pasta, then you chose coffee or vodka. One took vodka, one took coffee, so one was walking zig zag and one was jumping all around, so one jumped up and carried the other and they got there. They said “backvgvhgv tawgijg,” and they got let in and they saw a sign that said welcome to Mars, home of the Ghoulians!!! And they also saw things with 3 legs, 2 feet per leg, 16 eyes, 4 mouths that go down, 34 ears on top of there heads, 2 toes per foot and leg and 6 heads (that fight a lot). They were also very cute. They wanted to take 1 home for a pet.

 

Chapter Two

 

So they tried to get a Ghoulian, but then 2 ears of the Ghoulian sunk into their head and 2 guns came out and it shot down onto the two kids. Then they were in an unbreakable trap. They were trapped in the trap for 20 years and then they still wanted to take a Ghoulian. So, then the Ghoulians put them in the Human Zoo where Ghoulian families come to watch you play around with the wheel hanging from the ceiling from a rope and at special times get fed with carrots and some Ghoulians go into the cage with carrots from Planet Earth by taking their special magnets that got carrots. At first the carrots were amazing and then they could get tasteless

Then there was someone who got sick there and their eyeball popped out and then it died. And then, in nighttime when the Ghoulians were asleep, they took the body and hid it so they could take it back to planet Earth. After 10 years, you got let out, so Sam and Jack tried to go out and then they went out but they couldn’t find their spaceship but luckily they were in their spacesuits so they floated in space and then they realized that they didn’t have their spaceship so they had to try to go down to Earth by waving their arms up and down so then they could get back down to Earth and it worked but the problem was, you could only move 50 miles a day so they were stuck doing that for 20 years then they finally saw Earth but then they saw that they were over a volcano so they landed in the volcano and lucky for them it was a fake volcano that scientists used to check out what volcanoes are like. It “exploded” and then they got to go out but then they realized they were on a scientist island so they asked a scientist how they could get out.

The scientist said, “This is a scientist island.” The only way that we can get out is by flying on flying chickens because this is a very high room and only flying chickens can break through the roof. So, you will have to use a flying chicken, but there is a fee of fifty dollars to rent one. So then they looked around in their pockets and then they realized that they have something from the Ghoulian’s home on Mars. So, they told the scientists that this is something from the Ghoulians and the scientists loved that idea because they didn’t have something from Mars from the Ghoulians but they had a lot of other stuff like lava from Mount Vesuvius or a dinosaur. So, they accepted it and they got a flying chicken.
Chapter Three
But then, they saw other scientists on flying chickens with helmets and those kinds of gear. So, they asked the scientist if they could have some helmets and gear.

And then the scientist said, “I guess the Ghoulian body you gave us was really cool and it would be waaay more than fifty dollars, so I will give you helmets, gear, and I will also teach you how to ride on the flying chicken.”

So they followed the scientist into the flying chicken testing and training room and the scientist said, “This is the room where all our flying chickens get tested to see if they can fly and if they are more than 2 feet tall and they get trained with people and people get trained with them. There are even flying chicken teachers. So, you will be going in flying chicken #32’s room, which you will meet in 16 minutes. And, you will meet and ride with flying chicken #32”.
They went to the room for flying chicken #32. The scientist stayed with them to supervise. And, the flying chicken would give them turns and teach them tips and in the end,  they would get to ride on the flying chicken’s back and do really fun stuff like ride on the flying chicken roller coaster. But, you would have to find how you got past the loop and the tricky turns. And, the kids thought it would be really fun and easy.

So, then, they got on and then the flying chicken’s back lifted up, rocket propellers stuck up, and then the flying chicken said, “Second thoughts? Well, too bad! Get ready to scream in threee, twooo, onnne, screeeaaammm”.

And then, they went up a really fast hill. And then, they thought that there are no seatbelts. How would they stay on? And then, they realized that there were a couple of buttons on the flying chickens pressed a button. but, they pressed the wrong one. It was the we’re going on a loop button. So, then the flying chicken tried to push up so it could stay on the loop. So, then the kids freeeaaakked out. They almost screamed their heads off. And then, they pressed the bumpy road button. So, then suddenly it went up and down and up and down and they didn’t know what to do and then they finally pressed the going up the hill button. But, it was almost at the top of the hill and it was ready to go down a really bumpy hill. And then, so they knew where the bumpy road button was. And then, they thought that the going downhill button would be next to the going uphill button. But, they pressed it and they were wrong. Now, they were going underwater. So, then, the flying chicken was pushing down while it was going up and down and the flying chicken almost exploded! But luckily, it didn’t.

The going under water button was a very bad choice, but it pushed them so hard that the track broke. Lucky for them, they pressed the going under water button and it was the part when they were going over water so then all they had to do was press the bumpy road button again. And then, it was only the going under water button. And then, the next part of the roller coaster was a loop, but they couldn’t go on it. So, they looked for a button differentiating paper so they could press the steering wheel button. Now the knew how to steer so they steered to an island but that island was part of the roller coaster and that part of the roller coaster has the worst part because it was the part for people who wanted to escape. For example, there is a REAL shark, DEADLY PINEapples and weird holua men who shoot XXXXXXL bullets from their belly buttons.
When Sam saw the pineapples he didn’t want to go so he thought that all scientists must have underwater labs. So, he looked at the button, differentiating card and he looked for the ‘going underwater’ button. So, they pressed the “going underwater” button and the flying chicken pushed down. And then, before they knew it they were underwater. And then, they also pressed the “going downhill” button so the pressure on the sand on the bottom of the ocean was even harder. So, finally they got to the scientist’s underwater labs. It was a modern place, shaped like a dome and it was made out of glass. So first, Jack tried pressing the “zombie’s crossing” button, which makes you go really fast so no zombies catch you. But, they couldn’t push through the glass because the glass was unbreakable. And then, after that, they looked in and they saw a few robots going around like really weird people screaming, “People trying to break in, people trying to break in!”

There were sirens going off and they were really loud. Sam and Jack both felt scared. And Sam said to Jack, “I know how to get in. All I have to do is look at the button differentiator card because I think I saw a chicken and riders turn invisible.” So Sam looked at the button differentiator and he saw the “flying chicken and riders turn invisible” button so he pressed it and they turned invisible .but the robots can see invisible people and the robots shot 1,000,000,000,000 pound people at them.

They hit the robot octopus, which was used for many experiments. And they also hit the remote control coral. There was a big explosion. And when something explodes, the water turns pink and then the water’s texture gets weird. Very weird. And now it’s hard for the robots, animals, and the remote control seashells to swim. Jack thought that the chicken was a very fun thing, so he decided to ride on its head. And he also thought that standing on its head while jumping and saying made up words when he thought that they were real English words. Then, the very heavy and sweaty sumowrestlers were sumo wrestling in air and almost hit him. Just a little armpit hair touches him. Jack is thinking, ew gross this is disgusting. He was also thinking, I can’t believe that I didn’t get killed.

Meanwhile, Sam was thinking a lot and he opened the secret door on the flying chicken’s back. So he uses the button differentiator and suddenly he sees this great button, an “operate by your brain” button. It had a big picture of a biiig brain. He pressed that button and it does whatever your brain thinks. And he’s thinking, please, just…get..me..and my friend…out of..here…

and then the flying chicken suddenly shot the bunch of de-energy bullets.  I(t’s the only kind that can kill robots because it takes out all the energy of the robots.

Jack was saved.

After the biiig mistake Jack was so mad he almost killed Sam but he shot all the robot and they all died because it is the only bullet that can kill robots. After that they got into the lab and they found flying chicken #32’s operating lap top and made the roller coaster stop and made them return to the end of the roller coaster and then the scientist saw that they had passed the test and that they could go home but he still stayed with them just to make sure. first they had to take the shuttle to to flying chicken airport there were 527 flying chickens (including theirs).They were thinking so much that they felt  like their brains were oozing out of their heads.They were also worried.

Finally they got there.They were sooo worried.The scientist left.

Chapter 4: The Flight

They were there at the airport at the runway.They were going to be taking off after 76 chickens.

“This chickenport is busy!” Said Jack. It felt like 100 whole years before they took off, but they reeeaaally wanted to get home so they had no choice. They finally took off.

When they took off they saw that it was going to be fun and scary.the first place they saw was Hong Kong. They noticed that something had changed because Hong Kong was more modern. After that they saw a robot dragon. It was like a real dragon.They had a big battle.The dragon breathed fire and unburnable butcher knifes. This is terrible” said Jack. Then the dragon flew to kansas they followed. He tried to land on a volcano but he landed in a volcano then they flew to their hometown Nebraska.

They got home and saw their mom and thier mom said, “Hi kiddies! Where have you been?”

And Jack said “It’s a long story, honey” doing a perfect imitation of his dad. If his dad was there he would of been in trouble for imitating him but he was at Mah Jong restaurant a Chinese restaurant he made a lotta money because people love buying Mah Jong’s specialty stuffed rats stuffed with rotten shark. And Sam said “Yeah I agree.”

And they went into their house and their mother gave them each a big kiss. Then the next day they had a special public ceremony in there town and at the ceremony they had everything that they liked like XXXXXL iPads and limited edition candies.

Please Contact Logan Simonds

It was already 10:00 p.m., and Dad still wasn’t home.

“Where issssss he?” my 6-year-old sister Kaitlyn, whined, since Mom was letting her stay up until Dad got home.

“Be quiet, Kaitlyn,” I snapped, then returned to my gaze at the door. Dad worked at Google, pursuing his love of computers, and usually he was home by 8 every night. But not tonight. He was two whole hours late, and I felt more nervous and worried than I ever had. What if he had gotten into a car crash? Or what if he had been kidnapped, and the kidnappers had taken his phone away from him, so he couldn’t call us? Yes, I was overreacting, but STILL! The thought of anything bad happening to Dad made my heart leap into my throat.

I turned towards Mom, who was looking really nervous as she paced back and forth across the living room.

“What time is it?” I asked.

“10:30.”

I sighed, and turned back towards the door. And, just at that instant, the door opened, and Dad stumbled in, his hair messy and tousled. There were bags under his eyes, and a frown stretched across his face. Nevertheless, Kaitlyn and I still ran into his arms.

“Hey, kiddo,” Dad said, but without the usual ring to his voice.

“Dad, what’s wrong?” I asked.

Dad didn’t reply, and he walked up to Mom.

“Penelope, can I talk to you for a bit?”

“Sure, honey. What’s up?”

Dad led her into their room, and I heard the door lock behind them. What on earth was happening? Dad never acted like this, never ever ever. Where was his cheerful self, his kind and happy self, his self that always hugged me and was smiling? I was pondering this as I tucked Kaitlyn in.

“What’s wrong with Daddy?” my sister asked, as I turned off the light.

“I don’t know.”

Then I left, and went to my room to wait for my parents to come in and say goodnight. But it was only Mom who came in. She now looked as forlorn as my dad, and her face was tear-stained.

“Mom, WHAT is happening?” I said, sitting up in bed. She sat down, and placed her hand on my head, running her fingers through my mess of red hair.

Mom sighed, and closed her eyes.

“Something very sudden has come up, Marley,” she said in that soft voice of hers.

“Yeah, duh!”

Mom sighed again.

“Your father…he’s… lost his job,” she blurted out.

What?

“He’s lost his job.”

“At Google?”

“At Google.”

I was silent for a long time. This was all SO quick, and it came at me like cannonball. If Dad lost his job, we could go broke! Mom didn’t have a job, so there would be no good money in the family. We could be homeless! What if Kaitlyn and I had to be sent off to a homeless shelter because Mom and Dad couldn’t afford our rent anymore? Or what if…

“Why?” I finally said, quietly.

Mom didn’t answer.

“I’m going to send in your father, all right? I think that he should tell you why.”

Mom left, and soon my father walked in, the door creaking as he walked into my room. He was silent as he sat upon my bed, and he was still quiet 5 minutes later, just staring in front of him, a dazed look in his green eyes.

“Dad?”

Dad closed his eyes.

“Sometimes people gotta do what they wanna do,” he finally said.

“What?”

His hand went on my shoulder, and my father turned to look at me.

“Today at work, I was fired by my boss. My careless, rude boss who has no feelings for other people whatsoever,” he said, his voice coated with anger the way a chocolate-covered pretzel is covered with chocolate. “A guy at work, my friend actually, was being yelled at by my boss for saying that he would have to leave work early tomorrow, since he had to attend his youngest daughter’s school play. Well, I didn’t think that my boss screaming at my friend was right, so I-I spoke my mind. And that’s what got me fired.”

Dad looked at me, me, who was in complete shock.

“You got fired for standing up for your friend?” I said.

“Yes, I did. But I lost my temper, Marley. I took it a little too far.”

“How?” I asked, feeling bewildered.

Dad sighed.

“I yelled at my boss. Screamed, argued…cursed. What my boss did wasn’t right, but what I did wasn’t-wasn’t right either,” my father said, quietly.

Dad? Losing his temper? I was confused. Dad was supposed to be perfect. He wasn’t supposed to scream at people, even if those people were jerks. I felt a shiver go through me.

“Why, Dad? Why did you have to lose your temper?”

Dad didn’t reply, and one of those uncommon frowns formed on his face.

“Good night, Marley,” Dad said, in almost a whisper. And with that, he left, closing the door behind him.

 

. . .

 

Clack, clack, clack. My fingers worked furiously at my keyboard, typing and typing, deleting, and typing again. Finally, when my fingers were just too tired to type anymore, I stood back and smiled, admiring my finished product.

 

My name is Marley Simonds, and I’m 13 years old. I live with my dad, Logan Simonds, and he just lost his job for doing the right thing. Let me just tell you, my dad is the best person in the whole entire world. He is so kind, and nice, and cheerful, and smart, and he was so good at his job at Google. All I want is for my father to get another job, preferably one having to do with computers. He would be such a good worker, I assure you. Please, if you work with computers, and you need a new worker, hire my dad. My whole family would appreciate it so much.

Contact “logansimonds45@gmail.com

 

Done. My ad to put in the local newspaper was done. I grinned, satisfied, and sent it to the newspaper using the email address I had found the night before. Now, all I had to do was wait for the newspaper to email me back – hopefully with good news. What a surprise it would be! I closed my eyes, smiling. Dad sure would be proud.

It was a week later. Luckily for me, the ad was going to be put up in the newspaper by tomorrow! I got a letter from the local newspaper telling me that they would definitely put it in the paper, free of charge! How cool is that? The editor said that he was so touched by my care for my father, and that he was going to contact my dad later today, to let him know. I couldn’t wait to see Dad’s face, full of joy and surprise. He would hug me, and laugh, and be  his old self again. Soon, he would get the email from the editor, later today. Later today had better come soon.

Dad came home before dinner that night. The second he walked in through the door, him and Mom shared a glance that said so many things. Dad hadn’t found a job.

But just you wait, Dad, just you wait.

Mom looked down, obviously trying to hide her sadness, and continued to grill hamburgers on the stove with Kaitlyn hanging by her shoulder, nagging her to let her help flip the burgers.

“I wanna flip them, Mommy! It looks fun!” Kaitlyn said in that annoying little voice of hers.

Help me, Mom mouthed to Dad, who sighed, and walked up to the stove to convince Kaitlyn that flipping hamburgers wasn’t as fun as it seemed. All the while, I waited impatiently, hopping around in a circle, twiddling my thumbs, WAITING for Dad to be finished with Kaitlyn so that he could see the email.

Finally, Dad went upstairs to his computer. He was up there for a long time. Had the email come yet? I wondered, biting my lip.

“Marley, can you come up here for a second?” Dad yelled down from his office.

This was the moment I had been waiting for! I raced upstairs, and stood behind Dad, who was reading an email, surely enough from the “Connecticut Local Newspaper.”

Dad looked towards me, but I didn’t see any of the excitement I had expected to see in his eyes.

“What’s this?” Dad gestured towards the email.

I was confused. Why wasn’t he happy?

“I, well, I sent the newspaper a notice, about you losing your job and everything. I wanted people to see it, and maybe even, you know, hire you. I…wanted to help you,” I mumbled.

Dad was quiet for a long time, and I suddenly regretted everything I had done – the ad, sending it to the newspaper, having them email Dad.

“Oh, Marley,” he said quietly, rubbing the top of my head, “that was so kind of you. I can always count on you, you know that?”

I nodded.

“Aren’t you happy?” I asked.

“I am happy, Marls. But sometimes, someone as old as me has to take care of things themselves. You know what I mean?”

I didn’t reply.

“I can’t have my daughter getting me a job. That’s my responsibility. It just proves that the kids are always smarter than the adults, though,” he said, chuckling, “Marley, that was very thoughtful of you. And you know what? That ad you wrote was so inspiring. I’ll never forget it. But we don’t need that ad in the newspaper. Because, guess what?”

“What?” I muttered.

“I GOT A JOB! I was going to tell you guys at dinner, so it could be a surprise. The job is at Apple, and I’m gonna be in charge of the whole store! How cool is that?”

I looked up, shocked.

“You got a job?!!”

Dad nodded that nod of his, and smiled that smile of his, and hugged me the way that he used to. And suddenly, I understood everything.

“Oh, Dad!” I exclaimed, wrapping my arms around his neck.

I guess that there was a surprise tonight, after all.

Homeless

CHAPTER 1: My Life

 

“All she wants is to have a home.”

That is how everyone knows me, I thought. I was walking home after trying to find some type of family. No success; again. I do have a home, I thought to myself, those people are all wrong about me. Once I got to the park, I think about my day. I had been near the preschool, hoping someone would want another child. Seems everyone has enough children. The park is my home, but I don’t really spend a lot of time there. Most of my time is spent walking around the streets. I have been doing this for four years, ever since my parents died in a big fire at their office.

They were both scientists. Someone else at the office made a “mistake” on a potion. It burnt the whole lab building down. When I heard, I went home, and used all the money around the house to pay for food, bills and the rent. Eventually, I ran out of it. Now, I am 11 years old. By the time I got to the park, it was about 6 o’clock. I have no clue of the time though, since my watch ran out of battery about a year ago. I basically live in the woods. The park connects to the woods.

I always wonder why no one ever came to save me. NOT ANYONE. Not even the landlord in the building cared that I was a child. He knew that my parents were both dead. He was a mean man, he was NEVER nice to me. So, he made sure that I was out on the streets, instead of safe, inside an orphanage  or foster home. I still hate him. I will never like him. NEVER.

To this day, I hate orphanage and foster homes. I am glad that the landlord didn’t send me to one, but he could’ve made sure that I was safe with a relative, or something. He always made sure that I was unhappy. One time, when I was 4, a little girl walked into the building with ice cream. The landlord was standing in the lobby and all he said was, “Enjoy your ice cream, kiddo!” Then, I followed the little girl into the lobby. I had ice cream, too. He said to me, “No ice cream in this building. Get that ice cream out of here!” Those last words stuck in my head LIKE GLUE.  I could never forget all the times that he was mean to me.

The next day, I went near the preschool again. As usual, all of the parents ignored me. Then, it was getting late. I was about to go back to the park for the next few hours, until preschool ended. Then, one last preschooler came out, I said hello, and for the first time ever, I heard a voice answer back. I was surprised.

“Did you just respond to me?” I asked.

“Yeah, you said hello, and I said hello back–is that okay?” she asked me back.

“That is fine, I’m just not used to someone responding. You see, no one has answered me for three years,” I said, uncomfortable.

“How do you live like that?” she asked

“Practice,” I said, “And where are your parents, and why are you so late?”

“You ask so many questions,” she said, “but I can tell you one thing about myself.”

“What?” I asked.

“I am not going into that school right now,” She said.

“Huh?” I started to say before I blacked out.

 

CHAPTER 2: The Day My Life Got Even Worse

 

I opened my eyes after a while and I could barely see. Everything was blurry. I looked down and the marks of a needle were on my arm. The shot was blurring my eyes. The preschooler walked into the room. My vision unblurred slowly as she stood next to my bed. I was in a bed. Had I been sleeping?

“Can you see?” the preschooler asked.

“Yes.” I answered to the short skinny blonde haired girl. Her hair was down to her elbows. She was wearing a purple sweaterdress and pink leggings

“Good. Now something you should know about me is that i am like you. You will never see me with parents. Oh, and you think your life is awful? Well, it’s about to get even worse.”

“Huh? I don’t get it! How can this life get even worse? I am kidnapped, with no family or friends left!”

“You don’t know how bad a person’s life can get,” she said.

“What do you mean?” I asked.

“I told you it’s about to get even worse,  now relax,” she said.

I blacked out again. I don’t even know what happened. I couldn’t remember anything that happened before. The preschooler’s life was played in  front of me. Just important parts. The only thing I learned is that the preschooler’s fake name was Lily, and she was a spoiled brat.

I woke up. I couldn’t see, just like last time, “How did you do that? How–.”

“Shut up. And call me Lily.”

“You are nothing like me. You are a spoiled brat with parents, friends, and a family. You get everything you want.”

“True. I agree. Your life is awful, mine is great. And that black-out thing is none of your business. And I am completely like you. There are some things you don’t know yet!”

“But–”

“There are a couple of things you should know: you are being put to the test, and I am learning all about you. I am learning your life. Every time you black out, I see a new year of your life. What I mean by that is that I experience your life in fast-forward, as you are blacked out. I have access to your thoughts. From what I have seen, we could be twins.”

“Not!” I screamed. “We are nothing alike.”

I blacked out again.

 

CHAPTER 3: I’m Not Going to Estimate How Bad My Life Can Get Any More.

 

It seems that every time I black out I see something. This time, I saw my life flash before my eyes. One thing that I just remembered was that the park guard was mean to me. He always took my stuff while I wasn’t at the park, and he told me that I couldn’t live there anymore. I told him that I wasn’t even in the park, I was in the woods. I thought my life was awful. I thought it couldn’t get worse. Now, it’s getting worse by the day. I woke to what seemed like a hospital room, but I was the only one there. There were tons of beds, but the only bed that was not empty was the one I was in. I started to think about my life. My parents died, the landlord kicked me out of my own house onto the streets, and then I was living in the woods. I could barely get food. But of course it could get worse. I went from in the woods, and little food, to being kidnapped around to different mystery places every day. When I was by myself there was no one to talk to, no place to sleep. Wild animals outside around me. It was scary, I have to admit. But now, instead of knowing where I was, or what to do, I am in places that I have never even heard of. I used to have a daily routine that I followed every day. Now, I have no idea what to do. Then, my eyes started to unblur.  For the first time in 4 years, I saw a working clock, so I decided to fix my watch to the date and time. January 18, 2012, 2:56pm. That’s when I realized it. No wonder Lily thought we were alike. I used to have good caring parents, too. That’s when a man walked into the room. I recognised him in a weird way. He had short black hair, rimmed glasses, and a small goatee. He was kind of heavy. He was wearing a science lab coat, and he looked kind of nervous. He came to my bed, and held out his hand for me to shake.

“Jamie, I have learned so much about you! It is so nice to finally meet you! Can I tell you where you are?” He didn’t wait for an answer. “You are in the building that your parents used to work in. Well…it got re-modeled a little bit…after the fire.” He seemed uncomfortable to talk about the fire. “But I am Herald Waltzchiz, and I am here and proud of it! I used to work with your parents. They were very good people. I just want you to know that I feel your pain, and that I am here for you,” he said.

Just then I realized why I recognized the man. He was my LANDLORD. HE was the one who kicked me out onto the streets. I hate that man. I had no idea what to do. Should I tell him that I know who he is? No, I finally decided. “Hi, it’s so nice to know that there is someone there for me. Thanks Dr. Waltzchiz!”

“Anytime, Jamie!”

“Wait,” I said as he started to leave “Do you know who or where Lily is?”

“Oh, uh, um, uh Lily? What do you mean?” He asked nervously.

I then knew that he knew who Lily was, and where she was. I didn’t bother him anymore about it. I knew that he wasn’t ever going to be there for me, and that he was a bad man. Once again, I blacked out.

 

CHAPTER 4: This Is Not What I Thought.

 

I woke up to a big room. I guess I had been asleep this whole time. I was sitting in a chair. Next to me was Lily. She was sitting down, too. The first thing I did was look at my watch. I had been being kidnapped for the past six weeks.

“I have all the information about you. I know your whole life. You will not be blacking out any more. Since I know about you, I think you have the right to know something.” I didn’t respond. I was mad at Lily. She had been sending me around to different places with Dr.Waltzchiz for the past six weeks. I had no idea what was happening. I didn’t even know for sure that it was Lily. But, it could be Dr. Waltzchiz. I liked my life better when nobody bothered to torture me. Sure, I was alone, but at least I was free to do what I wanted. But, at the same time, I wanted to learn about Lily. I had no idea how she could possibly have the power to do this to me.

“Go on,” I said.

“Well, for starters, you have no parents. I have no parents. I know that I came across to you as spoiled, but I am being tortured as well as you. You don’t know how yet, but you will see. I have a plan to save you. We have completely different lives, but we have a lot in common. We both have unhappy lives,” said Lily.

Dr. Waltzchiz walked into the room. “Come on Lily, we have to go.” Then he saw me. “Jamie, what a surprise to see you here. It’s too bad that me and Lily have to go now. Bye! I guess I’ll see you later!” He said.

“But, Daddy–” She put her hand over her mouth. “Did I just say what I think I said?” Lily asked.

“Yes, and it really is time to go now,” Said Dr. Waltzchiz.

“I’m not going! I don’t want to!” Lily screamed and stomped her foot.

“Wait–” I said, “ Lily, this is your dad?”

“Uh…no um yes uh maybe?” Lily said. She immediately covered her mouth.

“We are going RIGHT NOW!” Dr. Waltzchiz yelled as he pulled Lily out of the room. Lily screamed for help, and I ran to help her, but by the time I got to the doorway, I looked down, and there was no floor. I did not want to go down, but I heard Lily’s distant screams, and I knew that I could not abandon her. I jumped down, slowly starting to hear Lily more clearly.

As I jumped, I had a memory. It was about when my parents died. The manager of the science office had run to my house to tell me. The first thing he said was, “Your parents are dead.”

I cried for hours. He stayed with me for a couple of days, although I never saw his face once. I knew him from before, so I was comfortable with him. He came to check on me every once and a while, but he slowly stopped coming, and I lost contact of him. After I lost my house, I lived on trash that was not completely inedible. My life sucked. I barely slept at night. Now– I don’t even know how I sleep.

I hit the floor. The neverending fall was over.

 

CHAPTER 5: Who (REALLY) Is Dr. Waltzchiz?

 

I stood up. I looked all around. I was in a big room. The middle was empty, but there were tables spread out on the sides. In the middle were Lily and Dr. Waltzchiz. They were fighting over something. It seemed unreasonable, but I couldn’t really tell. Finally, Lily screamed out, “BUT YOU’RE NOT MY DAD!!!!!”

“What do you mean he’s not your dad?” Now it was my turn to cover my mouth. Both Lily and Dr. Waltzchiz looked at the little shoot I had come out of.

“How did you get here?” He asked.

“I’m skinny,” I said, “I haven’t eaten much in the last four years.”

“What do you mean?” He asked.

“Ok. You can stop joking. I know that you know me inside and out. You have been almost reading my entire life the second it happened,” I said.

“You’re missing a chunk of the information, Jamie,” He snickered.

“Any help, Lily?” I asked, sounding like a beggar.

“Oh, she’s not helping you any time soon, Jamie. She works for me,” he said, Lily still staying quiet.

“She works for you? YOU WORK FOR HIM!?!?” I was about to go crazy!

“So smart now, huh dad?” Lily said.

“So he is your dad?” I asked.

“No, dumbo. Ever heard of sarcasm?” she asked.

“Lily, why do keep talking to this girl? We have work to do to destroy her,” he said.

“Destroy me?” I asked nervously, “You’re going to destroy me?”

“There is no use in hiding anything from you anymore,” he said calmly. “Lily said that you were being put to the test, and well, you were. The test was your life. If you were what you thought you were, you would have to die. You are nothing like we thought you would be. We thought you would be hopeless. Turns out, you are always hoping for life to get better.” I started to feel happy. “But, we still have to kill you.”

“I know all about you by the way. You have been four people in my life, trying to watch me wherever I go. You have been ‘the only survivor that used to work with my parents.’ That was when you lived with me for a while. You have been my ‘Landlord.’ You have been ‘the park guard.’ And you have been Dr. Waltzchiz. Not to mention the fact that you probably have been following me around everywhere I go using other disguises I don’t even know about.” I said, starting to get annoyed with him.

“I QUIT,” said Lily in the strongest voice she had ever used. She sounded tough.

“What? EXCUSE ME? You can’t quit!” said Dr. Waltzchiz, amazed with Lily’s choice.

She was standing across from me, next to Dr. Waltzchiz. She moved over next to me. She whispered to me, “I’m on your side now.”

“And you weren’t before?”

“Well, I wanted to be, but I was being controlled. You see, when someone likes him for a minute, he controls them. Kind of how he blacked you out.”

“I thought you did that,” I said.

“I did,” Lily said “but I was under his control. I just made myself realize that I hated him, and now, I have power over him.”

“How does he do it?” I asked Lily. Dr. Waltzchiz was still in the room.

“At birth, he wasn’t born right. Right before he was born, he died. The doctor put some type of a spatial light over him. Since his parents were both very weak, he grew up with the doctor. He taught him how to use his powers, but he motivated him to use his powers for bad. Then, he moved away, but the only way he knew to use his powers was to do bad things with them,” Lily said.

“How could you betray me?” He screamed at Lily.

Lily pulled my hand. “Let’s go,” she said to me.

“You’re not going anywhere.” he said.

“Oh yes we are! Come on, we have to go,” she said.

Dr. Waltzchiz tried to come after us, but Lily turned him into a toy, and put him in a jar. She picked up the jar. I was amazed.

“Close your eyes” she said. She brought me into a room.

“Finally,” she said. “It’s all over.”

She opened the door.

 

CHAPTER 6: Finally Happy

 

“He didn’t really kill your parents. He locked them up. This room was locked so that it couldn’t be opened unless he was destroyed. He thought he would live forever. You can open your eyes,” Lily paused.  “All that evil old Waltzchiz ever wanted was to make everybody’s life miserable. So, he figured out some way to get powers. Since he thought he would never die, he promised me his powers when he did die. The only power I got for being his assistant locking people in jars. I don’t know why, but for some reason, he had something against us, so he tortured us, and our families.”

I saw about a dozen people. Two of them were my parents. They were all frozen. “They were fed,” Lily said.

I ran to my parents. Lily unfolded a piece of paper.

It said: “My destroyer shall bring these people back to life.” Lily knew exactly what to do. She ran around, tapping all of them. They all came to life, and I hugged my parents. Finally, I was happy. At last.

“MOM, DAD!” Lily and I both shouted at the same time. We laughed.

“We knew that you would get us out,” my mom told me.

“Actually, Lily got you out.”

All of the thank you’s, and kisses, and hugs took hours. I missed my parents more than words could say.

Lily and I were friends for the rest of our lives.

“By the way,” Lily said to me, right after we found our parents, “I’m not in preschool.”

 

Chapter 7: Waltzchiz’s Story

by: Waltzchiz

 

I am not a crazy man!!! This is my story:

I went to college with the parents of Lily and Jamie. The dads of both families said that I was Harry, my first name, instead of Martin, my middle name. Ever since, I have wanted revenge. I am not crazy!!!

Excerpt from Apryl

Nat and I ate our bran cereal at the table, and enjoyed our last breakfast at home. I opened the mail, and found a notice on a green piece of paper:

 

Notice

Today is Switching Day!

All citizens of Ellipsis Yonder Metropolis are required to attend the ceremony.

Ceremony will be held at the Meeting Place

From 10 AM until 1 PM

Lunch will be held but please arrive early to claim your table.

All work is cancelled, and no classes will be held.

Anyone not at the ceremony will be severely disciplined.

 

It was Switching Day, the day that we switched quadrants. We would never come back to our parent’s quadrant. I didn’t know how Nat was taking it, but I cried into my pillow all last night. It wasn’t like I didn’t want to switch, I HAD to, but I would miss Mom and Dad. Maybe Nat didn’t think of it this way, but I thought of it as almost our last day of being sisters. Tomorrow, she would be with the negatives, and I would be with the positives. Sure, we would see each other (I mean, I’m pretty sure), but we wouldn’t live together. I was scared.

 

“Girlies! Get dressed! Your special clothes for the ritual,” Mom hollered at us from her and Dad’s room. The ritual is where we switch, and in front of everyone. We are required to wear nice clothes, so for girls, dresses, and boys, a sports jacket and nice pants. Nat and I had picked out dresses the week before, and I was completely IN LOVE with mine.

 

The dress was to my knees, and turquoise blue. A thick, dark blue waistband ran around, well, my waist. It was strapless, and, from waistband down, pleated. I zipped it up in front of my mirror, satisfied. I used my curling iron to curl my hair. I got the curling iron as a present for my fifteenth birthday. We get one present every other year. Nat got a straightening iron, so when I need my hair straightened, I use it, and vise-versa.

 

Nat and I met in the hallway outside of our rooms.

 

“You look great!” she grinned, her eyes darting from my hanging earrings to my high-heeled shoes, which was really not that high, only 1 inch. She wore a pink dress, the same length as mine, and had spaghetti straps. Rhinestones decorated the edges of the dress. Her hair was straightened (not surprising), and she too was wearing high heels. She had diamond studs in her ears.

 

Nat and I had been looking forward to getting to dress up like this for a long time. We aren’t usually (never) allowed to wear high-heels, or earrings, apart from the gold spheres that every girl receives on their seventh birthday. We dress simply, an outfit theme chosen at the beginning of each year, from when we are 10 until 16, when you are in your permanent quadrant. Honestly, I kind of like not having to pick my own outfit. When you wear the same type of thing every day, it doesn’t take long to get dressed, which is probably why they made this rule. I have always chosen the “Casual” theme, which is jeans, t-shirts, and sneakers. Nat chose that for 10, 11, and 12, but then she decided that she liked being “pretty,” and for 13, chose the “Preppy” theme. That’s dresses and flats, and stuff like that. She’s more used to wearing fancy clothes than I am. She must feel normal for her to wear these clothes. I like it, but it’s different. Really different.

 

We linked arms and walked down the hallway. Mom smiled widely at us, and gestured for us to go outside.

 

“Dad will be ready in a minute! Wait outside for us!” Mom rushed back into the house.

 

“So. Are you ready?” Nat looked at me.

 

“I guess. Are you?” I looked down at the grassy area in front of our house.

 

“No. I want to stay with you, and Mom, and Dad. Why do we have to be separated?” she sounded like she was choking back tears.

 

“I don’t know, but it’s the way of life here. We just, just have to do it,” I held back tears as well, my voice breaking.

 

Nat hugged me, and we cried into each others shoulders. Suddenly, the front door banged open, Dad hurrying out.

 

“Come on, girls! Time to – are you two okay?” He frowned, and glanced back and forth between us. We carefully wiped tears from our eyes, and nod. Mom walks out, and ushers us into the car. As we drive to the mixed quadrant, I see Dad whispering to Mom, no doubt about the hugging/crying scene. Our family has always been against showing how you feel, but I don’t exactly agree with that, and I don’t think Nat does either.

 

We arrive at the main Meeting Place, the car swerving into the parking lot.

 

“We’ll let you two out here, and we’ll find a parking spot. We’ve reserved seats, so you can meet us there! See you soon, girls!” Mom kisses us each on the cheek, a meaningful but somewhat reluctant gesture. Nat and I get out of the car, and enter the Meeting Place.

 

When we pushed open the glass French doors and walked into the huge room, I felt like everyone was staring at me. Was the strapless dress a bad idea? Should I have chosen something that covered my shoulders? Were people surprised to see me in this? Did I look bad? God, how embarrassing.

 

We found our seats, and sat down. I felt a tap on my bare shoulder, and turned around to see Linzi grinning at me.

 

“Linzi! Hi!” I embrace her over the seats.

 

“Hey, Apryl! Is this your sister?” She holds out her hand to Nat.

 

“Yeah. Nat, this is my friend, Linzi, and Linzi this is my twin sister, Nat!” They shook.

 

“So, what blood type are you?” Linzi asked. “I’m O positive!”

 

“O negative!”

 

A little girl walked up behind Linzi and said, “Linz, Mommy wants you at our seats. She wants to tell you something.”

 

“Sorry, guys! I’ve got to go! Mother calls.” She ran away, chasing the little girl, who looked to be her sister. A second later, Mom and Dad appeared behind us.

 

“Well, Nat and Apryl, we want to tell you that we love you very much, and even though you must switch quadrants, you will always, ALWAYS, be our baby girls. We love you.” Mom and Dad hugged us in turn. Nat and I held Moms’ hands, and reminisced about the 15 years that we spent together. Suddenly, Metropolis Superior’s voice blasted over the speakers.

 

“All 15-year-olds, please report to the stage. Mr. Irwin, Mr. Santos, and Mrs. Lilac will be organizing you for the switch.”

 

Nat and I jumped to our feet, and rushed down the aisle. I could hear Linzi’s bulky heels clumping behind us. I could sense Isaac’s eyes resting on my bare shoulders. I knew what the three 10 year olds were talking about in the front row of the Meeting Place. Everything was in perfect focus. I wasn’t sad, or scared. I wasn’t angry at my parents for not telling us that Nat and I would be separated. I was emotionless, blocking everything out, so that I could switch in peace.

 

Mr. Irwin placed me in between Nat and Kai Bayan. Jake was directly behind me, in a sports coat and nice pants. He leaned over my shoulder and said,

 

“Apryl, right?”

 

“Yes. And you’re Jake, Linzi’s boyfriend,” I smiled. Jake grimaced.

 

“Yep. That’s my title, I guess.” I laughed, nervously. Didn’t he like Linzi?

 

“So, your parents live in the O quadrant, right? My parents live in the A quadrant.”

 

He smiled sadly at me. “Well, they’ll hardly be our parents anymore, you know? I mean, we’ll be living separately, and since my parents are O negative, we’ll NEVER see each other,” he said, his voice a mixture of sad, and bit excited (but why? Nothing good can come from leaving our parents).

 

“What do you mean? In the A quadrant, we’re not separated by positive and negative.”

 

“You mean, they’re not separated by positive and negative. You’re going to be in the O quadrant, positive subdivision in a few minutes!” he corrected, grinning. At that same moment, Metropolis Superior stepped onto the stage, and called for attention.

 

“Today, we are letting go of our children. They will be citizens of Ellipsis Yonder Metropolis as of today. Obviously not productive citizens, at least until they get their jobs.” At this, the audience chuckled politely. “So, let us proceed with the ceremony. First up is Keala Aarons.” I watched intently as the tall girl stood next to Metropolis Superior, smiling. She seemed confident, and definitely not scared. The screen behind the mass of 15-year-olds lit up, and Keala Aaron’s blood information appeared on the screen. She was AB positive. Also, her job was indicated (she was to be Instructor of eight-year-olds). The people applauded her, and she left the Meeting Place. Hmm. Why was she leaving? I wondered where she went.

 

Many people went up to the front of the stage before me. Soon, I heard a name that caught my attention.

 

“Apryl Barnes? Are you there?” People in the audience were craning their necks to look for this “Apryl Barnes.” I must have been daydreaming, and I missed my name! Oh no! I half ran onto stage, making sure my dress stayed up.

 

“Thank goodness. I’m glad you were here! We wouldn’t want to mess up the system, would we?” Metropolis Superior smiled kindly at me, laughing, her blonde bun bobbing up and down. I looked back at her, shyly, a faint smile on my face, my cheeks a rosy red, from embarrassment.

 

A second later, the screen flashed, and my name appeared:

 

Apryl Barnes

Blood Type: O positive

Job Assignment: Diplomat

 

I got the job I wanted! Yay! The audience applauded me, and I saw Mom and Dad grinning at me. I walked offstage, suddenly feeling confident about my dress, and ignoring the fact that I had missed my name being called. I turned around before leaving the Meeting Place, and glanced at Nat. She was running up to Metropolis Superior. I wanted to watch her, so I stayed in the room as she received her job assignment. She got Psychoanalyst, just like Mom! She grinned and ran over to where I was, near the door.

 

“Congratulations! You got the job you wanted!” She hugged me tightly.

 

“You too! You and Mom will be working together! Or at least in the same building.” I hugged her back. This might be the last time we interact with each other as siblings, so we had better make it count.

 

“I’ll miss you.” I said, opening the door. We start to climb the sturdy, wooden staircase, our arms linked. She nodded. We got to the top, and Nat opened it for us.

 

“This might just be where we get separated,” she lets go of my arm, frowning. The room is long, and has seats like the ones in the Meeting Place. There is a window in front of the room. I peered through, and I had a perfect view of the stage. I saw that the room was divided up into eight sections, one for each blood type. Large green signs indicated the groups. Nat ran to meet with one of her friends in the O negative section, while I went to O positive, and joined the three other people there, who I didn’t know. I sat alone, watching for Linzi or Jake to Isaac to go onto stage.

 

First, Isaac bounded up to the platform, joining Metropolis Superior. He was A negative, and he will be Engineer. A minute later he appeared in the room, and I waved at him. He waved back, grinned, and mouthed the words, Good luck! I’ll miss you. I nodded back to him, and he sat down in his respective section.

 

When Jake went up, he cheered as his name appeared on the screen, and ran out of the Meeting Place amid clapping and whooping. His job was Physical Trainor/Novitiate Trainor. He entered the room, and ran to sit next to me.

 

“Congrats! You happy with your job?” He slid into the seat next to me.

 

“Yeah, really happy. How about you? Satisfied?” I smiled at him, with butterflies in my stomach.

 

“Oh, definitely. I’m more excited about training the novitiates than being a physical trainer, though.” He laughs, and I join him. We exchanged friendly conversation until we heard Linzi’s name over the speakers.

 

Linzi sauntered over to Metropolis Superior. Her tight black dress shimmered in the spotlight, because of the sequins. She had chunky black heels on, and a golden necklace. Her hair was in a messy bun on top of her head.

 

“Wow, she looks really pretty!” I exclaimed, nudging Jake.

 

“Yeah, she does. You do too,” he said, taking my hand a squeezing it. I quickly pulled my hand away. No matter how much I liked him, I couldn’t betray Linzi. And anyway, didn’t he like her? I mean, they were dating. And if he liked me, what did he see in me?

 

I blushed anyway. Even if I couldn’t like him, it felt good. Someone thinking I was pretty, I mean. Not the hand holding.

 

Nothing I Could Do

Lying here, sick in my stupid, old, busted up bed. It sucks so much. Dying and knowing it, that is. If I am going to die soon, I want it to be here. In the safety of my own home. My mother will most likely try to get me up and to school. She doesn’t know about my sickness. I would never have the nerve to worry her. She is the sweetest person you could ever know. She gives our leftover food to the poor and the homeless; she always gives up her seat on the bus. She is always kind and so selfless. I would never try to upset her, she doesn’t deserve that. It was hard enough when Dad walked out on us. I am supposed to go to school. I haven’t gone for a while though. I stopped the day I learned about my sickness. I got up every morning to go, then walked past it. I don’t want Mother to be suspicious of me. I missed Carly, though. She was my best friend. She would have been the first person I told if I had told someone. It was too risky though. I just told her I was on a long trip. I am scared that Mother would come in any minute now. I should try to get up. UGH! It’s too hard.

“George, I’m coming in, ok?” Oh no, I think. Just act really tired, and pretend to be ok, I tell myself. She opens the door and looks in.

“George it’s time to get up, are you ok?”

“Yes Mom, I’m just …” I can’t lie anymore. “Mom, I … I’m not ok. I’m sick.”

“Oh you poor thing. Do you have a fever? Do you need medicine?” She rushes toward my bed, her arms stretched out towards me. She tries to kiss my forehead.

“No, mom. It’s not like that.” I push her away. “I have a sickness. In my stomach.” I showed her the spot where the infirmitatem is. It was a bigish brown spot on my stomach.

“It hurts,” I say. She falls to the ground. I panic. What do I do? Should I help her up? Should I call someone. Did she faint? Is she ok?

“Mom! MOM?! Are you ok?!” I run, or more like hobble, to the phone. I dial in the number: 911. I don’t press call. Why? Why don’t I press call? I delete the numbers. (646) 534-7925, call. I press call. I wait. I wait more. I begin to become impatient. Just then a voice comes from the end of the other line.

“Hello? Mary? Is that you is everything Ok? Why are you calling me?” He sounds angry.

“Uh, um, no it’s me. Um uh, I think Mom fainted, or had a heart attack. What do I do?!” I start to cry. Why am I allowing myself to cry? Why would I do such a stupid thing? Now Dad will know how serious it really is.

“What?! Did you call 911 yet?”

“Uh, no. I called you.” I say. A pang of guilt hits me. Maybe I should have called 911.

“Ugh, just, call 911, Ok? It will be Ok.”

“Ok, bye.” I hang up and press my forehead against the wall. I bang it five times. I put the phone back up to my ear and dial the numbers 9-1-1.

“Uh, hello? Police, Firemen, or ambulance? What can I help you with?”

“My, um, mother had a heart attack.” I give them my address and hung up. For the first time in seven years I cry twice in a day. I cry until the ambulance arrives. And then it is dark. All … dark.

Next thing I know I am lying in a large bed, in a large wooden-floored room. I sit up, but quickly realized that was a bad idea. My small spot of infirmitatem has grown to a huge lump. I panic again. I don’t where I am, or how long I was asleep for.

“Hello?” A faintly familiar voice calls through the door. A man walks in. My dad. He came back. Am I happy he is here or angry that he left?

“Hi,” I say weakly. He obviously saw the spot.

“Let’s get you to the hospital.”

“Where is mom?” I have so many questions for him, all rushing through my mind.

Where is mom?!” I raise my voice and I need to know. I wouldn’t leave without my answe- OW! It is so painful.

“She is… gone.” He sounds disappointed. Then I feel myself just slip away. Gone. Forever.

Journey of A Worm

A few years ago, some worms fell from the sky in Norway. This is the story of how:

The worms of northern Norway were sick of eating dirt and living in dirt. It was sort of like eating their home. So they decided something: To live in people’s homes and instead of eating dirt they would eat gummy worms!

But the worms had one problem: How would they get to the town of Brekstad?!  It was a town that had a gummy worm factory.

Steve was the name of one of the worms. He had the answer to how they would get to Brekstad. But he had one problem: This plan would take way too long to get a driver’s pass (his plan is pretty simple):

“Let’s buy a punch buggy!”

All of the other worms were like, “What?” so they went with another worm’s plan. His name was JEFF!?!?! (yes including the (?) and (!) marks). JEFF!?!?! here wasn’t that smart, so he said, “Let’s go slide over the rainbow!!”

The faces of all the other worms were like,“What?” again. But another worm called Jhonny came up with another plan. This plan was to dig a tunnel to a field where there was a tornado going on in another part of Norway, in order for them to get blown to the town. This plan was all they had left, so the worms agreed.

It took a few years for the worms to tunnel to the field (really only a few hours because their destination was not actually that far), so when they got to the tornado near the town, the wind was so strong they all hung onto leaves but were blown away towards the town.

It felt like flying. It was like being sucked into a vacuum cleaner and being swirled around and around so much that they felt like they were going to hurl.

“Maybe this is how birds feel!” screamed Steve. All the worms were being stretched out because of the wind.

Jhonny wiggled around. “I’m doing yoga!”

After an hour, they finally fell. The leaves they were hanging onto broke their fall. When they made it to the ground they rejoiced.

“We made it!,” yelled JEFF!?!?!, and they all celebrated!

“So….now what?” asked one of the other worms.

JEFF!?!?! answered with, “I have no idea!”

Then they saw a sign that said: “Welcome to the Town of Bůd.” Underneath that on the sign it said: “The Town of the Gummy Worm Strike.”

Jhonny read the sign and said, “Are you kidding me?”

Not With A Wimper But A Bang

 CHAPTER 1  

“This is the way the world ends. Not with a bang but a whimper.” – T.S. Elliot.

I am Francis W. Smith, and I believe quite the opposite. I believe the world ends with a big loud bang. I think that the world will have a Grand Finale. I just feel it in my bones.

When people first meet me, they think I’m a boy. Mostly because my name is Francis. But I also wear my hair up in a bun, and put a cap over it. That gives me an advantage. People in my town don’t expect boys to follow the rules as much as girls do. Some of the neighbors think I’m a boy. So whenever I break a rule or two, they aren’t as harsh on me. James, Martin, and Steve are my best friends. Those aren’t really our real names. I’m Francesca, James is Jamie, Martin is Maria, but Steve is just Steve, because he’s a boy.

Steve believes that aliens are going to attack. I don’t believe in aliens. I wonder if there are really monsters lurking above the dark black skies, watching our every move. It creeps me out that there might be aliens up in the big swirl of darkness of outer space, sort of like that fat man in the red suit they call Santa. My parents do not let me believe in Santa.

Ding Dong.

I hear my mother yelling at my father downstairs.”Get the door Harry! I still have my curlers in!”

“You get it! I’m on the phone with the accountant!”

I stumble down the rickety stairs, and open the door. Steve stands there thin as a pencil, mumbling theories about aliens. He looks up, his glasses falling down his nose, finally realizing that I had opened the door.

“OHMYGOSHALIENSAREGOINGTOATTACKFRANCISYOUGOTTABELIEVEMEIHAVE

PROOF!!!” Steve says.

” Wow dude, calm down, I can’t understand you.”

“Aliens are going to attack, Francis you gotta believe me. I have proof.”

 

Steve brings me to his house, an old but quaint building. He digs through his baggy jeans, looking for the keys. As he walks in, his dog, Mop, jumps up and licks his knees. Mop sniffs me, and slowly walks away, as if to say I smelled horrid.

Steve says, “Come on, I’ll show you! You have to be quiet, we can’t wake up my little sister.” He takes me up to his room. Steve says, “Sorry it might be a little messy.”

I look around and I think to myself, it looks like a tornado came by and threw up another tornado. I have been to Steve’s house before, but it’s never been messy at all. We shuffled across the room, through the piles and piles of books and papers as tall as skyscrapers. They were mostly books about alien abduction, but the rest were for school. He took out his telescope, and pointed it up to the sky. I looked in the telescope, and he said, “Do you see it?”

“No. I don’t see anything.”

He looks in and says, “Oh, maybe it moved.” He looked around through the telescope, and gives me a sad look. “Maybe you should go. It’s almost dinnertime.”

He shut the door, and I hear him moan. I can hear him, “My dream. Gone. Never. Going. To. Become. The. First. Person. To. See. Aliens.” I leave his house, trudging my way to my house.

 

CHAPTER 2

My father opens the door, with his long hair tied up in a ponytail. I know it’s kind of weird, but my dad’s going through this hippie phase, where he does everything hippie style; tie dye, bandanas, skinny jeans, the whole package. He’s kind of upset that his work has a dress code. They have to wear a suit, but unfortunately, he couldn’t find a store that sold tie dye colored suits. He also went through a “Star Wars” phase. Every day when he drove me to school, he would wear a Jedi robe. My teacher told him no “pajamas”, and he went bananas.

Don’t even make me bring up what he named our dog. Chewbacca.

He says, “How are ya doin’ kiddo?”, in his fake southern accent. Just hearing my goofy dad made me feel better.

“Good, kind of good, not so good, bad. I don’t know.”

“What’s wrong?” He says. “Steve saw aliens, then he showed them to me and they weren’t there, so he’s embarrassed and sad.” He looked at me, puzzled. I just told him it wasn’t a big deal, and flopped down on my bed.

I pick up the phone and call Maria, and she answers, “The Caldwell residence, Maria speaking.”

“Hi, it’s Francis. Want to hang out?”

“Sure. Meet you at 3:00. At the movies?”

“Sure. See you.”

“Bye.” I hang up, take off my jeans, and change into my sweatpants. I tell my dad I’m leaving, then shut the door. I walk up to the curb and wait for the cars to pass by.

 

CHAPTER 3

I live in Rhode Island, the smallest state. It’s pretty awesome living here. I go to Moses Brown, the best school in the world. The campus is awesome. It has a music room, a theater building, a woodshop building, and a fencing building. Of course, there is the school building too. School starts in 3 days, and I want to run for student council, but I don’t stand a chance against Carly Westminster, the “popular” kid in school.

I cross the street, and see Carly staring at me. She says, “Hey girlfriend!” and gives me a phony smile. I roll my eyes and walk away.

I walk into the movie theaters, and I hear a shooting noise. The sound of a gun. I rush towards the concession stand, but there is nobody there. The whole movie theater is empty, completely empty. But where did the bang come from? Not with a whimper but a bang. THE WORLD IS GOING TO END.

As I walk towards the other theater rooms, I hear screams. Everything is going in slow motion. I am not scared, but something big is going to happen. The doors of the theater room open, and a man in a green suit looks down at me. I feel dizzy, and my body is flopping around like a piece of cooked spaghetti. The weird man in the green suit twitches his hand back and forth. Back and forth. Back and forth. Back and forth. He is controlling my body. As he moves his hand, he forces my limp body into the theater. I see Maria screaming, but I can’t hear her.

BANG.

 

CHAPTER 4

Lights flash brightly on my stone cold face, as a woman wheels me through a hospital. The ground is slightly shaking. Why is the hospital moving? I tug at the tubes in my arms, and I know I couldn’t have been shot. I didn’t even feel anything! No blood, no scars, I don’t see anything wrong with me. Except the fact that I believe in aliens.

I look through a window that I don’t think was there before. And guess what! There’s earth! Wait, what? How can that be earth! I’m in a hospital on Earth! If I can see earth, then I’m not on earth… Holy crap! I’ve been abducted by aliens! Ok, don’t panic. I’m just going to ask the nurse how I can get out of here. But, she’s probably an alien! I try to get off the stretcher, but my legs are tied to it. I lie back down, and think for a minute. My last option is to actually talk to this woman.

“Excuse me, miss, will you tell me how to get out of -”

“Reklg mekl gooihj,” the woman says.

“Excuse me!”

She finally turns around and looks at me. I gasp. It’s Carly Westminster.

I always knew something was wrong with her, her long white hair, big red eyes, like mine. Out of all the crazy things in my life, Carly Westminster has to be an alien! I knew she hated me, and now she kidnapped me in her stupid alien spaceship thingy and now I’m just talking really fast for no reason!! Ok, let me get back to reality. This is probably all just a dream, and I’m going to wake up. Ow! Pinching does not help! I guess this is really my crazy life.

Carly stares at me creepily, then she says the same thing.”Reklgmeklgjiooihj,djfyyzako!”

Then she makes this face, like she is constipated. Then she grabs her ear, and pulls off her face.

 

CHAPTER 5

What did she just do?! She pulled off her face from left to right. And under that was an angry crimson face, with only half of a mouth, and a big fat nose. The only thing that didn’t change were those bright red eyes. This is not how I pictured being abducted by aliens. I thought they would be cute little green things, with big black bug eyes, saying “We come in peace” or “ET phone home.”

Carly stares at me and says, “Francesca W. Smith. You are so lucky to be related to the Carly Westminster.” She twirls her hair and looks at me.

“W-what do you mean?” I stammer.

“You were left at your parents’ doorstep, when you were two. Our parents were poor. Very poor. And then grandfather started up the electrical business, and we got rich, just like that. We would have taken you back, but we couldn’t just tell the people to give us their baby. Well, I always hated you because you were normal, and I had to be the alien. Aliens abducted us, and gave us  powers. But now these powers have an advantage.”

“What does that mean?” I say nervously.

“Soon you will be like me, an outcast.”

“What are you doing with that needle?” I say.

“Once I give you this shot, you won’t remember anything, and you won’t be able to tell anyone what happened here.” I feel a weird pain in my wrists, and a green light starts coming out of my fingers. Her stunned face gleams in the light. All of a sudden, the light wraps around Carly’s wrist and she unconsciously stabs herself with the needle.

I look at her, lying on the floor, and suddenly something occurs to me. How am I going to get back down to Earth?

 

CHAPTER 6

I instantly look for an opening in the wall but there is nothing. Wait, there’s a small latch on the floor! Ughhh! I can’t open it. How am I going to get out? An enormous man with no eyes walks towards me, and I think, “Maybe my weirdness will come in handy.” The man sticks his hand in his pocket and brings out a magnifying glass.

“I think I need glasses.” He says. I think he needs eyes. I walk past him quickly before he “sees” me.

Another alien turns the corner and drops a wrench. He eyes it, then eyes me. Then he keeps walking. Why had he not picked up the wrench? A small smirk starts to form on my face. I can use the wrench to escape.

I glance back at the ground. What? My eyes are messing with me. Nope, my eyes aren’t messing with me.The wrench got up and walked up to the latch in the floor.  It’s opening!

 

CHAPTER 7

I didn’t know life could be so happy, breath taking, and sad at the same time. Steve was right. The world is ending, and the aliens are taking over. I have always dreamed about this moment. Except I thought it would be different. Falling to your death isn’t really in slow motion, it’s all at once.

When you die, it’s not a happy farm in New Jersey. It’s nothing. Nothing at all, just silence and a bunch of people in white clothes and sunglasses. It’s also very dark.  Everybody is marching in a straight, boring line to a small elevator. Maybe we were wrong. It’s a elevator to heaven, not a staircase. I look to my left, then to my right. A couple of old women take off their sunglasses All of a sudden, I hear a noise. “Francis! Francis! Wake up! Please Francis! Don’t be dead!” It’s Steve. Am I still alive?

I feel Steve patting my back, saying, “Please wake up!”  Why aren’t I waking up? I have a theory: maybe I am DEAD. Ok never mind I’m not dead because I AM BREATHING.

Providence Place Mall. I am here. Here, as in alive. My eyes slowly open, not fully adjusted to the light. Steve looks down at me stunned at what he just saw. It’s not every day you see your best friend falling to their death. Except I’m not dead. He suddenly looks up at the sky, and down back at me.

“What happened?” he says.

“Just my everyday routine, you know, fighting aliens, falling from the sky.” I reply.

“No, seriously. Are you okay?”

“I’m serious. That’s what really happened.”

He looks at me, obviously not satisfied.

“Steve, you know how you were so confident that aliens were real?”

“No,” he says angrily.

“Well, in a not so distant past you were. And they are real. I swear.”

“On your life?”

“Yes.”

“Still. I don’t believe you. My dreams were crushed, and I don’t believe in aliens anymore. I’m over it.”

He trudges away, and doesn’t look back. I whisper back to him, “I know you still believe.”

Suddenly the ground shakes, and the alien ship comes crashing down. There is no one there. Where has everybody gone? It’s an aliena incursio. An alien invasion.

Steve looks back at me, surprised. Then he says, “I believe you.”

I start to say “watch out!” but it’s too late.

 

CHAPTER 8

He’s been dead for two days now

…  …  …  …

 

He’s been dead for three days now.  It doesn’t feel real. I feel dead. It’s excruciating.

CHAPTER 9

I have to tell the world. I can’t keep living with no one else knowing what had just happened. I am the only one who knows, and the only person who will know. But I have to find them. I have to find the aliens.

I say the words Carly said on the ship: ‘Reklg Mekl Giooihj,” and a small alien appears, about the size of my arm. This one isn’t too frightening, and it looks like ET.

ZZZP. ZZZP. My lamp sparks and drops to the floor. I spoke too soon. It shoots lasers from its eyes. He walks up to me and says, ”Greetings. Sorry about the lamp. I’ll fix it. Now let’s get to business. I have a compromise. You never tell a soul about the invasion, and I will give you the boy.”

“But Steve is dead!”

“I can fix that too.” he says.

“Okay.”

The second he leaves, someone knocks on the door.

“Ugh, who is it?”I say.

“It’s Steve!”

“You’re alive!”

“Uh…yeah, why wouldn’t I be?”

They erased his memory. I should have known. I break down in tears. Nooooo! Why?

I wish I hadn’t made the deal. I wish I hadn’t.

 

CHAPTER 10

We walk to school, me pretending that it is a normal day, and Steve not knowing. Suddenly I stop and say two words: I believe. He looks back, and his eyes change color.

“I believe. I remember.” he says.

He stares at me, and we walk to school. It’s better than before, but life will never be normal again.

Oommbatata

Oommbatata the tortoise was a crazy testudine pupa. (A dollar tortoise’s scientific name.) He was not the kind of “friendly” tortoise. He only desired to create a new Turtletopia. (Turtletopia was the land of turtles and tortoises but was only a small island). His previous 43,535 attempts to take over the earth had failed because he had an army of only 62 testudine pupas, no tortoise tanks, lack of comedians, and blah blah blah!!! Oommbatata one day got picked up by somebody and then he was reminded of the injustice of animals.

“I’m gonna call in a tortoise army to show them who’s boss!” He climbed to the top of the random person’s finger and yelled in Tortoineise, “All you miniature testudine pupas better come here!”

Then the guy went, “What the heck is that tiny turtle saying?!”

Then, of course, Oommbatata yelled, “All of you testudine pupa, get that overestimated twerp!”

So, duh, he jumped off the person’s hand and landed with an oof. He chased Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me all over the place. But three hours later he hadn’t gotten close and Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me didn’t seem to care about Oommbatata. So, Oommbatata called the armed forces of Turtletopia to go faster. But since turtles are slow, they couldn’t catch up even then. He then had the urgent need to fart. He let it out into the skies above and landed on Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me’s head. He kung-fued him by pooping on Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me with a nasty blarp. The tortoise army mindlessly followed Oommbatata over Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me and that was that. Then they took over Carl’s House of Beans and ate beans and flew into the Tower of Pisa. It only took about five seconds for the world to rename it the “Leaning Tower of Pisa” (It was in the New York Times, Issue 26 of 2005).

He yelled, “You’re ours, Italy!”

Then the cops came to get him but that smelly little posterior knocked ‘em out. Oommbatata then realized the Army was on their way, so they farted out of Italy. He waited three minutes and said, “You’re 180.32 seconds late! Now get movin’!!”

Meanwhile, the enemies, the birds, were migrating to the U.K. So Oommbatata and his tortoise army decided on staying in an abandoned warehouse and hatched a plan for the nighttime assault, but only after the spies discovered where they were.

“At 12 we strike the nest. We will gas our way up there. Then we will fart our poo cannons up and we will fire!”

They snuck to the big tree. By big, I mean 68 feet tall. They used their turtlenoculars to spot them. Oommbatata yelled, “What’s the status?”

“We’re positive the mentally retarded flock’s asleep!”

And so he climbed (with the assistance of gas) up the tree. The tortoises farted all the way up because of their big load, which meant high speeds (remember the poo cannons?) Then they shouted, “Hey, who’s slow now?”

“Shut up!” yelled Oommbatata.

Then the tortoises lay on their bellies. The midgets climbed on. General Ahookasma yelled, “Open fire!”

And a stinky scent filled the high-perched habitat. The birds woke up in a dark shade of brown. They all fainted from the stench and later shoved off from the nest. At 7 a.m. the farmer woke up in shock that stinky birds were lying unconscious on his fields. The flag of Turtletopia was placed on the now-useless birdie-perch. Then in the middle of the gas party, Oommbatata commanded them to sail the H.M.S. Feather back to America.

They turned the Statue of Liberty green (putting a shell on would be too hard work). They sailed to Florida, where they recruited crocodiles (the people wondered why they were gone). Then he created and signed the Declaration of Preparation for Invasion (declaring invasion) on Washington. But, since he had bad geography, he attacked Washington state instead. They farted their way across the diameter of the state. They then found that the birds had claimed this land. Oommbatata had a plan.

“We will strike at 1:00 sharp. We swing up those vines, get in our shells, and crash on those surprised faces!“

These turtles were tired, but they managed to hit their marks. “Again?! Where do we go now with these testudine pupa messing around?!”

Then Oommbatata shouted, “Hey! Nobody calls us by our scientific, biologically-named names!”

They jumped around like monkeys and farted ‘til their nest burned to gas. The crocodiles jumped up, rolled up into a ball in midair and made big holes in the floors. Then they farted all the way to Canada, where they landed on a now-squashed-birdie-base. Rokanohi said, “Is this the congo?”

“No, you idiot, this is Canada!” said Oommbatata.

They ventured into nowhere and found a jungle. They ventured all they way to the Amazon and again, Rokanohi asked if it was the Congo, and again, “No, you idiot, this is the Amazon!”

Then Ahookasma said, “We’re actually probably going to die because we’re in the Amazon.”

“What is going on with this planet??!!” yelled You-Know-Who.

Then they met a tribe of testudines. Well, at least not testudine pupas. Then they declared war because they hated the differences of their shells.

“Kjgkuesrguiesygrikuserhgkuserghkieusghkrsut” is what the conflict of the first Amazonian war sounded like. This is how it ended. Like World War II, except it was a big bunch of melons times two. They had drops of turtlepowder in them which hurt more than the insides of watermelon (turtlepowder was just cracked bits of shell). They placed a flag smack in the middle of the Amazon. In Latin it said: Cave turtures! (ich by the way meant beware the turtles). Then they had to go back to Washington state (by the way, from Washington to Canada to Amazon to Washington took 12 weeks) to get the H.M.S. Tortoise running. Their next destination: Moscow, Russia.

“We sail starting 12 noon in 30 seconds. Then we will travel to the border pretending we are a little cruise liner. After we land we sneak out and take over the world!” Oommbatata announced.

“But our legs are sore!” (They didn’t know they were gonna fart there.)

“Guess what?”

“What?”

“Nobody cares! Now shut up and let’s get going!”

They launched from the docks after 23 seconds and then they farted off the ship (walking gets old! farting never does!). Then they started to stench up St. Peter’s square. It reeked so horribly it woke everyone up. The Fire Department had to wear gas masks to put out the smell. Mission accomplished! Oommbatata had a deadly idea. He found a flight that would go around the world. His maximum fart diameter was 64,532 miles. Combined with his testudine army he could cover the world with natural greenhouse gases. They snuck into the baggage section and got into the luggage chamber. Then they farted a tiny hole (big enough for 32,445 midget tortoise butts to pass gas) and then opened fire on the world! The world stunk of testudine gassing for ten devastating days. (Nobody remembered those days because no one was conscious.) Oommbatata’s plan had worked! (Only for a few days.)

That is how they did it. They spent five days sleeping! Then they kept spraying the world for a year. So 2005 was lived twice. The actual one was the first but no one knew. They had only seen the second and not original 2005. And to make sure they didn’t confuse the people, they set a one-year timer so when the year ended they spent another day cleaning up the horrifying smell so it would feel like the people had fallen asleep and woken up the next day. Oommbatata still farted around in Turtletopia (the island). The reason it hasn’t been discovered is because it reeks too badly to smell. Every person who tries to explore is knocked out. Every person who was never seen again probably was knocked out for a century from turtle speed. Even the U.S. deployed Black Ops!!! Along with Italy’s army (they were knocked out though). They left a Blackhawk heli along with an A129 Mangusta.

“You thinking what I am?!”

They flew it over Venezuela and passed some speed over the tiny place. (The reason they speeded over Venezuela is because they spun the globe and picked a random place.) When they flew back they also gassed on Mr. You’re-Dead-To-Me II and III (don’t ask me who they are). The U.S. declared war that you have never heard of. It was secret!!! It was known as the War of the Midget Enemy. The U.S. had tanks, and so did Turtletopia. The U.S. had planes, and Turtletopia had a fleet of modified 747s. The U.S. had ships and subs, and Turtletopia had sea turtle subs with floatie turtles. The U.S. had cannons and guns, while turtletopia had fart and poo blasters. The reason the war was widely unknown was because the U.S. was too embarrassed to talk about it. The turtles won by nearly a fart. The battle was only one day because the turtles dropped paratroopers and they farted on America and they got knocked out again to miss another day of life. So America’s pretty much behind a day and they gave up. The new Turtletopia is now Earth! (That is why a lot of turtles live on Earth) and why forget the facts:

  • All species of sea turtles are endangered because they lost their floaties and are not used to swimming.
  • You never see flying turtles because they look like airliners (BECAUSE THEY ARE).
  • All turtles now have the special ability to fart @ will.

Anyways, just Wiki it.

Continued, every sort of life form except turtles has missed 56,778,786,565,547,476 hours, 15 minutes, 35.687 seconds of time while the turtles had farted them out. To this day they still shell the birds and blast them with the helicopters they got for free. WW3 had begun against the birds because they owned Brazil and Turtletopia island was in the Bermudas. They weren’t far away and when the birds flew to America, tortoise recon got them in sight and they deployed the TTAF (Turtletopia air force) in a ≜ formation from the Bermudas to America. Then they split up and dropped the parapoopers onto the birdie-base. King of Birdie-Poo, the eagle, sent birds that were shot down by the 747 #56 in the first wave. Then the turtles fought back by dropping empty explosive tortoise shells on the bird bath.

“No! Our bath! You leave us no choice! Send the condors!”

A fleet of condors in a V formation flew into battle which were kicked out by the tickle-o turtles. Tickled to death, they were, and the 7.5 kilos were just too much to handle on the four gram tinies. The helicopters flew over, shooting feathers off the now-naked, featherless, beaked freaks. Here comes the twist. The Black Ops comes in and shoots everyone down. Well, at least for the turtles, because the sanctuary was a mountain of rubble. They took over an airport and the planes and helicopters landed at the airport to refuel. One hour later, they took off again after robbing the restaurants. They landed back at the island of Turtletopia and played fart volleyball. The End. Or do you really think so? Well, the turtles outsmarted him and tricked him into ramming into a wall. Mission accomplished!

The Never-Ending Story (of the Purple Doughnut)

 

Once upon a time, a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly a giant hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.

“Please, don’t eat me,” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“How will you stop me?” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“If I tell you a story, will you let me go?”

“If you don’t, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“Once upon a time, a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly, a large hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.”

“’Please, don’t eat me,’” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“‘How will you stop me?’” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“‘If I tell you a story, will you let me go?’”

“‘If you don’t, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.’”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“’Once upon a time a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly, a large hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.'”

“’Please don’t eat me,'” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“‘How will you stop me?’” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“‘If I tell you a story, will you let me go?'”

“‘If you don’t I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, I’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.'”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak.

 

“’Once upon a time a purple doughnut jumped onto the table. Suddenly, a large hand came down from the heavens and seized the doughnut.'”

“’Please don’t eat me,'” said the doughnut, covering its eyes.

“‘How will you stop me?’” said the giant in a gruff, gravelly voice.

“‘If I tell you a story, will you let me go?'”

“‘If you don’t I’ll smash your crust to make my cake, and if you do tell me a story, i’ll smash your crust to make my cake anyway.'”

He’ll kill me if I do, and he’ll kill me if I don’t, the doughnut thought. There’s only one way to get out of this.

The doughnut cleared his throat and began to speak…

Alexander: The Kingdom of Fairies

Prologue

My name is Alexandra Olive Rose, but everyone calls me Alex. I am 8 years old and I live in the country by a huge forest. Most of my time I sit and stare at my bedroom wall and get no dinner. Well, I have stared at that wall so many times I think it moved! You know why I stare at that wall almost every day of my life? Because I get in trouble from wanting to explore, like the time I went past the village and into the forest.

But it was only a foot in…

Fine! It wasn’t a foot in, it was my whole body! I know it was wrong but it felt so good to be out of the house! My dad carried me back home and then I got sent to my room, again! With no dinner! No “good night!”

My parents say that creatures live in the forest, dark creatures!

Anyway, I knew that I would not get dinner after I went to the forest, so every day before going to explore I always got a snack and put it under my bed, so that when I got sent to bed I would have something to eat. I ate my snack then started to read. I love books, and my parents wish I read rather than explored. But the thing about books is that I can read about other girls’ lives, just like mine, then see how they resolve it!

Chapter 1

I got up the next morning with the sound of birds chirping. I knew that today was going to be a good day! So, when I think I am going to have a good day I get dressed in my favorite outfit, a sleeveless juniper green colored shirt. Then for my skirt: white with pink polka dots and a pink line across. I went to the bathroom and brushed my thick brunette colored hair. I wanted my hair to grow long, but not too long, just like my mother’s. And to top it off I didn’t wear shoes that day!

I went down stairs and my mother left a note for me next to my breakfast. It said: ¨Don’t go into the forest and finish your breakfast  Love, Mom.¨  I sighed then finished my hot pancakes and all of my orange juice. After that I cut up some fruit so that I could be active because today was going to be the day! The day I left for an adventure! I went back upstairs to my room and wrote a note on my typewriter that said: ¨Dear Mother & Father, You need to let me go and adventure at some point, and again sorry I don’t follow your rules. See you soon, but I don’t know when. -Alex :)¨

Chapter 2

I decided to go without anything to carry so that I could get around quicker. Ok, I was about to do this! I got the door handle and opened the door, and…my mother came in!

“Oh hi honey! Thank you for opening the door for me,” she said.

OMG! I was so frustrated! Now I didn’t have an escape plan! She told me to put on some shoes which I didn’t want to do! She also told me to go and occupy my time, so I did. I ran to the back door to leave and…my dad walked in! And guess what he said?

“Oh hi honey! Thank you for opening the door for me!”

Like, can no one come through the window?! It’s easy, just climb, I do it all the time! After dinner I got tucked into bed. When I saw my mother and my father’s candle go out, I got out of bed and got dressed. I combed my hair so that I would look good running away.

I checked my parents’ room to make sure they were asleep so that I wouldn’t have to open the door and risk one of them coming through it again. I went inside the room and just looked at them. I had to admit it, I was going to miss them. I left the note I wrote on the desk then left. When I stepped outside, I quickly ran to the forest, then found a nice comfy cave to sleep in for that night.

Chapter 3

I woke up with food around me and a deer on top of me. “Is she dead?” asked a voice.

“No, wait, I see that she is waking up¨ another voice said.

I woke up and saw animals around me. It must be some type of dream, I thought, because how did I get here? I was lying cozy on some type of leaves, but none that I had ever seen before. As the deer moved away from on top of me, I sat up then asked “How did I get here?”

“Well we brought you here for Queen Ella and King Elite. Because you are our savior, you were chosen to come here,” the deer said.

Wait, did this deer just talk to me?

“I just understood you…” I said with disbelief.

“She is the one,” said the squirrel.

“But how?” I asked.

“Because we gave you the enchanted forest pendant. It allows you to communicate with us. It is protected by the king and queen and they said if we found you, to give it to you,” a rabbit said.

“How do you know it is me?” I asked.

“We just know,” said a turtle. And then, in a blink of an eye, they were all gone. I decided to go look around. My pillow had been a tree, so I stood up and peeked over it…there was an entire village! It was all made out of trees with tiny little glowing lights. Inside each one, a house. In the middle was a river of sparkly red water. I felt the enchantment in the air. And then I knew where I was…Enchantia.

Chapter 4

I knew about Enchantia from the Fairy Tale books I read when I was younger. I would always pretend I was a princess fairy, the most beautiful in the land! And so I thought today I would meet the lady that I pretended to be for so long! I ran towards the kingdom, then felt a little poke, like a shot at the doctor. I looked down and tiny warriors, the size of your thumb, were shooting spears the size of pinkies at me. They were fairies! But boys!

I knew that Enchantia must have had boys, but I never would have guessed they would also be fairies! I told them that I was a good person, not a bad one! But all I heard from them was “Idontknowwhatyouaresayingbadperson!”

Hey, I understood that…

I could speak fairy!

Just then, a lady riding in a carriage went right past the guards and straight up to my face. The guards bowed to her as she came up to me. She was the most delicate, beautiful, amazing thing I ever saw! I stared at her. She had a golden dress with a beautiful golden leaf crown that circled her head. She glittered, almost as if she were the sun. Then I saw who she was… I took a bow.

Chapter 5

“OMG! OMG! OMG! OMG! You are…” I said not finishing my sentence.

“Queen Ella? Why yes, I am! And you must be Alexandra.”

“Yes, how did you-”

“But everyone calls you Alex. You ran away from home and your parents say that the forest is too dangerous for little girls like you! And animals took you here under my command. You used to play as me when you were little. You were destined to come here, Alex, you were!” She spoke in some sort of British accent.

“How do you know all that stuff about me? And how-I mean, why me?” I said.

“I watch you in my dreams. When that happens I know you are the one! And when you fall asleep I come visit you and tell you all about Enchantia, and that’s why you came here,” she said.

“Wow! Like magic?”I asked.

“No. Like magic!” she told me.

“I know, that is what I said!” I told her.

“No. It’s what I said! Anyway, you are planning on saving us all, right? Because that is what you are here for!”

“Umm…”

“Good! Now follow me and I will show you your room!” she said. I then followed her past a river and into the middle of a tree!

Chapter 6

Outside there were flowers and trees leading into two golden and wooden doors that would open to a red carpet and another pair of doors which lead to a beautiful room! It looked like a doll house, something on display because you couldn’t fit inside…unless you were very small!

“Uh…it’s a very royal room but it’s just too small, I can’t even stick my hand in there!” I said, worried.

“Oh ya I forgot! Silly me!” she said.

“What?” I asked. She took out her wand, it had the same detail as on my necklace, but on top was a perfect, beautiful quartz! She held it in front of me then.

“ENCHANTIA!” she shouted. I felt dizzy, then everything started to get bigger. Then I couldn’t see at all! All I heard was “Oh dear me!”

Then…silence.

Chapter 7

I woke up. Everything was big and I now had a dress in a wavy-sort of style, and at the bottom of this dress there was a circle of leaves. I had a beautiful tree pin in my hair and my hair was curled. I had these beautiful flats that matched my dress and as I turned around…I had wings! They were beautiful and golden with tiny bits of green! My necklace remained, so I knew I could still talk to the animals of Enchantia. I tried flying and on my first try I fell. I tried a second time. I fell, again. But I was not going to give up! I tried one more time…I flew! The Queen came up to me and said, “I see you have gotten the hang of flying!”

“Its awesome! So…now since I am small I can live in that royal room?” I asked her.

“Of course you can!!!” she said.

“Thank You!” I said, then flew off to my room. It was a beautiful room, and everything inside was forest themed! Canopy tree bed and wooden walls with a forest painted on it! It just looked so royal! I landed on top of my huge bed and went right to sleep!

Chapter 8

The next thing I knew I was in the middle of a wedding! There was a monster. I remembered him from the Fairy Tale books I used to read! His name was Fenrir, a dark and scary werewolf. He lived on the cold side of the forest, where everything was covered in ice. He was dark gray with a white belly, and ice stuck to him like honey that never wanted to come off. He had dark blue eyes that would spot you from miles away. He used to be locked up in chains and spikes, but someone had let him free. I woke up in the morning and I realized that it was only a dream. I remembered in the old story that Fenrir was to marry a fairy named Mary that he was obsessed with! She was forced into marriage to unite the two kingdoms or Fenrir would destroy Enchantia! Fenrir was afraid of Enchantia taking over the land. He was evil and did not want goodness to spread to the darkest parts of the forest.

I looked around me and saw that half of my room was torn up, broken! It wasn’t a dream after all! I had to go to the wedding because something must have gone wrong!

But how? I recognized that place but from where? Then it hit me! It was the tree where I woke up at the beginning! I flew over there and, sure enough, there they were! All the fairies were tied up, even the Queen and the King.

“How do like being at my wedding?” asked the Fenrir.

“We hate it and you know it!  The savior will help us! I know she will!” the Queen shouted at the Fenrir.

“So she will?” said the Fenrir. Fenrir was as tall as the statue of liberty!  I snuck up behind him, then I kicked him in the weak spot on his shoulder, and just like in the story, he fell to the floor! It was like a gigantic explosion had hit the entire earth! I was speechless, and before anything could be said, Fenrir got back up. He pushed me down upon the floor and was about to stomp on me with all his might when, all of a sudden, a Force Field surrounded me. I was flying, again! Then I thought happy thoughts as sun/fire balls came out of my hands. I threw them at Fenrir. I knew I had an advantage over him, since Fenrir will die if he is out of the cold for any long amount of time. I threw one last fireball at him and he fell. I went to him and put my head on his chest to see if his heart was still beating, but it wasn’t.

Silence fell upon the room. “You…you…you did it!” said a fairy.

“I told you that she was the one! I told all of you fairies! I haven’t see that power since I ruled the throne! And no one else has it!” the Queen shouted.

“All hail our savior…Princess Alexandra Olive Rose!” said the King.

“Me, Princess?! Me!?” I asked, surprised.

“Yes, but you have to take an oath to say that you would stay here, forever!” said the King.

“I would…” I didn’t finish my sentence, I looked at all the fairies, then looked at my house in the distance. “I used to just be a girl who wanted to explore, and now look at me, about to become a princess? I love you all and I will come back and visit…” I said, still looking back. “But my family is waiting for me at home!” I said.

“Understood.” said Queen Ella. And with a flick of a wand I felt dizzy again. I fell to the ground and the last word I heard was “Goodbye!”

Chapter 9

I woke up in my bed and it felt like nothing had happened! Had it all been a dream? The only thing I could remember was the necklace! I felt around my neck, and there it was! I knew it couldn’t have been a dream because it seemed so real! Then, in the corner of my eye, I saw a light glow in my closet. It was faint but I soon recognized it…

It was Queen Ella! I waved and saw her wave back, then she pointed to my desk. I saw a tiny card that read: “Don’t forget us please! We will all miss you! Keep the necklace but come visit us, ok!” I then looked at Queen Ella as a tear went down her face. I wanted to run and give her a hug but by that time she was already gone. I got out of bed and looked outside, which is when I saw all the fairies of Enchantia holding little lights in the sky! They were all crying tears of joy with a sign that said: PRINCESS ALEXANDRA OLIVE ROSE!

 

Authors Note:

During writing this book I pictured an 8 year old girl that just had a life that all the other girls didn’t.  This is the second book I have done besides DisNerds vr. PokeNerds in school. But I have like 5 other books I put aside to finish this book! I also put an author’s note in the other book as well! Like every professional author, I add the people I thank for inspiring or helping with the book! Ahem, My friends: Gracie, Alex A, Izzy, Sophia, and so many others! Umm…Oh ya! Ahem, My Writopia correctors/teachers: Alex and Emily! Umm… ya, my family and just lets say lots of people!

Beanie Boo Bunch

There was once a dog named Sir Rufferton. He was an arctic dog who lived in Greenland. One day Sir Rufferton was standing as a sentry for his doggie village. A few hours into his shift, two dogs in the dog army came with a cat hostage who was caught snooping around the back side of the village. Sir Rufferton was then assigned to interrogate her. When they reached a private room, he took off her face mask and instantly fell in love with this cat beauty. Her name was Sheila and she fell in love with him back. Despite dog and cat code they got married and had a child who was a dog named Slush.  After he was born, the stern glances and rude gestures turned into riots and angry mobs. For the safety of themselves, and Slush, they decided to give him away to a  summer village, a strange place called California, so maybe he could have a happy life. The next morning, Sir Rufferton set out on his long, hard journey with his baby son Slush.

Once Sir Rufferton arrived he waited until nightfall, then put Slush next to the sweetest looking animal, gave him a kiss on the head, and left. Little did Sir Rufferton know that he had put Slush next to the leader of the summer animals, the meanest and toughest of them all, a colorful hedgehog named Holly. Sir Rufferton had no idea that he’d put his precious son in a long life of pranks, rude names, and so on.

Five years later, Slush was no longer a pup. He was an adult dog. One day he was woken up to a pink lamb named Babs baaing in his face. Slush was very annoyed, and Babs just explained that she was giving him the proper treatment for a dog.

“You don’t help an adult dog,” she explained.

As the day went on, all of the other summer animals finally woke up and gave him the same reply, except in their own little animal language. Slush finally screamed to the rest of them, for the first time in his life.

“I can’t take it anymore!” he screamed, “You call me rude names, you’re always mean to me, whether I was a pup or not. It’s just not fair, what did I ever do to you? I’m leaving this place, never to return. You all are just such meanies, and I can’t take it!”

And with that, Slush grabbed all his things and left his summer village.

Once Slush felt like he was a fair distance from California, he stopped for a moment. He pulled out the one hint he had as to who his parents were, and tried to figure it out so he’d know where to go. The hint was a letter telling him that they were from somewhere cold. It was also a map of a place. Not how to get there, just of the place. Slush thought he knew this place, but he had failed geography as a pup. He mistook Greenland for Antarctica, so that’s where he went.

It took many days and nights, and lots of cold weather, but he finally reached Antarctica. Slush roamed through Antarctica, feeling at home despite the cold weather, which he had never before experienced. All of a sudden he heard a sound screaming.

“Look out!”

Next thing he knew, a blue penguin was racing toward him on his belly. Before Slush could react, he was on the ground, and the penguin was on top of him.

The penguin said, “Sorry for bumping into you, mate! I’m Ice Cube. Oh, and I think you need to call upon the magical unicorn of the Antarctic, because I think you broke my beak!”

Slush wasn’t sure how to react, but before he could, Ice Cube started doing this weird dance, and making these weird sounds, and a flash of light appeared. Then a white unicorn with rainbow colored spots all over her came flying out of the flash of light.

Once she landed, she said, “Hello unknown arctic dog. Oh, and hello Ice Cube, it’s been a while! I see your beak is broken, would you like me to fix it? Oh where are my manners, my name is Wishful, unknown stranger.”

After they got the whole introduction thing finished, Wishful began using one of her magic spells on Ice Cube’s beak. The three of them decided to become best friends forever. Slush felt really happy that he finally had friends he could trust. But little did he know the Summer Gang was coming his way fast.

The Summer Gang had an unknown source and found out where Slush was. One strangely warm day in Antarctica began as peacefully as everyday had over the past few weeks. Then, all of a sudden, Ice Cube, Wishful, and Slush saw a big gust of ice flying up, as if something was propelling it into the air. A few minutes later, the Summer Gang, Opal, Holly, and Babs, were seen in the distance. As soon as they had arrived in front of the winter gang’s igloo, Holly explained why they had come.

“Hello Slushie-Bear!” she said. “Just before you left our summer village, California, you said that we were meanies. And we’ve come to say that hurt our feelings in our empty, stone cold hearts, you ugly gray mutt! I mean, whoever heard of a grey dog living in a sunny place? Anyway, I’m getting off track. I’ve come to begin a war with you and your putrid arctic friends.”

The Summer Gang immediately walked inside the igloo without being invited.

Before you could say bananananarama, the war began! Each team fought strongly, but their power was equal to the the other.

Wishful then said, “You think you’re beating us? Well I think I’m gonna call in a friend.”

She went outside for a few minutes, and when she came back she brought a white and brown owl named Swoops. Ice Cube knew Swoops, so he decided to tell the Summer Gang what they were up against.

“Swoops here is a wise owl, as all owls are. But he is a special wise owl. He is a trained tactician. He will give us the skills we need to defeat you, and add a fourth party to our war against you. You better give up now, or you will be defeated trying.”

Opal was very jealous of their new friend, so she said, “You think you can call in a friend and win? Well we can too. We’re gonna call in a friend from way up high, and I mean way.”

With that, Opal made a horrible screeching sound, and in flew an angel bear named Halo. Each team decided to take a fifteen minute break so they could go over new strategies.

Once they returned, each team fought hard. The arctic gang fought with as much precision and synchronization as possible, while the Summer Gang played dirty, and had their angel friend call upon some undead skeletons to fight. Swoops, seeing that the Summer Gang was gaining an advantage, decided to play a little trick on them. He stopped the war for a few moments, and said that the winter gang didn’t want their floors to be broken any longer. They wanted the Summer Gang to go outside, and call upon more skeletons if they felt they needed them. The Summer Gang, seeing their chance, went outside. They no longer had their heavy duty snow gear on, and they had lived in warm weather all their lives, so they were not prepared to endure this very cold weather. The second all four of them got outside, they froze! The winter gang, realizing they had won the war, were very happy.

Slush stuck a note onto the ice cubes they were trapped inside of which said, “Never come back. We have won the war fair and square.”

And with that, Slush and his friends mailed the Summer Gang back to their home in California. After that, Slush never felt alone again. He knew he had true friends he could depend on, who wouldn’t make fun of him. Slush and his friends lived happily ever after, as BFFS.

And They Will Live Happily Ever After…Or Not!

Prologue

 

I am an angel in Heaven right now. This may sound a lot like Flynn Ryder, but here is the story of how I died…

The morning dawned and each princess arose in her own way. Princess Ariel was awoken by a crowd of adorable marine life. Princess Cinderella prefered a wake up call inside of her, thanks to a wee bit of magic from her fairy godmother. Princess Snow White let the dwarves wake her up, as they did anything for her after all that time she had spent being their maid. Princess Pocahontas was still a bit of a stranger to the English culture so always awoke to Meeko, her pet raccoon licking her face. Princess Belle (Beauty) loved more than anything else to stir to dancing and singing silverware. Princess Tiana was always up with the sun, even without an alarm clock. Princess Mulan, quite the early bird as well, was up even before the sun for training. And Princess Aurora? She just slept and slept. Only the sound of breaking tiaras could wake her up.

Oh the excitement that ran through the princesses’ hearts! The first reunion in a century! The only princess that had lived that long was, again, Aurora. But she hadn’t attended. She hadn’t fulfilled her story. To be honest, the princesses weren’t excited.

“Do I have to?” Tiana asked Naveen that morning. “It’s busy season at the restaurant. Are you sure you can handle it by yourself?”

Naveen assured her that he could. Belle wasn’t any more excited.

“But Adam, I’ve got to dish sit for Miss Teacup and I’d hate to let her down, you know how sensitive she is.”

When Aurora was dragged out of bed early, she had fits! “NO! No!” she shrieked, still half asleep. “Must…sleep…innn… ” she protested.

The second Cinderella’s mice groaned, as they have aged, but Cinderella hasn’t since she is a princess. “Cinderelly! Cinderelly! You’ve got your big fancy party!”

She moaned. “Not today! I just couldn’t stand a day with those bratty princesses trying to steal my fame!” Then her fairy godmother shot her with sleep magic and hauled her into her carriage.

Meanwhile, Mulan was up super early practicing kung fu for a festival for the school children coming up next week. “Keep it up gurly you looking FINE in the kung fu suit!” Mushu, her pet dragon, exclaimed.

“Mushu, stop it, I am trying to focus,” she said, trying to hold back her giggle.

Mulan’s grandma came up to her out of the house and said, “Mulan, you have to get ready for the princess reunion, you don’t want to go there sweaty, do you?”

“Nainai, can I please have 5 more minutes?”

“No Mulan, take a shower and put on your dress and meet me in the garden in 20 minutes.”

“Okay, Nainai,” she said reluctantly.

Ariel’s excuse was her daughter, Melody. “But Eric, we’ve got Melody’s ball to plan for! I’ve got to pick out her dress, try out hairstyles, help bake and who knows what more! Plus, I’ll be missing my daddy visit!” Ariel’s father let the merpeople and humans mix now, so she was turned back into a mermaid once a week to visit. Especially now that her father wasn’t feeling well.

Eric looked at the ceiling. “Women,” he said wearily. “I’ll never get them! Ariel, it’ll be fine. Besides, Melody’s almost 16. She should be able to take care of herself.”

“Fine,” Ariel grumbled.

So, surprisingly, they all got to the reunion on time, except Cinderella, of course, who had to make a “fashionably” late appearance. Snow White clicked her tongue in disapproval. Pocahontas rolled her eyes. “What?” Cinderella asked defensively.

Tiana’s temper had reached its limit. “Oh I’ll tell you what. None of us want to be here. Agreed?” The others nodded their heads. “Exactly, so why do you have to get here half an hour late like you’re better than the rest of us?”

“That’s right,” said Mulan, “I’ve had it with you snotty upper class princesses from Far Far Away thinking that you’re better than everyone else.”

“That’s because we are,” commented Belle.

“That’s exactly her point! I mean, have you ever worked a single day in your entire life? No! Have you had to fight for your husband? No! That’s because everything’s handed to you on a platter!” Pocahontas practically screamed.

“And that’s our fault why?” Aurora couldn’t help but point out. “Yeah, like the crowds love us and we’re beautiful and kind and stuff. We can’t help that!” Ariel added.

“Oh God,” Tiana muttered. “Even Naveen was better than this. And on the fact of you being ‘beautiful,’ have you never realized that you guys look almost identical? Ever thought about how you are all skinny and white? Y’all is like clones! Like take Mulan, she’s Chinese. She’s got culture. And if you’ve seen Pocahontas’ movie, you’ll learn about the Native Americans. And me, I’m here to teach y’all about New Orleans. I actually feel bad for you guys. You’ve got nothing.” Tiana sat back down, pleased with her speech. But you can bet that Ariel wasn’t.

“Excuse you! Saying I don’t have culture! Need I point out that I am the only mermaid here!”

Belle nodded. “I bet no one else here married a Beast…” She was cut off by Cinderella.

“Who turned out to be gorgeous. Hey, Tiana! Are you forgetting how many years I worked for the Steps?”

“And now all you do is sit around doing nothing. At least you got to be the servant of people! Those dwarves are disgustingly messy! And don’t even get me started on their fashion sen-” Snow White stopped. Sneezy had just walked in with an extra bag of ‘essentials’ she had forgotten to pack. He looked hurt.

“This was just what Ti was saying- you don’t mind if I call you Ti, do you?-” Mulan asked.

“Of course not, my sister, go right ahead,” agreed Tiana.

“You go, girl!” Pocahontas added.

“Just what Ti was saying! You guys hurt people’s feelings and don’t care! It’s just one dwarf out of your admiration society, right Snow?” Mulan said.

“But-” she protested. Pocahontas shook her head.

“I don’t want to hear it,” Mulan countered heartlessly. Cinderella sighed.

“You all are so immature. Dumb, too! Everyone knows that I’m the most famous. Sorry to crush your dreams, girls.” She laughed her high, tinkly laugh.

“You know what?” Aurora snapped. “I wish I didn’t have to come! I wish I wasn’t here! I could be sleeping right now! You guys can stop arguing because I’m the oldest and the eldest is always the best, so stop your yapping!” The princesses looked at one another.

“Sheesh. What’s up with her?” asked Ariel snottily. “Plus, I’ve got a movie made about me, my daughter, and my past. Or course I’m the most loved by all.”

“Oh my gosh!” Pocahontas screamed. “For Pete’s sake! Although I agree with Ti and Mulan, we’re all princesses. We don’t have to be bickering all the time to prove that. But, if it matters so much, Ariel, I’ve gotten two educational movies made about me and so does Mulan. Your movies teach, hmm, let me think, how to brush hair, and how to sing in an impossibly high soprano. All such important life skills, of course!” All of the royalty glared at each other. If looks could kill, they would all be in a casket. Mulan pulled a dagger out of nowhere and started sharpening it. Belle ‘politely’ cleared her throat.

“Do you mind?”

Tiana clenched her fists. “I’m gonna go ahead and speak for my gal MuMu-”

“Don’t call me that!” Mulan snapped.

“Fine, ya feisty little frog! My gal Mulan! A. You cannot try being sassy. It doesn’t work for you, and B. Mulan has the right to do whatever she wants. Leave her alone!” The fuel and force in Tiana’s words had escaped her mouth, but the power in them was buzzing in the room. Not a good sign…

Miniature elephants somehow popped into view and played a fanfare on their trunks. “Oh! They’re so cute!”Aurora squeaked breathlessly and all of the princesses immediately started gushing. Then a hovering dolphin floated up to Ariel. It squeaked in dolphin, a language that no one but Ariel could interpret.

Ariel nodded. “Mmm hmm, okay, uh huh…” she said, soothing the excited dolphin. She suddenly looked shocked and her face turned pale under her makeup. “Oh,” she said, nodding again, but with noticeably less enthusiasm. She nervously turned to face the group, their eyes wide in fear (everyone but Ti, MuMu, and Poca). “I don’t know how Splash knew this – I don’t know at all – “ Her hands shook with terror. “There is a war brewing. Against us. The villains have teamed up with someone else. An unexpected group of people.” Her breath almost failed her. “The princes,” Ariel said, and fainted.
Snow White turned paler than humanly possible. Aurora collapsed and no one knew if she had fainted or simply fell asleep.

Mulan didn’t look at all surprised. “I’ve never trusted men, real men, that is.”

Belle looked like she didn’t really care. “As long as I still get my palace, why does this even matter?” Pocahontas scoffed.

“Talk about conceited! Did you think about all of the people that might die in this war?”

“Might,” Belle interjected. “Whatever! How would you feel once you realized that you don’t have any servants because they’re all dead?”

“They won’t die!” Belle cried hotly, sounding as if she was desperate for some backup. “And if they do, I’ll just find new ones. What, do you think I’d work like some dirty slave?”

“Because you don’t care what happens to anyone as long as you get what you want, right?” Pocahontas was on a roll and there was nothing stopping her once she had that fiery glint in her eye. Their argument was interrupted by the creepy hush of all the birds muting their voices.

“Is it just me, or did everything just fall silent?” Cinderella half whimpered.

“It’s not you,” Aurora stage whispered.

At that moment, the lights went off. So did the sun. Literally. The sun turned black. All you could see was a flickering candle on the far side of the room.

“C’mon guys! It’s not that bad!” Tiana said, but her tone wasn’t goading, it was encouraging.

“Yeah! Don’t worry, we’ll be okay!” Mulan chided.

“You hope,” Pocahontas replied darkly, still sulking from not finishing her argument.

The lock on the ballroom door clicked shut. They were trapped. From a distant, very faintly, the princesses heard a cackle. Mulan sat up straight.

“What’s the matter, Mulan?” Ariel taunted shakily. “Scared?” Maybe picking on others ridded her of her fear.

“No way! Hunter’s instinct. Never trust unfamiliar sounds.” The girls exchanged worried looks. For once, Tiana appeared to be uncertain of herself. Unsure of what would happen next. Because that is what fear will do to you. Pocahontas had a strange look on her face. Like she was scared spitless, but didn’t want to show it. The other princesses had no such masks. They were scared and wanted everyone to know it.

“Help!” They wailed. “Please, somebody save us! Turn on the lights! Get me a pretty dress to wear as I die!” they cried. Tiana mischieviously smiled at Pocahontas, who returned the smirk-like grin before resuming her battle mode. She tightly gripped a bow and notched an arrow instinctively. Mulan did the same with her knives, poising them so they’d be ready to attack in a moment’s notice.

“Listen to you!” Tiana teased. “The princes are in a war against us. Why would they come and save us? And I’ll bet that your minions – sorry – companions are too scared to return.” The formerly panicking princesses lowered their heads, embarrassed.

“I guess so,” Snow White finally admitted. “I mean, this is pretty freaky though. Who would think our princes would do such a thing?”

“So much for ‘true love,’” muttered Pocahontas. “I chose John Rolfe over John Smith thinking he’d bring me a better life, and look at where that got me. Trapped in a room with you guys.” She wore a disgusted look on her face. When Poca ain’t happy, nobody’s happy!

“What’s wrong with you guys!” Aurora exclaimed. “You’re flipping over something a stinkin’ fish said, for Pete’s sake! How do we know for sure that Ariel’s not pranking us?”

“Hello? Standing right here!” Ariel was mad with a capital MAD. “Do you think I’d really play this sort of trick? I mean, I do love a good prank, but I’d never do that. I’d never want Eric to betray me!”

“So let’s stop this arguing. Obviously, we’ve got to make a game plan. We all hate the idea of being double crossed, or flat out lied to, but we gotta face the truth.” Cinderella stopped talking. The others seemed awestruck.

“Maybe you’ve got a brain under all of that hairspray after all, Cindy,” said Mulan, clearly impressed.

“Not bad for a princess,” Belle agreed slyly, nodding her head. “Not bad at all.”

“So what C means is that we all have something we’re good at and that we have to make that our defense against their fancy but deadly equipment. For example – again, an example, so you don’t have to agree with what I say – I’m a cook and baker, so I’ll pelt doughnut after doughnut and cannoli after jumbo pots at them! Ariel, do you have any control over water?” Tiana asked.

“A bit,” she answered, appearing as modest and shy for the first time.

“Can you summon it?” Tiana wanted to know.

Ariel perked up at this, grinning innocently. “Yes I can!” she said triumphantly.

Tiana smiled. “That’s perfect, because your defense is going to be to create a thin water wall blocking them from us, while also completely soaking the opposition. Belle, you can talk to dishes or something, so can you get your silverware friends to find you some non-alive teapots or something to chuck at our enemies? Thanks,” Tiana said without waiting for an answer. “Poca and MuMu…” Mulan growled. “…Poca and MuMu,” Tiana continued, “Y’all have your bows and knives along with a load of practice, so my bet is that you’ll be fine on your own. Aurora, you got magic pillows filled with bricks that can be cannoned into the air? ‘Cause that’s what we need. Cindy, see if your godmama can make us a cannon and you’ll get some pumpkins to fill it up, too. Am I missing anyone?” They all shook their heads. “Then let’s get to it! Let’s go kick some royal butt!”

Mulan kicked down the door, both fearlessly and ferociously, invigorated by Tiana’s battle plan/pep talk. She wasn’t the only one. They all were feeling pumped. Feeling like they could do anything. The princesses strutted out of the ballroom with a newfound confidence, ready to take on the world.

The princesses were working hard, funneling their spirit into their work. Unsurprisingly, Mulan and Pocahontas both had competitive streaks, competing against each other on how awesome they could be with weapons in their hands. As it turned out, Ariel was a determined person who never planned on giving up. Belle had deadly aim and could hit a target with a fork from anywhere. Cinderella and Aurora were an amazing team, quick to gather supplies, pull levers, and alternate positions. They were all excited, having set their differences aside and were having fun. But deep down, they knew that the time would come where this would not be a game or training, but a fight for their lives. That time came too soon…

Aurora was first to spot them, from high in the tower filling her previously comfy pillows with bricks before flinging them down a chute into Cinderella’s waiting hands. “They’re coming!” she hollered into her bullhorn loud enough for her friends to hear, but not the princes. The female royalty scrambled into their hiding places, waiting for the princes to play right into their hands.

As expected, the princes had recruited other townspeople to rally against the soon-to-be queens, claiming that it was their fault that they weren’t living the high life. Belle rolled her eyes, waiting for it to be over. She almost fell asleep as Charming gave a speech persecuting the princesses, that is, until someone whispered. “Psssst!” Belle heard the voice but couldn’t see the source. “Over here!” The supposedly invisible person whisper-called, and quick as lightning tied her up.

“Who are you?” Belle asked, her eyes full of anger and wonder simultaneously.

“I’ll tell you who I am in due time,” replied the masked figure. “But first, we need to talk.”

Pocahontas stood ready, every inch of her alert, ready for battle.Then someone stealthily crept over and nearly pulled her braid out. “What was that for?” Pocahontas whisper-yelled.

“Follow me,” said the mysterious person.

So Pocahontas and Belle each obeyed and walked. Their captors had led them to some sort of hideout. At the sight of each other, they were filled with glee.

“Poca!!!” Belle squealed.

“Bellerina!!!” Pocahontas exclaimed, each of them using their pet name for the other.

“Who are they?” Pocahontas added with a frown, nodding her head toward their guards. Their kidnappers exchanged looks.

“I guess we’ve gotta tell them,” one said sheepishly.

“Alright, but I like the disguises,” the other pouted. The first one yanked off the ski mask covering her face and turned toward the kidnappees.

“I am Princess Jasmine, and I am ready to join your fight.”

Belle gasped, “I so did not see that coming.”

But Pocahontas wasn’t really paying attention to her. Her gaze was fixed on the other, Pouter.

“If she’s a princess, than you are too, which means you are…” and Pouter finished her sentence for her. She unraveled the turban around her head and the scarf on her face. “Princess Rapunzel.”

She stated matter of factly as miles of thick blond hair tumbled down. “But didn’t you cut your hair a few years ago?” asked Pocahontas. Rapunzel only laughed.

“It’s amazing what hair products can do,” was her only reply.

“Jasmine, take a spear and work with Mulan. I’ve figured that you’re really strong,” commanded Belle. “And Rapunzel, go to Ariel and create a force field of hair around her water wall. Any leftover hair should be lassoing up the enemy. Got it?” They all nodded, surprised to see Belle in control.

Meanwhile, the other princesses had been spotted. Mulan had carelessly tried to find Pocahontas when she was challenged in combat by Eugene Fitzgerald A.K.A. Flynn Ryder who happened to be carrying a stainless steel pot. Unfortunately, that was when Jasmine came along and smashed it to smithereens. The moments of combat occurred too quickly (and violently) to record, but it was terrible. Prince versus princess. Townsperson versus warrior. It was a madhouse out there.

The battle either lasted for 2 hours and 40 minutes or 4 hours and 20 minutes. It did, eventually, come to an end, as all things do.

A sense of darkness covered the area. The opposition bowed down to a misty black shape/person that appeared to be riding on a storm cloud. “Who’s that?” had become the phrase of the day, for that was what the feminine portion of the royalty was wondering. The figure was slowly descending and its shape was becoming more definite. It was a she. She was a girl, about 18, a black hood, very punk looking, with leather boots and black jeans, also a glamour goth, with black hair with a red streak. Her body radiated power, but also a form of death, and maybe revenge. This pale, skinny teenager was a wonder. Was she an ally, or a threat? But it all came back to the same question: Who was she?

“Well, well well,” she taunted, “what do we have here?” The tone of her voice made the princesses pretty sure that she was foe, not friend. “I bet you’re worrying your perfect bratty princess heads about who I am. Well, that’s for me to know and you to find out! For years I’ve been planning this. For years I’ve stood in the shadow while you’ve gotten the glory. Now have you figured out who I am, princesses?” She practically spat out. They shook their heads. “Well, I can’t be surprised. You’re all too dumb to figure anything out.” The princesses had been scared into silence, but that ended once the stranger insulted their intelligence.

“Excuse you, Miss Mystery, but I’ve got plenty smarts,” snapped Tiana. “More than you!” She dished out sassily.

“Oh, really?” countered the stranger. “Go on, walk up to me. Come now, I won’t bite.” Taken aback, Tiana stepped forward. “Whoops, wrong step!” She jeered, pushing a button, therefore ensnaring Tiana. “Goodbye, country gal,” the stranger said softly in triumph. She raised an eyebrow at Belle. “Well? Haven’t you figured me out, book girl?” Belle had been lost in thought, but shook her head in defeat.

“I know who you are!” Cinderella blurted out victoriously. “You’re the one we all thought was good. The one we always loved. The one who we now know always secretly hated us. Don’t listen to a single word she says, guys! Don’t you get it? The streak in her hair? She’s Red Riding Hood!” Red said nothing, but chuckled. A small smile danced across her face, before settling on her lips.

“Well done, Cindy!” She congratulated her, but, as with all of her words, she had a sense of sarcasm.”You’re much brighter than you appear to be.”

“Well, I hope you’re happy, because you’re goin’ down,” was Ariel’s frail attempt at being intimidating. But she did look fierce, with her tangled mass of red hair and tattered clothes.

“Are you sure you want this, Red?” Jasmine asked. “Do you really want to destroy so many people to get what you want? I know you desperately want to rule, but what good it it to be a king without a kingdom?”

“You could always join us. We’d find a way to make you a princess. Please. We could be friends!” pleaded Aurora. Their voices were richer-sounding. Not charmspeak, but some magic. Ariel seemed to understand what they were doing, even before they knew it themselves. They were not forcing her. They were befriending her. She began to beautifully vocalize and sounded like an angel. The others followed her, harmonizing to Ariel’s melody that swiftly melted into a song. A song about friendship.

 

“To have a friend is the greatest thing ever

Cause once you come close, you will part never.”

 

“You think you can crush me? I, who have stolen all of the dark magic on the planet. I, who have the power to do ANYTHING!!!” Red cackled.

But the princesses had a plan. They kept singing, talking, and putting their souls into their words. Red tried to fight back, to summon dark magic, but it was too late. The power of love couldn’t melt a heart frozen with hatred, but it could destroy it. The princesses suddenly knew what they had to do. They each put one hand on Red’s heart and it glowed into a purple glowing ball. It was her sense of love. You see, without meaning to, each princess had taken a bit of Red’s love. She had adored them, and that led to a bit of her soul being transferred into theirs. By singing, the love had come out into the open. Like a vacuum cleaner, that love sucked out every ounce of mean in Red’s body. She was free. But she was in no state to live. She had been through so much that she couldn’t take it anymore. As her body dissolved into mist, her now clean soul went to Heaven to start a new life. Red became an angel, as I am.

That is because I am Red, and this is my story.

 

THE END

Nothing To Do With Cats

Kathy

Hello. My name is Katherine Mohrlang but some people call me Kathy or, better yet, Kathy Kat. Okay, only one person calls me that, my best friend Sammi. Although you can still call me Kathy if you want. Sammi aka Samantha (but everyone calls her Sammi, I’m still trying to find a nickname for her.) and I live in, you guessed it, the South. Sammi and I have so many things in common, we could be twins. I think that we were twins to begin with but my mom thought that it would be nice to give her best friend (Sammi’s mom) a baby.  Sammi and I are both 12 years old and we both have German labradoodles which are sooo cute and fluffy. Mine’s named Julia. When it’s summer, we bathe them in our 19-year-old kiddy pool that neither my brother nor I have used since we were little. My brother’s name is Peter. He is 16 and the absolute best brother ever.

“Want to play some Minecraft?” Sammi asked me when we got to my house after school.

“Sure. Did you finish all of your homework?”

“Yeserry. What about you?”

“Yep.”

It seemed like we were playing for about 30 minutes, but when we finished playing and looked at the clock, it was 7:00 and we usually get home around 4:00.

“Wow, look what time it is,” I thought out loud. “Want to run up the hill and get your pjs?”

“Ok,” Sammi said, and went to get her stuff.

The good thing about our houses are that there is only a hill separating them. My mom and her mom act like we’re sisters and always allow us to have sleepovers with each other without asking. She also has a toothbrush and a rag at my house and I have the same at her house. The only thing we have at our own house that is not at the other’s house is clothing.

For most of the school year, it went on like that with different homework, new games, and other stuff. Until one day when school ended, I asked, “Do you want to come back to my place and play some games?”

“Uhhhh, I’m good,” Sammi’s depressed face said. I looked into her eyes. They were tired with a hint of sad.

“What’s wrong?” I asked.

“Nothing,” she says with a bit of attitude.

“Come on, I can see it in your eyes. You’re sad.”

“I don’t want to talk about it, ok?”

I felt like my whole world just crashed and crumbled. We never kept anything to ourselves, and we always told each other everything. I was stunned, heartbroken. Am I dreaming? Something like this would not have happened in real life. Somebody please pinch me.

Just then it happens. A car turns the corner. It’s going too fast for a peaceful Friday. I’m laying on my back with car wheel marks on my arms and leg. I can’t feel my body. I’m in so much pain. Then I hear someone screaming. Oh wait, it’s me. “Kathy, Kathy,” I hear someone say. I hear crying. I soon realize that it’s Sammi. I hear a siren. An ambulance. I’m loaded on like a package. Ahhh…

Is this what Heaven feels like? Endless white halls. Weightlessness. Then I see some people lined up. I think it’s for and escalator. People were wrong. It’s not a staircase to Heaven, it’s an escalator.

Sammi

My name is Sammi Garmalsdyte. I’m 12 years old and I go to South High Middle School but Kathy Kat probably told you about me and my backstory. The only thing she didn’t tell you is why that one day I didn’t want to come over and play.

See my other best friend Sara, she’s 14, her boyfriend dumped her, her guinea pig died, and now her dad developed cancer. She had the worst week in the history of weeks. She wanted me to come over and have a shoulder to cry on. Her mom doesn’t get her. Her mom never had a pet and she thinks that Sara is too young to date. It’s so frustrating for Sara that these things are happening and she has no one to talk to. She told me not to tell anyone and it’s not like it’s anything that I need to tell Kathy Kat…

There is another thing I didn’t tell her. Ok. This is really personal but my parents are getting a divorce. Ok please please pleeeease don’t make fun of me. I didn’t tell her because I thought that she would start crying and would ask a lot of questions and I don’t want to talk about it. Well, now you know my big secret.

Kathy

After going up that escalator I discovered there is a whole nother world up there. I got a new dog because Julia couldn’t come. I named my new puppy Angelina. One day, when I was walking Angelina, she started barking. I looked to the direction that she was barking to and I saw a cat. I went over to the cat to see if it had a name tag. It said “If this cat is found, please return her to your true best friend Sammi Garmalsdyte.” Then I saw blackness. I opened my eyes and I was in a hospital room. I screamed and my mom came running into the room.

“Ohh honey, are you ok? Do you want me to call a doctor?”

“Just pinch me I want to wake up. I want to go back to the cat and Angelina. I need to find out my life.”

“Honey, this is real life.”

“You just don’t understand. I just know it wasn’t a dream. It’s like you don’t even know me. You are the worst mom ever.”

Later someone approaches my room and says, “Hello? Kathy Kat?”

“Who’s there?”

“It’s me, Kathy Kat.”

“Oh,” I say. “It’s you. People like you are not allowed to call me Kathy Kat any more.”

“But –”

“No buts. Only my bffs are allowed to call me that.”

“But we’re best friends for life.”

“No best friend for life would deny to go home with me. Best friends for life would stay by my side. Best friends for life wouldn’t make me get run over by a car. This is all your fault!” and with that Sammi ran out of my room crying. Serves her right.

Sammi

I wonder why Kathy’s being so mean to me. I didn’t do anything bad.

OR DID YOU.

Who said that.

HI SAMMI, I’M YOUR SELF CONSCIENCE.

Ahhhhhhhh.

OH SAMMI, I’M HERE TO HELP YOU.

Does anyone else hear this? Someone help me.

SAMANTHA GARMALSDYTE, PLEASE LISTEN TO ME. I AM HERE TO HELP YOU.  

I’m here to help you solve your problems.

YOU NEED TO TELL KATHY WHAT HAPPENED.

But she will be too sentimental about it.

DO YOU WANT TO LOSE YOUR BEST FRIEND?

No.

THEN TELL HER.  

Ok, I’ll tell her.

GOOD. NOW GOODBYE. EAT CHOCOLATE, ITS GOOD.

 

“Kathy,” I say as I come in.

“Mommy?” she asks.

“Nope, its Sammi.”

“Ohh. It’s you.”

“Kathy, just listen to me. I want to tell you why I ditched you that day.”

“Well, I would try to get you out but, you know, I can’t move my legs.”

So I ended up telling her everything that happened with my parents and Sara. She started to cry and I hugged her.

“I forgive you,” she said. “I didn’t know what you were going through.” It felt good to have a shoulder to cry on. I should have told her sooner.

Twist in a Tale Because of a Portal

Prologue:

Once upon a time, in a land far away, there was a mushroom. A big mushroom. It covered the trunk of an old, sturdy oak tree looking as if even a hurricane or tornado couldn’t blow it apart. It was true, for even the strongest natural disaster couldn’t push it down. Why? Here’s why. A little girl named Abby had came here and sat underneath the mushroom. Everyday she would flip through pages of a fairy tale. The goddess of trees, Hellenore, blessed the tree with the mushroom. The tree would be healthy as long as Abby would sit under it. Over the years Abby will grow into a lady and the tree will remain healthy.

 

Chapter 1:

One day as Abby sat under the large oak tree which grew right behind her house, she heard a glistening sound like jewels clamoring against each other. She looked behind her and saw a crystal blue creek with shiny white stones almost like pearls. She gaped open mouthed as the water trickled over them making them sparkle radiantly. For a moment, nothing mattered. The stones shone so brightly and looked like it was full of magic. Abby suddenly came to her senses. As if in a trance, she picked up two of those pearl like stones and shoved them in her pocket. As she ran back home, the stones felt as heavy as a block of gold.

“Mom! I found these pearl-like stones near the tree.” Her mom looked at her wondrously. The lines on her face creased when she squinted to take a look.

“Why, those are the rarest stones on the earth!” she exclaimed. “ Where did you find those?”

“In the little creek behind the tree,” Abby replied wondrously.

Her mom and Abby raced to the creek. But, like magic, the magnificent creek with the shining stones was gone!

“Where are the stones? And where is the creek?” Her mom demanded impatiently.

“They were there when I came to read!” Abby cried disappointed. “They might have gone somewhere, I don’t know!”

So they walked home anxiously.

That night, Abby couldn’t sleep. She tossed and turned thinking about the creek and the beautiful stones she had found. I know it was there, it can’t be a dream, she thought, struggling to remember everything. Had she led her mom to the wrong place? She definitely knew she had not. She fell into sleep in a baffled expression.

 

Chapter 2:

“Good morning, sweet cakes,” her dad said smiling widely at at her with his eyes twinkling merrily.

“Good morning, Pa,” Abby smiled.

Her mom (also called Ma) was in the kitchen making waffles with blueberries and strawberries.

“Good morning, sweet potato,” she said cheerily as if nothing had happened last night.

“Um, good morning, Ma,” Abby said, baffled why her mom was acting different than last night. “May I go read at my tree?” Abby asked politely.

Her mother nodded. So Abby grabbed her book and raced towards the tree. As she was reading silently, she heard something. Something that sounded so radiant and wonderous. She was drawn closer and closer to the sound until she saw the giant mushroom. She stared at it as it began to glow. Wow, Abby thought. Then, in a second it turned into a giant portal with winds so strong it could blow the Empire State Building down and  with a scent of fresh daffodils, it was so strong her book shut tightly. Abby had no idea what it was but still she jumped in. In the portal, it only took three seconds, but it felt like a rollercoaster with no seatbelts.

As she descended from the portal, she found a village. The houses were a colorful paradise compared to Abby’s own home but instead the houses were giant mushrooms! From dotted mushrooms growing from a carpet of neon green grass that covered the whole village to the dry brown dirt outside of the village and wild brown mushrooms that looked as if a little breeze would blow it down.

As she finished looking at the miraculous village, Abby saw two short long-eared gnomes planting in their garden as big as a piece of paper.

Abby quickly ran to them and asked, “Hello, I’m Hermione and I was sent here by a magical portal. Can you help me get back home?”

Abby didn’t like to reveal her real identity.The two gnomes looked up and looked as if they were surprised that a human was standing right in front of them.

“Hello!” they squeaked like a baby chick. “Who are you?”

“I’m Hermione,” Abby replied politely. The gnomes returned it with a bow.

“There is only one way to get back home, Madame. You will have to ask the wise old goblin of our kingdom!”

“Thanks,” Abby replied gratefully. So she set off down the peaceful village of the gnomes to approach the Great Goblin.

 

Chapter 3:

The Great Goblin was sitting in his castle, bored of the gifts the ambassadors of other lands were giving him. Out of all the lands, he was the most magnificent and wise one. The fairies were only pretty, the witches were only evil, and the dragons were only fierce. He, the greatest of all, was all of that, and wiser than an owl.

As he was trying to hold his yawn, a servant rushed up and quickly announced, “My lord, there is a girl that is coming your way!”

“Ah,” the Goblin answered, smiling. “That must be little Abby! Let her in!”

It really was Abby, for after a minute she came skipping in. She quickly bowed and asked, “Mr Great Goblin, your gnomes have told me only you can send me home.”

The goblin answered shaking his head, “The only way to do that is to see the queen of the heavens for even I don’t know how to take you home.

“How will I ever see the queen of the heavens?” inquired Abby.

“Easy,” said the Goblin. “You must please her with your wits. Only then will she answer your question.

The Goblin must have noticed the sad and wearied look on Abby’s face so he told her, “She will see you soon, I promise.”

 

Chapter 4:

Abby walked out of the throne room and out of the castle. She was stumbling over every step, thinking in despair. She began to cry. Suddenly, as her tears fell off her face and on the ground, a image like a big platter/plate appeared in front of her. A woman appeared, with peach blond hair and sea green eyes.

“I am Victoria, Queen of Heavens. If you answer all my riddles correctly, I will grant you a wish.”

“Ok,” Abby replied excitedly.

“First riddle. What has four legs, but can’t walk.”

“I know this one, it is a table!”

“Correct,” Victoria replied. “What is an astronaut’s favorite food?”

“Easy, space chips.”

“Correct again!” after a while Abby got all the riddles right and Queen Victoria finally said, “You may ask me a wish.”

“How can I get home?” Hermione (from now on let’s call her Hermione until further notice) answered quickly.

“I’m sorry, but that is beyond my powers. Only the Great Goblin can answer that!”

“What!” Hermione cried. “I just went to see him. He just said I had to ask you, the Queen of the Heavens, for a way to get back home.”

“I know,” the Queen said smiling brightly and widely, “He always tells people to come to me, so I could test them to prove them worthy. Now let me kiss you and the Goblin will see you and know you passed the test.”

Hermione smiled.

“Now,” the Queen said, “Go in the palace and tell the Goblin that you’ve passed the test and he can take you home.”

“Bye, and thanks,” Hermione ran into the palace and cried out loud, “I’ve passed the test, Mr. Goblin please take me home!”

“Okay,” he smiled and said. “Close your eyes.”

Hermione did. And when she opened her eyes she saw herself under the tree. She heard her mom yelling for her.

“Coming,” Hermione said and raced back home happy for a normal life without magical creatures. But that didn’t last long.

 

Chapter 5

The next day when Hermione was reading, the portal opened again but took her somewhere else. It was the world of Tangled. As she was strolling around the busy streets full of merchants and customers buying and selling fruit and vegetables, she saw two people starting a dance that drew everyone’s attention. One was a young girl no older than 17. She had golden hair that was about twice as long as a cobra and twinkling sea green eyes. She was jumping and dancing around playfully and grabbing everyone to join her. The other person was a young man, with short, brown hair and chocolate eyes. Hermione was smitten by this dance and was drawn closer and closer until she could smell the rose scented aroma of the girl.

The girl smiled at her warmly and said, “Hello! My name is Rapunzel and this is my friend Eugene. We were coming here to find the light that floats at night.”

“Oh, you mean the lanterns that honor the lost princess?” asked one of the village people obviously overhearing what Rapunzel had said.

“Yes, whatever they were, but definitely not stars,” Rapunzel said dreamily. “I want to see them. They appear only on my birthday. My mom doesn’t let me see them so I ran away.”

Then, for some reason, the people ran all directions. Then Hermione gasped. An old woman had walked into the streets wagging a finger at Rapunzel. Rapunzel screamed and Hermione ran for her life. Down the streets she ran until she ran into a half-giant.

“Who are you?” he boomed and Hermione replied

“I-I a-am Hermione and I am lost.”

“Well, I’m Bob and these are my friends, Adam and Casey.”

“Casey Weasley!” Hermione stammered. “I’ve read about you. You’re Ron’s son. May I have your autograph?”

Adam, with dark eyes wearing glasses smiled and said, “Sorry, too busy tracking down Horcruxes. Maybe next time.”

Casey burst out, “I’ll give you my autograph!” And he wrote on a sheet of paper: “Casey Weasley.”

“For goodness sake, Casey, write neater,” said Adam.

So Casey took the paper and scribbled out his “messy” name and replaced it.

“Much better.” Adam turned to Hermione said, “Hi, my name is Adam Malfoy and this is Casey Weasley as you can see. “

“Hi, I’m Hermione and I want to go home.”

Adam gestured towards the street. “Come, we’ll take you to Hogwarts.”

 

Chapter 6:

Hermione was so happy that she fainted. She heard shouting and then nothing. When she awoke she found herself in a bed. In Hogwarts. As soon as she awoke, she saw Casey and Adam staring down at her. “We were so worried about you.”

“How long have I’ve been out?”

“At least 15 minutes,” answered Casey.

“Well, I hope you are smart,” answered Adam grimly. “Because we are stuck on a problem. How do we get into the Ministry with Death Eaters crawling around it?”

“No problem, can’t you use polyjuice potion?” Hermione replied, smiling.

“That’s a great idea!” Casey said brightly.

“Thank you and now you can go home,” Adam replied quickly.

Casey must have saw the look in Hermione’s eyes because he cut in, “Are you kidding! We won’t last five weeks without her! She is so smart, she thought of polyjuice potion in two seconds!”

“Well, I guess she could stay for a–”

Hermione cut Adam by wrapping him in a big bear hug.

“THANK YOU SO MUCH! I’VE ALWAYS WANTED TO TRAVEL WITH THE FAMOUS Adam Malfoy!” she yelled at the top of her lungs.

After she finished yelling, she looked around. Casey and Adam were rolling on the ground covering their ears.

“Control it, please,” they said in unison.

“Ok, ok, I was just excited that I got to join you.”

“Now for for the Polyjuice potion…” Casey stammered

“Does it taste horrible?” Hermione asked.

“I’m afraid so,” said Adam clutching his throat like he was going to barf.

 

Chapter 7:

They were making the potion when a portal opened up and sucked Hermione in. Adam and Casey yelled but it was nothing compared to the roaring of the portal. Hermione was sucked in and she landed under the great tree she was sucked into in the first place. She ran into a house that looked liked her own house. She saw her mom crying in the kitchen and her dad on the phone.

“Mom! I’m home!”

“Oh honey, we were so worried about you! Where were you?”

“I’ll tell you about it,” said Hermione smiling.

 

Chapter 8:

“First tell me, WHERE WERE YOU? WE WERE SO WORRIED RIGHT WHEN YOU CAME IN WE WERE ABOUT TO CALL THE POLICE!  THANK GOODNESS YOU CAME BACK!” Then she said calmly “ Tell me the truth. Where were you?”

“Umm…” Hermione was hesitant.

Suddenly a portal opened up (again) and Ma fell down.

“Ma!” Hermione cried.

“Don’t worry,” said a voice that sounded like tinkling bells on Santa’s sleigh. Hermione looked up. She saw a beautiful women that looked like Queen Victoria but had cheeks as red as a rose and a silver crown that looked liked the moon. Her dress was a pink paradise topped with moonstones and corals on the necklace.

“Who are you?” Hermione asked baffled. “And what happened to my mom?”

“Don’t worry, we’re just erasing her memory of you missing so you won’t get in trouble.”

“And done.”

“So I won’t get in trouble?” Hermione asked excitedly, “But is my mom all right?”

“She will be. And sorry. I haven’t introduced myself. I’m Glinda, the Good Witch of the North. And you are?”

Hermione didn’t want to tell Glinda her real name so she said, “Dorothy.”

“Oh, hi Dorothy,” Glinda said sarcastically. Then she whispered, “I know your real name. It’s Hermione isn’t it.”

How did she know? thought Hermione.

“Anyways, Dorothy. You LANDED ON THE EVIL WITCH OF THE EAST! Anyways. Here are her magic shoes. It can take you wherever you want.”

“I want to go home!”

“Done.”

Hermione found herself in her own room on her bed.

“Hermione! Hermione! Dinner time!”

“Coming Ma!”

And she lived happily ever after.

 

Germany Series

Halloween in Germany

In Germany, Halloween is on December 13th, but instead of people trick-or-treating, people wear Teletubby suits and sleep in the subways. They watch Teletubby videos and watch the president give the Teletubbies the Nobel prize. The Teletubbies throw a party to make everyone tubby so they can’t fit in Alex’s vac pack. Halloween is the only time when mustard is not illegal. Teletubbies give everyone mustard so they will become sleepy and do whatever the Teletubbies want. These things happen because December 13th is on…FRIDAY THE 13TH!!!

The Teletubbies order everyone to find a man named Alex Henderson so the Teletubbies can meet Moby *** (the whale (duh)). The Teletubbies know everything because the TVs on their chests show them everything in the whole entire multiverse. They want to see Moby *** because he invented the lightbulb (LOL). Everybody thinks that Thomas Edison invented the lightbulb because Thomas Edison stole the first lightbulb from Moby *** and said that he invented the lightbulb. Thomas Edison’s brother said that Thomas Edison died of diabetes because he was actually killed by Moby ***. The Teletubbies need Moby *** to make a time machine to stop the people that made them from discontinuing them.

All the people of Germany went to Alex’s vac pack and tried to open it. They all got sucked in and the vac pack exploded and Moby *** came out. Moby *** gave them the time machine that he made over the thousands of years that he’s been in that vac pack. The Teletubbies went back in time in 2001. Andrew Davenport was sitting at his desk, thinking of new ideas for the Teletubbies and then he decided to discontinue them. Then, there was a bright flash and the Teletubbies used their tubby powers to kill him. Tubby powers are things that are powers that you can only use if you are tubby enough. The only tubby power that you can use is a body slam where if you jump up you’ll jump really high and when you fall you’ll fall faster than anything else, and when you land you will kill/break the thing you landed on. The teletubbies can only use these powers because they are tubby and they have TVs on their chest. Then, the Teletubbies started melting.

“What’s happening?!!!” asked one.

The Teletubbies discontinued themselves by killing their creator. The Germans dress as Teletubbies on Halloween (FRIDAY THE 13TH!!!) because they admire the Teletubbies because the Teletubbies made them when they were alive. The End…or is it?

Christmas in Germany

Christmas in Germany is the time when all the Germans dress up as Dora the Explorer and Diego. They run around Germany and sleep in gas stations. They drive in the driveway and park in the parkway. They eat carrots and then dress up as a bunny and eat rabbit food and say, “What did the rabbit say? DING DING DING DING DINGDADING, DING,” and then they say “WE MUST STEAL MA-YO-NAYSE, VAC-PACK MUST DIE.” So the German SWAT team doggy paddled on doggies. It took ten years. They opened Alex’s vac pack and disabled the vacuum device.

“WE WON!!!” they screamed, followed by them laughing evily.

“MWAHAHAHAHAHA…MWAHAHAHAHAHA!…MWAHAHAHAHAHAHAHA!!!” They laughed like that for 50 years. And then they moved so slowly that 5 minutes later, Alex realized that he forgot his backpack (no longer a vac pack) at the airport and he took his backpack while the (retired) German SWAT team tried to take the now 110 year old tub of mayonnaise (and failed).

Eraser Day in Germany

Eraser day in Germany is the day when people wear erasers that they bought probably the day after Eraser Day last year. The erasers are very, very dirty because they erased their whole house so everyone lives in erasers on Eraser Day because if they don’t, they get kicked in the face by everyone. Everyone loves Eraser Day because they get erased in their eraser clothes, so after Eraser Day the population of Germany is 10. On Eraser Day, someone named Jimmyjoebillybobtommytim erases everything in the universe, so the big bang happened again because after the universe was erased, someone went back in time and exploded the biggest bomb that man will ever create and as the universe developed again, Jimmyjoebillybobtommytim fell in a hole and died.

Once Jimmyjoebillybobtommytim had a tooth. It was the most sacred tooth in all of Germany. He used it to power a time machine and went back in time and accidently pressed the self destruct button. Then, the 123456789987654321th big bang happened.

Why Germany Is Crazy

When Icosaxx was little, he fell of the Eiffel tower onto a trampoline. His DNA got messed up and his mind frame changed to that of an adult. He passed college and became the smartest man in the world. Although being the smartest man in the world, he got little to no recognition.

In Germany, someone invented a time machine and went back in time and killed Hitler. In the future, he didn’t go back in time to kill Hitler because there was no reason. Then the universe exploded. After the 3rd big bang, a time machine was created and duplicated twenty times by going back in time to ten seconds ago twenty times. Then there were twenty scientists named Icosaxx. They all got into a fight about who was the real Icosaxx and one got into a time machine and destroyed the time machine that made the 3rd big bang. Then the universe ended (at least for 10,000,000,000,000 years). In a parallel universe, the Icosaxx missed a button on the time machine and went back in time to become the smartest person in history named Einstein. In another parallel universe, the Icosaxx traveled back in time to become Leonardo Da Vinci. He also became Michelangelo, Abraham Lincoln, Napoleon, Martin Luther King Jr, Shakespeare, etc.

Once  Icosaxx invented a robot. A reproducing, communicating robot.The robot population grew and grew, and soon enough the robots took over the world. Then the one person left, Icosaxx, duplicated himself once more and touched himself. Then the universe exploded.

After the fourth big bang, Icosaxx changed his name to Icosikaihenainteger. ( ico-sika-ihe-nain-teg-er) Icosikaihenainteger was then finally recognized as the smartest person in the world in the year 9,999. Unfortunately, the world ended 10 seconds after the year 10,000.

 

The Dwarf Plan

 

The tiger went into a house that had a door that was too small for the tiger to fit through. It was a dwarf house so he ripped through the chimney, wanting to destroy the house. He destroyed the dwarves with explosives. But, one of the dwarves survived and, boy, was he angry. He ran from the burning remains, a plan of revenge coursing through his brains.

The tiger jumped off of the roof and scratched the dwarf hitting him down. But he missed and the boy kept on running and the tiger got really mad. So once he got up, the tiger chased him all the way up to the dwarf’s house since the door was too small the tiger went to locked the door then he went through the chimney. Then the tiger went to a tree and hid there so when the dwarf came he could attack. A wizard stopped it but the tiger dodged the attack. Then the wizard got really mad at the tiger because the tiger was destroying the world so the wizard went through a portal.

When he came out of the portal, he flew to the Potomac River and landed with a splash. It was a stormy night and the water was in big waves. The wizard couldn’t swim and he almost drowned. But, a ship came and picked him up and brought him to land. Then he got out but the tiger was running right towards him and pushed him down.

When he got up, he was back in the water so he swam to the shore and got up and ran to his house. The tiger snuck up into a tree before the wizard got in his house so he was already waiting for him. The tiger pushed him down and ate his wand. “Shoot!” The wizard knew he had to make the tiger spit it back out. How does one get a tiger to spit what it’s eaten? he asked himself. I could tickle him, he thought, or I could kick him in the throat he thought. I should probably tickle him, since I don’t want to make him any angrier than he already is.

So he tickled him and the tiger fell over because he was so ticklish and the wizard got his wand back and destroyed the tiger but he had a problem. The dwarf turned back on the wizard and the dwarf evolves but the wizard doesn’t know that and the dwarf knew were the wizard was so he ran into the woods and found him and ran out and tackle him and started fighting him.

First the dwarf began running circles around the wizard. He ran so fast, the wizard didn’t know that he was making a trap. Suddenly, the dwarf went underground and he cut a circle under the wizard’s feet. The wizard fell down and then dwarf covered up the hole with dirt. The wizard blasted open the top of the hole and yelled, “Diffindio!” which was a spell that spun the dwarf around until he fell unconscious. Then the wizard smashed him down into a huge hole and covered it up. But the dwarf was too strong and he broke out of the hole and punched the wizard in the face, then he saw the wizard’s wand on the ground. Then he picked it up and made the wizard vanish to another dimension.

At the other place, the wizard looked around confused. Where am I? he thought. Oh! I’m in another dimension. Trash was falling on him. Banana peels, old gallons of milk, and rotten cheese all fell on his head. Then he heard a shaking of an earthquake him. What on earth is going on? He looked around. There was metal dinging on the ceiling. With steel boxes as big as the Eiffel Tower! “Ah! I’m in a garbage truck! Where on earth is it taking me?! I’ve got to escape! Now!”Just then, he remembered that he had four seconds to get out or else he would be crushed. So he took a laser out of the trash and cut through the box. Then he used the laser and cut through the truck. He jumped down to the ground while the garbage truck sped away.

Then he went to a wand shop and bought a new wand. It was made of metal and titanium which was different than his other wand. When anyone tried to eat it, it would taser him or if they tried to take the wand it would taser them then too. “Expolamos,” he cried, making a circle with the wand above his head. He shot up into the sky into Earth.

Meanwhile, the dwarf had been looking for the wizard’s secrets. He was searching for the wizard’s actual name. Then the wizard came out of nowhere and shot his wand at the dwarf and the dwarf fell back onto the ground. An hour later the dwarf awoke but the wizard put on a spell that turned the dwarf into bell. It hurts because the kids were ringing the bell. So one day, when there was no moon, the dwarf broke out of the bell by using his super strength that came whenever the moon had disappeared. Then he started looking after the wizard’s secrets.

“I can see you’ve not learned your lesson,” said the wizard.

“You’ll learn yours!” said the dwarf. Then Evil Max came to save the dwarf. Evil Max looks like a huge monster. He has a good relationship with the dwarf because they’re both neighbors. His powers are invisibility, laser eyes, and jetpack feet.

“Oh, what do we have here? A wizard? Or a fish?” He laughed really hard.

The dwarf said, “A wizard!!!”

“Oh,” said Evil Max.

The whole time they were debating, the wizard was setting up a trap for both of them. Then when they both finished debating, the wizard was done with his trap. The trap was invisible so they couldn’t see it. So they walked right towards the trap and fell straight into the ground. They hit a spaceship that was flying underground and they flew into outer space and into another galaxy.

The wizard said, “Oh, he learned his lesson.”

 

THE END

The Secret Hunter

The burning sun beat down on my back as I intertwined the two pieces of golden straw. I worked intently, biting my chapped lips as the straw began to blend in with the rest of my basket. My masterpiece was halfway done, and I had been working on it for already half of the day, twisting and turning, while the sun burnt my bare back.

I looked up, setting my basket down onto the sand below my feet. In the distance, the sun was already starting to melt down the horizon, bursting with bright oranges, subtle yellows, majestic reds, and even tints of a soft green. It would be half an hour before the sun set, before Mama and Papa called me in for the nighttime meal.  I still had time to finish my basket, which would surely please my Mama. But I had been working on my basket for much of the day. I deserve a chance to have time to myself, I thought.

I stood up, brushing off dirt and sand from my clothes made of antelope-hide, and then began to walk over to the swimming hole. Clumps of sand crunched underneath my bare feet, as the sweet tune of the native sunbird carried out in musical waves in the beautiful sky above me.

It was a lovely day, perfect for exploring, running, and relaxing in the African savannah. Yet I was not permitted to do any of that. On this wonderful day, all I could do was weave a basket, and do all of the other womanly work that girls must do.

“Ebele!”

I whirled around. Imamu, one of the most daring boys of the tribe, was hanging off of the branch of an acacia tree, his long, strong legs dangling. He smiled at me.

“Look at me, Ebele! I am like the white monkey who swings atop the trees!”

His friends laughed around him, as Imamu let go of the tree, and fell towards the ground– only to land perfectly on the sand below him. I ran over to the tree.

“I would like to try!” I exclaimed.

I had just begun to place my foot onto a low branch, when suddenly, Imamu grabbed my arm, and pulled me down. He looked surprised at me, as did all of his friends.

“You are a girl, Ebele. The one who works around the home. Girls do not climb acacia trees.”

I did not reply. Instead, I looked down, and kicked a small, round pebble across the ground.

“Now, come, Ebele. It is almost time for supper.”

“But I was going to go to the swimming hole,” I began, but Imamu cut me off.

“There is no time.”

I sighed, and followed the group of boys back to the huts. I longed to climb the acacia tree. But Imamu was right. I could not. It was my job to weave baskets, to cook food, to clean up the huts. Men were the ones who hunted, explored, and climbed. Who did all of the things that I longed to do, but could not.

At dinner that night, all members of our tribe, which was known as Massai, gathered around a large fire. My Mama and I helped to serve everybody the meat from a fallow deer, before we were able to eat ourselves. When everybody was served, Mama, me, and all of the other women sat down to eat. As I munched on the juicy meat, I kept thinking back to today’s events.

“Mama?” I finally asked.

“Yes, Ebele?”

“Why must it be that men get to do adventurous activities while women must stay around the huts?”

Mama looked surprised at me.

“Ebele, men and women have their own jobs. We all help in our own ways.”

“I understand that, Mama. But why couldn’t the men cook and clean, and the women could hunt and explore?” I asked.

Mama cocked her head at me.

“This is just the way things work, Ebele. Now, finish your food. We would not want it to go to waste.”

Mama turned to talk to the woman next to her, and I turned back to my food. I gazed into the roaring fire, thinking. I needed to show Imamu and the rest of the men of our tribe that women were also capable of doing men’s jobs. But how?

The next morning, I woke up early to begin my chores. As I tidied up the tiny hut where I lived and collected wood for making a fire, I watched the men as they set off with their bows and arrows to hunt. Papa led the troop at the front. And suddenly, I had an idea.

Quickly, I swept the last bit of dust off of the floor of the hut, and ran over to Mama and Papa’s sleeping mat. Mama slept peacefully, but there was an empty space next to her where Papa usually slept.

“Mama,” I whispered.

Her black eyes fluttered open, and gazed up at me.

“I am going to go collect supplies to make a basket. I will come back in the afternoon.”

Mama nodded her head sleepily, and her eyes fluttered shut. I smiled. My idea was working.

Quickly, I slipped on my pair of moccasins, and took one of Papa’s bows and arrows from the shelf he had carved out when building our hut. Then I rushed out of the hut. I was a strong girl, so I ran quite quickly as I rushed to catch up with the men. I stayed back, waiting for them to fully disappear into the woods, and then, quiet as an elephant shrew, I went in after them.

I had never before been in the woods, so the surroundings were new to me. I gazed around myself in awe, at the tall, broad trees that ran along the sides of the path that the men always used. It was dark and cool in the forest, but very noisy, too. The forest was teeming with life. Although I could not see them, I could hear the sounds of animals everywhere – the chattering of baboons, the running of deer, the calls of albatrosses, the slithering of snakes. It was so different from the life I always lived at home, so much more exciting. I smiled, and then quickly crept along the trees, to catch up with the hunters.

We soon reached a clearing in the woods. Sunlight streamed through the trees, and I stayed back as the men stopped in front of me. Papa stood ahead of the group, looking around. Suddenly, one of the men, named Adebowale, let out a cry.

“The aardwolf! Men, I see an aardwolf!”

I gasped. An aardwolf! These very shy, nocturnal creatures were rarely seen by members of my tribe, yet they possessed some of the most juicy, delicious meat of all. I always heard men talking about how they longed to catch one of these animals, and now, here one was, for the first time.

I took a step forward out of the woods, my heart pounding. I watched as Papa’s eyes grew wide, and the hunters started whispering frantically to each other, as Adebowale pointed to a small, brown deer that was grazing in the shade of some trees. The men slowly affixed their arrows to their bows.

“Wait!”  Papa whispered.

The men turned toward him.

“It is much too difficult to catch the aardwolf with a bow and arrow.  It will be much easier to kill it using a dagger, yet we did not bring one. We must find another weapon to use.”

The men lowered their bows and arrows. The aardwolf had not spotted us yet, but it would soon. As the hunters looked around for something to use as a weapon, I did the same. Originally, I had only wanted to follow the men into the forest, and watch how they hunted. But now, I saw a chance to help, and I took it.

My eyes darted between the trees. A rock was too short and stubby to use as a dagger, and a piece of wood was not sharp enough. Suddenly, my eyes came to rest on a long, pointy stick that was resting against a tree. I looked up at the aardwolf. It was still grazing. Then, I glanced at the men. They were still searching. I smiled to myself, and I lifted up the stick. I took a step out from the trees, and held up the stick over my shoulder. I squeezed my eyes shut, and took careful aim at the aardwolf’s side. I knew that that was where I should be aiming, for I had listened many times to Papa’s conversations with his fellow hunters. Slowly, I walked farther out from the trees.

“Ebele!” I heard Papa shout.

I did not pay attention to his call. Instead, I drew back my arm, focused on the aardwolf….and released the stick.

I bit my lip as the stick shot forward. All of the hunters around me held their breaths… and the stick struck the aardwolf. I gasped, in shock at what I had just done. Around me, the men burst into shouts of cheer. I beamed, rushing over to kill the aardwolf, to put it out of its pain. As I tended to the creature, I heard running behind me.

“Ebele! Why are you in the woods? You should be at the hut, helping your Mama,” Papa exclaimed. The men around him nodded.

“I caught your aardwolf, Papa. I was the only one who saw the stick. I was a great help to you. If I had stayed home with Mama, the aardwolf might not have been caught.”

Papa gazed at me for a moment.

“You are right, Ebele. I am proud of you.”

He knelt down, and kissed me on the top of my head. Then, he helped me lift the aardwolf, and place it in a sling made of the strong hide of a fallow deer.

The other men gave me nods of appreciation as we began to walk out of the forest. I walked next to Papa, holding my head up high.

“I never thought that a girl could do such a wonderful thing,” Papa said, as we walked amongst the trees.

“Girls have the same abilities as men,” I said.

Papa nodded.

“I understand that now, Ebele. We will have a fine feast tonight, because of you.”

When we arrived back at the huts, everybody gathered around, while Papa told of what had happened. When he told of how I had killed the aardwolf, everyone gasped, and looked at me. And then, they all burst into applause. I even saw Mama at the front of the group, beaming up at me, her very own daughter.

“Ebele,” Papa said to me, when the clapping died down. “Will you join my hunting group? You are a fine hunter, and you will be a great help to my men.”

My eyes widened.

“Oh, yes, Papa! But only if the other women of Massai may join as well,”

Papa was quiet for a moment, but then he smiled.

“Yes. They may join if they would like.”

I looked out at the cheering women in front of me, and then at the men. Two equal genders, capable of doing the same things.

As I was walking back home, the sun setting behind me, I noticed a group of boys, in a huddle by the fire. They looked at me, their eyebrows narrowed, and I caught a glimpse of anger in their eyes. I walked slowly behind them, so that I could hear what came out of their mouths.

“How could Ebele’s father agree to this silly rule? Girls are not hunters. They are only made to clean the huts and cook us food.”

My eyes widened as Imamu said this.

“Ebele is sick in the head. She is a girl. I do not care if she caught the aardwolf, for that is not what she should have been doing,” Imamu’s brother snapped.

I walked on, for I had no longing to hear the rest of their words. Yes, people would not always agree that men and women were equal, despite all of our efforts to prove this. There would always be people who thought that women were only fit to work around the houses. Yet I knew that the women of Massai would prove themselves to be more than cleaners and cookers. Even if men such as Imamu did not agree.

Before I reached home, I made a final stop, at the acacia tree nearby. I let the wind play with my hair, as I placed my foot on a sturdy branch. I hesitated for just a moment. And then, I began to climb.

The Dog With Black Eyes

Now…

Aiki felt dizzy from her change. She rubbed her eyes and tried to focus. Staring at her were two pairs of black, watery, familiar eyes. She closed her eyes and tears went streaming out of her black eyes, remembering the details of what happened to her over the last two years.

Two Years Ago…

Aiki was nine before she was changed. She was running down the rocky stone path, crying and sobbing. Her mom and dad called her name.

“Aiki!” they shouted over and over.

Aiki never looked back. She never wanted to see them again. Why did they have to be in my life? she thought. This wouldn’t have happened if Mr. Goya had never appeared at their doorway.

Mr. Goya was a gangster. When people borrowed money, he would ask for more back. Aiki’s parents borrowed only $1.00 from him, but he is asking for $3,000. Ridiculous. And that is not all. He wanted to keep Aiki for her smartness. She was perfect in math, getting all A+’s. She could recite most of the Japanese history, knew a lot of science, and could write perfect essays. She was elected in all of her town to compete in the All Japan festival where she would compete against other kids for the prize. And the prize was $150,000. Aiki’s parents tried to hide in the town, but someone told him where Aiki was.

Mr. Goya wanted to pretend that Aiki was his daughter so he could get the second half of the prize: $35,000 for all of the parents. He wanted the prize money and the parent money. “I need Aiki, too. It is either me keeping Aiki or your whole family is going to jail,” Mr. Goya said.

Now, Aiki’s parents never wanted to go to jail. Or, they never even liked her. So they agreed that Aiki could be Mr. Goya’s “daughter.” Aiki overheard all of this from the kitchen. She quietly slipped through the back door and ran for the woods. She trampled through the tall grasses and scurried through the muddle of broken trees. She knew this place well. She always studied here and played here when she was little with her other neighborhood friends. She stopped short and rested on a fallen log beside a large rock for five minutes before she ran again. She ran deeper and deeper into the forest, jumping over tree roots and branches until making a complete stop. There in the woods sat a fairy in a blue, silky dress with faint teal wings. She was crying. Aiki ran up to her.

“Are you alright?” asked Aiki. Suddenly, the fairy zoomed across the sky-blue lake, leaving ripples on the surface. Aiki stumbled back in surprise.

“Who goes near me?” asked the fairy.

“Uh, l-l-I g-g-got l-l-lost…” stammered Aiki.

“What do you want?” asked the fairy.

“N-N-Nothing,” replied Aiki, still shaking from fright.

“I know what you want. You don’t want Mr. Goya to take you. Here is a disguise to last you two years,” and with that said, Aiki felt strange. Her arms scrunched up into the beige front paws of a dog. Her back legs became short, too.

“Woof! Woof!” barked Aiki, trying to say, “Why did you turn me into a dog?”

“Haha!” laughed the fairy and then she was off. Aiki felt unhappy. Just because of Mr. Goya, she thought. She ran to her house and licked her parent’s hands.

“What a cute dog!” her mother exclaimed. “Let’s keep her!”

And so, they did.

Two Years Later…

Aiki’s parents named the dog Aiki as well, which made Aiki laugh in her mind. Things were going so well, she even forgot she was a human. Her parents treated her 100 times better than when she was a human. She learned to not be afraid of Mr. Goya. She even forgot who he was. But she was a little sad. She wished she could tell her parents that she was Aiki. And also, she wished she even got to compete in the contest. She studied all year for it. But she pushed those thoughts away from her mind and imagined what the next day would bring. But one day, the fairy’s voice appeared in her head.

“In two years, you will be human,” the fairy repeated and repeated, her voice growing stronger each time.

Aiki wanted to see the fairy and ask her what she meant. Aiki never wanted to be a human again. She never wanted to have to run away from Mr. Goya again. Aiki ran out of the house and arrived at the fairy’s house. She couldn’t see the fairy. Aiki felt a little weird. Suddenly, her hind legs became human legs. The fore legs became her arms. The dog head became her head. She found herself in her old school uniform, which was clearly too short for her. She was spellbound.

“How could this work without the fairy?” she thought, her heart racing. She tried to run to her house. She wanted to tell her parents what happened. Well, she finished one of the two things. Aiki ran to her house, but she blacked out before she saw her parents. Her parents went outside and saw Aiki. They picked her up and carried her to her bed.

Now…

Aiki remembered all of those thoughts. She opened her eyes and saw her parents. She wiped her tears with her white school uniform sleeve that she was still wearing before she changed. She smiled and straightened herself into a sitting position. She was joyful to see them in her human form and she had many things to ask.

“What happened to Mr. Goya?” asked Aiki.

“He was killed by a fairy,” said the dad, who showed her a newspaper article. The fairy was using its powers to kill Mr. Goya in his fancy car.

Thanks fairy! thought Aiki.

“What about the contest?” asked Aiki.

“It was rescheduled. It is tomorrow by the way,” replied her mom.

“Really?” squealed Aiki. She leaped from the bed and grabbed her books and ran to the forest. She read and read. She was bothered by the pecking sound. She looked up to see what it was. Aiki smiled when she saw the fairy, grinning and holding up the newspaper all about her and Mr. Goya. Aiki returned home and talked more with her parents.

“You know, Aiki, we had an Akita dog. We named it after you. It had the same eyes as you, but she ran away. I wanted you to meet her…” her dad said.

Aiki smiled to herself.

 

The Unlikely

Chapter One: I’m Lizzie

 

Hello, my name is Lizzie, I’m 11 1/2. I perform at the Rose Theater in England. Today, I perform “Alex and Alex II.” I play Ida.

 

I’m going to tell you a story about a strange thing that happened to me.

 

“Lizzie, do you know where my prop is?” Ron asked. I reached for pink flowers with brown stems and handed it to Ron.

 

I finished my costume and went back to my teeny-tiny apartment. I looked at my savings jar. There were three sides — Spend, Save, Share. I used to be an orphan, but when only three orphans were left (including me) the caretaker bought us each a tiny house, and bought us each a dog. And that’s why I live alone.

 

I felt a lick. It was my dog, Lucy-Rosie.

 

“Hi girl! I’ll feed you right now,” I said. “Here’s your food.” I gave my dog a bit of dog food and washed her. She was very dirty.

 

Now back to my savings jar. I have one nickel, two quarters and three dimes. I realized I left my rainbow earmuffs from Gemma at Ron’s garage, where we were practicing.

 

Chapter Two: Bows and Buses, and a Strange Visitor

 

I tried to find a nickel to see if I could buy a bit of ribbon to tie a bow for my costume. After I found the nickel and made the ribbon, I got on a bus. I found a seat in the back — the only one left. I found a candy wrapper and tied it into a bow. (Did I mention I’m good at making bows?)

 

When I got off the bus for the second time, I put my earmuffs on and I walked inside. I noticed that my window was open and my dog was gone. I thought my dog was hiding, because the closet door was open and I could smell her wet fur.

 

Then a pretty red-head came in and said, “I think I found your dog!” She showed me a golden retriever with a pink bow and a pink leather jacket. It wasn’t my dog.

 

There was a very pretty teal pouch lying by the dog. I saw the girl run away. I think she might have been rich, I thought.

 

“Wait!” I said, but it was too late. She was gone.

 

I saw a very pretty pink card with sparkles on it. I opened it. It said:

 

Dear Poor Girl,

You can keep the puppy and what’s inside the pouch.

From,

Emily W

 

There was a gift card for H&L. I’ve never been to H&L, but my half-sister works there.

 

Just then, my best friend walked in with Lucy-Rosie.

 

Chapter Three: I Tell My Friend…

 

“The weirdest thing happened!” I announced. “A girl named E-”

 

“Well? Tell me what happened!”

 

“I shouldn’t tell you. You’re gonna be afraid. You’re a scaredy-cat.”

 

“No I’m not!” Elizabeth said, shaking her head.

 

“Can you give me a ride to H&L?” I asked.

 

“But…oh, okay.”

 

I got into a wagon with two horses.

 

Chapter Four: H&L

 

“Wow, can I buy anything here?” I looked at my gift card. How could this be? I knew she was rich, but I didn’t know she could get me a…I gasped.

 

It was a $100,000 gift card!

 

The first thing I found was a white tank top, very plain, but I turned it around and there was a package of fabric markers. “I like it,” I whispered, and I plopped it into my cart. Next, I went up two flights to a sign that said “Dog Clothes.”

 

“Oh, my!” I gasped. I saw the most beautiful jacket that comes for you and your dog. And then I saw a pretty red tee-shirt for my dog also. “I’ll buy this stuff!” I whispered loudly as I plopped it into my cart.

My Days as a Spy

I woke up this morning and realized I overslept. I threw on some clothes and ran out the door. I was just in time for the school bus to pick me up. I hopped on the bus, running to take my usual spot, next to my best friend, James. He looked very tired, I noticed. I pretended to be even more tired.

“Why are you so tired?” he asked.

“Oh, um, I- I was up doing homework, obviously.” I lied to make myself seem like a better person. James yawned loudly. He stretched his arms and pressed his nose on the window so it would be foggy. Then he wiped off all the fog. I fake yawned even more loudly and hoped it sounded real. I hoped he was not playing video games until 1:00 in the morning because I was only playing until 11:00 at night! I can’t let him know that. “Why are you so tired?” I asked suddenly.

“I was up doing homework until 12:00,” he replied.

I took a deep breath. “Yes,” I said to myself. I finished my homework at 8:00.

Suddenly, the bus came to a stop. We arrived at school. I walked as slowly as possible out of the bus and to the doors that led to the inside of my school. There was a large fountain with water pouring down outside the school. This girl, I’m not sure what her name was, had her shoulders up and looked tense. When she walked past the fountain, her shoulders went down and her face relaxed. She looked back at the water, and then bumped into a pole. The sound of the water seemed to calm or distract her. I chuckled to myself.

“You don’t see someone that ignorant everyday,” I said to James and patted him on the back.

When I entered school I dragged myself to the poetry room with my crazy and hippie teacher, Ms. Williams. Today we were going to write poems, I remembered.

“Think of things you like and your poem will arrive in your head,” she told my class and hopped around in a whimsical way. So I did what she told me and thought of things I liked. I made a list in my head. 1: Me. 2: Frappuccinos from Starbucks. 3: I can’t think of anything else. I sat there for a long time. I even tried hopping around in a whimsical way with my hands together and one leg in the air, but the poem never arrived.

I told Ms. Williams that I had poet’s block.

“Improbable!” she yelled at me. I turned my head with a dumb look on my face. It can’t be me she’s yelling at, I’m perfect. “I’m talking to you Zach!” she screamed at me. I stared blankly at her face, my mouth hanging down, drooling. Why would she yell at me? Something told me at that moment, something weird was going on with my usual calm, relaxed, peaceful, and hippie poem writing teacher especially because of the fact that out of everyone, she decided to yell at me, the perfect one. I intended to find out exactly what was going on. Just if you were wondering, it’s not like I’m worried about Ms. Williams. People say I’m nosy, but I prefer to say I like to know what’s going on with other people.

 

Spy Day 1

I woke up early this morning because I wanted to look as snazzy as an actual spy. I put on my cool, black sunglasses, my flashy watch, and wore a fedora hat to get myself in character. I looked so cool. I hoped no one would question my outfit. Wait, but why would they? I always look stylish. I told my mom I was leaving early today to get a frappuccino from Starbucks, but actually I was going to use my Starbucks money to take a cab to school since I was too early for the bus. I adore how tricky I am. Sorry, back to the plan. When I got there early, I would locate Ms. Williams and stalk her all day. I would ditch all of my classes which I do all the time because I’m way too good for school.

I walked like I was in a hip-hop performance to the cab, got in and directed the driver to Millsbury school. I’m as cool as a cucumber. Don’t tell anyone I just said that. Geez, “cool as a cucumber,” where did I get that from, my mom?

Anyways, ten minutes later, we were there and my search began. The driver handed me his card and said, “Good luck, kid.” Then he winked at me. It was like he knew me and everything I was going to do.

“See you soon,” I said that because I knew I would call him again.

When I walked inside the school, I saw a janitor on the phone with someone. I don’t think that he saw me because he was talking about how bratty and snobby the kids are at our school. How we don’t pick up our trash, don’t clean up our spills, and so on. I wanted to yell at him and fight back but, no, I remembered that I must remain unnoticed when I am a spy.

“This is going to be harder than I thought,” I said to myself.

I ran around the corner to the stairwell and didn’t look back. I hoped to find Ms. Williams sitting in the teachers’ lounge, but I know things aren’t usually that easy. If she is in there, there will probably be a catch. So when I went upstairs, I remembered that I had to expect the unexpected. I guess I’m just cool like that. I attempted to do a forward roll but I failed and landed on my stomach. I got up, brushed myself off and pretended like nothing happened. I looked back at the stairwell. Anyone could be following me at any moment. When I finally got to the teachers’ lounge, I peeked through the window to find Principal Blinkman giving Ms. Williams a lecture. What?! What did she do wrong?! I made a list in my head. 1:Calling me, her star student, out. 2: Making things sound very easy.

“Never mind,” I said to myself.

I decided that I wasn’t going to skip my classes because I do it so often that I was going to fail 5th grade. Lets just say I’m sort of regretting skipping yoga and math all the time so I could go to Emack and Bolio’s with my friends. As you could probably not imagine because you most likely have NOT ever been a spy before, I couldn’t stop thinking about the lecture all day.

Sorry about that guys. I’m just really cranky and annoyed at myself because I missed my chance to figure this out. Well, I’ll get back to you guys tomorrow. I have to go do my homework. (Did you get that joke? Who actually puts effort into their homework?)

 

Spy Day 2

Today, I’m a pro spy. I have experience and I know how to look cool doing everything. I’m even better than Mary Poppins. After all, she’s only practically perfect. I wore the same hat and watch and an all black outfit. I got compliments from everyone yesterday. Again, I lied to my mom. I called the taxi driver. I got in the cab and the driver already knew where I was going. I knew that I wasn’t going to mess this up today.

I didn’t talk to the taxi driver that day. He didn’t talk to me. It was silent. I think he was on to me. I don’t know if I will call him again. He looked at the back seat and said, “See you in ten years.” What’s that supposed to mean? He’s really freaking me out now. My final decision: no tip today.

I got to school and saw the same janitor, but this time, he was waiting for me.

“Look, it’s a bird,” I yelled.

“What?” he said stupidly and turned his head around. I didn’t think I could get by that easily. I ran up and peered in the teachers lounge again. This time Ms. Williams and Principal Blinkman were walking in and left the door open. All the other teachers rushed in and sat down rapidly. The door remained open.

“We have a very special announcement for you,” said Principal Blinkman.

“We are getting married,” squealed Ms. Williams with delight! My mouth dropped open and made the shape of an “O”. I’m done now. No more spying for me. Three words: Too much information.

 

Spy Day 3

Sorry guys. I was overreacting. Wait – or was I? You guys wouldn’t know how much stress this is, because you’re obviously not spies. And even if you were, you would never find out anything because you would be terrible spies, unlike me. So you know what? I’m gonna go back to bed, and stop spying because you guys are being so sassy. You already know too much! Goodbye. Mission accomplished.

 

Epilogue

This was written in the year 2005, when Zach was in 5th grade. Today, in the year 2015, Zach is an international spy. He has never forgotten you, but is afraid to talk to you again. He wishes that I tell you thank you, from him.

 

Sincerely,

Zach’s guardian angel, the taxi driver

Vroom Vroom

The car screeches across the asphalt and I groan under my breath as I press myself to the seat. The ringing of police sirens fills my ears, and if I’m even more unlucky, I might go deaf. I press my sandaled foot to the pedal, screeching at the same time the car does. It makes a strange sound and I notice I’ll have to get that checked out. Add that to my agenda, as if it wasn’t full enough already.

I squint and turn my head to the side, gripping the wheel and leaning forward. I’m on an unlucky streak. When I got my driver’s license, my supposed friends made me drive us to Las Vegas, where we would party for a week or three to celebrate this newfound freedom. Freedom isn’t all it’s cracked up to be though, especially when all of your friends think it’s a good idea to trash a casino with celebrities hanging out in it, for example, Katy Perry or Justin Bieber, who they may or may not have screamed at multiple times and gambled with. And lost your money. And then when they continuously scream at you-

“DRIVE!” Barley shouts into my ear, and I nudge him in the ribs. He’s riding shotgun next to me, but Madeline is leaning forward to yell at me too from the backseat.

But who cares where they’re sitting? It doesn’t matter right now, as we’ve already done something illegal.

I press the pedal harder, looking into the mirror at the cops. Lights flash by me, blue and red and green and yellow, all the colors in the rainbow blended to brightness that brings tears to my eyes. Barley rolls down the windows and I know it will be soon that we’ll be sweating as the hot air slams our faces.

“Air conditioning, Yasmine?” Madeline begs, but I shake my head breathlessly as the city flashes by us. Or maybe we flash by the city, I can’t tell. “Mad, we’re in a car chase in probably one of the craziest cities in the world. I’m beginning to know why we call you Mad.”

She rolls her eyes but keeps looking forwards, twitching nervously. I control my breathing and watch the array of colors smooth by. We crash through the parade, but thankfully don’t run anybody over. We’re in enough trouble. Barley yells a warning and I quickly avert the civilians with weird hair and colorful clothes and terribly applied makeup. And lots of bald guys that have the city lights reflecting on their shiny heads.

“This is bad,” Barley says tersely.

I roll my eyes. “Did that just occur to you? You can’t fool Barley, oh no! He might not look like the brightest crayon in the box-”
“Yasmine, one more insult about my intelligence and I’ll throw you out of this car,” He warns. I wave the remark off with my free, sweaty hand, but then attach it onto the wheel again.

“It’s my car. Good luck outrunning the cops.”

The wind whips my hair that has large, rainbow streaks dyed in it. Mad screams as people dart out of our way, clearing a path for another large car.

“Get ready to swerve it,” I inform my friends, making another unwise, stupid decision of a large array of unwise, stupid decisions.

“Oh, no,” Barley says hoarsely. “No. Yasmine, you’re not going to-”
“Shut up, Barely,” Mad chimes, leaning forward and grabbing his arm and screaming as we dart around the car, and I wince as we keep going. My instructor told me I was an excellent driver. I am, when I’m not in the midst of fear.

I wipe my rainbowed hair out of my eyes.

“We done?” Mad asks, trembling.

“Car chases never finish, oh dear Madeline.”

Life’s a Mess

August.12.1986

Lab

 

Heart beating and racing.

Pulse strong,

fast.

Words floating in my head randomly.

People treating my life as just a retrospective,

the way I live.

Facing the threatening fear of

DEATH.

 

August.13.1986

Truck

 

Blood pouring from my chest,

down to my numb,

pale legs.

Crawling hands feel like they’re climbing up

my spine.

Tickles make me nauseous.

Flash back:

lhkjk! mggfusti! io!

(Don’t take my precious daughter! What are you doing! NO!)

kjdgkj!jhfsdh!

(Sorry! I can’t help it!)

kjkjsgggskg,jsgjkg! jfshsdffdk!

(What’s going on! Stop this!)

 

*Bleep* is all I hear,

now chattering.

Heavy woman carrying me now.

Tears roll down my cheeks heavily.

I seriously can’t take control of this.

 

Anonymous

August.13.1986

To Mr.Pres

 

The alien is caught! Can’t you believe it!

 

SoORrY! CANt wRiTE!

Gernemrwer BLOdb

 

{Same Day}

 

I was

craving this.

Delicious humans

this planet

brings!

*Lips

licking.*

 

August.14.1986

?

 

Escaped.

 

August.15.1986

Girl’s House

 

Saw girl.

Followed her.

Girl has dark hood.

Demonic prayers?

Beady,

crimson eyes.

Hands like claws.

Wings like thy raven.

Left dark,

mysterious trail.

 

Ever so

 

Peculiar.

 

The girl gave me

a dark stare.

“Curse her!” The girl mumbled into the darkness.

She snapped her cloak sharply.

Observed a book

laying on desk.

Force brought it

to her.

Calamine air filled

the room.

So very

 

suspenseful.

 

I followed her anyway.

 

She walked into a portal leading into a dark cave with a shrine. She took off her hood and a beam rose to the sky, making a hole in the cave and in clouds straight in the sky.

“Ugh, I can’t control this!” The demon girl exclaimed. She lit out her match with the tip of one of her fingers; if I did that, I would melt!*

She fainted.

 

*I’m made out of slime even though I have some normal human body functions.

 

The candle flew out in the peculiar shade of aeneous which transformed into a neon orange and then into pure cinerious,  making the delicate candle burn into ash. I blew the now lukewarm candle and formed a flame with my slime.

 

August.16.1986

Slime Shack

 

Inside the cave, I made myself a shack,

a slime

shack.

Where I held my

insecure feelings.

Specifically

about this new

earth culture.

Suddenly,

a boy

in a dark cloak

walked up to me,

handed me a

burnt

rose.

 

You couldn’t tell if he was blushing under his dark cloak. You also couldn’t if I were “blushing” because I’m just formed slime. Even though I did smile awkwardly.

 

August.17.1986

Back at girl’s house

 

The girl is back at

her cave.

She put

her amulet

on.

It

unleashed

another solar

beam.

Suddenly,

she broke the amulet

in half;

in two halves.

And the boy fell

out of the middle of those two halves.

But this time,

he completely

ignored

me.

*TEAR*

 

August.18.1986

Still at girl’s house

 

Girl found me,

locked me into

a

cage.

I think I locked myself

into a metaphoric

cage.

I’m not out of this cage,

but I’m walking,

civilized.

Little bits of slime,

falling off,

in this heat.

This

heat

wave

of

metaphoric

infinites.

 

August.19.1986

Locked in my own heart

 

Out of this

metaphoric

cage.

Now I’m locked into my own

 

HEART.

 

IN IT’S DARKEST DESIRES, DEEPEST NEEDS, PLAIN ME, MY LIFE

 

HOODED UP IN A DOME.

THE DOME.

zzzzzzzz

 

THE DATE DOESN’T MATTER AT ALL

IN INFINITES WE LIVE

IN THE DOME

 

DARKNESS FROLICING IN THIS DOME

MY DOME

IT’S NOT LIKE ME

AT ALL

I SEE THE BOY

IN A CAGE IN MY HEART

I LOCK HIM OUT

HE PLANTS

A KISS

ON ME

I KNOW

IT’S

NOT

ACTUALLY HIM,

IT’S

IN

MY

SLIMEHEART

RIGHT NOW

I DON’T CARE.

 

HE HANDS ME THE SAME

AMULET THAT

THE

DEMON

GIRL

HAD

IT’S

THE

EXACT

REPLICA.

 

INSIDE,

THERE’S A

SWORD

WITH

A

SUPERSHARP

BLADE.

I LIFT IT OUT AND

KILL

MY

HEART.

 

A

GIRL

POPS

OUT

ME.

I’m not me.

 

blonde,

frizzy

hair

beady

blue

eyes

rosey

shirt

I’ve

been

brainwashed

for

all

these

years.

 

END.

 

 

 

 

The Portal of Fiction

Crystal woke up, finding herself in her bedroom. It was quite dreary in her room, so she turned on the lamp. She grabbed a book from her desk. It was a Heroes of Olympus book by Rick Riordan called The Blood of Olympus. She was very fond of this book. It had so many twists and surprises which kept her at the edge of her seat. Crystal sat down near her lamp, turned it on to a dim light and started reading in the shadows. She wished that the characters in her book were real. But they’re in a fictional world, Crystal thought. And I’m here, in reality. She continued to read. She was at the part where three characters— Leo, Frank, and Hazel —were meeting Apollo and Artemis to seek help. Crystal glanced at the clock hanging on the wall. It was 6:30 a.m., so Crystal decided to get ready to go to school. She put her homework in her backpack, and then put her book in there, too. Half an hour passed. Crystal exited her house, and walked towards the bus stop. She looked up at the gloomy sky.

“I wish that the characters in my book were real,” Crystal said, still staring at the ominous sky as if her wish would come true. She thought that her wish would never come true, but she was wrong. After one month, Crystal’s wish came to life.

 

It was May. Crystal had finished her book a while ago. Her wish was still in mind, but she was convinced that it wouldn’t happen. She looked outside, and it seemed pretty warm out, the usual spring weather. She texted her friend: Hey do you want to go running 2day? Her friend didn’t reply, so Crystal continued to stare out the window. It was suddenly cloudy and windy, as if the sun decided that Crystal’s neighborhood wasn’t worthy enough to shine on. She raced down the stairs to get a snack.

“Real sunny, don’t you think? You should go running with one of your friends,” Crystal’s dad said. Crystal raised an eyebrow.

“Dad, it’s cloudy and really windy right now. Not the right weather for running,” Crystal replied. Her dad looked outside and shook his head.

“It’s still sunny out, Crystal. Take a look,” Crystal’s dad said. She took a look. It was still windy, and she pointed that out. Her dad took a picture with his phone and showed the picture to Crystal. The sun shined brightly.

“What? But it’s….” Crystal decided not to argue anymore. I guess that if it really is nice outside I could go for a walk, Crystal thought. She put on her running shoes and went out onto her porch. It was still really windy, but this time it was stronger. The wind caused her to fly out of her porch and onto hard cement, far away from her beloved home. The wind was even stronger there, because this was where the wind was coming from. Crystal looked up and saw a giant shape over six feet tall. The exterior was amazing. With obsidian outlines, the shape was made out of diamonds. At the edges were…Percy Jackson books? Crystal discovered that the shape she was staring at…was a portal. Purple and blue sparks were everywhere, and inside the rectangle she could see hills and trees.

“I’m going in,” Crystal said. With her foot shaking, she stepped inside the portal.

 

Crystal did not want to leave. The first thought that entered her mind was, “Woah.” Across the meadow she could see a familiar pathway. Crystal approached an entrance, reading the words carved on the arch. “CAMP HALF-BLOOD,” she read. Her eyes widened and were as big as quarters. No way. Even if this was real, I can only pass if I’m a demigod, Crystal thought. She decided to step in anyway. However, Crystal passed. She stood there, shocked. A boy quickly approached to snap her back into reality.

“A new demigod? Did a satyr take you or…” The boy stopped talking as a centaur approached.

“Percy, remember that the barrier is broken. She could be a mortal. Remember that.”

Crystal gasped as the centaur said those words.

You’re Percy Jackson?! Wait… it all makes sense…” Crystal thought for a moment. In the books, Percy was described as a tall boy with sea green eyes and black ruffled hair. This boy had met all of the criteria.  And the centaur was probably Chiron! Before Crystal could say anything, Percy replied.

“Um, yeah I am Percy Jackson. Listen, I really don’t care if you’re a mortal, but we need all the help we can get.” Crystal had a puzzled look on her face.

“Huh?” she asked. Chiron sighed.

“Luke Castellan has returned, with a so called ‘friend,’” he explained. Crystal’s eyes widened, and if anyone looked closely they might have seen the fear in her brown eyes.

What?! B-but Luke’s good now, right? I mean, he stabbed himself in his Achilles’ heel in order to stop Kronos.”

In The Last Olympian, Luke Castellan was the hero of the great prophecy all along, and had turned to the good side at the last second. Chiron went silent, not even bothering to answer Crystal’s question.

“Percy, just… Tell Annabeth that we have a newcomer and uh, show her around. Crystal needs some armor, a weapon and a lot of training,” Chiron muttered. Percy nodded and motion for Crystal to follow him.

“Are you diagnosed with ADHD?” Percy asked, and Crystal knew exactly why he had asked it― it helped demigods fight monsters. She nodded.

“Yeah. Really stinks, but now I guess it can help me fight Luke and his sidekick,” Crystal replied, smiling to keep up the spirit. Percy smiled back, but Crystal could immediately tell that the smile was forced.

 

Camp Half Blood was packed. Even though Crystal had read all about the storage room for battle gear, she was still amazed. Daggers and swords were stacked against the walls, and hanging armor caught Crystal’s eye. She studied a celestial bronze sword, and she could tell that it was one of her favorites. Earlier, Percy had gotten Annabeth, a close companion, to show Crystal around camp, mainly because he needed to talk to Annabeth eyed Crystal examining the gleaming blade.

“I have a feeling that that sword is the one for you, Crystal. I know it,” Annabeth said with a lopsided smile. While touching the sharp sword, Crystal nodded.

“Yeah… I’ll pick this one.” Crystal replied, and Annabeth nodded back.

“Take it. Anyway, Crystal, what’s home like to you? I want to get a good backstory, like, I want to get to know you,” Annabeth said. Crystal sighed, remembering how earlier she explained her world to Annabeth.

“I kind of miss home, even though I’ve only been here for a few hours. Like, what’s happening back in my world? Hey, that reminds me… Will I ever get back home?” she asked. Now it was Annabeth’s turn to sigh.

“To be honest, I really don’t know, but I have done some calculations… ” Annabeth took out a folded piece of paper from her pocket.

“According to this paper, you got here through a portal, bringing you to this world. The difference between our world is that you’re reality and we’re from a book. Crystal, how exactly is that true? I’m not fictional, I’m a true being, I’m living a life,” Annabeth said with a puzzled look on her face.

“Well it’s hard to explain, you know? You’re part of this book series called― ” A rumbling sound interrupted Crystal’s reply. Demigods shouted their battle cries while raising their weapons. Some frantically rushed into the storage room, the same exact place where Crystal and Annabeth were, and grabbed armor.

“What’s going on?!” Annabeth screamed over the noise. Clarisse turned to her.

“Luke’s arrived, nit-wit! Get in gear!” Clarisse yelled back. Crystal remembered how Clarisse and Annabeth didn’t get along as well.

“What do I do?” she asked Annabeth, hoping she could hear her over the roaring noise. She seemed to hear her perfectly.

“Grab your sword. It’s time for your first battle!”

 

Battle was horror. Everyone was screaming or yelling, while some of the demigod leaders were trying to get control. Crystal could see Luke’s figure. He was tall and no longer wore a Camp Half-Blood shirt. By his side was a much smaller figure. Squinting, Crystal could see the figure’s features. He also had blonde hair, and dug his knife through a teddy bear. Crystal’s face fell. The ‘sidekick’ was Octavian, the main villain of the Heroes of Olympus series. She found Percy yelling at his peers, so she grabbed his arm when she had the chance.

“That guy with Luke is Octavian! He wants to take over our camp and he’s not Greek!” Crystal hissed. Percy’s face was blank.

“Then what is he? A mortal?” He asked.

“No, Roman! It’s really hard to―” Before she could finish, Octavian’s voice boomed through the air.

“Listen up, you stupid Greeks! I have a whole camp with me, and I finally convinced them that Greeks are dumb and do nothing for us Romans!” Demigods murmured after he had said those very words. Octavian continued to speak.

“Many Romans had objected, and said that I was wrong. What are their names? Oh, Jason, Reyna, Hazel, and Frank. I plan on killing them, after I take over this camp! Romans— ATTACK!” Swords flew through the air.

Someone grabbed Crystal. She turned around to see who it was, and it was Percy.

“We need to talk about this alone,” he said seriously. They turned to escape the battle, but two Romans approached. Percy took out his pen and opened it, revealing his sword, Riptide.

“Get out,” he growled at the Romans. They took out their swords and slashed at Percy. He dodged it right away and pulled Crystal’s arm, but the Romans wouldn’t let her pass. They slashed at her too and she almost was cut badly. She grabbed her sword and swung it at them as hard as she could.

“Curse you, Greek. All of you belong in Tartarus! You’re weak anyways. Ryan and I can take you both down.” The Roman had spoke in a gruff voice, and had also cursed under his breath. Ryan, nodded. They were both distracted and was focusing on Crystal. Right behind them, Percy swung Riptide and the Romans cursed.

“Dang it Greek!” Ryan yelled and slashed back, giving Percy a huge cut. The other Roman hit Crystal, and she screamed as she fell to the ground. Before she passed out, she only had one thought left in her mind. I want to go home.

 

“Crystal, it’s okay.” She heard these words spoken by a familiar voice— Percy’s voice. Crystal got up, and saw that she was in the infirmary.

“Oh, hey. You weren’t hit as badly as… others,” Percy spoke weakly. She turned around and saw what Percy meant. Campers were groaning in pain, and the Apollo kids were doing the best they could to help.

“The sword hit you, but it’s a small cut. I think I knocked down those Romans, though.” Percy didn’t say anything else. Just then, Will Solace, a well known Apollo kid, had walked up to Percy.

“I’ve had it!” Will yelled. “Those stupid people, the Romans, are freaking killing us. We’re losing a whole bunch of people!” Annabeth walked up.

“He’s right. Many demigods were killed. Anyway, I was eavesdropping on Octavian and Luke. They’re planning a bigger attack by the end of the month,” Annabeth informed. Another Apollo kid raced up to Will and whispered something to his ear. Will frowned, and said nothing for a minute or two.

“Annabeth, this is really hard to say but—”

“What?!” Annabeth interrupted with a concerned face. He sighed, and finally replied back.

“Your half-brother died in battle. It was Malcolm… Sorry Annabeth..” Will drifted off. Annabeth was silent. Crystal could see a tear rolling down her cheek. Malcolm was the second in command in the Athena cabin. He had done so much for Annabeth. He’d lead the Athena cabin to battle while Annabeth was with Percy. Percy embraced Annabeth, and she cried. Even Crystal felt like crying, because she knew what it was like to lose family. When she was two years old, her mom was in a car accident. Everyday, Crystal would ask her dad: “When will Mommy come home?” Her dad would leave the room, and she would hear faint crying sounds. After a week, her dad would stop leaving the room, and say: “She went on a trip, Crystal. Just a few more days and she’ll be home, I promise.” Of course, this promise was always broken. When Crystal grew older, she understood that her mom took a drive to heaven, and was going to stay there forever.

Annabeth raged.

“No matter what, Greeks will completely destroy these Romans!” Annabeth yelled loudly. Percy flinched, as she was right next to him. Crystal decided to say something supportive, but instead she said something else.

“I need to go home!” Crystal blurted out. No one really cared too much about what she said, except for Percy and Annabeth.

“You sure? I mean, you have potential you know…” Annabeth was about to say many reasons why Crystal was needed, but Percy cut her off.

“Sure. I mean, after all, this isn’t your home. Annabeth can calculate when the portal could be opened, and you can go home,” he said. Of course, Annabeth disapproved, and she pulled him aside for a little talk. Even though they were at the back of the infirmary, Crystal was still able to hear them.

“She can’t leave, Seaweed Brain,” Annabeth insisted. “We need her. She’s important.”

“It’s her choice, Wise Girl,” Percy shot back. “Besides, no mortal can be used to having battles every five minutes.” He grinned when she finally gave in. They returned to Crystal.

“As soon as I know where the portal will appear, you can travel home,” Annabeth said. Crystal felt like smiling, but couldn’t. She really wanted to know how the fight would turn out. After all, she was the only one who knew information about the Romans or Octavian. Then again, she wasn’t that brave and wasn’t a risk taker. She could never stand a chance against Luke. Annabeth sat down, writing equations about the portal arrival and whatnot.

“You can head to my cabin if you want. You might as well explore the camp, actually. I’ll come with you,” Percy said to Crystal.They exited the infirmary and looked at the cabins of the demigods. The cabins were all in the shape of a U. Crystal explored each cabin, but her smile immediately dropped when she saw the Athena cabin. She heard faint crying sounds, and she knew why the demigods were crying— because of the death of Malcolm.

Putting his hand on her shoulder, Percy said, “We shouldn’t bother them.”

Crystal agreed. They left, and bumped into Tyson, Percy’s half brother who was also a cyclops.

“Hi brother!” Tyson said cheerfully.

“Who is your friend?” Percy chuckled.

“This is Crystal,” he said. Tyson nodded, and spoke about working in Poseidon’s underwater palace. It took a few minutes, and then Annabeth suddenly raced up to Percy.

“Seaweed Brain, I figured it out. In about a few days, the portal will arrive, and Crystal can get home,” she said. Crystal came up to her,with her face all red.

“A few freaking days?! I need to go home now!” she yelled. Annabeth backed away from her.

“Sorry, but it’s just the portal’s arrival and speed. I can’t change that for your needs.” She stalked off into the Athena cabin, and everyone could hear her trying to calm down her cabin mates.

“Where do I sleep?” Crystal groaned.

“You can sleep in the Hermes cabin,” Percy suggested.

“Fine,” Crystal mumbled. “When do I get home?”

“Don’t ask me.” He shrugged. Percy left, as it was getting late. Crystal decided to get some rest. She introduced herself to the eight people in the Hermes cabin. There would usually be a lot more, but too many of the demigods were killed. Crystal felt uncomfortable in her bed, but managed to get some sleep. It was a very dreamless sleep.

 

Days passed by. Crystal spent most of her time training. She was taught how to use her sword properly by Percy. Sometimes Annabeth would come by, asking about the Romans. She also tried bringing up what Crystal had said about her being in a book, but Crystal often changed the subject. She didn’t know what to say, and the thought process behind it drove her crazy. How exactly were fictional characters real? Crystal had decided not to think about it. After four days, Annabeth calculated that the portal would come in the afternoon, near the entrance to Camp Half-Blood. Once she had told Crystal, she had never seen such happiness from someone else. Crystal waited out until the portal had come. She checked her watch: 11:52 p.m. She glanced further through the field, and gasped. The Romans had come back.

“Oh my Gods!” Crystal screamed. “They’re coming right now!” Other yelled while pushing through into the storage area, and other groaned, clearly annoyed of the incoming event. Soon enough there was a whole battle going on.

“What the freaking heck Greeks, we beat you last time! Stop trying to fight us.” Octavion groaned, while Luke looked disgusted to have a partner like him. A portal zapped at the entrance. Crystal immediately ran towards it. She had stopped when she heard a terrifying yell. It was Percy. Luke smiled for a few seconds, but had frowned.

“What the hell!” Luke yelled at the Roman demigod. “I wanted him alive!” Crystal stood there, with her mouth wide open.

“Percy!” Annabeth screamed, pushing through. No one paid attention, they just kept fighting each other. Crystal came racing too, worried about her favorite character in the series.

“Fight, Annabeth. This is really dumb to die at a time like this, huh?” Percy mumbled.

“Seaweed Brain! You drive me crazy with those words! Here have some―” Annabeth started to get ambrosia, but Crystal stopped her.

“It’s too late,” she whimpered. “Percy’s dead.”

 

Annabeth cried. She was sobbing nonstop. She looked up to see Luke Castellan standing above her. He still had his scar, running down to his chin.

“Sorry,” he said. “I wanted him stay alive but hey, battle is battle.” Luke clenched his teeth together. Crystal tried hard not to punch his face. Annabeth turned to her.

“What are you doing?! The portal!” She reminded her. Alarmed, Crystal headed straight for the obsidian shape she had once saw. One foot was in.

“This is not what Apollo wanted!” Will Solace yelled at the top of his lungs. Octavian was a son of Apollo too.

“Kill the demigod scum,” Octavian said cruelly. At once, Romans had stabbed at Will, leaving him to die.

This world is vicious, Crystal thought. Too much violence. She shut her eyes. I need to help this place overcome this terrible battle. I choose not to go home. One foot was out. Taking her sword, she yelled, stabbing as many enemies as she could.

“Stop!” Luke Castellan said to her. Taking her arm, he shoved her into the empty Hermes cabin.

“We need to beat that stupid Octavian. He is unbearable!” Luke said sharply.

“Don’t you want to take over the Greeks and Romans? Or destroy Mount Olympus?” Crystal gritted her teeth. Luke rolled his eyes in return.

“Listen, I know that was all a big mistake. But Octavian is crazy. His orders are terrible, and he’s getting on my nerves. Some darn kid barking at me? Ugh,” he said, followed by a curse. Crystal wanted to believe him, but she still wasn’t so sure. Luke seemed to know what she was thinking.

“You want some proof that I’m against Octavian? Jason, Reyna, Hazel, and Frank! Come out,” Luke said. The four people shuffled out from a hidden wall.

“Luke!” Jason said with a frown. “There’s a demigod right there, we could get caught!” Crystal rolled her eyes. Jason was her least favorite character out of the series.

“Don’t worry, she’s with us, idiot,” Luke said while shaking his head. He turned to her.

“These are the Romans that think that us Greeks aren’t so bad,” he explained.

“Octavian is a terrible praetor. He isn’t even a praetor, he just thinks he is,” Reyna muttered to herself.

“So, you guys must have vital information on the Greeks,” Crystal guessed. Everyone nodded except for Luke.

“They’ll be able to help. Anyways, you guys get back to your wall. I need to talk to Crystal.” Luke shooed them away like animals. The Romans rolled their eyes and went back into their secret base. Pulling Crystal’s arm, Luke took her outside of the cabin. He looked down at his feet right away, after he saw the terrible damage the Romans had done. The Apollo kids were working harder than ever, getting the demigods to the infirmary. Annabeth continued to cry, right until Luke approached. Tears were still in her eyes, but she managed not to be so loud.

“Your soldiers killed…” she was not able to finish that sentence.

“I wanted him alive! Don’t you think that I care, Annabeth? I’ve cared for a long time, but Octavian had gotten the best of me. I have heard that Thalia had died, Annabeth. I’m broken.” Luke hung his head in shame. Crystal was mortified. Thalia was a very good friend of Annabeth and Luke, and now she was dead.

“I’m so sorry,” Crystal said shakily. How many times has she said that? The fictional world was terrible to its people living in it. Suddenly a horrible thought struck her. What if I die?

 

Training was important. Crystal trained every day, slowly becoming better and better. Percy was no longer there to help her. The incoming battle was so important that no demigod had any time to mourn, or to even do a proper burial. Annabeth did perform a burial ceremony for Percy’s body, but it was just by herself. Crystal stayed around, but she decided to train some more. Days passed, turned into weeks. Months came around. The Romans decided to attack a bit further into the year. The Romans that had declared a truce stayed in hiding, but trained too. Luke decided to teach Crystal about strategies in battle. This had made her improve a lot. Later that week, the Romans attacked.

 

Octavian turned up, as expected.

“We have come, once and for all! Attack, Romans!” Octavian screamed. Luke turned to Crystal.

“We need to get to Octavian. Don’t mind the others,” he said quietly. Crystal nodded, and soon they were hiding. Octavian was near, so Crystal was very scared.

“Get the onager!” Octavian called. “It’ll blow up these Greeks for sure!” Luke frowned, but Crystal whispered her plan to him. In The Blood of Olympus, Octavian had died due to his toga tied to the onager. When it fired, he flew through the sky and died. First, Luke had to find a way to get the Romans on their side, not Octavian’s.

“Crystal, sneak up and tie Octavian’s toga to the onager. Tyson will impersonate Octavian with his voice, so the Romans will be lured away. I’ll distract him,” Luke whispered. He went off without even bothering to listen to Crystal’s thoughts. That didn’t matter anyway, as she thought it was flawless. It got passed on quickly to Tyson. Luke made some awkward noises, and lured Octavian away. Tyson knew that it was the time to act.

“Hey! Get over on those rocks over there!” Tyson barked. “We’ll get a much better view of the death of our enemies!” The Romans seemed to hear, and they went over to the rocks. Demigods ambushed them, and they were cornered. They cursed, but no one could hear or care over the noise. Luke then motioned for Crystal to sneak in.

“Octavian, get further towards the onager,” he said. “I’ll teach you where to aim perfectly.” Octavian nodded, and Crystal cheered in her mind. He fell for the bait! He didn’t seem to notice Crystal. She quickly tied his toga on the onager.

“Why do you want to take over the two sides?!” Luke said loudly. Octavian rolled his eyes.

“Whatever. I want to prove that I am superior. I hate these two sides, and the Romans are really dumb sometimes!” Octavian quickly covered her mouth, as everyone had turned silent to his words.

“I uh, didn’t…” Romans yelled and screamed at Octavian and surged forward to kill him.

“Crystal, now!” Luke screamed. She powered the onager, and Octavian was soon flying through the sky with a girlish scream.

“Good work!” He said, and then hugged her. She wanted to say so many things, but suddenly the portal zapped in.

“What? No! I can’t go home now.. I just..” Crystal tried to say something, but couldn’t. The portal had already sucked her in.

 

Crystal stood at her porch. Coming inside her house, she could here her dad crying.

“Missing children.. My child was missing..” Her dad murmured.

“Dad?” He turned to Crystal. He didn’t say anything. He just ran to hug her.

Thieves of the Sea (Excerpt)

Chapter 3

 

*Gawain*

 

“Meet me where the sky touches the sea

Wait for me where the world begins”

 

I felt lost in another world. Time flew by, and I didn’t know how to count the minutes that had passed. A startling atmosphere hung in the air. I couldn’t remember what had happened. Am I dead? Is this how heaven feels? Like an endless, blank room? Everything was plain white. It damaged my eyes to see nothing but one color, but I couldn’t give up. This was just an obstacle I had to pass through. I made up my mind to search this unusual place.

I had been walking for what seemed like hours. My eyes were sore, so were my feet. If I was lost, I wouldn’t know. I had wished more than once that Jak were here. He was my savior, for he always knew what to do.

Finding the situation hopeless, I put myself into Jak’s shoes.

“What would Jak do?” I asked myself. Pondering on this question seemed doltish.

But indubitably, it was quite obvious. Emptying my pocket letting coins and other junk tumble out and onto the white floor.

I chose a few items and placed them as my markers and continued to explore placing a marker every few yards.

Jak had taught me all about what to do if you find yourself lost. He inspired me to keep items in my pocket for safety.

Dreaming in the process of marking, I failed to notice that my markings had shifted in the place of a circle.

“What the–”

But I didn’t have time to finish my statement before the inside of the hole became a purple storm. A feeling inside me told me I had to jump. Whether the hunger had gone to my head, or I was just normally insane, I jumped.

I thought my leg would sink through the cloud, but I was shocked when I landed softly like a feather on a pillow.

“This isn’t so bad,” I said as I watched the clouds slowly sink down, and the top of the hole close. “Perhaps this is the new land I had been searching for!”

But of course I was nowhere close.

It had seemed all delightful at first, but my heart had skipped a beat causing me to choke when the clouds dropped me in a dark tunnel. My eye couldn’t focus, and my hand was invisible in front of my face.

My back hit the ground hard, and in an instance, I was moving in an incredibly fast pace down the slope. Light soon found its way in the tunnel lighting it up. Stalagmites hung from above sparkling with due.

I felt my stomach rumbling and had been wishing for the ride to be over after many quick dodges from death.

I pointed my heel down and tried slowing down. Dust flew in the chilly air and went down my lungs. I gagged and fell flat on my back causing it to make an awful sound as I bellowed in pain.

Giving up, no longer feeling like Jak, I allowed myself to slide the rest of the way down, shutting my eyes.

I wasn’t scared, if that’s what you are thinking. I was just tired…..

 

I opened my eyes slowly, as if expecting something — or someone — to jump at me. Instead I saw a room. The room itself felt like it was part of a house. A family room perhaps.The proof I saw to help prove my point was a fireplace that stood in the center, and a brown, furnished table built of wood that had seemed recently polished.

The table had nothing but a large china plate with a dozen pieces of bread covered in the finest honey that glimmered in the light. The table wobbled at my touch as I leaned on top of it to get a better whiff.

My mouth began to water. The orphanage had been given a jar of honey as a reward for taking such good care of one of the parents who adopted a girl named Melitta. But that was before the death of Mr. Floros.

I remember how fine the honey was. It was sweet in my mouth and softened my throat that was painful.

This honey, however, was golden and seemed to be pressuring me to reach out and eat it.

I couldn’t help but reach out and grab the one farthest away from me, and stuff it in my mouth. The honey was all that mattered in that minute of delectable goodness.

I hadn’t noticed that my eyes were closed. It came as a real shock to me when I opened them to see the whole room empty, just as I tried to reach for a second helping of bread and honey, but that was missing as well.

I nearly tripped over the dead rat that sat beneath where the table used to sit.

I got down onto one knee to study it. What had caused his death? I hadn’t seen him before. Was what I seen before an illusion? Am I stuck here for eternity like the rat?

Near the mouth of the rat’s, was his front teeth inserted in a piece of bread. Honey slathered all over his poor, lifeless body.

Questions threw themselves at me as I tried to solve what was currently happening.

Looking around once more. The table missing, as well as the china plate, and the fireplace. It was missing. It couldn’t have sprouted legs and ran away! Or could it? No. It couldn’t. I kicked myself for having been so lousy.

I was stuck in an empty room with nothing. I was done for. I would die of starvation if I wasn’t dead already. I was ready to sulk when I heard a faint tinkling music behind me. I turned around alert for anything. In the distance I saw a round mirror.

It had a gold frame, and pearls every two inches. The glass was polished and sparkling. Golden vines seemed to be entwined in the frame. Words can not describe its remarkable beauty that I saw that day.

As I inched forward, the mirror’s light seemed to have been radiating the sun’s glare. I managed to step forward. I was deeply startled when I did not see my reflection in the glass. Was it a fluke? I had no idea on how this mirror appeared so suddenly. Could it hear my desperation? Was it magic? I wanted to find out as soon as possible, which meant now.

I marched towards it, and brought forth my hand and let my fingers and the mirror collide together. The mirror was cold, and smooth. My fingers slid onto the frame tracing every mark. It was then, when I was caught off guard, did the mirror cast a deadly beam of light. So bright it was, I nearly went blind.

“Who dares to awake me?” said a bold voice coming from within. I licked my lips which had dried and tried to responded although it was hard to think of the right words to say when you’re still trying to figure out how an ordinary mirror can talk.

I could feel it deep down that I would regret offending this powerful object.

“I’m sorry. I didn’t mean to disturb you,” I apologized, taking a step back.

“Ahh. Gawain Michel. Pleasure to meet you.”

I was starstruck! How did it know my name? The name of a poor orphan boy.

“Pardon me, but how do you know my name?” I asked, checking behind it to assure myself no one else was here besides me.

“You will find no one there, boy,” she said which made me blush. I hope it didn’t look rude.

“To answer your question, I am The Mirror Queen of them all! I know everything that has happened, is happening, or will happen. I know everyone by name! Every place that has been discovered or not. And I am immortal, to live forever in the souls of every hero. I never shall die or decay,” it fumed.

“Are you going to kill me?” I addressed her…or him.

The mirror laughed with it’s lights blinking on and off.

“I would love to!-” it replied.

I stiffened.

“-But sadly I can not. You see, you have heard my tinkling noise. Only thee who hear it’s beautiful sound can see this very mirror, which is I. Mirror Queen. Therefore I can not kill you because you are the special one. My soul lives within you. And I can foretell that you have an important mission.”

I tried not to show it, but I was relieved that The Mirror Queen wouldn’t kill me. Although, I still had a question, but I didn’t know how to ask. I didn’t know if I even wanted to know-

“Ask me little one. I can hear your thoughts,” she interrupted.

” I-I was wondering, your majesty-” I bowed, “What would have happened if I didn’t hear your tinkling wonder?”

I didn’t know how, because this is all so hard to explain, but I could sense that she was blushing because I had felt a happiness inside me that did not belong to me..

“Well, if you hadn’t heard my tinkling-” she began. “That would have meant you had eaten the wrong dessert. You would have chosen the poisoned bread and honey. If you ask me, you have powerful instincts and I would advise listening to them. Tell me, boy, how you chose it, I’m pondering on how you survived. For nine out of the twelve are deadly. Two out of the twelve would open your eyes to allow you to see what is real, and depending on which of the two you chose, you may have even possessed power.”

“What did it do to me. Can you tell me which one I drank?” I begged ignoring her question.

“Unfortunately, darling, I can not allow you to divulge in what could have or has done to you, for the fates will not allow me to reveal such private facts. I am terribly sorry.”

I was confused and didn’t want to have to solve or be involved with the fates, but I did not let that show.

“Thank You Mirror Queen, but where am I? I thought I was dead at first, but now I-I don’t know!”

“You are in a dream, dearest boy. You are to awaken soon if you follow my command.”

“Of course!” I promised.

The mirror began to swirl in the colors of yellow, and purple.

“You must step through this portal. It will take most of the power invested in me, but I will manage. You will find yourself surrounded by my swirls of colors. Once you are in you must say one wish. Once you speak of it, it will appear on the walls and become real for a temporary amount of time.”

“The spirits will ask of you to step in, they will make promises they can not keep, but you must not! It is all an illusion,” she warned. “Instead you must resist the temptation. Instead you must destroy your dream. Here.”

A golden sword of similar color appeared out of thin air in front of me. My fingers found their way to the handle. I gaped at its wonder.

“Now go! There is a girl who is awaiting your awakening. You are both in trouble, and need to leave the premises! Best of luck, Special One.”

I didn’t want to risk leaving and dying, but my legs refused to listen and began to walk forward and into the portal.

“Will I ever see you again?” I asked.

She let out a soft laugh of sweet happiness. “All in a times come, boy. In the future, if you are to survive that is, we will see one another again most certainly. Although you may not be pleased to see me.”

I had disappeared as The Mirror Queen had recited her last word. I was blinded by the colors I had seen earlier. The swirls seemed to be coming closer. I didn’t have to even think about my wish because every star I ever saw, or every opportunity I could find to pray, or every birthday wish from my candle, I would always wish for the exact thing.

“My biggest wish is to have a family of my very own. Someone to love and hold in sad moments. That is my biggest wish!” I shouted through the swirls of colors that were inches away from touching my skin.

“We hear your wish, foolish child,” many voices hissed in usion. “And we can give it to you with no pay at all. All you must do is step throu-”

“Be quiet!” I shouted in a rude voice. “I know all you want to do is to feed on my blood, and feast on my bones. I will not step through the swirls!”

“Ahh, but you will change your mind. See here! This is what you can have.”

The swirling stopped. The room turned into an image of me having a picnic with a lovely woman and a handsome man. They were smiling into each others eyes. the woman — who I guessed was my mother — had brown eyes like me, and brown hair falling down her shoulders as she bit into her apple. She was wearing a tired grey dress with an apron tied around her that matched the the bonnet she had on.

The man had a brown mustache that matched his hair. He had blue eyes that were really quite sharp. He wore wrinkled clothing. I guessed that he was my father. Then there was I. I looked much handsomer, and less tired. I was chasing a little girl who I guess is my little sister. She looked like a miniature me, except for the girl part, and blonde hair.

I wanted to step through the picture. I wanted to be part of the scene. I didn’t care what The Mirror Queen had to say. I was ready to walk through the portal when the spirit awoke me.

“Yes. Yes. that’s it,” it hissed happily.

The scene was a trance! I didn’t actually want to cross! But it made no sense. Could it…be magic? No. It must be a dream. And to think of how sad I would be if that wish were to come true and be gone when I awake.

Pain would wash me. I took one last look at the scene. Without thinking I slashed off all the heads in the picture. Their eyes rolled to the back of their head as blood rained down.

The swirling stopped abruptly. I encouraged a smile to be plastered upon my bloody face. I awaited for something unusual to happen. Not that this or anything else that happened was unusual, but something to top it off.

My smile faded into an angry scowl. I was so caught up in my thoughts that if it hadn’t been for the slight creak in the floor, I would have died.

A devilish man with horns protruding from his head, and fangs that peeked out of his mouth, with a body of a horse came running with a silver sword towards me. The man was taking aim, and threw his sword. I was able to dodge out of the way saving my life, but my arm was severely scraped. Blood poured out of the wound, and onto the floor.

I held my arm in agony. “Why?” I asked through clenched teeth.

“My brothers and I haven’t eaten in ages, my dear. You are the first to come in over two centuries. I bet we can hide the fact that you’re a bit too skinny towards the belly, but I think we can manage,” he hissed.

Still on the ground holding my wound with a bloody hand, I managed to swipe my sword at him, missing by feets.

“Well done! You were able to stab the floor! I am impressed,” he mocked inching closer.

I was now swordless. I tried to think of a solution. I made a move of trying to grab my sword, but he blocked me off. If I were to reach down for it, I would loose my head with a flick of a wrist.

The sword was too far to reach it with my foot. If only there was another way! The man only continued to inch forward.

“Where are your brothers?” I asked, trying to spare myself some time.

“Where they should be. Lurking in the shadows awaiting for the right time to attack. Because like The Mirror Queen, we too are immortal.”

I searched for his brothers. I couldn’t locate any shadows. Where could the demons be?

“I find it cute, foolish one, that you can not seek them when they are right above your nose!” the man sneered.

Above my nose? My body stiffened as I looked above me. There on the ceiling lay more than a hundred demons. Each one unique in bad ways. One of them had three eyes and two holes for a nose, and no mouth.They were each a horrible sight, one worse after another.

“And you know what surprises me, foolish one?” the Devil asked. “Is that you have no idea of the power you contain. With one bite from you, I could possess all the power you maintain. Wouldn’t that be incredible.”

What could he be talking about? But I push my thoughts aside, for he was no more than five feet away from where I stood, as his brothers had almost reached my head.

“And who may you be, wanting to own my power. I bet you have loads. What could mine possibly be that you don’t have?” I countered. I was pleased on my come back.

“You joke! How dare you. I am your worst nightmare. The one that hides under your bed. They have many names for me, but I call myself the devil. The Queen must have told you. Well, screw her. You know that I have no power. That by simply devouring you I have enough to destroy, your majesty, while she is in her weak state. That’s what you get for helping others!” he whined.

I wanted to smile that he had no powers. It felt special at the moment, but I yet had no plan! He was close. Too close. If I were to outstretched my arm I could touch him, but I would have to be mad to do such thing.

“But aren’t I in a dream? You can’t kill me if I’m asleep,” I challenged him in a sassy one.

The Devil chuckled. It sounded deep and scary, and it echoed through the room.

“But that’s exactly how I receive your power. In your dreams. If I were to kill you now,” he said grabbing my chin tenderly. “Then you will — poof — disappear. Your soul with fly out of you, and on it’s way to heaven when I, the devil, will interfere — of course — and breathe you in where you will go to my kingdom. The most miserable, and feared place that the world will ever face. Lovely story, isn’t it?”

The Devil was already by my side. The sword lay on the ground. The Devil was on the opposite side from me. If I could be quick, then I could succeed.

Feeling better with a plan in mind, I took action. I jumped to the opposite side of the Devil and grabbed the sword. I was feeling a moment of bliss, when I fell to the floor. There was a heavy object weighing me down. It was the same color as the devil, but much more horrible. It had no eyes or nose, just one, wretched mouth. It’s body weighed me down as much as it could. I was being crushed.

Out of instinct and pure luck, I was able to dodge a few punches and stabs by the demon’s dagger. Out of pure frustration he meant to stab me, but I was able to lift my back high enough to pass it, but when I saw the opportunity dangling of the demons back, I took it. I opened my mouth wide enough and bit him. Of course to him, who had skin made out of iron, felt nothing but a pinch. Although startled at such a silly attempt, tried to shake me off.

Seeing my chance, I rolled out of the way, although my feet were still stuck underneath his weight. Without thinking much on what to do, I sent him a powerful kick on the back, causing him to drop his dagger.

I picked up the dagger that was bloodred. I stared at this object flashing before me with great beauty. A hand blindly attempted to search for it on the ground. I stabbed the it, pushing as hard as I dared to go. The hand was too large to be pierced all the way through, but enough to break his scaly skin. But I didn’t stop there, I pulled the dagger out. Green blood came pouring out. It flooded the ground, inches away from where I sat.

I let my dagger lead me, and I came so close to the demon’s heart. I hesitated on pushing it forward. I didn’t think I was capable of such criminal intention! Yet I had to do it.

I stabbed the demon’s body with his own dagger. I felt such burning guilt fill me inside. The demon shriveled up, becoming weightless.

The words: I had just killed someone kept floating back to mind. I had just murdered.

I had had a tough past, and killing would not help. I had sworn that the action of death shall never be committed by my name.

Yet I had done the very thing, I had betrayed myself. Even if he wasn’t human.

But there was no time to feel guilty. There was another demon to deal with, whether I wanted to or not.

While fighting, I had been oblivious to the shadow without a person. Realizing at the last minute, I threw my dagger at the shadow, square in the chest. The shadow disappeared into smoke going in all directions. I had been hoping I had killed it, but that would have been too easy.

I heard a voice in the distance cackling wickedly. I was turning my head in all four corners in the room, trying to make out the hidden demon.

“Ahh. I admire how you think your so powerful, full of…” He appeared in front of me, holding my chin between his warty fingers. “…Ability.” He said ever so casually. I held my dagger firmer in my hands, causing my knuckles to turn white. I swung my dagger towards his stomach. But of course, not being fast enough, he had disappeared into smoke once more.

I felt a tap on my shoulder, I turned around, quite swifter than I thought was possible. There he stood, behind him was hundreds of other demons. All bigger than he. All bigger than I. I knew I had no chance of beating them all. The thought of surrendering came to mind. But I pushed it aside. The only solution that seemed reasonable, was to stall.

I didn’t know what to say. I had never been good at talking. Instead I just let my heart speak, and kicked myself for every stutter.

“Well, that’s unfair. 200 against one. You must be very frightened by my skill,” I commented. “In Fact, Whenever I fought someone. It was usually just that person and I. Never had I thought, I would be fighting against demons.”

They all looked around, flustered by my comment.

“But never did I imagine that I would be fighting meek demons,” I finished off.

The demons gave me a look of murder plastered on their face, well, the ones who actually had a face. I felt proud of myself, but I didn’t expect for them to make the teams fair.

“Meek demons, did you say?” I heard a whisper in my ear. I felt hands rubbing my shoulders. Under other circumstances it would have been considered relaxing.

“Then, shall we get rid of these, ‘meek demons?’” the Devil hissed in a mocking voice.

I turned around and tried to stab the demon. No such luck. He had vanished once again into black smoke.

“You’re pathetic! Show yourself!” I shouted with rage. I held my dagger in my strong grip, resenting any sign of ridding it.

A few feet away from the demons, stood he.

“Shall we charge, sire?” a demon in the crowd hissed.

The Devil gave me a long look. He looked me up and down. His eyes seemed to be scanning me, seeing how strong I could possibly be. What my chance of winning is.

When his eyes reached mine, I saw fire behind his pupil. It was a wild one, swishing to all places. Nervous I took a step back.

The Devil seemed satisfied of my nervousness and smiled, I wanted to punch myself for showing weakness.

“No. Leave me be,” he replied, inching forward in a snake-slithering way.

“But sire-”

“I SAID LEAVE ME BE!” he roared with erupted rage.

The demon seemed speechless. I almost felt pity for him. Almost.

The Devil then made an effort to push the demon, but instead of the demon falling to ground, it burst into flames. The flames as though of the one behind the the demons eyes. The demon screamed with pain. He was slowly sizzling away until he was nothing but black dust.

“Does anyone else want to object as well?” the Devil threatened. There was long, silent, pause. No one shouted out. No one even dared to breathe.

“Good,” he replied. Clearly content with himself. With a snap of his fingers, the army of demons swiveled away in a swirl of wind. They were gone. It was just the Devil and I. I was scared. The Devil just sent his army of demons away, he obviously knew I was too weak to defeat someone such as him. Someone who has been alive for eons. I stood no chance, and I knew it.

“Is that fair now, foolish one?” he asked in a wretched tone.

“Why did you kill that demon?” I couldn’t help asking.

“Why shouldn’t I have. He talked to me disrespectfully. That’s unacceptable!” Each word became louder as he spoke them. He talked with such disgust. Every syllable was pronounced with such anger, and sadness.

“Because…because it’s unfair,” I came up with. I, myself, didn’t believe my words.

“Enough with this ‘fairness,'” he responded with annoyance in his voice.

“But to answer your question, monsters can’t be killed. His soul remains where I rule. The kingdom where my power is endless. There he will rest until he reforms. Of course, he can not do so unless I consent, which may take a few centuries to figure out,” he added.

Every step forward he took towards me, I took a step back. When I felt my back bump against the wall, I felt helpless. I was done for. Something caught my eye. It was shiny, and was glowing, but I had no time to investigate, instead I saw the Devil grin a sly smile before he pounced.

I dropped to the ground, and rolled to my side. I grabbed my the object, that I had guessed was my sword, and stabbed the Devil in the heart. I was certain he would die.

“Every human’s heart is is placed in their chest, but a demon is not. Instead they are located in the head, and the brain on the foot, where it is safe. Therefore you have not defeated me, but weakened me, for that sword is poisonous to the flesh of a monster. But weakness is not death!” The Devil hissed with effort, for i could tell he was in great pain.

Thinking that I had won, when the Devil collapsed, I had let my guard down. The Devil gathered all his speed and twisted my sword. He had used so much force that my hand was sprained. I dropped the sword with confused pain. He grabbed my sword, ready to plunge it in my heart. As his arm came forth towards my chest, I dived to the floor and stabbed my dagger into his foot. Red blood came oozing out of his foot. I looked up to see that the Devil looked half dead. I then took the dagger out and plunged it into the other foot as well. That was when the Devil fell. Just to make sure I stabbed him into the head as well. I couldn’t help letting a tear fall down.

“You don’t deserve to live,” the Devil hissed. Those were his last words. And I had to agree with him.

I curled up into a tight ball, crying with heavy breaths.

How am I alive? was the question I continued to ask.

The Case of the Missing Ruby

Miles Sharplake, better known as Detective Sharp, was busy playing on his Wii U when suddenly his partner, Patrick, hollered in his ear.

“Sharp, come here, take a look at this.”

Sharp, who was tired and wanted to relax playing Mario Kart, walked over. “What is it?”

Patrick told him to look at the other TV. The newscaster said there was a ruby worth 11 million dollars that had been stolen from the museum. Police had studied the scene of the crime, but no evidence was found. Sharp, who was really smart, knew what to do.

“Sharp, I think you can solve this,” said Patrick.

Sharp said, “Well then, let’s do this. But this is my last case. Oh crap, why another case?”

Sharp and Patrick went to the museum to check out the crime scene. When they looked at the dome featuring the ruby, they saw that it was gone. The tour guide was there, along with the police chief. The police chief was questioning the tour guide about what happened the night before since the tour guide has to help the janitor with cleaning up.

“Last night, I was asked to stay for a few more hours. When I went near the ruby, I swear I saw the ruby float. Then, something hit me, and I was knocked unconscious,”  said the tour guide.

“Say, is there anyone who knows about this ruby?” asked Sharp. The tourist told him that Bob could help.

“Bob isn’t here right now, but I know his address.”

“Well then, next stop: Bob’s house,” said Sharp.

Inside Bob’s house, there was a person with chips and soda on his couch. He was watching TV. The newscaster said that new, advanced technology had been invented, specifically gravity guns. The museum would put gravity guns in the displays. That segment immediately shocked Sharp. Gravity guns, museum, what did this all have to do with the ruby?

Sharp and Patrick immediately went to the police chopper. “Here comes the big experiment,” said the chief. There was a scientist who was using a gravity gun  for testing purposes. The gravitational force shot at the rock, pushing it.

“Perfect. Tomorrow, meet me at the museum,” said Sharp.

Sharp and Patrick went to the museum that night in night guard disguises and snuck into the building.

“Have you got the magnifying glass?”

“Yep, I do.”

“Quick, get to the ventilation system.”

Inside, Sharp and Patrick went and crawled under the laser security all the way into the famous display of minerals. “The thief is ready to go.” Suddenly, a voice was heard. “Ready aim― what the…” The whole room went pitch black.

“The power’s out,” said Sharp. “Quick, get me the flashlight, Patrick.” Suddenly, the power came back on. Police were surrounding the criminal. “Hey, we don’t know who we’re dealing with,” said Patrick.

“But I do,” said Sharp.

“Sharp, you know who this is?”

“Well well well, if it isn’t my old friend Thomas,” said Sharp. “Let me explain. A long time ago, when I started going to college for my degree, I met Thomas. We did experiments together, we helped each other in math class, we were basically best friends. Until one day, tragedy struck when Thomas went broke.

He had no money and no job. But, this was after our graduation. He moved over to Texas, and I never saw him again. Or did I? When I was playing on online mode of Mario Kart, some guy hacked on my account. He referred to himself as an old friend. When I heard that the ruby was stolen, I remembered the tragedy. And to this day I know what happened. Thomas knew that the ruby was worth 11 million bucks. He tried to use the gravity guns in the safe room to steal the ruby.”

“So you knew who the thief was, but you kept it a secret,” said Patrick.

“Yep, I did.”

“Sharp, you’ve done a wonderful job,” said the police chief.

“Yes, yes. Thank you, but please call me Miles. I will no longer solve crimes, I need to focus more on relaxing.”

Life as a Gymnast

Prologue:

One day when I was two years old, I was on my couch watching the Summer Olympics with my mom. That’s when I knew I wanted to be a gymnast. I started just a few weeks after the fact, and only progressed. In beginner’s class, I met my best friend, Cammie. We go to the same gymnasium now, and have been besties ever since.

 

Chapter One: Spotted

“I don’t know if this is such a great idea…” I said.

“Come on, it’ll be fine!” Cammie said, trying to reassure me.

Sorry, I’m Katherine Fisher. I have dark brown hair with crystal blue eyes and I’m about four and a half feet tall. My birthday is on March 17th–Saint Patrick’s Day! I was practicing routines at our gym with my best friend, Cammie. I’m ten years old and in level seven, the seventh highest competitive level at our gymnasium. Each level gets more challenging than the one before, and each level has different/harder routines and skills. I have a 12-year-old swimmer sister and a 14-year-old baseball/tennis brother. I also have a mom and a dad, and a medium chocolate labradoodle named Mak. My family’s talking about fostering another puppy, but our parents say that’s a long process. Anyway, my team shares a gym with the Golden Girls, our rival team, and they completely wrecked our supplies! Cammie and I were trying to think of a way to get back at the Golden Girls, but I wasn’t so sure about it…

* * *

I had to get home to finish my homework, so as soon as the Golden Girls walked into the gym I left for home. When I got there, I started my homework quickly so I wouldn’t get into trouble with my parents — I wasn’t even supposed to be at the gym! Cammie was still at the gym, doing whatever she was doing. I kept thinking about her because Cammie (alone) plus the Golden Girls equals…uh-oh! I just couldn’t help myself! Finally, I couldn’t take it anymore. I raced out the front door, leaving everything behind.

* * *

Of course, I was going to the gym. I had to find out what Cammie was doing. I had entered through the front door and was peeking through a window. When I got there, Cammie was trash talking to the Golden Girls.

I couldn’t let her do this! The Golden Girls had taken it way too far, but Cammie knew Coach Jasmine had told her if she did this to the Golden Girls again, she wouldn’t be able to compete in the next meet! Our team, Shooting Stars, needed Cammie! But then, I noticed Raven, a Golden Girl, was cursing back.

Instantly, they saw me. I tried to hide, but it was too late. I was dead meat. I’d been spotted.

 

Chapter Two: The Conversation

When Raven noticed me, that’s when I really started to freak out. She’s the “head” of the team at age eleven. Coach Jasmine believes everyone is the best on our team. I knew I’d have to come over sooner or later, so I chose sooner.

Raven smirked. “You brought your only friend — sorry, idiot — with you?!?! Such a baby!” she proclaimed.

“Excuse me?!?!” asked Cammie.

“Yeah, like, that’s right. I don’t care about, like, your stupid team. Like you’ll ever get sixth place in, like, our next meet, the Spring Classic. You do know the judges, like, give you tips, right? You might want to go practice to try to get, like, 80th in all around!” retorted Raven.

“You do know we got first place at the last meet that somebody forfeited? In fact, I’ve actually practiced, unlike someone I know. To be clear, there are only 78 people at the next meet! And there only are six teams, so technically what you’re saying is that we won’t get last place,” I told her.

“Oh, I know there aren’t even 80 people at the meet. That was my point. And, like, I meant you wouldn’t even place since, like, they might only give out five places,” Raven said, trying to give me a good comeback.

“How dare you,” I said and gasped, flabbergasted at her cruelness.

“You’ll get it this time,” Raven responded.

And with that, she grabbed me by the arm and pulled me away. I tried to fight her off, but Raven sure had a good grip. My parents would know I was missing.

 

Chapter Three: Missing

Raven was running off so quickly, I didn’t even realize what was going on! Then I realized, I was locked in Raven’s closet! At least she had lots of popular clothes and was rich, so to me, Raven’s closet was like a room. At least I had breathing space. Also, this is the only time I’m actually glad that Raven’s apartment is on the same floor as mine so I could hear my parents talking through the vent!

I could hear my parents saying, “Where’s Katherine? She’s not in her room! I better call Cammie’s mom. I bet Katherine’s with Cammie,” said my mom, trying to stay relaxed.

“Ok. I’ll try to reach KK on her cell,” replied my dad, worried as ever. I felt really worried for my parents too since they didn’t know where I was. And unfortunately, I left my phone on my desk so it wouldn’t interrupt me during routines. Suddenly, I could hear my phone ring from my room.

“She’s missing!” wailed my mom, after she and Dad had called everyone and looked everywhere.

“No, she’s not. We will find her,” promised my dad. “She’s old enough to take care of herself.”

* * *

Since I could hear my parents, they would be able to hear me, right? You might think I’m stupid, but I’m just not the kind of ten year old girl that causes all that commotion. I just stay calm and think of all the ways to get out. Thankfully, I’m a stickler for when my bangs come out of my ponytail in gymnastics, so I always keep a bobby-pin in my gymnastics pants, which luckily I was wearing coming back from the gym. It was my favorite one, but it would get me out so I bent my bobby-pin back and clicked it into the lock to push the lock back out.

As soon as I heard the click, I sprinted out to the window and looked down. Oh, great. There was a ladder, but it was about eight feet from the window. As brave as I could be, I pushed out Raven’s window screen and climbed onto the windowsill. I had to leave before Raven’s family finished dinner, so I stepped out over the front door, and slipped!

Swiftly, I gripped the sill just in time without being seen. Luckily, I’m a very strong gymnast, so I pulled myself back up into front support and then stood back up, horrified. So close, I thought. I took about five more steps, and had reached the ladder. I quickly climbed down, jumping onto a snowbank, and ran home to my parents, as proud as ever. After I had told them everything, my parents told Raven’s gymnastics coach, Casey, and Raven was disqualified from the Spring Classic.

 

Chapter Four: Another Side-Mate

I could tell that when Raven got back to her room, she must’ve checked on me but was horrified that I was missing. Suddenly, Raven’s parents received a phone call from Coach Casey, explaining everything. The next day at the gym, I could overhear Raven telling a teammate that she was grounded.

*       *       *

The next day at practice, Raven’s “sidekick” Amelia walked over to me! I was worried she’d come to strangle me or something. But she actually apologized!

“For what?” I asked, literally puzzled.

“For Raven. Listen, I heard what happened, and I don’t want to be her little ‘robot’ anymore, but I’m way too scared to admit it to her. Imagine what would happen! It’s bad enough that I’ll have to train with her, but I’m on your side now, and it’s not a trick. I did bring a copy of the blueprint of her next comeback, to make you scratch yourself from the meet by calling in using a voice modifier that she has copied your voice on. Would it be okay if I helped you prevent that from happening? I mean, if you think it’s totally dumb, that’s fine, I understand. But just to let you know, I deleted your voice and ripped up Raven’s copy of the plan,” Amelia proclaimed quickly.

“Of course!” I replied, overjoyed. “Under one condition–Cammie can help. No offense, but you guys kinda sorta really ruined our event stations. We were already trying to think of a comeback. You purposely raised the parallel bars to a height that not even Sara, the five feet and three inch tall girl on our team, could reach! You also lowered our vault to rec level, removed the screws from the best beam, and took out the springs on floor! And guess who had to fix it; us! Listen, I’m really sorry. I’m sure it was probably Raven’s idea, and I shouldn’t even be yelling at anyone. Please forgive me,” I begged.

“First of all, what are you talking about? We didn’t wreck…RAVEN!!!” Amelia yelled, angrily. “Sorry, I’m just mad. Raven must’ve done this without us knowing and was secretly practicing in her private gymnasium at her house so she could win first in all-around in the Spring Classic and get that middle school scholarship! I’m really sorry about everything. Of course Cammie can help, and I forgive you,” she proceeded. I thought about Raven for a moment. I realized right then, that her name fit her perfectly. She was cruel. She was horrible.

“Thanks so much!” I said, hugging Amelia. I felt so relieved that that moment was over. I’d been dreading the asking for help part for days.

 

Chapter Five: “Katherine!”

“I can do this, I can do this, I can do this…” I managed to utter.

“Don’t worry. You’ll do great!” replied my dad.

“That’s just what parents are supposed to say. Listen, I’m just really nervous because this is a really important meet, and I’ve never had a meet since I learned my new routine with a back layout in it,” I proclaimed.

I was at the Spring Classic and it was right after bars. I had already done beam. After floor, I only had vault left, a full on. That’s where you sprint down the vaulting runway and when you get to the table you jump off the springboard, push off your hands at the end and twist off. Even though Raven was DQ’d, she didn’t even come to cheer her team on!

“KATHERINE FISHER; FLOOR; LEVEL SEVEN,” I heard over the loudspeaker. Oh, great. My turn.

As I stepped onto the floor and presented to the judges, terrified, I could feel Amelia watching me. She wasn’t Raven, but I still felt nervous. I guess I didn’t feel horrible that Raven was disqualified.  All of a sudden, my music started to play. I felt really good until my back layout. I had very angry butterflies in my stomach that were eager to escape into puke!

Everything seemed to slow down, but I stopped. I knew I was off-beat and I couldn’t afford to lose any more points, but since it’s my tumbling pass (one of the major tumbles in a routine, but you must run) I counted to three: 1…2…3! I hadn’t yet completed my back layout at a meet yet. Jasmine had spotted me and I had only completed it at practice three times alone, but she said I was ready. I started to sprint down the floor into my front handspring front tuck. After I presented, I started to lean forward and flipped back, keeping my knees straight and together. As I landed, I heard a loud snap and felt a fiery pain in my ankle! The music stopped and Jasmine, my parents and the nurse ran out onto the floor, while I had tears in my eyes.

“Katherine!” Jasmine yelled.

“Ow…” I managed to get out between gasps.

“Let’s get you to the ER, quick!” said my mom, horrified. But I was a little embarrassed for interrupting the whole competition.

I started to cry. In fact, I cried a whole downpour of tears! My brother, Matthew, broke his ankle once, and had a cast for a month. My sister, Alice, broke her wrist once, and had a cast for one month. There were two more meets until Nationals, and we had a meet every weekend. It hurt so much, I knew it was broken, and the doctor agreed. I would miss Nationals.

 

Chapter Six: The Plan

When I had finally come back from the ER, I was resting in bed with my leg up on my chair, reading. All of a sudden, the doorbell rang. Ding-dong! Dang it! I thought. I had lost my spot in my book. By the time I had found it, Cammie and Amelia were up in my room. If you hadn’t already figured it out, they were the ones that rang the doorbell.

After we had talked and I had answered many questions about my leg and the whole experience, Amelia handed me flowers-made of chocolate! The card tied to the bouquet read:

“Dear Katherine,

Feel better soon!

Cammie and Amelia”

“Aaawww! You sure know the way to my heart,” I said, sweetly. “CHOCOLATE!!!”

It turns out, Cammie got first place for all around in the Spring Classic and Amelia got second! They didn’t give out scholarships because of “the incident.”

“Amelia and I were thinking we totes need a good plan to get back at Raven. We need your help!” Cammie explained, implying they needed time with me to think of one.

“Of course,” I replied, willingly.

After about ten minutes of contemplating, we finally thought of a plan: to sneak into Raven’s house before the next meet that I can compete in and pour flour down Raven’s leotard. Then when she put it on, she’d have to leave for the meet and wouldn’t have time to change, since she always procrastinates and she wouldn’t have any extra time. She’s always first at every meet because her last name is Arango (the only person on our team with a last name that starts with an “A”). Our teams always competes in this order: beam, bars, floor and vault, so Raven would be on beam first. We compete in the same division every time because we practice at the same gym. Then, the flour would be so itchy Raven wouldn’t be able to resist scratching. You get points off for itching/scratching and touching your leotard during a meet so Raven would get her score lowered and maybe (if we’re lucky) she’d be so itchy, she’d fall off and get even more points deducted!

“We can’t let anyone find out, though,” I proclaimed.

“Duh,” replied Cammie.

 

Chapter Seven: Removed

ONE MONTH LATER:

“Honey, I think we’re better off waiting until tomorrow to get your cast off because it’s supposed to be warmer and some of the snow should be melted by tomorrow,” Mom explained to me.

“But, Mom! The sooner, the better. Also, I want to actually be able to practice some simple skills. Please, can we do it today! If we want to do it today, we have to leave now!” I replied, trying to reassure my mom.

“Fine,” she answered.

We had just driven to the doctor to see if I was ready to get my cast off. I was in the waiting room at the doctor’s office. When the secretary called my name, then my doctor, Dr. Blart, would check my ankle to see if my cast was ready to be taken off! I mean, it’s been on for a month and I’m pretty sure it’s ready because I’ve been resting it a lot.

“Katherine Fisher; ankle injury; Dr. Blart; room 117,” I heard the secretary, Rachel, call out.

Yes, yes, yes, I thought.

TEN MINUTES LATER:

“Congratulations, Katherine. You’ve been caring for your ankle so well and now you’ve been rewarded with the joy of no cast! I’ve officially taken it off,” said Dr. Blart.

“Thank you!” I replied, joyfully. All of a sudden, I sounded a little too happy.

“Oh, don’t thank me. You’ve taken terrific care of it!” Dr. Blart answered.

After Dad drove me home I three-way called Amelia and Cammie.

“How’d you guys do at Nationals? I just got my cast off!” I told them.

“We have something to tell you,” Cammie said joyfully. “Nationals were postponed because of the snow and now you can compete!”

“Really!?!?” I asked.

“Yup,” answered Amelia. “We think it’s time to put our plan into action,” Amelia informed me.

“Let’s do it at the meet in two days!” I suggested.

“Perfect,” both Cammie and Amelia answered at the same time. We all started to crack up.

 

Chapter Eight: (The Not So Sweet) Sweet Revenge

TWO DAYS LATER:

I was at the meet and had all the ingredients in my drawstring backpack. Cammie, Amelia, and I were ready to put our plan into action.

Finally, after stretching, it was time to go to beam. We were all very nervous, and I was almost starting to regret it. But if we were going to do it, now was our chance. We had all snuck over to Raven’s house before leaving for the meet and luckily she had her team leotard laid out. I had been the only one that dared to pour the flour in, but whatevs.

After the judges had set up, they called her name. I could tell by the flabbergasted look on her face that she had definitely noticed the flour. Well, she couldn’t quit now. Raven had to compete.

In her back-walkover, Raven’s foot slipped and landed just off of beam. Yes, I thought. Unfortunately, she was fine for the rest of her routine. As a result, she got 9.27.

Then she asked Coach Casey if she could go to the bathroom, with her sweet face. Of course Casey said yes and obviously (to Cammie, Amelia and I) Raven was actually changing into her other leotard, the one that’s an exact replica of her other one. The rest of the meet went went by so swiftly, I honestly didn’t even know what was happening.

On the floor I fell on my butt during my back layout but at least I didn’t die.

When we got home, my mom had a very stern look on her face. I wondered why — actually, no I didn’t. I knew why. Raven had told her parents, and now my parents knew. I’m sure they told Jasmine.

“What happened?” my mom demanded, sternly.

“I’m sorry. I couldn’t help it! You just don’t understand,” I replied, sobbing.

“Yes, I d-” mom was cut off.

“No, you don’t!” I assured her, sniffling. “You don’t know what she does to us. I know it was wrong of me, and I really regret doing it now, but I’ve tried ignoring Raven, trying to teach her that it’s wrong, everything! It was my only choice.”

All of a sudden, Mom held up her phone. “I do know,” she said, softly. On the screen, I saw our gym. It was a video camera! “I haven’t told you this, but Jasmine installed video cameras in the gym and sent us the link of footage. I’ve seen what you did to help, and what she did to hurt you. I understand. I’m glad that you realized what you did was wrong — because it was wrong — but I’ve seen it all, and I apologize to you. Just ‘cause I feel so bad that you have to handle this alone.”

“But I had Amelia and Cammie by my side!” I said.

“Yes, but next time you’re bullied, you need to tell me! Parents are here to help,” she told me.

“Okay,” I promised.

The next day at practice, Jasmine called Cammie, Amelia and I into her office. We all knew we were in trouble.

“I can’t believe you guys! You’re the best behaved kids on the team. Why did you sabotage Raven? Listen, I’ve seen what she did from the video cameras, but I heard about the meet. I need you for nationals, but if this happens again, you are benched from meets for one month! Do you understand?!?!” Jasmine scolded.

“Yes,” the three of us mumbled.

“Alright. Go warm-up. I’ll keep an eye on you guys,” Jasmine replied with a face as hard as rock.

 

Chapter Nine: Nationals

“I’m really nervous,” I told Cammie on the phone. “I don’t know if I can get my back layout.”

“Don’t worry. You’ll do great. You’ve done it at practice a few times, you just need to concentrate.”

“Thanks. I guess you’re right. Why do you always have to be so logical!” I said, sarcastically angry.

“Bye,” Cammie said.

“See you in three hours,” I replied.

Then Cammie hung up. Nationals were in three hours, and I was freaking out about my back layout. Now that my foot was better, I was physically able to do it, and I needed to prove I could move up to level eight!

* * *

When Cammie and I were at Nationals, it was already time to stretch! But, Raven wasn’t there, and she’s always first! Since my last name starts with an “F”, I always compete second, right after Raven. If she’s not here, I’d be first on floor! I’d completely screw up. All of a sudden, she walked in the door of Galaxy Gymnastics’ gym. Pheeeww! I thought.

Time flew by so fast (only like a half hour) so we were already on our second event-floor. There Raven was, doing her “little perfect routine,” with her “little perfect moves.” Then it was my turn. There I went, away with my dance. When I got to my first tumble pass (front handspring front tuck), I was glad I would get it over with soon, but then as I presented to the judges I realized it was now or never. I sprinted across the floor as fast as I could, thinking about what I had to do for my back layout. As of now I was on my roundoff double back handspring back tuck (a new skill in my routine even though I’d been doing them since level three). Here goes nothing, I thought in my head. I bent my arms and legs, and swooped my body backwards, keeping my legs straight in the air. I felt nothing as I landed, and had no idea what was going on. Suddenly I realized I HAD JUST COMPLETED MY BACK LAYOUT!!! As I finished my routine (with the biggest smile ever), Raven’s score was displayed. 9.55. Oh great, I thought. How am I ever supposed to beat that score? Then I presented to the judges for the last time and walked off the floor as my score appeared. 9.85!!! OMG!!! I couldn’t believe my eyes as I practically exploded. I couldn’t stop smiling, even during awards.

* * *

“FLOOR: THIRD PLACE, A TIE. CAMMIE GOLDFIN AT 9.45 FROM SHOOTING STARS AND RACHEL RICCARDI FROM GALAXY GYMNASTICS. AND SECOND PLACE, A TIE FROM THE GOLDEN GIRLS, RAVEN ARANGO, AND ALSO FROM GOLDEN GIRLS, AMELIA GOLDFIN AT 9.55. FIRST PLACE, KATHERINE FISHER FROM SHOOTING STARS AT 9.85!” I heard the speaker announce.

On and on she went. I got fourth on beam, second on bars, sixth on vault, and first AA (all around)!

All of a sudden, I heard the speaker say, “RAVEN ARANGO, YOU HAVE WON A MIDDLE SCHOOL SCHOLARSHIP!!!!!”

Then my heart sunk.

“EXCUSE ME, THERE WAS A MISTAKE…KATHERINE FISHER FROM SHOOTING STARS HAS ACTUALLY WON THE SCHOLARSHIP!!! WOO-HOO!” the announcer continued.

There was something about how she said “woo-hoo” that made me feel the best. I wasn’t trying to boast, but it felt like magic as I walked up onto the podium.

And the happiness continues! As soon as I walked into the front door of my house with all five medals, there was a giant banner and balloons everywhere! Someone must have told my parents about the surprise. All of a sudden, Amelia and Cammie slowly peeked out from behind a wall. I knew what they had done. Then I saw a tiny goldendoodle walk out of the bathroom behind Cammie and Amelia!

“We’re fostering a puppy!” my mom said, holding out a ‘Congrats!’ cake.

My phone started to ring upstairs in my room. I ran upstairs and picked it up on the fourth ring.

“Uh, I’m so sorry; please forgive me!” someone stammered on the other end.

“Excuse me, who is–Raven, is that you?!?!” I asked, stunned.

“Yeah, it’s me. Listen, I’m really sorry about what I’ve been doing all this time!”

“Oh, and you just realized that now?” I asked, upset.

“Well, after Nationals, Jasmine had a talk with me, and I guess she’s made me rethink my actions. Please forgive me,” Raven begged.

“You’re lucky I’m–never mind. Okay, I forgive you. But don’t you dare think we’re friends after what you’ve done to me! Listen, I’m sorry I’m yelling, but you need to prove to everyone that you are nice inside,” I commanded. “Why did you go through all that trouble anyway?”

“I was just…jealous. I mean, you have such a nice family. You’re so good at gymnastics, and you have friends! And, uh, you did an amazing job at the meet,” Raven complimented me.

“Uh, thanks. I’m sorry if I’ve been bragging about stuff that I have and you don’t. But if you didn’t act so jealous, you’d have way more friends than anyone else in the world. You’re really nice inside, you just need to show it on the outside, too. Don’t worry, I go through the same family problems as you, but with my siblings,” I replied with a laugh. I’d never really gotten a compliment from Raven before.

I hung up the phone as I ran back downstairs and gobbled up the last of the vanilla/chocolate swirl cake with mocha frosting.

Amy and the Mystery of the Gold Vault

Once there was a girl named Amy. She hated it when people called her by her real name, which was Amelia. She was a curious 7-year-old girl, and loved to explore the streets of Paris. Everyone knew her — everyone knew the girl who had short, tangled red hair, and big blue eyes. Everyone knew the girl who always wore a long plaid skirt and a ruffled shirt.

It was June 5th, 1957, and Amy was causing trouble again. She lived in a large, fancy apartment building/hotel with a large ballroom, a banquet room, restaurants, and lots of room to cause trouble.

“Amy!” The cry could be heard all over the building whenever Amy was around. On this particular day, she was in the lobby staring at a tall, very fancy woman with ostrich feathers in her hat and all over her long gown. The woman was startled when she saw Amy, looking at her down through her spectacles. (She was visiting from New York and thought that a little pest like Amy should not be tolerated in this very fancy hotel/apartment building.) Amy didn’t care, she curtsied and pulled on the feathers. Hmm, this person’s feathers are VERY suspicious! She thought. She took the woman’s hand and pulled her into the broom closet. She took an electric torch and turned it on in the woman’s face.

“Where were you on the night of the…um, yesterday!?”

“Little girl, you must be joking! I have places to go!” she said.

Amy let her go after five more minutes of interrogation. The woman walked off, muttering things to herself. Amy was seven, so she wanted some adventure. She asked her mother if she could go onto the streets and look around.

“Yes, yes, but make sure Cecily comes with you.” Amy’s mother was always busy with work, so she usually made Amy’s annoying older sister babysit her.

As soon as they stepped out onto the street Amy took off, leaving Cecily in the dust. She knew her way around Paris. She decided to stop at the bank and chat with the people who were there. When she got there with Cecily far behind, panting and yelling, she overheard two people talking. “Jo, I don’t care. I won’t believe it. There is no gold vault behind that door!” one person said.

“I think that there is, Bill. I heard the bank people talking about it!” Jo wouldn’t budge, neither would Bill. Amy knew that she just HAD to interrogate Jo. She grabbed his hand, and dragged him into the alley next to the bank.

“What vault? Tell me tell me tell me! Ahem, I mean what do you know about said vault?” said Amy.

“Kid, leave me alone!” said Jo.

“Hmm, I wish that I had an electric torch…” said Amy.

“Alright, fine. We heard that there was a gigantic vault of gold behind the employees only door,” said Jo.

“Hmm, I suspected as much,” said Amy. She let go of his arm, and he ran off.

Amy was excited. She had a mystery! When she knew that there was no one passing by, she did her victory dance. She skipped back to the bank, where Cecily was waiting to give her a stern lecture. “I am going to tell mom that you ran off and that you were interrogating agai-” Amy passed her a One Direction t-shirt. “Squee! This will complete my collection of fan merchandise!” Aw, that was the last of my merchandise!

(Amy used One Direction when she was in trouble with Cecily. One time she put salt in Cecily’s tea, and when Cecily got mad at her she said that One Direction would hate her if she was mean.)

Cecily ran off to her One Direction temple in her bedroom and worshipped for half an hour, which gave Amy time to escape. Amy ran home — it was almost time for supper. When she got into bed, she told her puppy, Bartholomew, everything about the vault, and how she had tactfully interrogated Jo. Bartholomew told her about how he ate her toy bear by going into Cecily’s room and throwing up. That night Amy dreamed of golden chewed up toy bears.

In the morning she went with her mother to the bank. Her plan was to slip in the door and open the vault with her high tech “open sesames.” But she saw that someone already had that plan. A person in a trench coat had slipped into the employee’s only room. Amy decided to follow him. She turned the knob, and…

“Hey! Hey you! You’re not allowed to go in there!” an employee said. “That’s highly confidential!” Amelia was so disappointed. But she knew that if it was highly confidential (whatever that meant) it probably wasn’t a broom closet! Now she had a clue! She wasn’t exactly sure if it was gold, but it was something! The disappointment started to go away as her mother took her hand and dragged her out of the bank, muttering things that Amy could barely hear.

“You can read, Amelia! I don’t know why you would ever break the rules and go through that door!”

“Sorry. Please call me Amy, mother.”

“You are in so much trouble! And Cecily asked me to tell you that you have to clean up the vomit in her room! It’s your dog!”

“It’s her room.”

“You ruined her One Direction T-shirt!”

“Bartholomew ruined her One Direction T-shirt!”

“Why did you ever choose that silly name!”

“I like it. And why are you being so nice to Cecily! It was my bear that Bartholomew ate!”

“I thought that you outgrew that bear!”

“Bye.”

“What do you mean, ‘bye’?”

Amy took off. She ran all the way back to their apartment/hotel building. “Top floor, please.”

“Yes, ma’m.”

“Guess what, Bob! I found out that there is something amazing behind the employee’s only door at the bank!”

“What, a golden mop?” Bob joked. His name was not Bob, but Amy liked that name ever since she visited America and saw “Bob the Builder” on television. When she came back to Paris she said to Bob (Pierre) that she just had to know someone named Bob. So of course she chose her third best friend. (She wasn’t allowed to name her second best friend because it was a girl and she met Bartholomew before she saw Bob the Builder.) “Thank you, Bob.”

“Anytime, Amy.”

She hopped out of the elevator and into her apartment. Her family was very rich, so they owned the whole floor. She wanted the penthouse, but her father said that they shouldn’t spend their money on some foofy penthouse.

“I hope that you are here to clean my room,” warned Cecily.

“Nope. I want to speak with father,” said Amy, annoying Cecily. Amy ran to her father’s study. “Father! Can we go get bagels? I have a mission!”

“Did evil Mr. Squid come back?”

“No silly, this is real! I need as many danger sesames as possible!”

“Wait, I never heard the whole story of Mr. Squid!”

“Oh of course, you must hear! It was quite a battle. It was last month. I was sitting on my chair, and suddenly, Mr. Squid was in battle armor. I thought that he might have been playing dress up with Mr. Octopus, but I was wrong. He was getting ready to attack! I got ready. I ran to you, and asked for a dozen sesames. We bought them, because when I was little I had tons of charm.”

“I thought that this was last month!”

“Oh, but that is so long, cherie! Do not interrupt! Now where was I…ah, yes. I came back to my bedroom. Mr. Squid was in battle stance. I got into battle stance. I uttered the command. ‘CHARGE SESAME!’ I threw the bagels swiftly. They flew like bullets toward Mr. Squid. They hit him. Mother charged in. ‘Young lady, Mr. Squid is not a bowling pin,’ she said. I knocked her out of the way just in time for Mr. Squid’s ketchup packet bullets to whiz by. Mr. Squid was rushed to the infirmary by Mrs. Octopus, Mr. Octopus’ mother, who was a nurse. I defeated him in triumph. That is how the story goes.”

“You are very brave!” said father, laughing and clapping. “Yes, we will get the bagels.” Amy and her father walked down to the American shop, where they sold great bagels. They ordered a dozen sesame bagels.

“I’ll take it from here,” said Amy.

“Alright.” Amy’s father trusted her. “Now I must get back to work, dear.”

Amy went to the bank. The person in the trench coat was not there, but the employees only door was open, and in the progress of swinging shut! She made sure nobody saw her, and slipped in. What she saw did not amaze her. Aw, It’s just a dumb vault. She thought. But she slowly realized that the gold must be in the vault! The door was slightly open. The person in the trench coat had forgotten to shut it completely. It wasn’t enough to see inside, but it was open. Amy pushed as hard as she could on the gigantic door, and finally opened it enough to slip inside. There was one piece of gold.

“The person in the funny coat!” she said.

The next day Amy went to the bank early, before anyone was awake. She had her bagels ready. No one was in the bank except for the woman behind the counter, but she was in the back. But the employees only door was open again. Amy slowly walked in. The man in the trench coat was in the vault, just making sure that he didn’t forget anything. Amy fingered the piece of gold in her skirt pocket. She threw a bagel at him.

“Hey!” For a second he just stood there in surprise. “Ah! I’ve been shot! I’m getting weaker and weaker…hey…a 6-year-old angel…”

“I’m seven! And you just got bagelpulted!”

“Wait, what?” He bent down and picked the bagel up. “Hey kid! What’s the big idea?”

“You’re a thief! I’m telling!”

“If you tell,” he whispered threateningly, “I will shoot your brains out.” He pulled out a gun.

“A bagel gun?” Amy said.

“No, ya stupid kid, a lead gun.”

“Is that a kind of bagel? I only use sesame as a weapon.”

He pointed the gun at Amy. She screamed and ran out. He ran out the door into the streets of Paris. Amy followed. He ran to a sewer. He climbed in. Amy followed. There were thirty-nine other bandits. The sewer was overflowing with gold.

One of the bandits said, “Hey! There’s a little girl! Look!” Everyone looked at Amy.

“Hey kid! You’d better get out!” said the trench coat person.

I know a song that gets on everybody’s nerves, everybody’s nerves, everybody’s nerves I know a song that gets on everybody’s nerves, here is how it goes, I know a song…” Amy sang.

“Kid get out and if you tell anybody I’ll shoot you!” said funny coat Bob, as Amy called him.

“Funny coat Bob, please don’t shoot me with your lead bagel gun! I’ll leave!”

“H-how did you know my name was trench coat Bob?”

“Oh, I thought it was funny coat. But anyway I’m psychic, so bye.” Amy left.

At dinner, Amy’s mother asked, “What did you do earlier, Amy? I haven’t seen you all day!”

“I solved a crime! I am going to go see the police and tell them.”

“What crime?”

“Trench coat Bob says that if I tell he’ll shoot me with his lead gun which he told me is not a bagel gun.”

“T-trench coat Bob? Oh my, I’m so glad that you’re okay! People have been trying to catch him for months! He is from Venice, and — oh! Tell me everything!”

“What about his not bagel gun?”

“He won’t shoot you behind bars, honey.”

“Okay, so there’s a gold vault behind the employees only door and he stole the gold and he put it in a sewer with other bandits, I think that there were a lot, and I guessed his name.”

The next day Amy and her family went to the police office. They told the whole story, and Amy showed them the sewer where the gold was. She showed the the piece of gold that she found. “You’ll be sorry, little girl!” trench coat Bob screamed as he and the other bandits were dragged along to prison.

 

The End

Read the next one!

 

Saving Grace

Chapter One

 

Grace Cook and her sisters, Sadie and Ellie Cook had been best friends since the day that Grace had been born. They didn’t really fight. Even though Ellie was ten years older than Grace and Sadie was five years older, the trio acted in unison. But all of that was about to change on October 1st, 2010.

 

Grace left for school at 6:30 to catch the bus. She ran across the street with her long red pigtails whipping in the wind. She got on the bus and her friend Alyssa called out from the backseat: “Gracie, Happy Birthday!!! You’re finally ten!!”

“Thanks! And you know that you only turned ten, 21 days, 3 hours and 2 minutes ago, Alyssa.” Grace slid into the seat next to Alyssa, next to the window.

“That’s still 21 days, 3 hours, and 2 minutes ago!” Alyssa bragged.

Grace sat the rest of the bus ride listening to Alyssa talk excitedly about the six-person sleepover Grace managed to talk her mom into doing. Grace sat very quietly and stiller than a trash can when no one is in the room. She looked out the window and wished that Ellie and Sadie were here. Her favorite part of her birthday was going to be the secret feast that she was going to have with Ellie and Sadie at midnight. They had done this when Sadie turned ten. Grace couldn’t remember what they had done when Ellie had turned ten because she had just been born two months ago. The sleepover wasn’t it. It hadn’t been hard to get. She had just asked for The Feast. Ellie, Sadie, and Grace would be breaking a couple of rules.  a) They weren’t supposed to be up at 12:00 b) No food was allowed in Grace’s room and c) There was no c.

“Grace!!! We’re at school!” Alyssa shouted, shaking Grace’s arm.

They got off the bus and Alyssa skipped off to find their friends, Ela and Chloë Ledger, her strawberry blond hair bouncing back off her shoulders each time she took a skip. Grace ran after her, flying like the wind. She had been told that she was as graceful as wind when she ran. She flew to the school steps and sat down. She was feeling really lonely and wished that she could go to middle school with Sadie. Even if she still had few friends, at least she would be with her loving and kind older sister.

“I hope that the birthday girl doesn’t plan on sitting on the steps for the whole day,” a voice said over Grace. Grace looked up into the smiling face of Chloë Ledger, “Mind if I sit with you?” Grace shook her head. Chloë sat down and looked straight into Grace’s purplish-blue eyes and Grace stared right back into Chloë’s sea-blue eyes.

“What’s wrong?” Chloë asked.

“Oh, nothing.” Grace sighed and dropped her gaze from Chloë. “Where’s Ela?”

Ela was Grace’s best friend from first grade. That was when she had also became good friends with Matilda. Even though Chloë was Ela’s twin, she had only became good friends with her in 3rd grade, same with Alyssa.

“Ela’s inside. It’s almost 8:15. We should get inside as well.”

Chloë stood up. Grace got up too and as they walked in their school doors, Chloë took Grace’s hand.

“lt will be okay,” Chloë whispered into her ear.

They ran to the door and were sitting down at their wooden desks when the morning bell rang and their teacher, Ms. Kate walked in with a clip clack of her gold high heel shoes. She walked to the front of the room, sat down at her polished white desk, and turned to face the class.

“Good morning, ladies,” Ms. Kate said, and started the longgggest school day of school in Grace’s life.

Seven hours later (only it felt like seven hundred hours to Grace) Grace walked out of Elm Elementary and searched for their car that was going to pick Grace up.

“Over here, Gracie!!”

Grace whirled around and saw her sister Ellie standing by their Green Subaru.

“Ellie!!” Grace shouted, and ran into Ellie’s arms. Ellie laughed and ran a hand over Grace’s red pigtails. Grace looked up into Ellie’s warm brown eyes, and the loneliness melted away inside of her.

“How are you, Ellie?” Grace asked.

“How am I? How is the Birthday girl?” Ellie asked.

“She’s fine.”

“Hop, in the car, kiddo.” Grace got in the car and buckled herself into the seat. Ellie put the key in the keyhole, pressed the pedal, and the sisters set of home.

 

Chapter Two

 

At 7:30 in Grace’s apartment, Grace and her Family were eating 3-Cheese Mac-and-Cheese (Grace’s all-time favorite meal) and were having a nice conversation when Grace’s Mom, Sara, asked the question that would change Grace’s life forever.

“Did you get a letter yet, Ellie?” Sara asked Ellie. Grace looked at Ellie for an answer.

“What letter? Tell me, Ellie!” Grace demanded, looking Ellie straight in the eye. Ellie wouldn’t meet Grace’s eyes.

“Um, well, Gracie, I have to go to college and, well, I applied to Harvard, and umm, err, I got accepted there,” Ellie mumbled, looking down at the marble table. Grace stared at her sister in horror.

“You got accepted at Harvard!” Sara and Grace’s Father, Leo exclaimed, “That’s great news, Ellie!”

“No it ISN’T!!” Grace screamed, “How will I SURVIVE without my older sister???!!”

“I think you’ll manage,” Leo said. Leo didn’t understand Grace’s friendship with her oldest sister.

“Well, I just got an email from Boston School of Arts,” Sara said, “And they want to take you in. It would mean that you would move to Boston with Ellie.”

“Oh, Yes!” Grace cried out, “Thank you-”

Grace stopped and saw that Sara had been looking at Sadie. The email had been about Sadie not Grace. Sadie looked at her sister. She really wanted to take the spot but she knew that Grace would never be able to handle it. She would fall apart. She felt like she should be there for Grace. But on the other hand, not everything could revolve around her little sister. And being an artist was Sadie’s dream.

“I don’t know,” Sadie said.

“Come on, Sadie,” Ellie pleaded, “We would have so much fun! Boston wouldn’t be the same without you.”

“Maybe…” Sadie shrugged.

“My WHOLE world is about to FALL APART!!! And on my BIRTHDAY!” Grace screamed, got up from the table, stormed down the hallway and into her bedroom.

She got onto her warm bed and began to cry. Grace lay down on her back and looked up at her ceiling which was black had all of the constellations painted on it in gold. The rest of walls were royal blue. Grace got out her pillowcase (where she hid her diary), pulled out her diary, turned to a page, pulled out her favorite flow pen (red), and begin to write.

Dear diary,

My world may be about to end.

The next thing Grace knew, she was being shaken awake.

“Gracie Bear, get up!” Leo started to tickle Grace and her eyes flew open.

“Dad!” Grace groaned.

“Kiddo, you got to run! The bus comes in 20 minutes!” Leo said, pushing Grace around. Grace jumped up, very awake, and ran down to breakfast. 20 minutes later, Grace was once again running to meet the bus. She got on and thanked the bus driver for waiting for her (again).

“No problem, kid,” the bus driver said.

“Grace! Over here!” Alyssa shouted from the middle of the bus. Grace made her way towards her.

“Slept in?” Alyssa ask, “For the first time in forever?”

Grace grinned and said, “Yep. For the first time in forever.” Grace sat down next to Alyssa and said “Ready for school?”

“Ready to Fly.” Alyssa and Grace shared a secret smile.

They were doing their secret pumper-upper. Grace looked away from Alyssa, out the window. She then remembered what she had been thinking the morning before. The secret Feast! They had never done it last night. Grace felt hurt. They had done something for Sadie but not for her? Of course, Grace had noticed how close Ellie and Sadie were. They shared a room. They most likely had billions of whispered talks after they turned out the light and Grace could never know what they were about. They had forgotten. That was it. It was the most that they had ever hurt Grace. She felt like crying.  Soon they might be living in Boston together for 4 years. Grace knew that Sadie wanted to take the spot at Boston School of Art. What if their friendship fell apart? Grace thought it might. Sadie and Ellie had been distant for a while. Suddenly, the bus jerked to to a stop in front of Grace’s school. Grace got off and found herself head to head with Chloë Ledger.

“Chloë,” Grace said, looking into Chloë’s trusting eyes, “I’m about to be an only child. My world is about to end.”

 

Chapter Three

 

One month later Grace and her family were at Elm Tree Airport, so they could tell Ellie and Sadie (who had decided to take the spot) goodbye before they flew to Boston for 4 years. They had rented a little house near Harvard and was also close to the Boston School of Arts. Grace was heartbroken but she tried to put on a brave face as she hugged Ellie and Sadie goodbye. She was going to miss them more than they could imagine.

“Plane 3444 Boarding now. Please report to gate 5 if you are on plane 3444,” said a woman’s voice over the speakers. She sounded bored like she couldn’t believe that all she had to do was say the number of the planes and their gates all day.

“That’s our plane, Sadie,” Ellie said. “It’s showtime.” Sadie and Ellie gave everyone one more big last hug and took off running towards gate 5. Grace kept her eyes on them until they were out of sight.

“Gracie Bear,” Leo said, “We need to go back home.” Leo gently stirred Grace back to the car and drove home. When Grace got home her mom said:

“Grace, would you like me to make you some cookies?” Grace knew that cookies wouldn’t help the space left by Ellie and Sadie but cookies are never something that you want to miss on.

“Sure,” Grace said sadly. She ate the cookies wishing that she had been eating them with Ellie and Sadie at the Feast they had promised but had never happened

The next day at school, Grace felt even more lost than before. The gap left by her sisters was bigger than before. She spotted her friend Ela standing by the biggest elm tree in the schoolyard. She walked up to her, planning on telling her how she was feeling and hoping that Ela could help her.

“Hey Ela,” Grace said.

“Grace!” Ela cried and threw her arms around her.

Grace pushed Ela’s arms away and said, “I have a problem.”

“What is it?” Ela asked. “You know you can always tell me everything.”

“Well, it’s about my sisters,” Grace muttered looking down.

“Oh no! Not about them again! You know you’re supposed to fight with them sometimes in your life, Grace. You’re like the perfect family on a reality show!” Ela practically shouted.

Grace looked hurt and walked away. She thought that she could tell Ela anything, but that was obviously not the case. She knew that her friends thought that she and her family were perfect because they didn’t fight. Obviously, they didn’t know that Ellie and Sadie had completely ditched her.

“Hey girl,” Matilda said, walking up to Grace. Grace jumped in surprise. She hadn’t seen Matilda lurking right nearby.

“I hate to tell you this, but it’s true. You are like the perfect family on a reality show, Grace,” Matilda said sadly.

Grace shouted, “Oh no, not you too! I am not the perfect family! You don’t know the half of it! Ellie and Sadie just completely ditched me! They left for Boston for the next four years to have tons of fun without me!” Matilda looked doubtful. “It’s true!” Grace screamed and stomped away.

She stomped off to the school steps where she had sat just one month and a day ago. She couldn’t believe that one month ago she was worried about missing Sadie and Ellie for an entire day. Now she was worried about missing them for four entire years!

Just then, the bell rang. Grace ignored it, though. She put her head in her hands and started to cry into them. Her sisters had only been gone for a full day, and already she was missing them like they’d been gone for five years.

The school door opened and Ms. Kate came clickity-clacking out. “Grace,” she said. “Where have you been?”

Grace fiddled with her hands and nervously looked up at her teacher. “Okay, I’m coming inside, I’m coming inside.”

Grace had many days like that. She got through a month of school with her grades keeping up and keeping herself together. But one day, Grace completely fell apart. Her grades started to go down. First Bs, than Cs, then Ds. She couldn’t take her report cards home. She threw them out in the trash. She cried herself to sleep every night. And worst of all, her parents barely paid any attention to her. They didn’t do anything to make it better or worse. One day before school, Grace completely fell apart. She sat down with her back against a tree. She put her head in her hands. She felt someone slide down next to her. She looked beside her. It was Chloë.

“Grace,” she said sternly. “I know nothing’s okay right now.”

“Well, I miss my sisters,” Grace sighed.

“I know,” Chloë said gently. Grace looked up in surprise. Whenever she tried to talk to someone, they shouted at her, screamed, or said she wasn’t even trying to get through it. But Chloë’s behavior was different.

“What if I become your replacement sister?” Chloë asked. “It might help you get through your situation.”

Grace brightened immediately. “You would do that for me?”

“Of course I would!” Chloë said, smiling as bright as the moon.

From then on, Chloë and Grace became best friends. They had sleepovers every weekend. Chloë stuck with Grace whatever Grace was going though and Grace did the same for Chloë. The two acted like sisters. Grace’s world was put together again. Chloë helped Grace get though missing her sister and little by little Grace got used to Ellie and Sadie not being at her house. Chloë saved Grace from falling apart. She stitched Grace’s world back together. Chloë was Grace’s Saving Grace.

 

4 years later

 

“See you later!” Grace called over to Chloë.

“The sleepover still on?’ Chloë asked.

“You bet!” Grace said, looking over her shoulder as she got on her bus, M 91910. She sat down on a seat and pulled out her copy of the Iliad. She had just started to love poetry when she turned 14. Her mother had given her Homer’s poems and she loved them.

She thought back to four years ago when Ellie and Sadie had first left. She had been a wreck. She couldn’t handle not having them around. Now? It was better. She still saw them over summer break and spring break but their relationship was strained. They also seemed to be giggling to each other or they seemed to know something about Grace that she didn’t know. They texted their friends in Boston a lot. They stilled played with Grace but she knew that they were growing up and didn’t really want to play anymore. But they still had fun. They would talk and have fun hanging out with Grace. Once they left; it was always hard for Grace. But then she would get over it. All because of Chloë. They were still best friends today. Grace was still friends with Ela and Matilda but she thought they were shallow and silly. Alyssa had moved to India to help her mom and aunts out with their grandpa, who was king of India.

She even now had a little sister, Maddy Cook! Maddy had brown hair and brown eyes. She was the light of Grace’s past 2 years. Grace made a friendship with Maddy, just like her one with Ellie and Sadie.

Grace realized that it was her stop and got of the bus. Two people were waiting there for her. One was taller and the one next to her was smaller. They both had fire red hair and kind, warm brown eyes. They looked familiar.

“Hey, Gracie,” one said.

“Ellie!” Grace exclaimed and flew into her arms.

“We’re home.”

 

Horse Academy

Horse Academy

 

Chapter One

 

My name is Scarlet Brook. I have been waiting all school year for this day. Summer! All school year, it’s all about work, work, work! But in summer, just do whatever you want! Well, at least that’s what I thought. The first day of summer, I thought I would be going to hang out with my friends or something, but instead my mom forced me to babysit my annoying little sister, Sydney. Sydney wasn’t too happy herself.

“But, Chelsea! I want Chelsea to babysit me! She’s better!!” she whined.

“I told you! Chelsea is going on her honeymoon!” mom said.

“Can I at least hang out once today?” I said.

“Of course! The whole summer will be fun. Remember? I signed you up for riding camp!”

Oh, I forgot to tell you. I live in a magic land: a place where there are unicorns, wizards, and dragons. Usually normal people don’t have flying piglets as pets. Well, those normal people don’t live here.

 

Chapter Two

 

The next morning, I woke up still exhausted from what happened last night. First Sydney wanted water, then milk, then orange juice, then candy, and finally she wanted to watch a movie. But she wasn’t finished yet, then she wanted popcorn, and to go with popcorn she wanted soda. How does Gabriela do it? Well, she had ruined the first day of summer but not all the days! Then I just remembered. I had riding camp today! I hopped out of bed and into my riding gear. I brushed my teeth and brushed my hair. Then I ran out of my room and I thought, Wow! Am I doing well today!

 

Just then, I spotted Pip, my flying piglet’s mud footprints splattered across the floor. Uh oh, I thought. Then mom came out and screamed.

“Take Pip into the bath tub! Stat!!!” I slipped on the mud and grabbed Pip. I put Pip into the bathtub and ran out. I grabbed paper towels and slid them across the floor. When I saw mom slip, I couldn’t help but laugh. With her hair all tangled, her body all muddy, and veins popping out of her forehead, she looked just like an angry witch! Mom glared at me and made herself calm down. She sighed. “Wow, what a great start of a day!” she said sarcastically.

“Umm…mom?” I said, “Don’t I have riding camp today?”

My mom nearly fainted. “Go! Go! Go!” she screamed.

I ran out the door. “Wait!” she ran after me. She handed me my lunch and gave me a map to the camp. I ran all the way. On my way there, I thought to myself, Wow, I’m late on my first day of camp!

When I got there, I saw a bunch of riders on their horses. I ran to the coach and explained what happened. I could hear people whispering about me. The coach told me to take a seat on the line. I sat down.

“Listen up, kids! my name is Betty. Get a partner, we will be practicing jumps on our horses,” said Betty. Betty paired me up with a boy named Henry.

“Hi,” I said. He didn’t say anything to me. He just hopped on his horse. I looked at him.

“Well?” he said. “Don’t just stand there! Get on your horse!” he yelled. I jumped. I don’t know why, but I felt mad. “I don’t have a horse!” I screamed. Henry must have been frightened because he started backing away from me. Betty came over to see what all the commotion was about.

“What’s going on here?” she asked.

“That girl’s crazy and she doesn’t even have a horse!” Henry cried. He bumped into a girl that had dirty blonde hair worn in a low ponytail.

“Ow!” she said, turning around, “What was that for?”

“She made me!” wailed Henry.

“Calm down, riders!” Betty yelled.

“She’s not even a rider!”

“Quit screaming!” yelled a girl with brownish hair held in a tight ponytail. I had a feeling today was going to be a long day.

 

 

Chapter Three

 

When I came back to riding camp the next day, the girl who had screamed “quit screaming!” came over to me.

“Henry’s such a jerk,” she said to me.

“Tell me about it,” I said.

“I’m Bryn,” she said. I smiled.

“Thanks for being the first one to tell me their name. Well, besides Betty.”

Bryn laughed.

“Emily!” she called. The girl who Henry bumped into ran over.

“Hey, aren’t the one who got into the fight with Henry yesterday?” she asked. I shrugged.

“Nicely done!” she said, smiling.

“Huh?” I said. Emily and Bryn started laughing.

“Henry’s a pain,” said Emily. I joined in the laugh too, even though I didn’t know why we were laughing. When I got home I told mom all about it. Mom said she was happy I made friends. But I left out the part with Henry in it because I knew mom would ask all about it, or she would get mad at me for getting into a fight or call Henry’s mom telling her what happened.

Mom told me someone moved in next door. I was so excited! Maybe she would become my best friend! We could send flashlight notes to each other at night. And we could have sleepovers whenever we wanted! Oh. What if it was a boy? My heart dropped. I crossed both of my fingers.

“Mom,” I asked, “is it a girl or a boy?”

“A 13-year-old boy.” I felt like someone had dropped a heavy ball on me.

“And a 12-year-old girl named Jane.”

Yesss!!! I thought.

“They also have a 3-year-old named Taylor.”

“When are they coming?” I asked excitedly.

“Oh look! There they are right now!” she said, while pointing out the window.

“Moooom!” I moaned. “I wanted to greet her when she came!”

“Oh, doesn’t matter! Go!” she said. “I wanted to make her cookies!”

My mom sighed. After we made cookies, I fixed my hair and put on a blue blouse and a white frilly skirt. I walked out of my house to their house they had a porch that had white paint that was peeling off. I rang their doorbell and a big jolly lady opened the door.

“Hello,” she said.

“Hi!” I almost screamed. “I live next door. I came here to give these cookies to your children.” Hey, I know it was cheesy, but I was trying to be friendly!

“Oh, my!” she said.  “That would be lovely!”

Score! I thought. Just the response I was looking for.

“Right this way,” she said. “Jane! Someone’s here to see you!” she yelled.

“Really?” I heard a girl’s voice yell from upstairs. Then I heard footsteps coming from the stairs. Then I saw a girl with brown hair held in a braid on her shoulder.

“Hi,” she said.

“Hi, I’m Scarlet. I brought cookies,” I said, feeling kind of stupid wearing my Hello Kitty bag.

Jane’s eyes lightened up when I said cookies. “Cookies!” she repeated. She grabbed my arm and brought me to the kitchen. There I saw a little girl with light brown hair with a butterfly clip in her hair, smashing a toy against the table.

“Taylor, stop smashing your toy against the table!” Jane looked at me. “Little sisters are so annoying,” she said, glaring at Molly. “Oh, and that’s not all. My older brother Henry is such a pain. He just started riding camp.” Just then a boy came out of a room. My jaw dropped. It was Henry.

 

Chapter Four

 

Jane showed me her room with her adorable little sparkle bunny. Sparkle bunnies are bunnies that can jump super-high and sparkle when they are happy. It started shooting sparkles everywhere. My mom said I couldn’t get one because they are too messy. But I love Pip. She’s the perfect pet for me. Okay, well, you didn’t get a good experience of Pip on my first day of camp, but she is a wonder to have around.

Her sparkle bunny was named Fiona and was light brown. Whenever I looked into Fiona’s eyes, she was squinting. Then she would bend down and put her paws on her head like she was trying to scratch her eyes. “Why is she doing that?” I asked after the third time she did it.

“I think there’s something wrong with her eyes,” answered Jane, while planting a kiss on top of Fiona’s head. Fiona looked at me with her sparkling deep-hazel eyes. But when I looked at her, she did it again: squinted and then rubbed her eyes.

But then I noticed another cage next to Fiona’s. Jane must have saw my reaction because she said, “That’s Millie’s cage.” She put her hand on top of the cage.

“You have another bunny?” I asked. She opened the cage and pulled out a white bunny with it’s eyes closed. Fiona jumped on Jane’s shoulder and looked at Millie. Both of them sparkled.

 

Chapter Five

 

Henry came into Jane’s room. “What are you doing with that, crazy girl!” he asked. Jane looked hurt. “What do you mean?” she asked, signaling for him to go away. Then a tiny spike dragon came out behind Henry. Spike dragons are dragons that can protect you by shooting fire spikes from their mouths. They never turn against their masters. They can also fly. They are awesome! But they are also very rare. “You have a spike dragon!” I exclaimed without thinking.

“You mean Rex? Nah, he’s a thorn dragon.”

“Oh,” I said. Thorn dragons can turn invisible. They turn into a thorn when they sleep.

“Anyway, what are you doing here?”

“I live next door,” I said. His face got big.

“What?!” he asked like the world was ending.

“Umm…” I said. “I should go home.”

“Yeah, you should,” said Henry, kind of doing a sideways smirk.

 

Chapter Six

 

The next day at riding camp, I finally got a horse! It was light brown and had a beautiful brown mane. It had strong silver wings. I named it Miracle because it was a miracle that I got such a beautiful horse. Henry had a black horse with a black mane and black wings. It was ugly. He named it Spike. Bryn had a white horse with silver wings and had a beautiful brown mane. She named it Lucky. Emily had a brown horse with a brown mane and big silver wings. She named it Beauty. She was a beauty. The first time I got on Miracle, I felt like I was flying. I felt like Miracle was talking to me. Like she was telling me I was going to be okay. A couple times I got nauseous but when Miracle looked at me with her beautiful brown eyes, I felt like everything was going to be fine.

 

Chapter Seven

 

I didn’t even know we were going to have a competition! But I was totally surprised we had a competition in three days! I mean, who would do that? Just put a competition six days after the camp even started! We practiced what we were going to do in the competition. Betty said we were competing against other riders too. We were going to race. I had to memorize the obstacle course. I thought I thought I was going to win.

When I got home I thought I was home alone because it was so quiet. It is usually very loud. Since I thought I was home alone, I started freaking out.

“Momm!!!” I screamed. “Where are you?!”

“Booo!” someone cried behind me. I felt like I had a heart attack. I turned around and saw…

“Aunt Audrey!” I screamed. I hugged her.

“Hey Scarlet! I’m taking you out for dinner today!”

I squealed.

“With Sydney!”

I stopped freaking out. “Awww…” I said.

“Hi auntie Adwey!” Sydney said. Aunt Audrey took us out to my favorite Japanese restaurant, “Tatany.” I ordered my usual (udong, dumplings, and miso soup). Sydney ordered her usual  (miso soup, and tofu teriyaki).

 

Chapter Eight

 

The day of the competition, I had my riding gear on and we were playing in a stadium. I couldn’t believe we were going to be on TV! My family was here. So was my aunt Audrey, in her “I love NYC” shirt, my uncle Tim, my other aunt Mary, and my uncle Jeremy. I was surprised to see my cousins, Salina, Curtis, Alex, and my baby cousin, Molly.

We took our places in the stadium. I looked at the guy with the gun. I held Miracle’s mane tightly and she looked at me. I looked over at Bryn and she winked at me. I looked at Henry, and for the first time ever, he smiled.

“Ready, set, boom!” went the gun. Everyone went, including Miracle. I think Miracle was startled because she almost tripped when the man shot the gun. We flew up a hill. I passed a rider on a brown horse, then a black horse. I could see Bryn and Emily behind me. Then came the big hill. Miracle tried going up the hill but when a couple horses passed us, Miracle fell down the hill. “Miracle!” I yelled. Then Henry stopped near us. “Wow,” he said. He helped up Miracle.

“Thanks,” I said. I kept going. “Come on, Miracle, we can do this,” I said. Miracle flew up the hill. “Come on,” I said, “We’re almost there. I could see the finish line from here. Miracle went super fast and we saw a black horse that was about to cross the finish line and… zoom! Miracle passed the finish line! After the finish line, Miracle slipped and I fell off Miracle. Everything went pitch black.

 

Chapter Nine

 

I woke up in the hospital. Mom was kneeling next to me. “You won,” she said quietly.

“I won,” I repeated.

“Look,” she said pointing out the window. I looked out the window and saw Miracle! She had a gold medal around her neck. Then I saw Betty holding another medal. Then I saw Henry. I remembered how he stopped to help up Miracle. Maybe he wasn’t so bad after all. I smiled. It felt good to be a rider. I felt like it was going to be a long, great, awesome summer.

 

The End

Adventures of Emily

“Go outside, Emily. Go outside.”

 

Emily heard the voice in her dream. Emily was a girl that was blonde and had bright blue eyes. Emily went to a regular school, had a regular family, had a regular dog, and had a regular house. “Go outside Emily. Go outside.” Emily was hearing this for the fifth time so she decided to go outside. When she was outside in her yard, she saw a statue that she had never seen before. It looked like a statue of her grandfather that she never met, it told her, “Tomorrow, go to the graveyard at noon…”

 

The Next Day…

 

As the statue told her, she was there at noon. She saw the statue on top of her grandfather’s grave open and she saw a staircase leading downwards. She decided to follow it. It was a very twisty and slippery staircase. Once she reached the bottom, there was a big room covered in moss. She saw a shadow that looked a little bit like a ghost. She saw something glow and she decided to clear away the moss. After a little while, she saw a plaque that said…

 

“The 25th daughter of Quadricles will discover that her power is stronger than the power of Varniduca.”

 

Emily got scared when she saw that, and she thought, Who is Varniduca, and what powers is the plaque talking about, and who was Quadricles? Then she heard that same voice that was in her dream say, “Varniduca is an evil witch, Quadricles was a wizard, you are the 25th daughter and you must discover your powers on your own.”

Who is that? Emily wondered as she looked around, and suddenly she saw a shadow walking towards her.

 

“Hello, I am your grandfather, Anderson. I will help you learn to use your powers.” Then the shadow took off a cloak and Emily saw an elderly man.

 

“You will be able to walk through walls, turn invisible, read people’s minds, see the future, fly, and you will have laserbeam eyes.”

 

I have powers!? thought Emily.

“How did you talk to me in my dream?¨

“I have magical powers.¨

Emily asked, “How come everyone thought you were dead?”

“I hid down here to make a plan.”

He showed her a piece of paper that had a picture of the witch’s house and a bunch of lines and x’s.

“What’s this?” asked Emily.

“This is our plan,” he said, and then he explained that Emily would go inside the witch’s house and hide until the witch fell asleep, and then Emily would get the gems. She would have to get the two gems that control time. She stole the one that controls the sky and the one that controls the sun.

 

The next day…

 

“We have to work on the plan.”

“Why right now?” Emily said.

“Because we have to get ready for the big day.”

After working on the plan for three hours, they were finally ready.

 

The next day…

 

After walking for two hours, they finally made it to the darkest part of the forest where all the evil creatures lived.

“Where’s her house?” asked Emily

“Just a little bit farther forward.”

“Why do we have to hide?”

“Because if she doesn’t know we’re here, we’ll have a better chance of capturing her.”

“What’d she steal?” whispered Emily.

“She stole two of the five jewels that control time in the magical world.”

“Is that her house?” asked Emily pointing to a big purple and black mansion.

“Yes, be very quiet.”

“Is that her?” asked Emily, pointing to a lady looking out the window.

“Yes.”

“Should we go now?” asked Emily.

“Five…four…three…two…now!!”

Emily ran towards the house and knocked the door open.

“WHO DARES TO ENTER MY HOUSE!!” shrieked the witch.

Emily hid behind the bench as the witch started to search. Emily turned invisible and read the witch’s mind.

She was thinking, “Is it Tommy’s cat again?”

Emily thought, “Phew, she doesn’t know I’m here.”

Emily silently walked forward.

Emily went behind the witch.

Emily tripped over the back of the witch’s dress and made a loud sound.

“WHO IS INSIDE MY HOUSE?”

Emily hid behind a closet while the witch put a forcefield around the house so that nobody could get out once they were inside and the power of invisibility didn’t work.

“I seee you,” said the witch.

As the witch started to look for Emily, Emily quickly searched the house for all the hiding spots possible. Emily hid under the witch’s bed and hoped that she wouldn’t look for her there. After searching for three hours, the witch said, “Whoever was in here must have left. They couldn’t have stayed in here without food or water. I will take off the barrier.”

 

After waiting for three hours, Emily heard the witch start to snore. Emily decided to take a chance and come out of her hiding spot. Emily silently tip-toed away from the bed and searched the house for something that might look like a magical gem. After searching every room in the house, she found a pattern of stones on the floor of an empty, very small, dusty room. After thinking for a little while, Emily thought it was a code. She recognized this type of code from books, I have to step on the correct stones for something to happen. Emily also noticed that there were clues for which stone to step on. They were: Blue is the fifth color of the arc of seven colors.

The bright yellow sun is the closest star to the earth. The midnight sky seems far, far away. White is the center of all the colors. Grass is the middle of the sun and the water. The bright color of royalty belongs in second place. The color of ever-lasting fire belongs on the third mark of seven. Emily thought and wrote in her notebook and came up with the answer. Purple, gold, red, white, blue, green, yellow. Emily stepped on the stones in that order, and she found herself inside a huge room. I have to get the stones. But then she thought, What if she catches me? Emily chose to search for the gems. After searching everywhere, she found the gems in a big box. Emily was about to grab the box and run, when the witch said, “I found you.”

“I see you too,” said Emily.

“I know you see me,” the witch said. The witch made a bubble around her and Emily so that they had to move in that small space. Emily made a laser net around the witch and after a little while, the witch gave up and said, “I give up, you can have the gems.” So Emily took the gems and with some help from her grandfather, the forest animals, and the birds, they brought the witch to the magical prison, where she would stay for one hundred years. Emily also returned the gems to their spots in the magical rainbow castle where they belonged, and everything was normal again.

 

The End

Route 66

Chapter One

 

My headphones were in while I stepped out of the car. I flipped my hair, then put my black sunglasses on. I didn’t realize how sunny it was here. I grabbed my suitcase and rolled it inside the hotel. I heard my mom calling my name in the distance, but I ignored it. I was too into my music to turn around and talk to her. I was listening to Calvin Harris, his new single, “Outside” feat. Ellie Goulding. I walked into the hotel and waited in the lobby for my mom. I sat down and took out my headphones. My mom came in carrying a bunch of my bags. I wanted to help her, but the hotel guy seemed to have it under control. When she came over she put down the bags and got a cart.

“You know, Hallie, it wouldn’t hurt if you helped a little,” she said to me.

I stood up and started helping her. If you don’t understand what’s going on right now, I’ll tell you.

Me and my family lived in Nashville for 16 years, but my parents got divorced last month, so my dad stayed in Nashville with my older sister, Emily, who is 18, and me and my mom packed our bags and moved to Los Angeles, California. I didn’t choose to move, it actually wasn’t my choice at all. I didn’t have a say in it. I didn’t mind leaving my dad, he was always kind of mean to me and my mom. He hit me sometimes. It was Emily that I had trouble leaving. She was not only my sister, but she was my best friend. We did everything together and we told each other all of our secrets. We had a really hard time saying goodbye. But enough about that, it’s going to make me cry. My name is Hallie. I’m 16 years old and I love producing music. My hobby’s are making music and DJing. when I left Nashville I brought all my equipment with me, oh, and my cat, Dibbles. Dibbles and Emily were the only things I really had in Nashville, I didn’t have a lot of friends, I was very independent. I spent most of my time locked in my room making Music. So in a way moving to LA wouldn’t be such a bad thing, new friends, a new start. It would also be a good break from everything. I love Emily, but she was such a goody-two-shoes. That’s why my dad never hit her, because she was perfect. Every little thing about her. I have light brown hair with blonde highlights, it’s up to my shoulders, I have side bangs, they don’t really show, but it’s okay. I like it.

 

Me and my mom went up the elevator to our room, we would be staying here a while until we can afford a real place. When we got to our room, I started unpacking. My mom came up to me, “Hey, sweetie, I know this is tough for you but I’m really proud of you for pulling through.”

“No problem mom, anything for you.” I said.

“Oh, sweetie, you’re the best.”

I smiled and put Dibbles on the floor so he could stretch. I put my clothes into drawers and put my DJ equipment on my bed. I went into the bathroom to check on my mom, and she was fixing her hair.

“Sweetie, remember tomorrow is your first day of Brookstone,” she said to me. Brookstone was the new school I would be going to. I nodded and hugged my mom. She really was the best.

“I love you, mom” I said.

“Aw, sweetie, I love you too. So, so, much.”

 

My mom was my hero. She was always there for me. I loved her so much, when I was younger we had our occasional fights, but they usually only lasted for five minutes, then we would hug it out and say we loved each other, we don’t have a bad relationship, and we don’t have a perfect one either, we have one that would last through the good and the bad times, and I loved that about us. Her name is Julia, she’s 38-years-old, I know, pretty young, her and my dad had kids early.

 

Chapter Two

 

The next morning I had to wake up at 6:50 a.m., because Brookstone was very far from the hotel. My mom wasn’t up yet so I decided I would surprise her with some breakfast in bed, she was going through a really hard month and I knew she was stressed out, so I went into the lobby in my PJs with Dibbles in my arm. I went inside the coffee shop and bought two Caramel Lattes (her favorite) and two Scones (also her favorite). I saw people staring at me- they thought I was some kind of freak because I was in Pajamas and holding a cat in my arms. I didn’t care, though, I was used to it. In Nashville people would make fun of me all the time for the way I looked. You should’ve seen me, I looked like a freak, seriously though, when I was 12 I dyed my hair pink and chopped most of it off. I know. Freak.

I went back to the room and woke my mom up, it was now 7:15. She woke up and smiled when she saw the Caramel Lattes, I told you those were her favorites. My mom is very pretty, she has dark curly brown hair that goes all the way to her ribcage. She sat up and grabbed the Latte out of my hand. We both laughed. I put Dibbles on her lap and grabbed clothes from the drawer, I changed into my outfit. I was wearing a plain white crop top and long black overalls, my signature black sunglasses, and my beige suede wedges. I walked out of the bathroom. My mom saw me and was paralyzed.

“Is something wrong?” I asked.

“Not at all, you just look so beautiful,” she answered. I smiled at her. I checked my phone, it was now 7:27, I had 3 minutes before I had to go. I grabbed my backpack and hugged Dibbles goodbye, I didn’t want to leave her. I haven’t left her alone in 3 months.

“Don’t give mama so much trouble, be good, Dibbs.” I kissed her forehead. then I hugged my mom so tight I could hear her heart beating.

“I’m gonna miss you, mama” I said.

“Oh, honey, I’m gonna miss you too. But trust me, you are going to kick Brookstone’s butt.”

I laughed. I let go of her and took a deep breath. I stood up from the bed and said goodbye one last time, then I walked out the door, (not) ready to start a new school.

 

Chapter Three

 

I needed to take the bus to school. It was a 30 minute ride. School started at 8:30. and it was 7:38 now. I put my headphones in and walked to the bus stop. While walking, I looked around noticing everybody, they all looked so different then the people from Nashville, they went from cowboy boots to five-inch-high heels, from old-fashioned jeeps to bright red Maseratis, big country hats to bandanas, leather backpacks to leather jackets. I started missing Emily, so I called her. The phone rang and rang. No reply. Dang, Em. I left a message.

 

“Hey, Em, it’s Hallie, just wanted to say I miss you. You’re probably at school right now, I’m on my way to Brookstone now. I really don’t know how I’m going to survive without you.”

 

I started tearing up. No. No. Not now. No. But it was too late, by the time I reached the bus stop I was sobbing.

 

“Well, now I’m crying. I love you, Em. please call me soon. Bye.”

 

I hung up and wiped the tears from my face. It was 7:49. The bus came at around 7:51.

 

On the bus I sat alone. Everyone was playing on their phones, or throwing spit balls at one another, I was sitting by the window in silence, I wasn’t in the mood for anything. I felt so different, I was actually, for the first time in my life, nervous about something. This was not me. I did not get nervous. I was tough. Wasn’t I? Well, apparently not.

 

I got off the bus at 8:27, 3 minutes early. When I got off the bus I was completely starstruck. The school was 10 times bigger than the one I went to in Nashville. My heart began racing. I wasn’t ready for this. This wasn’t me. I’m not a california girl. I’m a nashville girl with a heck of an accent. Would people make fun of me? Would they think I’m weird? god, I still own my cowgirl boots from 5th grade. Snap out of it, Hallie. you don’t get scared, you don’t get nervous. You are strong. But the truth was, I wasn’t at all.

I walked inside the school, and there were people everywhere. I basically fell over. I didn’t know where I was going. I wanted to ask, but everyone seemed busy doing their own thing. This is so weird, I thought, I mean, it’s January 25th, and I’m starting school. It’s the middle of the year. What the heck am I doing here? I reached the principal’s office at around 8:34, and knocked on the door.

“Come in!” he said.

“Hi, I’m Hallie Steinfeld, I’m enrolling here.”

“Hallie! so nice to meet you! Please, take a seat,” he said to me.

I sat down and took my sunglasses off. The principal started talking to me about a bunch of school stuff, but I wasn’t paying attention. Behind the principal was a big glass window where I could see everything going on. It was a regular school, I guess. It had all the labels, the jocks, the nerds, the popular click, the rockers, the goths, and the loners. That was me. When the principal finished talking he stood me up and took me to my first class. English. I walked in and took a deep breath. I was ready. The teacher introduced me to everybody and then gave me a seat. Right in the middle.

“This is it, Hallie” I thought. “This is it.”

 

Chapter Four

 

English was interesting. but mostly the same as my old school. I guess it was better. I saw some boys staring at me, that was a good sign. Hopefully. Classes went by pretty quickly. I found my locker, I was next to a jock and a popular girl which kind of sucked because they were just talking really loudly about this sick party that I wasn’t invited to. But it was okay because I didn’t expect to be invited to anything yet. I had five minutes left of Math before I went to lunch. I was actually pretty excited to meet new people. Too excited. I dropped my text book and it made a huge bang on the ground. Dang it. Everyone stared at me, and I even heard some laughs from the people in the back row. I leaned down to go pick it up, but somebody got it before I had the chance. I looked up. right there was the most beautiful boy I have ever seen in my whole life. He had green eyes and blonde hair. He was obviously a jock because he was wearing a varsity jacket that said “BROOK 4 LYFEEEEEEE.” Then I realized who he was, he was the jock next to my locker, he was the one, he was- ring.

I snapped out of my daydream, I guess I just spent five minutes looking into the eyes of that handsome hunk. And… and… he stared back! When I got to my locker to put my stuff away, I felt someone tap my shoulder. It wasn’t my- I mean- the handsome hunk, it was lady hands. I shut my locker and turned around. right there was “the” clique, the one that every single school has. the popular ones, the pretty ones, the only ones that everyone looks up to.

“Hi, is it.. Bayley?” the blonde one said.

“Hallie,” I replied.

“Whatever your name is, you better stay away from Jared,” she said with sass.

I was confused. who was Jared? Wait a minute, the blonde, she was in my math class, Jared must be… the handsome hunk. Even his name is hunky …

“Listen, blonde, you can’t control me. You might be physically flawless, but it doesn’t mean I like you.” What. Was. That. I’m such an idiot. The clique walked away laughing at me. I leaned back on my locker and sighed. Then somebody came over next to me.

“Hey,” the voice said, “I’m Jared”

Ah Oh my God what is life. I acted cool.

“Hi, I’m Hallie,” I replied. I turned around to face him. He was sooo tall. He must have been 6’4.

“Can I take you to lunch?” he asked.

Ahhh, I’m going to die in this dream.

“You may.” I replied, acting casual. We started walking. Then he looked at me and said, “Your hand looks heavy, let me hold it for you.” Then he grabbed my hand.

I seriously almost passed out. I laughed a little. Oh my god Hallie, what was that? But it was okay because he smiled.

“so, what do you like to do?” he asked me.

“I produce music.” I said.

“No way! My dad works for a record label!” he said.

“Awesome.” I replied. I started to get used to this. I wasn’t shy anymore. We were laughing in the lunch line talking about our lives. I pulled out my phone and showed him Dibbles. That was a big hit. He loved cats! Yay! I feel like I could tell him anything: I told him about my parents and how they got divorced, about how I live in a hotel with my mom, how I have a sister, and how I lived in Nashville. Everything. Now I know we’ve only known each other for a day. But I felt like I’ve known him all my life. It was so easy to talk to him. The words flew right out of my mouth, and the best part was, he didn’t think of me any differently knowing about my past.

“Hey, Hallie, I’m having this party tomorrow at my house, do you wanna come?” he asked.

“I would love to!” I replied. I was so happy. I knew I was going to like this school. but it gets better.

“Hallie, do you mind if I have your number?”

I was done. Completely done. What is this I can’t even. I gave him my number and he texted me right away. I’m pretty sure I passed out.

 

Chapter Five

 

When I got out of school that day I was so happy I skipped all the way home. When I got to the room, my mom wasn’t there, but had left a note.

 

Hallie,

I will not be home until late tonight. I am going on a job hunt. Be safe and take care of Dibbles. Text me if you need anything. Love you.

 

Mama <3

 

I smiled and jumped on to my bed. Dibbles was sleeping. I opened my phone. 3 messages.

 

Emily-

Hi, Hallie, I’m sorry I missed your message. I love you so much and I know you’ll get through this. You are so strong and brave. I miss you too but I know that you are going to do just fine in LA. Always text me, Hall. <3

 

I replied:

 

Thx so much Em, you’re the best, I met someone today and I think I really like him. 🙂

 

There were 2 more messages.

 

555-2424

hey, hall. it’s Jared  😉

 

hehe… he called me Hall…

hey Jared, I had a lot of fun getting 2 know you today  😉

 

I sent it. Ah!!! Be calm, Hallie, be calm.

 

Dad-

hey, sweetie. how’s LA?

 

I didn’t feel like talking to him. so I just deleted the text.

Then I got 2 more messages.

 

Emily-

already?? omg, girl. you cray-cray.

 

I laughed.

 

Jared-

me 2. so r u going 2 the party? it starts at 8:00.

 

Duh! Of course I was going!

 

i’ll be there.

 

Jared-

great, I will pick u up at 6:50

P.S

i think ur really pretty and cool. just wanted u 2 know.

 

Oh my god! This is unreal.

 

thx. you’re also really cool. and really handsome….

 

Uh oh. I think that was too much. Oh, well!

 

Jared-

lol thanks. ur the best. ik we just met. but I think ur the most beautiful girl in the world.

 

I’m dead. R.i.p me. I died. Dead.

 

omg thanks you’re so sweet.

 

Jared-

maybe we could get dinner together sometime?

 

Ahhh! I stayed calm. Pf, No I didn’t!

 

I WOULD LOVE THAT <3

 

Ahhh!

 

Chapter Six

 

The next day went by fast. Jared and I talked a lot at our lockers. He was my first friend at this school, and I think I really liked him. I didn’t have any other friends. I mean, there were these two girls that I talked to sometimes in Social Studies, Gabby and Mia. But they weren’t really like me. They weren’t mean or anything, they just weren’t relatable to me. After school I ran into them, and they asked me if they could come over to my house. Okay, so I didn’t tell them that I lived in a hotel. They couldn’t be expecting a mansion. I said yes and they cheered the “EEK!” cheer. They linked my arms and we walked home together.

 

“So, Hallie, what do you like?” Gabby asked.

I could tell she was the chatty one. Mia was like her sidekick.

“Well, I like cats” I said.

“NO WAY! My uncle has a cat!” Gabby said.

“Wow!” I said sarcastically, I told you I was more independent, I didn’t like talking! When we got to the hotel they looked shocked. I just ignored them because I don’t even care if someone makes fun of me. This was my life, I couldn’t change it. They looked disappointed, so I turned and looked at them. “You think I want my life to be like this? You think I chose this path? Wow. You guys are super selfish to think that everyone just has a perfect life. Because not everyone lives in a huge mansion like you guys.”

I was going to keep talking but Gabby’s nails were so long they were sticking into my skin.

“Are you going to Jared’s party tonight?” She completely ignored what I’d just said. Wow.  I nodded.

“Maybe we could get manicures together!!!” Gabby screamed.

Done. I was done. I just can’t.

“Yeah, but, um… listen… I… can’t because I need to… um….. visit my uncle! At the… police… station.” That was the worst lie in the world.

“Oh, okay! We’ll see you at the party!” Gabby said.

God, she was so cheery! I opened the door to the room. I didn’t see my mom.

“mom? mom?” I saw Dibbles hiding in the corner.

“Dibbs, where’s mama?” He started shivering. Huh. Then I heard something. it was coming from the bathroom. I opened the door, and there was my mom. Lying on the floor, sweating, most of her hair chopped off, wearing dad’s old shirt.

 

Chapter Seven

 

I started freaking out. I started sobbing. I grabbed the phone and called 911. It was ringing.

“Hello, this is Hallie Steinfeld. I just came home from school and my mom is lying on the floor sweating and looks like she passed out. I really need an ambulance.”

“Okay. We’ll be right there, what is your address?” the policeman said.

I told him everything he needed to know. I was freaking out. I went to the bathroom and leaned down near my mom.

“Mom. mom, answer me mom. I know you’re there mom. mom, please.” I starting crying like crazy. The ambulance came 10 minutes later. They rang the door and I answered. They ran into the bathroom and took my mom on the stretcher. They carried her away and I followed. In the car, they were feeling her heartbeat and saying a bunch of medical stuff. I pulled out my phone to call Emily.

 

Ring. Ring.

 

She answered.

 

“Hi, Hall! What’s up?

 

“It’s mom, she passed out today and I found her in the bathroom. She was sweating and most of her hair was chopped off. She was wearing dad’s shirt. I called the ambulance and we are in the car right now. God, Em. I’m freaking out.”

 

Tears kept running down my face. I couldn’t survive without my mom. She was my hero. What would I do without her?

 

“Oh my god, Hall. I’m so sorry.”

 

“I don’t know what to do, Em.”

 

“She’s going to be fine Hallie, she is strong and she will pull through.”

 

“I don’t even know what happened, or how it happened.”

 

“You never know, but she’ll be fine, Hall. I really wanna be there for you but I’m in the middle of finals. I’m so sorry.”

 

“It’s fine. I guess I just really needed my older sister to come here and tell me everything’s alright instead of hearing her voice on a freakin’ phone.”

 

“Hall, don’t be like that.”

 

“No, Emily. When I need you the most, you aren’t there. Silly of me to even think that you would fly to LA to see your mom who might die. because we both know that you don’t even care.”

 

“HALLIE!”

 

I hung up the phone, then the tears came out, they came out and never stopped. I knew my life sucked, but I thought my sister didn’t. We used to be best friends. Now we felt like strangers.

 

Chapter Eight

 

I was in the hospital waiting room for about three hours. They wouldn’t tell me anything. I just kept pacing back and fourth. I texted Jared.

 

jared im so sorry I have to miss your party. family emergency, im at the hospital r n. long story, I am so sorry I really wish I could be there but I just cant.

 

I sent it, and leaned my head back against the wall. Why did this have to happen? Why does my life have to suck, why is my family a freak show? Why is my “sort of” boyfriend popular, why did I have to move, why did my parents get divorced. Why did my dad hit me? Why isn’t Emily here. Why? Why? Why?

 

Jared-

party cancelled. coming 4 u, hall. ill be there in 10.

 

No, he was not really coming. He did not just cancel his party to see me. A girl that he’s known for 2 days. I couldn’t believe it. I never thought I would say this, but I was in the hospital, with my mom who was passed out, not knowing if I could be happy again, and a guy that I’ve known for 2 days, who is hot, and popular, made me … smile. Made me smile at one of the hardest times in my life. He was the one that brought me up when I was down, and to think … that used to be Emily. But now, it’s him. It’s him.

 

Jared did come. He ran in and threw his arms around me, I hugged him so tight that I could feel his manly arms come out of his shirt. He sat me down and held my hand. He made me so happy. The doctor came in about 15 minutes after.

“Hallie?” he called.

I stood up with Jared, whose hands were in mine.

 

I saw my mom in the hospital bed. She looked horrible. So sick and red. I started crying again.

“So what happened?” I asked holding my tears back.

“Well, it’s hard to tell, we found her on the ground holding scissors in her hands, so it must’ve been suicide, and that also explains the cut hair. Suicidal thoughts happen all the time. Apparently she’s had a mental disorder since she was 34, but nobody knew so it couldn’t be treated. She’s also suffered from very serious depression. She is going to have to stay here for a while if she wants a chance to survive, I am very sorry to say this, Hallie, but it is a very easy situation for her to die.”

When those words came out of the doctor’s mouth I stopped breathing. I stopped moving. The earth stopped spinning, everything just stopped, well, at least for me. I ran out of the room. I heard Jared call my name but I ignored him, I was so depressed. I am nothing. Literally, nothing. Silly of me to think there was such a thing as happily ever after.

 

Chapter Nine

 

The next week went by so slow. I was spending it in the hotel with Dibbles. I know I was supposed to go to school, but I couldn’t, it was to hard for me. I texted Jared for most of the day, and called the hospital to check in. I wasn’t allowed to stay at the hospital because they were doing surgery. I got a text from Jared.

 

Still on for tonight? xoxo

 

Oh my god, I totally forgot, I had a date with Jared tonight. I had to go, I needed to get my mind off of mom.

 

of course. pick me up at 7? xoxo.

 

I changed. I was wearing my white crop top with a high-waisted plaid skirt, I wore my old-fashioned high heels and my black purse to match. I wore my mom’s gold necklace for good luck. Then the door rang. I opened it.

“Wow,” he said, “You look amazing.” I blushed.

“Thank you. and you as well,” I replied.

He took my hand and we walked to his car. He had a big,black van, you know, the one’s that rich people with drivers have. It was amazing.

“Wow,” I said. He laughed and opened the door for me. What a gentleman. We drove to a sushi place near his house. It was so fancy. We sat at a booth in the back, and it was so nice. We started talking about his life and what he does and his family. I found out his mom had died. When he was three, she got into a car accident. He had a sister named Gigi, who was 18. He had such an interesting life. We got our sushi 30 minutes later; I got an avocado roll and he got a california roll. We laughed so much that night. When we were done I leaned my head against him. He smiled.

“I really like you, Hall. I know we just met but I think you’re the one for me.”

I smiled and stood up.

“Me too.”

He leaned in, I leaned in, and the next thing you know we were kissing, and I never felt so happy.

 

It was 1:00 when I got home. But I didn’t even try to fall asleep, I just texted Jared all night.

 

tonight was amazing. thx for the sushi. <3

 

No problem, hall. 😉

 

What is this, some kind of sick joke?

 

so are we dating now? <3 I sent.

Was that too much? Nahhhh, it’s okay.

 

I felt mean, I know I should’ve been paying all of my attention to mom, but I couldn’t help it. He was the only one that made me happy and I needed to be happy more than anything right now.

 

if thats okay with you…. <3

 

Ahhh! We’re dating. Ahhh!

it’s totally okay with me. ily.. <3

 

Before he could respond I got a call. It was from the hospital. I answered it. The words they said on the phone call were the two words I would never forget.

She. Died.

 

Chapter Ten

 

How could they do that? Just say it like that. “She died” not even a “She passed away, i’m so sorry” type of thing. I was over it. Over life, over everything. I didn’t care anymore, all I had left was a crappy hotel room, and my cat that sounded like a rooster. I was completely done. So I went away, I packed my bags and started the car. I drove through the city with the roof down and my hair blowing in the wind, I didn’t tell anyone, not even Jared. I just abandoned my life because it was pointless. My phone kept buzzing with texts from Emily, dad, and Jared. But I ignored them. They weren’t important anymore, nothing was.

I drove all the way to, you guessed it,

Route 66.

 

THE END

 

Conclusion

 

When I went to Route 66 I found a small shack near the water. I ended up telling Jared where I was, and being the gentlemen he was, he came to get me. I wouldn’t go, though. I didn’t want to live in that sick town. So he bought me a house, about 15 acres across from his house. He visited once in a while, but me, I lived with Dibbles for five years, until one day Jared came over and bent down on one knee, and you know where this is going. We got married and lived, I guess you could say, happily ever after.

Emily and dad came to the wedding, and me and Emily were friends again. Not as close as we were before, but we were sisters, and some things would never change between us. But dad was gone. He wasn’t dead, but I never talked to him again. It was so wrong it almost felt right. So Jared, Dibbles and I, along with our one kid, Julia, yep, named after my mom, ended up living on Route 66.

 

The Night Before School in Texas

Once there was a family, the McKnight family. They moved from Utah to Texas during the summer. Here are the people in the family. Mindy is the mom of the family who has her own youtube channel called The Mom’s View. Shawn is the cameraman for the youtube channel. He’s also the Daddy’o. Brooklyn is the popular girl, was head of the cheerleading squad(in Utah), who makes friends very easily and is super nice. She is 14 years old. Bailey is Brooklyn’s identical twin who is 2 minutes younger and is super shy and funny. Obviously, you know how old she is. Tyler is very cute and is going into his sophomore year. He is 15. Kayla is the little daredevil of the family and is going into 4th grade. She is 9. And Riley is a very quiet soon-to-be-kindergartener, age 5.

So here’s the story. They were all eating dinner at the dinner table and talking about the first day of school tomorrow.

“Is everybody ready for their first day of school tomorrow?” said Mindy.

“I am!” said Brooklyn. “I’m ready for new friends and I hope to be the head of the cheerleading squad at Presner School.”

“I’m not,” said Bailey, looking annoyed and folding her arms.

“Why?” said Riley with her quiet, tiny, five-year-old voice.

“Because I’m not going to make any friends and I’m going to be a solid-D student and have the worst time ever!”

“I bet you’re not!” said Kayla.

“Bailey isn’t that nice that Kayla thinks you’re gonna have the best day tomorrow as a freshman.”said Mom

“I care,” said Riley”.

“Uhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh I do too?” Tyler said, obviously confused.

“But, I care the most,” said Brooklyn.

“No you don’t!” said Bailey. “You always take all the attention away, you entered to be class president because you knew that you would get more votes. When I’m trying to make a friend you takeover, YOU RUIN MY LIFE! I’m done with dinner, Mom.”

“Me too,” said Brooklyn.

Brooklyn went up to her room and saw that Bailey was on the right side of the bed. So Brooklyn was about to get on the left side of the bed when Bailey flipped over on the left side.”I think you’re having trouble getting comfortable,” Brooklyn said .

“Yeah, Well it’s kinda hard to sleep when there’s a knife in your back,” Bailey said. She used her body to try and cover the entire bed so Brooklyn didn’t have any room.

“I think I’ll just sleep on this chair,” Brooklyn said as she sat on the armchair next to the AC.

”But if I get up to get a glass of water, you’ll steal the bed! LIKE YOU STEAL EVERYTHING ELSE!” Bailey said.

“Bailey I didn’t know I was hurting your feelings, and I am so sorry,” Brooklyn said.

“I thought you were my friend,” Bailey said.

“I AM your friend!” said Brooklyn.

“Well, I hate to see what you do to your enemies!” Bailey said.

“I don’t have any enemies!” Brooklyn said.

“You do now,” Bailey said.

“Ladies, ladies,” said a voice. It was Lucas. Lucas had a  crush on both Brooklyn and Bailey but, Brooklyn and Bailey didn’t have a crush on him.

“How long have you been here?” Brooklyn said.

“The whole time,” Lucas said. “I hate to see you two fighting! I want my future first and second wives to get along,” Lucas said.

“Get out!” both girls said.

 

September 4 ,2015 10:20

 

I’m trying to fall asleep but I can’t!

 

XO,Bailey

 

So Bailey hopped out of bed, went down the hall and to the left, into Riley’s room. She slowly opened the door and pinched Riley to wake her up.

“AH!” Riley said. “What are you doing here?”

“Riley, I’m nervous about my first day of school tomorrow. Do you have any advice for me?”

“I’m only five! Go to sleep!” Riley said as she got under the covers, hiding her entire body.

“Fail number one,” Bailey said as she closed the door slowly and headed into Kayla’s room. Bailey opened the door slowly and pinched Kayla to wake her up, same as she did to wake up Riley.

“Hey!” Kayla said. “Shouldn’t you be in bed? With Brooklyn?”

“I need some advice for school tomorrow because I’m nervous. Do you think you know anything about a freshman year?”

“I’m nine, I’m not an idiot,” Kayla said.

“I never said you were nine, or an idiot,” Bailey said.

“Just go to sleep,” Kayla said.

“Fail number two,” Bailey said. She closed Kayla’s door slowly and headed in Tyler’s room, thinking that he wouldn’t be such a big help. But she went in Tyler’s room anyways. She pinched Tyler to wake him up.

“Huh what huh?” Tyler said. “You’re so annoying ,” Tyler said. “Why can’t you just chill out for one minute? You’re exhausting,” Tyler said. He pulled the covers over his head and went back to sleep. Bailey didn’t even say Fail number three, because that was barely a try. So Bailey went into her parents’ room and opened the door. They were watching Odd Mom Out in their bed.

“Mom? Dad?”

“What are you doing awake?” Mom said.

“Shouldn’t you be in bed with Brooklyn?” Dad said.

“I can’t sleep. I’m nervous about my first day of school tomorrow!”

“You have nothing to worry about!” Mom said.

“You’re going to be just fine,” Dad said. Just then, the three of them heard footsteps. It was Brooklyn.

“Mom, I need my nighttime pills. I forgot I left them in your bathroom.”

“You didn’t take your nighttime pills tonight?” Mom said.

“No, I didn’t,” Brooklyn said. “And Bailey, what are you doing awake?”

“I feel like you guys should have a little talk,” Dad said.

“About what?” Bailey said.

“You know what, honey,” said Mom. “

Fine,” Bailey said.

“Brooklyn, you get your nighttime pills. Bailey, hop into bed,” Mom said.

“I’ll be waiting,” Bailey said to Brooklyn.

When Brooklyn came into the room, she said, “I don’t know what’s up with you, usually at the dinner table you’re telling jokes or listening to stories others are telling.”

“I’m just nervous I’m not gonna make any friends, I’m gonna get bad grades and I’m gonna be lonely and scared. I’m gonna have no one to hang out with.”

“You can hang out with me!” Brooklyn said.

“Wouldn’t you rather hang out with your friends that you’re gonna make at school?” Bailey said.

“The only reason I make friends easily is because those people are nice to me. I don’t know if the people in the new school will like me,” Brooklyn said.

“The truth is, I’m kind of a little shy. Not that many people like me.”

“But how did you get to be so popular? And how did you get to make so many friends at our old school?” Bailey said.

“The only reason I got so popular was because I was head of the cheerleading squad, and I was class president last year. The only reason I had so many friends is because a lot of people liked me.”

“Oh” Bailey said.

“I’m sorry about our fight earlier. I shouldn’t have told you that you ruined my life. Cause you really didn’t. Now I understand. I’m sorry for taking all the attention away,” Brooklyn said.

“You didn’t,” Bailey said. “I was just jealous.” They hugged each other.

“Let’s rest up for our big day tomorrow,” Brooklyn said.

“I’ll be right there,” Bailey said. “There’s just something I have to do.”

 

September 4, 2015 10:35 PM

 

Dear Diary,

 

Everything worked out just fine. Everythings ok, for now…

 

XO, Bailey

Dragons vs. Dracula: Book 5

The dragon brothers carefully entered the cave full of bats. They found out about the cave from Fred the Dwarf, a friend of the dragon brothers. They were exploring the cave, searching for the crystal of death. The Crystal of Death would give them the power to revive dead things, so they could revive friends and use it for good. When they entered the cave, bats charged at both of the dragon brothers, but the two dragons burned the bats by breathing fire.

“What just happened?” said the older brother.

“Don’t blame me, I didn’t do it!” said the younger brother.

Suddenly, a pack of robotic bats with lasers came charging at them. They shot at the dragons. But then, one of the dragons created a burning shield that bounced the lasers off and reflected them towards the bats and destroyed them. The dragons together kept walking in the cave until they fell into an electrified cage. They quickly flew out before the cage closed shut.

The dragons kept exploring the cave looking for the Crystal of Death. After several days, they finally came to a dead end, and Dracula flew down from a hole on the ceiling with an army of indestructible bats.

Dracula commanded the bats to hold him up in midair so that Dracula could turn the dragons into vampires. After the bats held him up, Dracula tried to bite them. He opened his mouth, showing his teeth. They burned his teeth by breathing fire, so then Dracula changed his mind about turning them into vampires. He wanted to destroy them.

Dracula wanted to make the fight harder in order to impress the bats, so he let down the dragons and fought them fist to fist. First Dracula grabbed a rock shield and a metal sword and swung it at the dragon. The older brother dragon flew up then dived down while breathing fire, but Dracula dodged him. But the younger brother flew under and punched Dracula, knocking him down.

But then the older brother said that Dracula isn’t powered by life, he’s powered by death. After thinking about that, the brothers figured out that the Crystal actually powers Dracula and they would have to destroy him in order to get it. And so they hid behind the rock and created a plan. The plan was: the younger dragon would go to to Dracula as bait and while he did that, the older would create a formula out of the materials that they had. So after the plan was formed, they tried it. The younger dragon went in as bait and started to fight Dracula, and meanwhile the older dragon brother was making the potion. They kept on fighting until the potion was done and Dracula made the younger brother fall to the ground. Just as Dracula was about to destroy him, the older brother threw the potion and destroyed Dracula. The brothers found the Crystal, but they tested it first and threw a rock at the it. And the rock dissolved into ashes. So they had to wear a thousand rocks on their hands so their hands wouldn’t dissolve, and they put it in a container at their home in space. They decide that they will use their undissolvable tweezers to touch it.

They touch a button that points it towards what they want to heal. And that heals their friends.

Guardians Part 1

Chapter One

 

He walked back to the clinic. “How’s life?” Jason asked.

“Fine, for someone with cancer,” Jack responded, who was in his hospital bed.

“Well, if there’s anything I can do, tell me.” Jason paced around the room.

“Ugh, I hate this waiting. I wish you would either get better or… or something would happen!” Jason exclaimed. Jack had been diagnosed with cancer when he was 12.

“Well, it’s not like I can do anything!” Jack yelled.

Jason fixed his shaggy hair and left the room. He was 19, and had to get back home to study. He was on the basketball team, but not considered buff. He had a short temper and always needed something to do. He was diagnosed with ADHD when he was 14. He was walking back to his dormitory on 118th street when his friend walked up to him.

“Hey, how’s Jack?” asked Brian, the star of the basketball team.

“In his words, ‘fine for someone with cancer,’” Jason replied.

“Well, that’s not that great of an answer,” Brian responded.

“What do you want me to say?” Jason said.

Jason walked onto the college campus. He went to Columbia University. He was in his second year of college and was hoping to graduate with a master’s degree in engineering. People were all over the campus. He walked to his dorm building and sat on the steps, contemplating all that had happened that day. He needed to calm down. He had almost lost his temper on the basketball coach during a game, but Brian had gotten him out of the jam. The coach said Jason had a real problem and that he might need to see a therapist.

 

Chapter 2 (2 Weeks Later)

 

Jason knocked on the door. “Who is it?” the person behind it answered.

“It’s Jason, for the 7:15 appointment.”

“Ok, come in.”

He opened the door and laid on the couch. The therapist was sitting behind a desk with bookshelves to his left and right. He was wearing a sweater and a button down shirt with yellow jeans.

“Ok, Jason. Tell me, what angers you?”

“Well, a lot of things, but mainly, my friend Jack has cancer and I can’t deal with the waiting and not knowing what’s going to happen. It’s just scary, I don’t want to lose him, but I can’t wait much longer.”

“It seems you need to get your mind off of Jack and try to understand what’s happening to him.”

“Well, Jack isn’t having any surgeries and besides basketball, I do nothing else. What do you suggest?”

“Maybe try and get more involved in your school work.”

“Well, I’ll try that, but I’m not so sure it will work.”

Jason left the room, took the C train to 110th street and walked over to campus. “So, what did the therapist say?” his dorm mate asked.

“He says to get my mind of Jack by becoming more invested in my schoolwork.”

“That’s not the worst thing recommended by a therapist.”

Jason put down his school bag, pulled out his homework and laid down on his bed. Today had been good for Jason, something new happened. He tried to focus more on his schoolwork but he would always lose focus, even when he tried to work on the tiniest of things. He blamed it on his ADHD.

 

One day, he looked outside to the lion statues on campus. He looked back at his schoolwork and five minutes later when he looked outside, the statues were right outside his dorm! He was surprised and scared but also wanted to go outside and prove they had really moved. Finally, his curious got the best of him and he walked outside. When he opened the door, the lions spoke to him. “You are the only one who can see us. We can show you magical things but you cannot tell anyone. If you do, you will never see us again. Do you promise to never tell anyone?”

“Yes, I promise,” Jason said.

“Good. We will contact you when we need to.”

Jason walked away. He was puzzled by their words, “When we need to.” What did that mean? He turned back to them but saw the usual college students, chatting away. He resumed school as normal, but always had the lions on his mind. He wondered if what they had said was true, if no one else could see them but him. There had to be someone else.

 

Three Months Later…

 

It was a late Tuesday night, about 10:30 p.m. and Jason was studying. Then, the lions appeared. They seemed to pull him outside. It was like the lions could control his curiosity. “We need you now. Come with us.” The lions were being very conspicuous. A black sedan appeared out of the ground directly in front of him. “Get in,” the lions said. He got in the car.

I have to say, for a car that just came out of the ground, this is pretty comfortable,” Jason thought.

“Wow, really, Jason, you’re thinking about that. Why did we recruit you?”

“Wait, what? How do you know that?”

“Put two and two together, Jason. Figure it out.”

“Oh, ok, so you can read my mind now? Can I read minds now, too?”

“In time, Jason, you will learn. But for now, you need to learn the basics.”

“Basics of what?”

“The basics of controlling people.”

“Controlling people?”

“Yes, manipulating people to get exactly what you want.”

“Oh.” Jason was quiet for the rest of the car ride. He thought about what the lions had said. Did he really want to do this? Yes. He had to. It was the only way to stop thinking about Jack. The car ride finally ended. He got out of the car. “Where are we?” Jason asked.

“You don’t need to know that, so we won’t tell you.”

“Why not?”

“Our people do not like to waste time, so when we do not need to tell someone something, we do not.”

“That is a weird reason,” Jason thought.

“We can still read your thoughts.”

“Oh sorry, I forgot.”

They walked inside the building. It looked like a miniature castle with its and stone structure and towers. They walked four flights up a spiral staircase made of stone, with creaky wooden railings.

“Here is your partner, Jason.” A girl about 5’8” with long flowy blonde hair walked in with her own set of lions. “She will guide you through the basic training.”

“Nice to meet you, I’m… “

“I know who you are, Jason.”

“And who are you, then?”

“I’m Lara Walker. That’s all you need to know. Let me show you around the building.”

They entered the first door on their left. “What’s this?” Jason asked.

“This is the sleeping quarters.”

“Will I stay here?”

“While you participate in your training, you will stay here. After you complete your training, you will have the option to stay and be a mentor or work with the lions.”

“So, how many others are there?”

“We don’t know. The lions search around the world at campuses and school buildings for kids who can see them.”

“So how many are here?”

“Three others, making five altogether. I’ll introduce you to them when I’m done showing you around.”

They walked over to a set of white double doors.

“Is this the cafeteria?”

“We call it the mess hall, or the mess for short.”

“Ok, cool. Are there preset eating times or can you just walk in?”

“Well, both. From 8:30 a.m. to 10:00 a.m., you can get breakfast. From 11:30 a.m. to 1:00 p.m., you can get lunch, and from 6:30 p.m. to 9:00 p.m. you can get dinner. These times work in with your practice schedule but if you have time for any reason, you can stop by and grab a snack.”

They came to a long narrow hallway.

“What’s this?” Jason asked.

“These are the training facilities and classrooms.”

“Is that all?”

“…All of the building, yes.”

“I thought it would be bigger, for a secret hideout.”

“It’s not really a hideout, more like a training ground. Follow me.”

“Where?”

“To the others, remember?”

“Oh yeah, sorry,” Jason apologized. “They’re in class?”

“Yes. Good improvement on self-learning, Jason,” Lara remarked.

“Thanks?”

They walked into classroom number 504. “Who’s this?” asked the class in unison.

“Class, this is a new recruit, Jason.”

“Nice to meet you, Jason,” greeted some of the class. “Hi, Jason,” greeted the rest of the class.

“So, what’s this class working on?” Jason asked.

“We’re studying how to figure out what a person wants so you can manipulate them.”

“Oh.” Jason sat through the rest of the class.

“Did you like the class?” asked one of his classmates.

“Yeah, but I thought it was a bit weird.”

“We all do. But it’s better than where we came from so we’ll take it.”

 

Four Months Later…

 

While everyone was eating, the lions walked into the cafeteria and asked everyone to silence themselves. “Students, we, the lions, have an announcement to make. The training you have gone through was not actually to learn how to manipulate. It was to learn offense and defense against…The Hidden. The Hidden are an elitist group who believe if you are inferior in one thing, you are inferior in everything. Our ancestors tried to show them otherwise. They were assassinated. The Hidden are extremely good at what they do, which is killing people. We have been training your type of people because you are open to magic. The average person will write off magic as a ‘weird phenomenon’ or will not believe it happened in the first place. Open people accept magic, which is why you can see us. All we are made of and anything we own is magic, which makes you the only people who can see it. You five were chosen to defeat The Hidden, and that is what you will do. Sometimes you will work as a team but sometimes you will have to work on your own. Even though The Hidden aren’t much stronger than you, they have the power to break you. We will keep you updated as you work. Also, you will now work with the other lions. Tomorrow, we will have a meeting ceremony.”

The five kids were slightly shocked but one or two said, ”I knew it!” What was even stranger was that the day carried on as normal. But over the weeks, their training got harder. Soon they had personalized sessions and were working and learning for 8 to 11 hours a day. They had tight schedules and barely ever had free time. Then, one day, the lions had another announcement.

“Students, you have trained around the clock. Now your time has come to see what it is like in real battle. You will all graduate by the end of the week and will be doing field missions around the world. Do not worry about your other life. When you entered this building your outside life paused. When we are done with your services, or you wish to permanently leave, your life will resume as normal and you have the option of you memory being wiped as well. Understood?”

“Yes,” responded the five students.

Graduation was ten times more intense than the previous training. They fought battles against each other, cast spells they had been learning and worked in teams. They were split in half and faced the instructors in duos. Jason worked with Laura in duels and 1v1’s. These were the hardest because they faced the lions as well.

Finally, Jason and the group went on their first mission. Apparently, one of the scouts for the lions had found a fallen member in one of the college campuses.

“That’s strange.”

“What is?” Jason asked.

“We didn’t expect them this far up,” the lions explained.

“What do you mean?”

“They’re usually not as aggressive as going to a campus to hunt for us.”

They took the appearing car (the same one Jason took when he arrived at the castle) to the campus. “What do we do when we find The Hidden member?” Jason asked.

“Do what you were taught,” said the lion.

“You mean, attack him or her?”

“Thats what you learned, correct?”

“If they are The Hidden, what are we?”

“Everyone used to be human. Then came The Hidden. The attack was called the Fall. We are the Survivors. You are the Guardians.”

“The Guardians of what?”

“The last remaining of my species. Only special humans that can see us are The Guardians.”

“Well, do you have the same technology as humans? Are you an advanced race or…?”

“Can you ask us the questions later, like after we take care of this Hidden?”

“You sound like a mafia mobster.”

“What?”

“Nevermind.”

They approached the Hidden member. “What are you doing!?”

“Umm, stopping you?”

“You want me to battle you ruffians? I am Canakis The Great! Only kings challenge me!”

“Well, we’re gonna do something to you.”

The battle commenced, exhausting everyone to the max. Jason and Lara were very helpful, as they had been partners in the graduation duet battles. Before the group finished him off or before he retreated, the lions came over to extract some information. This gave the group of guardians some time to relax. They were all around the age of 18, the oldest being 21. They sat down on park benches.

“That was new.”

“Yeah, definitely.”

“Don’t know if I could have killed him though.”

“He deserved it. He was snobbish.”

“He wasn’t that bad.”

“Yeah right.”

“Not the rudest person I’ve met,” Lara said.

“Really?” Jason asked.

“Oh. Trust me, I’ve had some super snobs as friends.”

“Oh, sure.”

“You sure are acting snobbish.”

“Be quiet!” They both laughed.

“Today was fun. We work well together.”

She smiled at him. The rest of the group had broken up into their partnerships they had used at graduation. As the months passed, the group became more accustomed to fighting The Hidden and altogether became more friendly with each other. Partnerships were formed and bonds were made. Jason was having a lot of fun. Then came his next big problem.

“We have scouted a new power that is threatening to overcome The Hidden, The Survivors, The Guardians and possibly humanity. It is called The Monstrosity. They are a group of aliens connected to one source, one body of plasma, which is The Monstrosity. You will have two months of extra training based on what we have recovered from our scouts about The Monstrosity,” the Lions announced. “You will also have a two month break to visit people before we start the training. Colleges around the world have teachers and students that are recruiting Guardians like we are. You may know some.”

Jason was happy but surprised at the break the lions had given everyone one. Was it a sign? Could Jack be a recruiter? Jason felt confused.

Jason finally left with one of the lions to go to his campus in the strange appearing car. He said hello to everyone: Brian, the therapist, his roommates. Then, he went to visit Jack.

“Jack, I know…”

“I know what you’re about to say, Jason. Yes, I am a recruiter, yes, I did try to push you to the lions, and yes, the therapist is also a recruiter.”

“Whoa, how did you…?”

“I was trained too, Jason.”

“Oh. Well, that was all I was going to say, so, bye? I guess…”

“We can talk about normal things, if you want to.”

“Ok. How’s cancer life going?”

“Fairly horrible with a hint of…” Jack sighed.

“Well, this is awkward.”

“No. This is fine. I haven’t talked to anyone besides doctors in weeks. No one visits me besides the lions and they are boring too. Please talk to me. I won’t see you for months, maybe years. Please.”

“Well, if you put it that way, then I guess…” Jason trailed off. “Are you seeing anyone?”

“What do you mean?” Jack asked.

“Are you…dating someone? Like actually,” Jason said.

“No, boys in hospitals with cancer aren’t exactly popular.” Jack laughed.

“Nice to see your sense of humor. Always reassuring,” Jason said. “Anything else you wanna talk about?”

“Not really, but…”

“If you want to stop talking, that’s fine,” Jason said. “I know you can’t always talk and…”

“Jason, it’s fine. Go ahead. Leave if you want to, I don’t want to hold you back.”

Jason left and met back up with the lions. He asked the lions to go back to the facility.

“As you wish, but you don’t get to change your mind,” the lions said.

“Whatever,” Jason said.

He hopped in the car. The scenery around Jason drastically changed as they approached the facility. “Lions, do you know who trained Jack?”

“Yeah, only the best teacher. You should know who he is.”

“That’s cryptic,” Jason said.

The Lions ignored him for the rest of the ride. At the facility, he asked around to find Jack’s instructor, but couldn’t find him anywhere. He started get random headaches every now and then. They wouldn’t hurt that much but he would see flashes. Later those flashes got clearer. They were showing him something. But he didn’t know what it was. He told the lions about this. They seemed concerned.

“Can you see what the flashes depict?” they asked.

“Not clearly.”

“How long have you been getting them?”

“Maybe two to three weeks.”

“Okay. Keep in touch. If you can ever see what the flashes are depicting, tell us.”

“Why?” Jason wanted to know.

“We think The Monstrosity may be trying to contact you. It’s been happening to Lara, too.”

“Is she ok?”

“She’s as good as you are.”

Jason left the lions and went back to his room. He traveled through the white hallways and contemplated on his talk with the lions.

 

Two Months Later…

 

Jason rushed to the lions. He had a flash of a pulsing piece of plasma and a fairly small circle was highlighted in red. As he started to talk, he saw Lara was saying the same things.

“I saw something in the flash!” Lara and Jason said together.

“What did you see?” the lion asked.

“I saw the location of The Monstrosity,” Lara said.

“I saw its weakness…the brain,” Jason said.

“So if we can get to the brain with Lara’s help, we can exploit its weakness thanks to Jason,” said one of the lions.

“Students, we have an announcement. Your fellow classmates Jason and Lara have had visions that tell us where The Monstrosity is and how to kill it. We have already made a pact with The Hidden, so The Monstrosity is our main target. You know how to kill it and you know why to kill it, so let’s destroy our last enemy. That is all.”

Everyone was a little shaken up by the last talk, so they all took a nap. Jason kept having the flashes about The Monstrosity. People asked him and Lara, “What does it look like?” and “Where does it live?” or “How do we kill it?” It got a little annoying. Eventually, everyone stopped asking. They went through different stages. At first, they wanted to do the mission, then they got scared, then they just didn’t care. Finally, they went on the mission.

“According to Lara’s flashes, we will find The Monstrosity’s core in Hamburg, Germania. We will go there and kill it!” said one of the lions.

They arrived at a huge volcano and started to climb it. It was very rough ground. Once they reached the top, they saw The Monstrosity. It was a colorful mix of blue and purple, uglier than a face that had been shot. It had veins on it and spanned the whole gap of the volcano. In its center was a red and greenish dot-like mark that looked like a target. Some of the kids asked Lara, “Is that what we’re supposed attack?” At first she was a little confused, because it didn’t look as clear as it had in her flashes, but then she said yes. They asked the lions what to do next but their answer was cryptic: “You should know what to do already.”

They decided the best idea was to head down the volcano so they could attack the dot-thing in the middle. Using some cables and black harnesses, The Guardians began to descend down the bottom of the volcano’s cavern. It was very dark. Someone lit a lantern so they could see. Finally, they reached the bottom of the volcano.

“Do we have to step on the plasma thingy?” asked one of The Guardians.

“I think so,” Lara said.

“I’m washing my shoes after this,” Jason said.

They walked over to the dot-thing and started attacking it. They even stomped on it. But nothing happened. Next, The Guardians started falling down. Jason walked over to one of them. He had tranquilizer darts in the back of his neck. Then, suddenly, black, white and sunlight. Jason woke up in a white room with two people in lab coats staring at him.

“What happened?” he asked.

“This might hurt a little.”

“What will?”

Suddenly, a needle injected him. As he screamed, the light fades. Jason woke up looking out of his dorm window. His roommates were staring at him. He didn’t care. He could see everything but the lions.

Last Stand

Chapter 1: End of The World

Agent 37 patrolled the streets of New Nerf City. Agent 1 defended the city’s banks. Agent 99 scouted for Agent 37 and Agent 10 was the head of a Nerf army!!!

“Move it troopers, move it troopers,” said Agent 10.

 

Chapter 2: Reinforcements

“No!!” said Agent 1. “A grenade landed in a bank! Agent 1 was mortally wounded because he was next to the explosion.”

 

Chapter 3: Streak

Clash cing xing stab slash boom kick bam ka bam hi yah!

“Ouch, that hurt,” said Agent 45.

Agent 12 defeated Agent 67, Agent 75, Agent 56 and Agent 45 with fists guns and swords!

 

Chapter 4: Snipers

Pew pew pew pew! Ah! Unh! Nooo! Oof! Ahhhh.

Snipers picked off a lot of the insurrectionists.

 

Chapter 5: Recruits

A hobo finally found a cheap apartment room and was shown into his first personal room for years. The room was very nice. There was already a bed there, a lamp, and there was a table with a TV. The bed had pillows already, and some covers already. He also had a washing machine in there. So when his clothes were dirty he could just wash them right away while sitting in his pajamas reading a book. The first few days, he could sleep by himself. He was very happy because he could get a job, and he could stop panhandling. But there was a problem. Soon he couldn’t sleep by himself. He saw a Chinese movie that scared him so much that he couldn’t fall asleep. So he slept in the living room. Everybody else teased him, because he couldn’t sleep by himself. For example, like, “Oooh, this guy can’t sleep by himself!” or “Nerd!” or “Stop getting scared!” He went back to his apartment feeling humiliated, sleepy, and finally, upset. People called him names so much, he decided to lock his door and stay in there forever, and called it home.

The hobo was reading the news when he saw an advertisement for a new agent replacing Agent 1. He didn’t want to at first, but he thought Agent 1, if he retires, he could get a lot of money. Then he decided to join the agents. He walked right towards the headquarters. The headquarters is so high-tech, one button could already shoot ten thousands lasers out of it. It looks platinum and can transform into anything. There’s a secret hatch underground, and the hobo went through it. The secret hatch is for when you can’t enter the main entrance because people are attacking. The hobo asked about three million questions at headquarters, so he knew where the hatch was. The main entrance is only for high level clearance.

He found himself in the toilet. They had changed the pipes so he would end up in the toilet instead of the command center. He was so wet, he couldn’t go into the command center, because they restricted any wet people. But he found a small agent training center three hundred miles away right next to his house. He went there and signed himself in, and now he’s Agent Infinity.

Then he went through hard training courses. He had to lift three million pounds, run a twenty-five-mile lap, swim three hundred miles, and finally, jump rope right into some water and swim back up, but you can’t get your jump rope wet. He failed everything except for the twenty-five-mile-lap and a jump rope, and the swimming. He failed to lift three million pounds; he got crushed. He got promoted to Agent 2.

He thought that the people who called him nerd would pay, because now he would be in the news and they would read the news. And he was in the news. The article was, “Fat Hobo

Promoted to Agent 2 After Completing Three of the Training Courses.”

 

Chapter 6: Badge

When the hobo got sent to fight Zelltrax, he got defeated and the monster took his badge. Hobo passed out and he woke up in an emergency center. He got wounded so much that they had to amputate his arm. Hobo was asleep and didn’t feel the pain at all.

 

Chapter 7: Lose Your Rank

Hobo got demoted to Agent 27, which is pretty bad.

 

Chapter 8: Losing

1234567890-0987654321234567890p987654321234567890p9876543 was the password to blow up the world.The insurrectionists blew up the world.
THE END

The Ghost in the Haunted Mansion

One evening, the haunted mansion had just risen from the ground. Werewolves were guarding it, and if they bit you, you’d turn into one. Zombies were guarding it too, and if they bit you, you also turned into one — unless they devoured you. The zombies and werewolves were all people who used to work in the house. There was a ghost who was the king of the house because he had once owned the house until it sank into the ground. He was the man that had run the house. This house was not just your ordinary house. It had gone down in 1849. It had fancy golden arches all over it, and it was covered in vines. There was a second ghost who was not king of the house, but he was the king’s servant. He would look around for something to eat. Sometimes he found ghost nibblets and sometimes he found seeds and berries. For dessert he’d have a cookie pie.

One night he was looking around for something to eat when he bumped into one of the werewolves and said, “Are you a ghost nibblet or a berry?”

The werewolf said, “Get out of the house if you’re not a ghost!”

The ghost said, “I am a ghost, you rotten berry!”

The werewolf replied angrily at the ghost, “I am not a rotten berry! I am a werewolf!” The werewolf was huffing and puffing and had jagged teeth.

“Try and eat me!” yelled the ghost. “Oh wait, you can’t, because you’re a werewolf, not a ghost. I could actually be inside you if I wanted to.”

“Oh yeah? Try it!”

So the ghost went inside of the werewolf. Once he got out of the werewolf he said, “Oh, you’re never going to be my dinner…” So he went back into the mansion. He realized that he wouldn’t find dinner inside because he had eaten all that was left, so he ventured out into the woods surrounding the house. He had seen the trees but he’d never gone in one.

“What’s this?” he said. “Is it called a hardly bargly? Or is it called a tree? I’ll go with tree! Yeah, tree would be the good name.” He went out and he saw something. It was a panther, but the ghost did not know that. “Oh, you must be one of the werewolves that I’ve heard so much about!” But the panther didn’t say anything because he wasn’t dead yet. So he couldn’t see the ghost, but he could hear him.

The panther thought, What’s that sound? That must be my head talking to myself…

He walked on to ghost’s property and was killed in seconds by the werewolves. The ghost of the panther ran into the forest, saw the ghost and said, “You mangy little thing! You made me go to the werewolf place!” He was running around, but the ghost just floated on.

The ghost kept going until he saw some quicksand. He thought the quicksand was ghost pellets and he tried to pick it up, but he couldn’t because it was just regular quicksand. “Bah! Not ghost pellets.” He moved on until he found an old wood shack. He went through the walls and he saw a little boat. “What is this thing?” It was a canoe made of three logs that were all put together to make a little…it wasn’t really even a boat – it was more like a raft. He moved it without anyone seeing, put it in the water and started paddling. “This is so cool!” he said. He rode it down the river until he reached a waterfall. “Why doesn’t this thing fly?” The raft went over the waterfall while the ghost was still flying. “I guess I’ll just have to keep flying and follow the river,” thought the ghost. He decided to follow the river because he thought it would lead him to food.

He got to the end of the river and walked right into a trap. It was just a table of ghost pellets with a cage on top. The ghost said, “Finally! Ghost pellets!” He went to the table and ate all the ghost pellets, but then the cage dropped and he found the King Ghost standing outside.

“You’re coming back with me,” said the King Ghost. He took him back to the haunted mansion, threw him in a cage, and said, “You will be punished for going outside of the property!” The servant ghost knew he wasn’t supposed to leave the property, but he hadn’t known that the King Ghost would find him.

After the King Ghost left, the servant ghost bent the bars of the cage and went outside. The servant started dragging his rags home, but he accidentally went to mansion of silly stuff, not the haunted mansion! The mansion of silly stuff was next to the haunted mansion, and it was where all the bad ghosts went.

The mansion of silly stuff looked exactly the same as the haunted mansion — it even had the same address. When the servant went inside, he saw a clown that popped out with two kitchen knives in his hands! The clown had a creepy smile painted on his face with sharp teeth, and the little ghost walked through him. He saw that there were ghost crocodiles, ghost sharks, and ghost orcas! He tried to fly up, but then he saw that he couldn’t fly — he had to surf across the water in the mansion. This place was very cold and he rode all around it. Then he found the worst thing of all. It was the ghost trap that held every single ghost that had died there. Then he saw a ghost that he recognized in the trap — it was his father hanging upside down. He had blood all over his face and he was hanging from a rope.

“Ahh! What is that thing?” said the servant ghost. Then he saw another trap that had ghosts parts in it. “I could’ve gotten my father out of the trap if I was the strongest ghost on Earth, but I see that little trap and I’m not falling for it,” he said.

He moved on and then he saw something…it really was the worst thing in the world. He saw a beheaded monster! The monster was squiggling around with arms like an octopus and had fifteen heads that had all been popped off. This monster was black with wings and breathed fire. It was 30,000 feet high and it was all bloody. The monster was so big it barely fit in the house, and it was trying to eat the ghost for a snack. It was drooling blood and was soaking wet with blood. It had orcas that could eat you as a tail. It was screaming like crazy, “Rawr!”

The servant hid behind a rock and said, “That’s gonna take awhile for me to defeat…so I’m just going to sneak around it if I can.” The monster had heads all over its back so it could see everything around it. The ghost tried to sneak around it, but one of the heads saw him. The head breathed fire at him and just barely missed him.

“Well, that was an unexpected party favor,” said the servant ghost. He snuck away and then he saw that there were lots of dead ghosts on the floor. He saw a sword, picked it up, and chopped off one of the heads. Blood and organs exploded from the neck. The monster screeched and the ghost had to cover his ears.

“I’ll just kill the main head,” said the servant ghost. He chopped off the main head with a sword and the monster fell down to the ground. “Well, at least that’s over.” He flew all the way out of the house. “Hey, I’m out in the forest again…oh boy. Now I just have to run away from the King Ghost.” He didn’t know that outside there was a trick. The King Ghost had made the bars of the first cage out of ghost gold, but this time, he made them out of diamonds and iron so that the servant ghost couldn’t bend the bars. The servant ghost stepped on the trap, but he got out of the way of the cage at the last minute. And then, there was more blood! The King Ghost had brought a dragon that ate everything that he saw, including plastic. The dragon’s tail was made of blood, and its face was made of blood — the whole dragon was made of blood — nothing but blood! The blood was red and so fresh that it was streaming. He was making an ocean of blood that nobody wanted to cross because it had orcas in it. The blood dragon was made out of magic blood and had sharp blood teeth.

The servant ghost said, “Blood! Yay! I love eating blood with my noodles…but I still like tacos better.”

The King Ghost yelled, “What? You crazy ghost! I will kill you!” Then he took out his humongous carving knife and threw it at the servant.

The servant caught the knife. “Oh? Was that your best throw?” He threw the knife back at the King Ghost and hit him in the heart. The King Ghost died. But the servant ghost became King because once the King Ghost dies, the servant becomes King. Once the servant became King, he said his first word as the King: “This was the worst day ever! But now that I’m King, I will search for all the old King’s secrets. I will search for the secret lever…”

He found the lever on top of a painting. He pulled the lever, and it opened up a passageway that led all the way to the basement. When he reached the basement, he walked down a hall full of spiderwebs, and there was a very faint light that only bats could see in. Only the old King Ghost had ever been to the basement. It was very creepy with a lot of blood on the pictures and walls. Once the new King Ghost made it down in the basement, he saw there was another lever! On the lever it said, “If you pull this lever down, this mansion will sink down to the ground.”

“Hmm, that’s probably how this mansion sank the first time!” said the new King Ghost. Then he saw the old King Ghost’s bones lying where he had died for the first time. They were in the shape of a human and had goosebumps all over them. Then the bones came alive.

The bones said in a dark, low voice, “Who has made me alive? Whoever has made me alive must be the King!”

The new King Ghost said, “It is I, the servant ghost.”

“What the heck!” said the bones. The bones were so surprised that they almost broke into a million pieces. “What happened to the original King Ghost?”

“Oh yeah, yeah,” said the new King. “Well, there was a knife in his heart…and now he’s dead…and I don’t have a heart, so you can’t kill me. Yeah.”

“Why! What! You killed me? Well, you killed my ghost, not me, because I’m bones…but you killed the GHOST OF ME!”

The new King went back towards the lever. He thought that if he pulled the lever, then it would take him to an Evil Land of Evil, where he belonged. So he went back to the lever and pulled it. The house shook like there was an earthquake. It was like a tornado sucked it underground. It got darker, and darker, and darker, until it was so dark that he realized he was in Ghost Land. All the zombies and werewolves had disappeared. The King wasn’t in the Evil Land of Evil. He was in Ghost Land, where he would sleep forever.

The Battle

I pulled and thrashed and tried my best to heave him off me. He was an evil piece of work. I socked him directly in his stomach, and he looked green, as if he was about to hurl. He donned patterns of wicked grins. Then, for a moment, he goggled at me, looking sheepish as if he might let me toss him across the room. But he stuck to me as firmly as a tree’s roots were planted into the ground. I swore.

“You, come right here!” my teacher screeched at her usual high pitch.

“Coming!” I gasped for air.

My arch-nemesis just would not let go without ending the fight.

“Stay and fight, you coward!” my sworn enemy screamed.

A voice in my head spurred me on, and I continued the war. I bit him, I punched him, and I swore that if I ever got him off me, I would murder him. “Ouch! Curses!” I had stubbed my puffy toe. I was getting beaten up and making a huge fool of myself in front of my whole class. My face burned red from embarrassment as my classmates sniggered and giggled. My head was stuck under his arm!

“Would one of you be kind enough to help him?” my twin sister said, with a pang of annoyance in her voice.

My best friend volunteered. Ha! I thought, you’re no match for two kids! But I had underestimated the power of my evil foe. One was defeating two of us! The teacher called up another one of my classmates to join the battle! But my crooked fiend was invincible. My twin just kept on calling up one student at a time to try and help me overcome my opponent. But nothing stood in his way. He was indestructible! At last, all of my classmates joined the fight!

We strategized. One person would try and pull him off me from his thick left shoulder, the other would try from the other shoulder. Everyone else would try pulling him off the top. The name of our battle plan? B.U.A.S.O!. Everyone got to their stations. We counted: 1, 2, 3, GO! They all tugged and pulled. Beads of sweat trickled down my neck. But our adversary retaliated with his own wicked plan: hang on tight and don’t let the stupid kids take over! Oh, yeah, and strangle the innocent victim (me) while you’re at it!

The irritating thing was that the teacher did absolutely nothing to help us. She just sat there, and occasionally took a sip of cool pink lemonade. After a few futile attempts to yank the enemy off me, the headmistress walked into the classroom to carry out her weekly ‘class supervision.’ My guess is that she scribbled something like, ‘class 567 is acting like a band of uncivilized monkeys’. Which is really offensive to monkeys!

At that moment, my friend grabbed a pair of scissors and tried to pierce the rival’s invulnerable and hairy skin. I spun around, with the enemy on me, trying not to get cut by the scissor. Then, disaster struck. I whipped around, smashed into the headmistress and knocked her over! She screeched in frustration, her puny spectacles dangling of her long, bony nose with steam escaping her ears. Her face was red as a tomato.

“YOU!” she yelled in a fury.

She blindly lunged at me, and in her rage, seized my arm (with the enemy still hanging onto me) and dragged me to her eerie office (dun dun dun!)!

Many strange artifacts hung here and there in her domain. A clock hung upside-down on a peg, and broomsticks lay still on the floor. She slumped onto a chair and donned an amused grin.

“Need help with that rival of yours, don’t you?” my principal said.

“Yes, miss!” I squeaked.

“Well, he can just stay on top of you and tackle you for eternity, I don’t care! That will be your punishment for knocking me over!” I swear that I heard my foe cackle with glee.

My enemy had blue spots all over his body from all the punches I had thrown at him. When I trudged out of the room, I accidently pushed a china pot over. It tumbled off the desk and shattered on the floor.

“AGAIN!?” my principal screamed.

This time, she charged at me and tried to pull me. Fortunately, she missed, and got the enemy instead. He landed on the floor, his stringy and woolly hair in a mess. I was free!

After a long lecture (with an occasional yell) the school bell finally rang. Students trampled each other, eager to get out of the prison. “FREEDOM!” they all yelled in unison.

When I got home, my mother asked the usual question, “What did you do at school today?”

I answered, “Today, I beat up my arch-enemy with B.U.A.S.O!” I puffed out my chest and flexed my muscles like Superman.

“What’s that?” my mom asked, while doing the dishes.

“It’s a battle strategy!”

“And who was your arch-enemy?” my mother asked, now very interested in the matter.

“My polka dotted sweater! B.U.A.S.O. stood for Beat Up A Sweater Operation!”

The Lightning Conspiracy

Peter rushed down the stairs. 10 minutes. He took out the guard near the door. 9 minutes. He heard the boosters starting. 8 minutes. He started to lockpick the door. 2 minutes. The door was unlocked. 0 minutes. The rocket took off. Peter’s heart sank. He had failed his mission.

Peter grabbed his coffee and put on his coat. “Another tiring day at work,” he mumbled to no one in particular. That is when the most unexpected thing happened. Two NSA agents appeared at the door of his apartment.

“Peter F. John, we need you,” the agent named Albert said.

“To do what? Make a cup of coffee?” Peter joked.

“Sir, this is serious matter. The NSA needs you to take down Lightning Industries. You did well stopping a nuclear war between the United States and Russia.”

“Do you mean the Lightning Industries that can blow up the moon with a touch of a computer? Oh yeah, by the way, you didn’t give me the 100,000 dollars like you promised.”

“Sir, are there any other Lightning Industries? And the President cheated you, not the NSA,” the agent said.

“Can’t your NSA goons take the company down?”

“The NSA does not have the right to take action. We can’t interrogate people, send people on suicide missions, etc.”

“So, what’s going to happen?”

“They are going to turn America to civil war.”

Peter was stunned. He always thought Lightning Industries was the greatest company in the world. How could Lightning Industries start a civil war in America?

“Sir? Are you there?” the NSA agent asked.

“How are they going to send America into civil war?”

“By crashing a rocket into Los Angeles. The rocket will have the U.S.A flag. People will blame the government. The second stage will involve a nuclear attack on the west coast. The attacks push America onto the edge of civil war. Finally, Lightning Industries will send in their troops and overthrow the government. Peter, the CIA and the FBI are made up of spies for Lightning Industries. The NSA intercepted a message about this.”

“What do I get for saving the world?”

“3,000,000 dollars, and we will buy you a nice estate just outside of New York City.”

“Okay. I’ll do it. Just make sure I get the reward.”

“Start Project: Civil War now.”

“Yes Mr. Lightning.”

“Oh yeah, and one more thing. Kill that highly skilled agent Peter John while you’re at it.”

Peter was finally there. The tallest building in the world. Lightning Tower. 520 floors and headquarters of the first multi-trillion dollar company. Armed with a pistol and a lock-picking kit, he knew he would never pass through security. His mission was to make sure the rocket never launched. “Freeze!” the armed guards shouted. Peter kicked the first guard and sent him crashing into the guard behind him. The four remaining guards started to fire away with their rifles. Peter took cover behind a truck. He loaded his pistol and fired at the guards. All the guards dropped to the floor and were saying their last prayers, and soon they all fell and lay motionless in a pool of blood. Peter slowly lock-picked the back door and went inside. He got in the service elevator and went to the control room.

He was surprised to see the control room empty. He looked at the enormous screen. He saw the target. Los Angeles. “What!! Only 10 more minutes till the rocket is launched!” Peter yelled.

The elevator down from the control room seemed like the slowest elevator that he’d ever been on. The elevator went above the 519th and a half floor, so he had to take the stairs down.

Peter rushed down the stairs. 10 minutes. He took out the guard near the door. 9 minutes. He heard the boosters starting. 8 minutes. He started to lockpick the door. 2 minutes. The door was unlocked. 0 minutes. The rocket took off.  Peter’s heart sank. He had failed his mission.

“Breaking News. A U.S. rocket crashed into the heart of Los Angeles, California, leaving 2,000 dead and many more injured. Revolts in San Francisco, San Diego, Sacramento, and Oakland have led California to the brink of civil war,” the reporter announced. Peter’s heart sank. If he had just been a little earlier, the U.S. would have nothing to worry about. Then he remembered something. The nuclear attack.

 

The Story of Lightning Industries

Lightning Industries was originally a weapons company that was founded in 1971 by 56- year-old Mark Lightning. He provided weapons to the government during the Iraq War and other various wars fought by the U.S. Mark bought tons of companies, and Lighting Industries’ yearly profit jumped to $12,234,109,459,017 in 2013, making it the first company worth a trillion dollars. Mark died on August 23, 2014, at the age of 93, after helping to fight Ebola in Africa. James Lightning took over the multi-trillion dollar company. Unlike his father, he was corrupted by evil and didn’t think about the middle and lower classes. His company became a monopoly in every department, and other companies fell like helpless chickens. His ultimate goal is to take over America. He gained control of the CIA, FBI, Army, Air Force, and the U.S National Guard by persuading (and bribing) them to take down the U.S government.

 

“I’m never going to get another job again,” Peter mumbled to himself.

That’s when two Lightning Industries troopers smashed through the door. “We have been ordered to put you in The United States Penitentiary Administrative Maximum Facility in Fremont County, Colorado until you have to present your case at court,” one yelled.

“What the !@#$!! What the !@#$ did I do? And did you really have to crash into my door? Have you guys heard something called a !@#$ing DOORBELL!!”

“Mr. John, you have been charged with assault and murder,” the buff guard said.

“Who did I murder?”

“You killed 5 Lighting Industries guards and injured 7 guards, 3 of whom are in critical condition.”

“You’re not the police though. You can’t arrest me!”

“Refuse to come with us, and we will shoot.” The guards then pulled out their pistols. “Last chance,” they warned Peter.

“NEVER!!!” Peter shouted.

There were gunshots and screams from the apartment. Then, everything went silent.

Peter woke up with his eyes bloodshot and his chest throbbing with pain. He slowly got up from his bed. He looked across the room. He saw Albert sleeping on a chair.

“Albert?” Peter moaned.

Albert’s eyes fluttered open.

“My God, Peter, you’re awake!” Albert rushed toward him.

“Yeah, I think I realized that I’m awake. What am I doing here?”

“Those Lightning Industries guards shot shrapnel into your chest. Our NSA agent on the street heard those gunshots and called the nearby hospital. Fortunately you live on the first floor so the medics could find you quickly. Right now you’re at a classified location.”

“How long have I been out?”

“2 weeks in a coma.”

“What has happened in the last 2 weeks?”

“America’s military forces have taken sides. The states of California, Washington, Oregon, Arizona, Nevada, and every state west of Louisiana have seceded and and declared themselves the Consolidated States of America. Lightning Industries, the Army, and Coast Guard have sided with the CSA. The Air Force went against Lightning Industries for framing them for the nuclear attacks on Portland, Oregon and the rocket crash on Los Angeles. So the Air Force, Marines, and Navy remain with the U.S government.”

“Wait. Are you telling me that they nuked Portland?”

“I’m afraid so.”

“S@#$!”

“Pete, don’t you realize what the biggest part is?”

“This might be World War III.”

Peter stared a long time at the building. The White House. The Fountain was gushing up water and the Columns towered high. He was going to meet the President to plan a strategy to combat the CSA.

“Good morning Mr. President, Christopher Beck.”

“This isn’t a good morning, but I’ll take the greeting,” said the stressed president.

“So, what is our strategy?”

“We surround the CSA. The Navy and Coast Guard will take the seas. The Marines are already securing the Mississippi River, and will join the 64th Tank Division en route to Topeka, Kansas.”

“Well, Mr. President, what do I do?”

“You’re going with the Navy SEALS and Albert to Boise, Idaho, to take down Lightning Industries’s main headquarters.”

“But isn’t Lightning Tower in San Diego the headquarters?”

“That’s what we thought, until the NSA figured out that the broadcasts Lightning Industries were sending to the CSA government were coming from Boise, Idaho. If you take Lightning Industries down, the CSA will lack weapons, supplies, and other troops.”

“What do I get?”

“The same reward you were supposed to get for stopping this civil war.”

Peter, Albert, and ten other Navy SEALS parachuted down from the plane. The wind blew against Peter’s cheeks as he floated down from the high altitude. The team met up in town, not wearing their uniforms of course. “Alright guys,” Peter whispered through the the comlinks in their ears. “Our operation will consist of two teams, with six people in each group. The first team will secure the perimeter. The U.S hacked their security system, so it should be easy to get in. The second group will make its way inside, and the first group will follow. Then, we plant the bomb inside the command center, and we get out. Understood?”

“Yes sir,” the soldiers said in unision.

Peter, Albert, and four Navy SEALS made their way through the dark building. It took them 30 minutes to find the building that was underground in the sewers.

“Hawk-1, this is Easy-4. We’ve secured the perimeter and took out some guards. We’ll be joining you soon,” the commander of the first group said.

“Roger that, Easy-4. We haven’t encountered any hostiles yet.”

Peter took out the map of the headquarters. He saw that the control room was the first door to the right. The team walked down the hall. That’s when about 50 CSA Army Special Ops surrounded the team, blocking their path to the control room where the self-button was. They had no chance of getting in.

“Hey Pete,” Albert whispered. “I’ll take on these guards, and you make a beeline for the control room.”

“But you’ll surely die,” Peter responded.

“There are more important things at stake the my life, Peter.”

Peter whispered Albert’s plan to the other Navy SEALS. First, Albert started to fire at the guards and threw a smoke grenade. The guards couldn’t see Peter and the rest of the troops making their way to the control room in the smoke and the confusion. Peter pushed the door open and found hundreds of workers inside.

“Everyone evacuate this building immediately!!!” Peter shouted to the workers. The workers didn’t leave at first, but after they saw the guns, they rushed out the exit.

“It’s going to take some time for me to hack this main control panel and blow this place up,” the technician said.

“How long is it going to take?” Peter asked.

“Five minutes.”

Albert was having trouble fending off the troops. He already had wounds in his foot, arm, and leg. He was getting drowsy. He knew he was losing blood. He started to collapse. His eyelids closed, and he thought about home. He then lost consciousness.

“Vulcan-5, this is Hawk-1. Easy-4 and Hawk-1 need extraction,” Peter shouted into his comlink.

“Roger that, Hawk-1. ETA 2 minutes,” the Vulcan-5 commander shouted.

Soon, Easy-4 and Vulcan-5 arrived to remove Peter and the rest of Hawk-1. Except for Albert. Peter flew away in the helicopter, and all the troops shouted with joy as they watched the factory blow up. Shrapnel flew in all different directions. A mushroom cloud hovered over Boise. All the troops strapped their gas masks on. It was the second atomic bomb used in war. Peter knew that they had probably now won. But not without a cost.

 

EPILOGUE

On January 14, 2017, the CSA merged back with the USA. James Lightning was reluctant to sell the company to another big company, Energy Enterprises, but advisors convinced him it was for the best. The Lighting Conspiracy was released by the government and James Lightning was put on trial for treason and sure enough, he was found guilty and sentenced to life in prison. Energy Enterprises helped America rebuild after the second American Civil War. Albert Goodman and Peter John were awarded the Medal of Honor for their bravery in combat. Peter retired to his new house near the Hudson River in New York. He does not want to be disturbed, but that time will have to wait.

Peter was reading his morning newspaper when the NSA showed up at his door. The NSA agent started to walk forward and began to talk to Peter.

“Peter, we have orders from the president to extract you and bring you to Washington D.C.”

“To do what?”

“We have another mission for you.”

 

The Lonely Woman in the Kitchen

Once upon a time, a woman closed the door with a smack. She took some flour, milk, and butter out of the closet door. There was no one else in the room. She felt kind of sad. She started to mix the flour, milk, and butter. Once she mixed it, it made a really yellow gooey mix. She just wanted a friend. She put the mixture in the oven and set the timer to 40 minutes. Then she sang:

I don’t have a friend

I want a friend

whaa whaa

I’m feeling blue

 

When the timer rang, she took out the cake and let it cool by the window. When it was cool she ate it all up.

 

The Sweet Family

There was a dog named Boa-Boa that lived with an owner named Alexandra. Alexandra had a baby named Margot. The baby was two years old. Boa-Boa wanted her owner to stay at home. Alexandra was always going to work. Boa-Boa was sad, because she didn’t have anyone to stay home with. She would go in her bed and sleep until Alexandra came back home. She woke up and jumped up and down when Alexandra came back. They played with each other. They played fetch outside and they did some tricks. Boa-Boa’s favorite trick was jumping to get a treat. When Boa-Boa was done with her treat, she went in her room. Alexandra went into Boa-Boa’s room.

The next day when Alexandra went to work, Boa-Boa went to get a sheet of paper and a pencil. She wrote down what she was going to do to stop Alexandra from going to work. Her plan was to tell Alexandra why she didn’t want her to go after she came home. When she came home, Boa-Boa gave Alexandra the paper.

Alexandra asked Boa-Boa, “What does this letter say?”

Boa-Boa said, “Arf arf arf arf arf!”

But Alexandra still didn’t understand. Then Alexandra turned Boa-Boa to speaking the English language, and Boa-Boa said, “This letter says that you cannot go to work anymore, because I love you. I mean, I mean you love me.”

Then Alexandra tried to turn Boa-Boa back into a regular dog because Boa-Boa sounded really silly. But Alexandra couldn’t turn Boa-Boa back into a regular dog, and Boa-Boa started to say crazy things, like: “***-a-doodle-doo, I love you, Alexandra and her dad loving and peeing, they’re walking together and says they’re ugly, but then they trip and pees on their head…” Boa-Boa kept on saying the same thing again and again. Alexandra kept shooting Boa-Boa with the laser, but Boa-Boa kept saying this:

“I love chickens, but chickens pee…”

Alexandra made Boa-Boa back into a dog, but there was a mysterious mouth on the back of her head, and the mouth started to say, “You are a poo. What a poo you are!”

And then Boa-Boa came up with a different strategy and started to walk like a human and acted so sassy. “I’m going outside and playing fetch — oops, I mean, I’m playing ball — oops, I mean I’m playing with my friend — oops! I mean I’m drinking coffee — oops, I mean I’m eating a cupcake, too!”

Alexandra was laughing so hard at what Boa-Boa was doing that her pants fell off outside. Alexandra said, “Oops!” and pulled back up her pants, but her pants broke open. When she went back home she tried to look for her pants, but she had no more pants because all of her pants were broken. Then her shirt and her underwear fell off and she was naked. And she was also bald because her hair fell off. She was naked and she needed to go outside, because she had to go to work, and she dared herself to do it, and she did.

She went outside and there was no one outside, and she went on the sidewalk, and then a million people came running toward her, and brought her back to her home. They cut her fingers off to make chicken fingers. Boa-Boa was crying and making a flood in the town.

Then Alexandra grew back her fingers, and her hair, and her shirt, and her underwear, and her pants really fast.

Then, Alexandra ran all the way home. On the way, she saw her dog Boa-Boa on the street. She picked her dog up. Alexandra took her dog Boa-Boa back home. When they got home, Boa-Boa started to act like she had been before. So Alexandra asked Boa-Boa why she was acting very strange.

Boa-Boa answered in a funny way, like: “fgfgfgfgharuiopoooppptaywgdsjjkcdiXCFHBFFGHhhhJJJAKE!”

Since Alexandra was annoyed by her dog, she gave it away to the best owner named Kuipi Lam. Alexandra walked to Kuipi Lam’s house on Tuesday. She opened Kuipi’s front door and saw Boa-Boa. “I will miss you,” Boa-Boa said in a funny way.

“I don’t care,” screamed Alexandra. Then she walked away.

“It will be okay,” Kuipi said in her house, and she petted Boa-Boa on the back. She let Boa-Boa go in her house and gave him some bones to chew on. Then Boa-Boa started to like Kuipi as her owner because Kuipi did not have to go to work because she had been fired, and she had lots of money so she was rich. She was very nice. Boa-Boa kept on chewing her bones when Kuipi was talking. Boa-Boa didn’t hear what Kuipi was saying. Kuipi was saying that it was time for dinner, but Boa-Boa didn’t go, so she didn’t eat dinner. Kuipi kept on telling her to eat dinner, but she didn’t go cause she was too busy chewing on her bones.

After Kuipi ate dinner, she called Boa-Boa to dinner again, but Boa-Boa still didn’t go. Then, Boa-Boa tried to find Kuipi, but she couldn’t find her. So Boa-Boa just went to bed.

The next day, Kuipi saw Boa-Boa not alive. She was so sad. She kept on crying and crying. Now that’s what I call a sad story. But now Kuipi can buy another dog that she will always take care of.

THE END!

P.S. I love Boa-Boa!

Intern Story

When Ava Mack woke up on that December morning, there was only one thing on her mind: New Moon Girls magazine. All other facets of reality eluded her. She was totally unconcerned with the lovely way in which the moonlight was pouring in through the glass panes of her room like milk. She was even less impressed by the new layer of snow that sparkled boastfully on her front lawn. Every square foot of space in her mind was occupied by the heavy knowledge that the independent bookstore down the road now carried the first edition issue of New Moon Girls magazine.

“Ava. Ava!”

Ava looked up from her coffee to meet the gaze of her brother, Ryan. Ryan was a year older and thought he was far superior to his sister in terms of maturity. He wore a flannel shirt with a picture of a teddy bear on it as proof.

“What are you doing up at four o’clock in the morning?”

Disinterested, Ava took another gulp from her mug.

“Flanagan’s opens at six,” she said, shrugging. “Jennifer and Ginger are already waiting for me outside.”

Ryan, who had just finished reading The Catcher in the Rye for school, rolled his eyes in the most dramatic way possible.

“You used to do things that matter,” he said, mournfully. “You used to cry on carousels.”

“I’ll see you later,” Ava said.

Jennifer and Ginger lingered on the front porch, hands balled in their pockets, kicking up snow with the tips of their combat boots.

“It’s about time,” Ginger said.

The three girls walked in a line down the road. They walked in the street, since nobody would be coming by anyway, heads slightly bowed from the wind.

“Watch Angela and Christine and Pete already be there,” said Jennifer, caustic. Ava and Ginger didn’t answer. Ginger’s chapped lips trembled in the cold.

Sure enough, Angela and Christine and Pete were already there, standing in a line on the sidewalk, in front of the little brick shop.

Some time ago, Ava was friends with Pete Daly. Christine Sisler, too. It was Christine, actually, who had introduced Ava to New Moon Girls magazine. That was before Christine dyed her hair its signature red hue.

“We were here, first,” Angela said as the girls approached.

“So what?” said Ginger, “We’re not getting in line.”

“But – “

“Hey,” Christine said, “Let’s get in a line. But, like, a horizontal line. On the sidewalk. Let’s make it fair.”

They all fell into place. Ava found herself in the center, next to Christine, a foot away from the front door. The shoulders of their peacoats were touching. Soon the only sound to be heard was their quiet breaths, blowing clouds of white vapor into the air.

They all looked up at the two windows on the second floor of the store. One window had turned yellow with artificial light. They all knew that Liza Flanagan was in there, probably still in her pajamas, drifting sleepily through the tiny rooms, like a dream. Oblivious to the soldiers lined up outside. Suddenly, her shadow made an inkblot in the saturated yellow, and the soldiers all held their breaths.

The shadow disappeared at once. The soldiers leaned forward on their toes, not daring to touch the door until Liza opened it for them.

“She’s coming down the stairs,” Pete whispered. “If you listen closely, you can hear her footsteps. She should be out any second.”

Pete’s prediction rang true as the door to the bookstore opened with a loud creak. Ava began to take a step forward, but Jennifer held her back. Ava watched as the figure of Liza Flanagan appeared in the doorway, wearing a robe and slippers.

“Usually no one comes until at least nine o’clock,” Liza muttered under her breath, yawning. “But I never turn away customers. Come on in, kids.”

One by one, the anxious readers stepped into the bookstore. Ava was too excited to appreciate the way the warped hardwood floor under her feet creaked softly, or the monstrous silhouettes of creatures that were created by the dark shadows of bookshelves. Liza let each reader in, closed the door behind her, and flicked on a light. At once the store was illuminated, and Ava looked about, searching for the magazine.

“Are you here for anything in particular? Usually there’s a big book release when kids come this early, but I don’t know of any blockbuster that just came out…” Liza rambled, crossing her arms and shuffling her feet. Ava nodded, still looking for the magazine.

To her right, Christine gasped. Ava watched as she ran to a display in the corner of the room. Angela and Pete followed close behind.

“Come on, Ava! We can’t let them get there first!” Ginger grabbed Ava’s hand and pulled her along, Jennifer at their feet. The three girls ran to the display. Ava couldn’t believe it – she was going to get the first edition copy. She would read it voraciously, and rub it in Ryan’s face when she got home.

The three girls reached the display, but not fast enough. Angela, Christine, and Pete were already there, grabbing at the thin stack of magazines as quickly as they could. Ava’s heart sank as she saw that the display was now empty. How had that happened? She’d done all she could to get the magazine, and now her efforts would be futile.

“Hey! You don’t need two copies!” Ginger stole a copy from Angela’s hands, hiding it behind her back. “And Christine, you don’t need three! Give us some of them, would you?”

“Give that back!” Angela shrieked, reaching behind Ginger and snatching the copy from her hands. She held both copies tightly. “My little sister wanted one.”

“I told my cousin I’d get her a copy, too.” Christine said, shrugging. “And one for my aunt.”

Ava crossed her arms. She wanted to speak, but her thoughts were jumbled. They would never listen to her. Christine had changed since they’d been friends. Pete only had one copy. And Angela had never gotten along with Ava.

“Please, guys,” Jennifer began. “We all love this magazine, right? We should each get a copy. Your family can get the magazine somewhere else. But we’re here, right now.”

“Jennifer’s right,” Ava said, suddenly finding the right words. “We’re all fans. I bet the writers of New Moon Girls would be upset, if they knew we were fighting instead of reading it together. Remember how we used to recite the articles by heart, Christine? How we used to cut out the pictures and make collages?”

Christine nodded solemnly. She loosened her grip on the magazines, let the hand holding them fall to her side.

“Pete – you never liked reading magazines, until we showed you this one. And Angela, we might not get along all the time, but we both love this magazine. So I think we should each get a copy and read them together. Like we used to.”

Pete nodded. He nudged Angela on the shoulder.

“I guess you’re right,” Angela said, beginning to smile. “It’s not really a competition. Take this one.” Angela handed Ava her second copy. Ava grinned. She could tell a new connection had formed between her and Angela – one that would continue to grow.

“Here’s one for you, Jennifer. And one for Ginger,” Christine handed the girls her extra copies. They thanked her with a smile.

“Got what you came for?” Liza Flanagan appeared behind Ava, peering into the circle of kids. “New Moon Girls Magazine! Great choice. Now, come pay before you run home.”

Ava followed Liza to the register, clutching her copy of the magazine to her chest. Her friends followed behind her, flipping through the pages and whispering excitedly. Ava looked down at her magazine as satisfaction filled her with joy. She couldn’t wait to get home and start reading.

 

Evergreen Hartly

Evergreen was a typical girl, until the day she got into a car accident.From then on, she  could only say long words, because the part of her brain that keeps her shorter words got damaged.  Will Evergreen find a way to communicate to her friends without using long words, or will  she be stuck like this forever?

It was a normal day in July, and me and my family were driving to a water park.  I was singing along to the radio, and my brother Chase was looking at his baseball cards.  I gasped, speechless.  Behind us, a car was speeding, and coming closer.  This time, I had to save myself from being in danger, not my mom, not my dad, not Chase.

“Mom, pull over, now!” I yelled to her.  She was the one driving.

“Darling, do you need to throw up?”  Mom asked, extending her arm out, holding a paper bag.

“Mom, no! I need you to pull over! That car is coming!”  Mom looked in her mirror, but before she could see it, the car hit the back of our car, which made our car go skidding forward.  We hit into the next car and then halted to a stop, and I veered forward. The windshield had broken, and the whole back of their car had fallen off.  I was crying, and Chase was stroking my back.  I pushed him away, and my head started to ache.  I sat up, but fell back down.  That was all I remembered before everything went black.

I woke up in the emergency room.  Machines were beeping.  Tubes were stuck into my arm.  Everything seemed to be moving around, and I could not see a clear image of anything.

A doctor and a nurse walked over to my mom to tell her either good or bad news.  “Your child has a brain injury, which has affected the communication with one part of her brain.  Unfortunately, your child will be very hard to understand, because she has lost all  memory of every short word she has ever learned.  She will only talk with complex words.”

“Dear relative, am I afflicted with an illness?  If so, you may call the hospital wagon and escort me to my mattress for a pleasant nap or short rest that will put me at ease.”  I said.

“No, darling,” said mother, leaning over me. “You are already in bed.”

“What will take effect in my future of important educational results and school work?” I asked mom.

“Well, Honey Buns, you will be placed in a 1st grade class.”  My mom still calls me stupid nicknames, even though I’m 10.

“Well, mother when does this exclusive gathering of children happen to start?”  I asked.

“Tomorrow.” she said.

Then I went back to sleep.  It was a great dream that I had that night.  It was about transporting to time’s base, and the rest of it is really confusing!  I woke up the next morning in my bed at home.  My mom knocked on the door and I let her in.

“Honey, the doctors told us that we could bring you home last night, so we did.”  Mom said.

“Did the internal medicine physicians disclose the results from the test?”  I asked.

“Yes, Honey, and the results were positive!” Mom squealed.

My mom gets really excited over really little things.  I jumped and hollered like I was a monkey who had just finished two bananas.  I got out of bed and ran down stairs to get a bowl of Kellogg’s Rice Krispies and raspberries.  I ran back upstairs so that I could get my laptop to type while eating breakfast.  I love to write and tell the stories of the untold.

This time, I was writing a story about the time when the Earth was created.  It is called Starting It Up.  I have been writing it since I was five years old, and I am so interested in researching.  It’s not just to know what information to add to the story, but to know how I came to life.  Not many people know about this topic, so only about two pages of results came up when I googled it.

“Let’s go get you a new dictionary,” exclaimed Mom.

“Tell the cause, mother.”  I rolled my eyes.

“For the new class, Honey.  It starts today.” Mom told me.

We hopped into mom’s Acura and we were off to the pharmacy.  I walked down the aisles.  I saw my old friend Ruby.  She was talking with all the other popular girls.

“Greetings, and holy blessings, Ruby.”  I remarked.

They all laughed at me as I sighed and ran around the corner to hide.  I  heard the giggling stop, so I walked back around the corner but they were still there.  I began to run, and they chased me while saying, “Evergreen, the first grader, what a little little girl!  Evergreen, the first grader, what a little little girl!”  They repeatedly chanted.

Luckily, I am fast, so I reached two aisles before they saw me.   I hid behind my mother like a four-year-old.

“What’s wrong?”  Mother asked.

“Shield me from the other kids, Mother!  It’s for safety!” I hid behind my mother as she handed the food to the cashier.

When she was done we bolted out of the store.  My mom laughed at me.  She was laughing so hard, she fell over on the ground.  I picked up Mom because a car was heading toward us.

“CEASE driving the car!”  I yelled as I held up my hand to stop the car.

The car rushed to a stop.  My mom stood up, and gathered her bag and sweatshirt.  We ran back to the car and got inside.

Mom drove me to school, where I was about two feet taller than some of the first graders.

“Salutations and best wishes for the oncoming day.”  I said softly.

The teacher gave me a nervous glance and let out a small giggle.   Why was she laughing at me?  I was only a 10-year-old in a first grade class.  That’s when I realized how stupid that sounded.  I was suddenly embarrassed.

First was math where we did one-digit addition and subtraction, and I was done with the whole paper when some of the first graders had not even started the first problem.  Next was grammar and spelling.

We learned lots of stuff, this is a reenactment of what really happened today in class.

“Children, please turn to page 10 in your dictionaries.”  The teacher said.

I raised my hand.

“Yes, Evergreen?”  The teacher pointed to me.

“What does the word is mean?”  I asked, pointing to ‘is’ on page 10.

“Oh, Evergreen darling, ‘is’ means that you are doing something or one of your dear first grade friends is doing something.” the teacher said.

She was wearing a teal tunic with a tight black skirt, and her hair pulled back into a braided bun.  I would say that she was about 30 years old, and she refused to tell anyone her name, so we always called her “Teacher.”

It was finally late in the afternoon and I still had not made any friends yet.  I was walking in the hall to the front entrance, where the helping teachers would escort everyone to the buses.

I spotted a girl, and she walked over to me.  She seemed pretty friendly.

“Naomi.” She shook my hand.  “Fourth grade.” she said.

I was supposed to be in fourth grade.

“Evergreen, it is a dear love to meet you, Naomi.” I shook her hand firmly, as she had shaken mine.  “First of the grades of elementary.”  I said.

“Really?” she said, a surprised look on her face.

We slowed down so that I could tell her what had happened with me and the first grade.

“I got in a car accident, and I had brain damage which has completely ruined my use of some words.”  I sighed.

“Nice meeting you.” Naomi said, and she ran to her bus.

I ran to my bus since it was pulling out of the school lot.

When I got home, my mom was sitting at the counter reading one of those gossip magazines.  She would not show her face.  I was confused.

“How was your day, Evergreen?”  She sniffled, as if she had been crying.

“What is the need of help for your issue, Mother?”  I asked.

“Darling, I don’t know how to say this, but you are getting brain surgery.  Tomorrow.” Mom sniffled again, tears dripping down her face. I started to cry.

That night, I went to bed with my back slumped and my hands  crossed over my chest.  I knew that I had to awaken the next morning and go to the hospital.  But I had to be brave and push through.  So I went to sleep that night and dreamed that the surgery went horribly and I had died.  When I got out of bed the next morning, I ran to my mom’s room to wake her up.

She wasn’t there. I ran to the workout room, and there she was. We were ready to go.

We got in the car, and I wore a simple button down shirt so that I could easily change into a hospital gown.

 

When I arrived, they asked me to write down all of this weird information.  I was soon in the operation room.

“We are going to give you a medicine so that you will fall asleep and you won’t feel anything.” said one doctor.

 

FAST FORWARD TO AFTER THE SURGERY

 

“Good news,” the doctor stated, “The surgery is helping your brain.” “What does that information mean?”  I asked.

“You will get some memory back in your brain.” said the man.

That was all I had to hear before I knew that I was healthy again.

 

THE END

 

Campetition

Chapter 1: Camp

I opened my eyes. I was in some sort of toy room that preschoolers would use for fun. I looked around. Then, I saw something. I looked closely at it. It turned out to be a video game. It was what I had asked for my whole life. I walked towards it slowly. Odd, it seemed. The video game I wanted forever was sitting on a bookshelf. I reached for it and grabbed it. Suddenly, an alarm went off. BEEP! BEEP! BEEP!

“What is it?” I heard a preschooler ask.

“Oh, don’t worry about it, child.” said a lady. “I’ll go check on it!” She busted down the door with a rake in her hand. I was nervous. The janitor busted through another door with a mop.

“Shame on you!” yelled the lady. “Stealing toys from little kids, you rotten thief! Attack!” Preschoolers swarmed into the room like bees. Then they charged at me. Let me tell you, it was not easy. I was in seventh grade, but there were about three hundred of them punching and kicking me. I felt like I was going to die. That woman was the criminal.

“That’s fifteen years in jail for you!” she said angrily. Then, I heard something. I couldn’t quite make it out. Then I heard music. It was this terrible song called “Chair.” I closed my eyes. Then opened them again. I was in my bed and my alarm clock was flashing 8:30.

“Okay!” I yelled. “Who messed with my alarm clock?!”

My older brother David entered the room. “You better get up or you’ll be late for school again, Jake.”

I grumbled. Of course it was him. it didn’t take a rocket scientist to figure that out. There was one advantage, though. Today was the last day of school. I, however, was scared because we were getting our report cards back today. It was not the most fun thing in the world, or at least for some people.

Dad drove me to school. “Jake,” he said, “what are you planning to do this summer?”

“I’m making a list of thing I want to do. It’s not complete yet, but here’s the incomplete version: rock climbing, sky diving, jaywalking, bungee jumping, video game playing, food eating, soda drinking, more video game playing, swimming, shark taming, daring, rocket shooting, –”

“Or,” interrupted Dad, “you could go to camp.”

“Fire breathing,” I continued, “giant slaying, kidnapping, drunk driving, evil plotting, ninja slicing, window breaking, jaw slinging, decorating, ball playing, water fighting, vandalizing, computer hacking,–

“No.” said Dad. “I’m serious. I went to a camp called Camp Zelo. It’s named after Erik Zelo, the discoverer of the land. It’s been in their family for generations. It’s full of adventure and discovery and the family really liked me. I was one of the best campers and…you’re not even listening.”

“Modeling,” I said. “ Dabbling, more video game playing, garden destroying, rock throwing, door slamming, soccer playing, and that’s it. Happy?” I got out of the car and went to school. I got my report card sixth period. My grades were not bad, but they weren’t the highest in the class. My highest score was a 92% and my lowest was an 81%. There was this one girl who was really smart and got 100% in every subject. During lunch, I talked to my best friend Toko.

“What are you doing this summer?” asked Toko. “I’m going to a camp called Camp Zelo. I’ve been going there for about five years now.”

“No, wait, really?”

“Yeah. Five years. It’s really fun.”

“Well,” I said. “my list is quite long and I haven’t yet finished it.” My day didn’t get any better after I went home. Dad signed me up for camp.

“Hey, sport.” said Dad. He sounded extra cheerful. Anytime my dad sounded cheerful, you knew he was planning something. “You excited for camp on Monday?” I froze. He signed me up for camp.

“Yeah.” said my dad. “I signed you up for Camp Zelo.” My whole summer was ruined. This meant that on Monday, I had to go to some stupid camp. No jaywalking. No skydiving. No vandalizing.

“You what!?” I almost yelled.

“It’s fine,” Dad said. “You know, I’ll go with you. We’ll have a great time. Go hiking, roast some marshmallows, tell scary stories, play games, swim, climb trees…”

Hiking, swimming? What about jaywalking and giant slaying? What about fire breathing, what about skydiving? I was ready to throw Dad’s computer out the window.

“You sent Jake to camp?” asked my mom. “Why? Why would you do that? Jake just wants to stay home and hang out with his friends and play video games. Why can’t you just let him enjoy his summer?”

“Because,” said my dad. He always, always answered a question with a ‘because’ and said something that would start a fight. “He needs to learn responsibility. When he comes home, he’ll be a man. He’ll know how to tie knots, swim, pitch up tents, and survive in the wilderness. Plus, I’ll go with him. It’ll just be us, and the rest of the camp on an adventure. No TV, no video games.”

I went outside to enjoy two days of summer before going to that awful camp.

Chapter 2: Zelo Time

 

Believe it or not, Dad actually won that argument and convinced my mom to send me to this dumb place. We drove to camp on Monday morning with a whole bunch of lame camping stuff. It took a whole hour to get there. My dad had his stupid radio on the whole time.

“You know, son, Christopher Zelo was my best friend every single summer. His dad was the leader of the camp, and now it’s being passed down to him. How awesome is that?”

“Whatever.” I sighed, looking out the window. My dad was not like the others– he was a bit embarrassing to be around. Suddenly, I passed what I thought was the campground.

“ Dad?” I asked. “Is that the campground? It’s so awesome! It has a beach, and a free snack bar, and a dinner spot, and a recliner, and an entire lake. Wow.”

“Of course not.” said Dad. “Where you’re going is way better. That’s Camp Awesomeness. The lame camp.” We finally arrived at camp.

We first unpacked and then went to our camp spot. I was in the older group because I was in eighth grade. Dad took me to my camp director and got me to my group.

“Hey, Will.” said Christopher. “How’s the family? It’s good to see you again. You wanna sign up your son?” I immediately knew that they really had a lot in common. Dad spent fifteen minutes chatting up with him before they got serious again. Then, they spent another fifteen minutes doing form stuff.

“Spot 7,” said Christopher.  We walked all the way over there. It took ten minutes. After that, we set up our tent. It took twenty minutes to set up the tent, and then we met each other.

“Hey.” said a guy. “Can you pass me that wrench?” I saw a toolbox next to my foot.

“Sure.” I said. “But why do you need a wrench?” I gave him the wrench. The kid looked up.

“Hey,” he said. “I’ve never seen you here before. Are you new here?” I saw he was using the wrench to tighten a bolt.

“Uh, yeah.” I said nervously. “I’ve never been to this place before and my dad said this was Camp Zelo.”

“Well, you’re right about that.” he said. “My name is Gale Zelo. My dad’s the camp  director. Let me introduce you to the gang. Apparently, I’m their leader. No counselors, just us. So, over there is Jack, Tom and Pom are right over here, and there’s Steeler, Josh, Kate, Larry, that’s Girl, Gabby, Zipline, Yoko, Hags, and over there is Millie. I think she likes me.”

“Okay, okay.” I said. “I’m Jake, and that’s my dad over there. Your dad obviously knows him. So what do we do here?

“Sadly, my dad says that we don’t have enough money to do all that stuff we did last year.” Gale said. “Last year, we entered something called the Campetition. We haven’t actually qualified for a spot in the Campetition this year, but it was one heck of a ride.”

“Okaaaayyyy…” I said slowly. “I’m going to find my dad now because I didn’t even have breakfast yet.”

I walked over to my tent and found my dad.

“Dad?” I asked. “Can I have my breakfast now?”

“Uh…” mumbled Dad.

“You ate my breakfast!?” I shot.

“Sorry.” said Dad. “Mom ate my breakfast this morning. I was hungry. I had to eat something.” I knew this was not true because there were two bags sticking out of the bag with both of our eaten breakfasts in there.

“You’re lame,” I said. “Now can I have my 3DS?”

“Sorry,” said Dad. “Christopher took it because he has a strict rule about electronics on campgrounds. So he’ll be keeping it for the rest of the summer.” This was not going to be fun.

Of course, it wasn’t. Camp today was awful for the first half of the day. We went hiking, ziplining…all that lame stuff. Until lunch, I didn’t have a bite to eat. Without my 3DS, my life was completely over. So I decided to sneak into the main house and take it back. The problem was, I didn’t have one clue where it was. I searched for fifteen minutes and then I saw it. The Main House was atop a few steps. I walked up them and opened the door. Luckily, nobody noticed me. They were busy discussing this lame problem.

“Apparently, we owe about $100,000 in debt to some lame studying camp where all you do is math and boring stuff.” said Christopher. “It says that if we don’t pay by the end of the summer, they will take our camp away!” I saw my 3DS next to the camp director. I really hated that guy.

“What is going on here?” asked his wife. “They don’t own us!” I suddenly came up with a brilliant plan.

“Apparently, they do,” said Christopher. I burst in.

“Hey,” I said. “Where is the bathroom? I really have to go.” They were quick to answer that one because they probably knew I was here for another reason.

“Uh, there’s a Porta-Potty near every group site,” said another counselor. “Now scram, kid!” I quickly fled the scene, scared and with anger of failing. I could still hear what they were saying about their stupid debt.

“How do we pull a $100,000 move off this time, Chrisie?” said Gale. “Let me guess, we can enter the Campetition again. The first match starts this Friday night. If you can sign us up tonight, we’re all set to go.”

I did not like that idea. I heard that we lost the first match every single time. I returned to lunch with the bad news.

“Bad news, guys,” I said. “We’re entering this Campetition thing. Also, I failed to get my 3DS back.” Everyone cheered.

 

Chapter 3: A Spark of Luck

 

To make a long story short, Christopher Zelo signed us up for the Campetiton. We lacked skill, preparation,  and many other things. We were playing a pretty decent camp in a relay race. It was a long one too.

“Okay.” said Gale. “I’ll go last. Who wants to go first?”

“I will.” said Yoko. “It’s not a bad start-off, is it?”

“Okay,” said the Ref. “First competitors to the starting line. 3, 2, 1, GO!” Yoko and the other first competitor dashed along the obstacle course. I had to admit, I was pretty impressed with how he was handling all of this. He had dodged every single hurdle and started taking the lead. He slid under a few hurdles and grabbed hold of a rope vine hanging over a giant mud puddle. After reaching the halfway point, he turned around and made it back seconds before the other person. He tagged Zipline’s hand and he ran. Now, these guys were very average, no offense, but before I knew it, it was my turn. I was the second to last one, but they were already on their last. Hags tagged my hand and I was off!

“Okay.” I said. “This is it!” Suddenly, I hit a hurdle and fell down. The last guy zipped past me.

“Get up!” said Christopher. I slowly used the hurdle to stand. After that, I wasn’t very fast with the hurdles. I was cautious but inept with fear. Then came the mud rope. I stopped to get a good jump. Then I tried to grab the rope, but missed and fell in the mud. It was quick mud to be exact. I tried to get out.

“Come on!” yelled Gabby. “Don’t you have the strength to get out of mud?”

“No,” I said. “I can’t even do a pull up.” But I was able to save myself from possible death! I grabbed onto a rock sticking out of the ground and hauled myself up. It took every single ounce of muscle to do that. I crawled out of the quick mud and somehow stood up. It was  painful. I was able to trudge on, and crawled under a few hurdles and found my way to the halfway point. The problem was that the other guy was very close to home. I turned around and got up. I took five seconds to heal and then crawled under the hurdles again. This time, I actually managed to grab the rope dangling over the mud. I tried to swing back and forth, but it was useless. I jumped off of the rope and hit solid ground. I picked myself up and ran, only to hit a hurdle. Then, I heard cheering.

“Camp Awesome wins!” said the announcer. “This means that they get to go to the second round!” With sadness, I crawled back to the starting line.

“Did we win?” I asked sarcastically.

“Attention, all audiences!” said the announcer. “There have been some changes to the score! Camp Awesome has been disqualified. They were caught shooting rocks at Camp Zelo.”

Everyone but me cheered. I was bruised. We may have gotten off easily this time, but it will never happen again. Luck is never something that you can count on for long.

 

 

Chapter 4: A Walk in the Woods

 

I woke up in a prison. I was being sentenced for 15 years of time for trying to steal a video game. I had no idea what just happened. I had to find a way out of this place. the problem was, I didn’t know who my family was. In fact, I didn’t know if I even had a family. I was all alone in prison. I had an urge to jog. It’s like this place was controlling me. Suddenly a cop came up to me.

“Trying to escape?” he said. “Escapers shall answer to the horn.”

“What’s so scary about a stupid horn?” I asked. I heard a huge horn noise that almost made me go deaf. I opened my eyes.

“WAKE UP!” yelled someone. Christopher burst into my tent with a chocolate covered donut and a jug of milk. “What do you think you’re doing!? It’s fifteen minutes past wake up time! How am I supposed to run a camp with a stupid kid who doesn’t follow rules!”

“What are you talking about?’ I asked. “It’s 4:30 in the morning!” I set an alarm for 8:00 am.”

“Didn’t I tell you we were going for a hike!? Everyone’s ready to go already! Who do you think I am!? Your butler!? I’ll give you 5 minutes before we leave!”

“Okay.” I said. I got out of bed and put on my hiking clothes. That guy was super annoying. This was a summer camp! It was not the marines! Thank god that my dad had packed everything the night before. the hike took two whole hours. We finally arrived at a training place in the forest that we were going to stay for a couple of days. However, we soon found that it was already taken

“What are you doing here?” asked a grown up. Christopher quickly shot back.

“We’re here to train for our second campetition match.” he said.

“Well get out!” he screamed. “This place is for good camps only.” I quickly realized that this was the camp that they owed $100,000.00 to.

“And don’t forget the $100,000.00 you owe us!” See, I told you.

“This,” said Christopher “is a bad man. he’s a selfish jerk who wants to expand his studying camp.”

“Indeed.” said Gale.

“Okay.”I said. “We should leave.”

“Yeah!” said another kid from the other camp. “Now get lost! And give Mr.Beasly his money! Studying is the future of summer!”

“No.” said Yoko. “I think we should play them in a game of kickball to see who gets to use the turf.”

“Yay!” said everyone but me. See, kickball was the next event of the campetition. However, we were sent back to camp on our two hour walk.

“This is so unfair!.” screamed Millie. “Why do we have to leave? I think they cheated.

“I know it’s harsh.” said Gale. “However, life’s not fair at all.”

“We can find another training site.” said my dad. “There are a ton of places we can go.”

“There’s a kickball field in our town.” I said. “We can go there. Wait. Do we all know how to play kickball?”

“What do you think?” asked Gabby. “Do we look like we were born yesterday?”

“I don’t know.” I said. “That field though is an hour away. We have to drive.”

“Are you crazy?” asked Gale. “A Zelo never drives. He hikes.”

It was a three hour hike to my town. Christopher actually made us bring our tents there.

“Zelos don’t sleep in hotels or houses!” he yelled at me. ‘We’re camping out on the baseball field.”

“That jerk!” I told my dad. “He runs this camp like a prison! It’s not enough that he made me get up at 4:30 two days ago, now we have to sleep in the baseball field!”

“Just deal with it son.” he said. “I know this will pay off sometime.” I couldn’t believe that that was the best advice he could give me. I know this is a camp, but it was like living in the wild. When we got there, it was 5:30 in the afternoon, and pouring rain. Then, we realized something. We didn’t have a kickball.

“I’ll get it!” I said. “My house is only two miles from here.” Luckily, my dad trusted me. I raced off until nobody could see me. Then I slowly walked to my house. It looked like heaven from where I was. Jake was getting a bowl of warm soup. I rushed into the house and got a blast of heat. I was definitely planning on staying. I got a bowl of soup and watched an episode of “Good and Bad”. After what I had just been through, I deserved it, no matter what everyone else said. Halfway through the episode, I dozed off. I fell asleep for a bit only to find out it had been a whole night. I woke up to a sunny day with the rain drying up.

“Hey,” said mom. “We have hot chocolate for breakfast. David’s going out to play baseball at the baseball field.  I was wondering if you’d like to join him and his friends.”

“What!?” I asked. I raced out of the house after grabbing the kickball. It took half an hour to run to the baseball field. David was already there. So were the others.

“You are still resisting the path of camp.” said Gale. “F.”

 

Chapter 5: The Big Ballgame

 

Thank god David was willing to train us, or those guys would’ve  teared me limb from limb from limb.David’s not the type of brother who’s always there for me. I don’t blame him though. Alot of brothers are like that. Big and little.

“Alright you turkeys!” yelled one of David’s friends. “Kickball isn’t for wimps! Line up in groups of two and make it snappy! Wait, no! You’re all one team, vs us. If you can’t beat us, you can’t beat nobody! Now move it!” I saw that this guy was no different than that camp director person what’s his name.

Let’s say for the record, we sucked. We played better at that match two days ago. The pitcher was out of shape, the game was an overall score of 1234567890 to 4, a grand slam scored by Gale.

“Wow, said my dad.”  “We really, truly, extremely, especially suck.” The worst part was that the match was tomorrow night.

“Okay.” said David. “Let’s see what we have here. Puny strength, slow running ability, zero sense of direction, with all that lameness, do you really think you can defeat them in battle?”

“Let’s teach them a couple of things.” said Mark. “It’s not like we’re mean people or anything.” Just by what he said, I knew he was being sarcastic.

“OK!” said David. “We’ll help them. Now see here kids. This round red thing, is a ball. You are supposed to kick it with your foot. Also, that white thing, is a base after you kick the ball, you are supposed to run to every base, and home. See this thing attached to my arm, that is called a hand. You use the hand to catch the ball when kicked. You also use it to throw the ball to basemen before the opponent gets there. Got it?” We all nodded, but with little question. They prepared us for the rest of the day, and tomorrow night, we clashed in a match with a camp called Best Camp Ever.”

“Okay.” said Christopher. “If you lose this game, you lose everything, and shall be subjected to labor for 10s of thousands of millions of centuries. Now get out there and win this thing or I will!”

“Yes, Chrissie.” said Girl. I laughed along with her only to earn a disapproving glare from my dad.

We were first up at kick. Steeler went first. He ran up to the ball and kicked it with all his might. Unfortunately, the ball didn’t go the way he wanted it to. But, just like my brother said, he took off after the kick. It was close, but he made it to first base. He gave the thumbs up, but it made Chris mad at him. Iand a couple of other kids gave him the thumbs up back. Next up, was MIllie.

“Kick the ball with all your might and then run, or you’ll get out just like the last turkey who didn’t listen to me.

“Don’t be such a jerk, dad.” said Gale. I rolled my eyes at and focused the other way. Millie kicked the ball.

I saw steeler slide under the arm of an opponent of someone who tried to push him. The pitcher picked the ball up and threw it to first base. Luckily, the guy dropped it allowing Steeleter and Millie to advance another base. Larry kicked the ball into the pitcher’s hand.

“Yer out!” said the ref. “Tough luck kid.” The game went on like that until the score was 78 – 79. The score was to 80. I was up to bat, and there was only one person on 1st base. I’d have to score a home run to make this work, because this was our second out this inning. I closed my eyes. The camp director was yelling at me, the team had 0 faith in me. I ran up, and kicked the ball with the inside of my foot, and it went to the pitcher. Wow! I didn’t care. I ran to first, and the first baseman dropped the ball and I slid under him to first. The others were going for Gabby, so I dashed to second base.

“C’mon.” said Christopher. “You have got to be kidding me with that kid.” Gabby made it to home, but I had stopped.

“GO!” yelled everyone. I didn’t know what I was doing, so I charged to the third. The ball was thrown at me, so I jumped over it and made it there. No sooner than I got there, I made a sharp turn for home. I almost slipped, but I ended up ducking under the ball. Putting this thing before my own safety, I slid for home. I rolled over and made it there. The whole team looked down at me.

“Did we win?” I asked again.

“Camp Zelo has won!” said the ref. The entire group cheered. But there, in the audience, I saw Beasley walk away. He was up to no good.

 

Chapter 6: Really Real Training

 

We went back to celebrate at the campgrounds; by having a campfire. We never, ever get to have campfires here. At least not that I’ve heard. We gathered around the campfire to roast marshmallows and tell stories. Christopher made announcement.

“This week, you guys have really shown improvement.” he said. “I’m proud of each and everyone of you. Even you, Steeler.”

“Say.” said Tom. “Where is Steeler? He’s supposed to be eating marshmallows right now.”

“Cut him some slack.” said Gale. “He’s been distant all night.” I suggested we tell some more stories tonight.

“No.” said Christopher. “It’s time for bed tonight. Although, we could dance.” Every single person sprang up, including me.

“Who’s ready to drop some beats?” asked Zipline. People started dancing. I went over to Steeler.

“Hey.” I said. “You wanna come over and dance with us? Even I’ve gotta admit it’s fun.” I saw a depressing look on his face. I suddenly knew what it was about.

“Look.” I said. “You don’t need to beat yourself up over the fact that you kicked the ball the wrong way. If Chris doesn’t appreciate your score, than that’s his fault. He did say he was proud of you.” He smiled as I turned to leave for my tent. Tomorrow was a big day.

That however, was not a good day. I awoke to find out that a video about my dad’s camp was being posted online. I busted through the doors of the main house to see what was up. Every single member was crowding around my DS.

“WHAT IS THE MEANING OF THIS!?” yelled Christopher. He was really mad, yet even more embaressed. The other campers tried not to keep from laughing hysterically. I went over to my 3DS and took a look at the video on YouTube.

“You have to believe me.” I said. “I’m not behind any of this!” It was clear that they already knew that, thank god.

“Something tells me, we’re going for a ride.” said Gale. “Right after lunch.”

We did our activities up to lunch. On Saturdays, our group has Ziplining, hiking, and swimming. After lunch, we went to the domain of Mr. Beasley, the evil camp person. That studying camp was called Camp Core, where they enslave kids with studying.

“Hey!” said a kid. “You don’t go to Camp Core!”

“Yeah, we don’t.” said Zipline. “We’re too awesome to waste our summer like that.”

“Quiet prisoner!” he yelled. “Follow me to your camp director. This camp looked like a paradise from the outside, and a school on the inside. More like a jail.

“Look at this place!” said Gale. “It’s abominable. it looks like the inside of a landfill.”

“I said QUIET!” he yelled. “The boss is in that door. I should get back to my digging. Oh, and did you see that hilarious youtube video about you?” We burst into the door.

“I see you’re here about the video. said Mr. Beasley. “Now into the studying prison. And give me my money or else. It’s no use for you, because that video is already making me money. NOW GET ME THAT HOSE SO I CAN USE IT ON YOU!”

“Now! said Zipline. Before you criticize me on what I did next, please keep in mind that… It was their fault. I picked up a chair and slammed his computer. Then I slammed his foot.

“OW!” he yelled. We ran away with the chair and threatened to use it on anyone who we passed.

“That was intense.” said Gale. “It was like a maze.”

“Doesn’t matter.” said Steeler. “We couldn’t take the video off of the internet! Now our reputation is ruined forever!” We went back to camp to start training for our next event, which was a mountain race. We had to climb up a mountain before the other team.

“Okay!” said Christopher. “In order to win, we must climb a mountain before they do. Let’s start at two hours.” Each of us climbed the mountain at our own pace. I used every edge I could. It wasn’t easy, but I made it up there in 12 hours, which was thirty seven minutes after Hags who was surprisingly unfit at that time.

“What was that!?’ asked Chris.

“But dad,” said Gale. “I made it up in 3 hours. C’mon. At first, you don’t succeed.”

“I’m not talking about you!” he yelled. “It’s everyone else I hate!” It took about a week, but I finally made it up in 2 hours after drinking milk and doing pushups.

“Now we go to one hour!” he said. Later, it was thirty minutes, and he was done.”

“Alright.” he said. “Now you are ready. You worked real hard, so go to bed. Campetition’s tomorrow night.”

 

Chapter 7: A Dream Based event

I woke up in prison again. I was eating gruel and watching the news. Apparently, a terrible accident had taken place. There was an ambulence. I saw Yoko and Gale.

“Hey guys!” I said. They didn’t seem to hear me. I saw the face of the injured guy on TV. It was … Christopher Zelo. It said that he was injured by who knows what? I turned right and saw Steeler and Zipline.

“You’re supposed to be carrying the police cheif.” said Zipline. “GET BACK TO YOUR POST OR I WILL!”

“But.” I asked.

“Butts are for pooping! said Steeler. “You are stuck with this job forever. You have no other choice.

“I uh..” I said. Suddenly, I woke up. I was in my tent. Tonight was the mountain climbing challenge. I just had to prepare for this. I spent the afternoon doing sit – ups and jumping jacks.

“Hey!” said Yoko. “What are you doing?” I paid no attention to him. I just walked away. You may think that was rude of me, but ever since I came to this camp, he’s been giving me the cold shoulder.

As I said, we were at the campetition that night. We were about to climb a mountain. I looked up into the night sky and noticed a helicopter in the distance. I first thought it was to help anyone who fell off, but then, I heard the sound of someone being tied up with duck tape over their mouth.

“Ready!” yelled the Ref. “Set! GO!” I jumped onto the first rock. I managed to grab it, but almost slipped. That’s when I Realized the rock was unstable. I grabbed the rock with my other hand. I couldn’t believe that Gale was over half a mile up in the air. I pulled myself up onto the next rock with my feet on the first. I was already out of breath.

“Come on.” I said. “Now? Of all times you legs.” I put one leg over the other. and put my hands on the fourth rock. I had a rope. I took it out, and threw it onto the eigth rock. I tried to climb up, but my body didn’t budge. It was already 9:30.

“Alright.” I said. “I’ll rest, but only for a minute. I rested for five minutes and gale seemed to be at the top. I also noticed that my rope hadd ripped and was more useless than my money when I got in trouble at school for slipping on a wet floor. I climbed up onto the seventh rock and looked up. Millie was at the top.

I jumped up and managed to grab the tenth rock. I climbed for another five minutes until I got to the thirtieth rock. My arms and legs were ready to kill me for abusing them through mountain climbing. But now, I had a whole new problem to deal with. The wall was litterally going in and out and I had to scale those. By the time I made it to the last lock, I was exhausted to no end. I reached for the the rock, but something else hit it first and I fell off the mountain.

Not to worry, I handed back first on a big concrete rock which looked like a hand. The opponent jumped ahead of me, scaling rocks like nobody’s business. Then, I was ambushed by a rock slide.

“Somebody get me off of this stupid thing!” I yelled.

“Dumb kid.” I heard Christopher say. “Hold on, I’m coming up here.” I was hit in the face with a pebble.

“Ow.” I said. Luckily, I dodged a bigger rock that came my way. Chris was jumping up on the rocks. Now, I was in for a real attack. A few rocks pushed me off of the ledge, but I was able to grab onto it. However, nobody could hear me, because I was under the rocks, but I had heard three missiles being shot at me. When they hit the rocks, I fell… right into the hands of Christopher, who was hanging on the rock below.

“Ready?” he said

“Ready for what?” I asked suspiciously. Christopher drew me back, and he threw me over the rockslide. Let me tell you, that he had a really good arm. I passed the competitor and reached for the top yet again, but this time, I caught it and tried to hoist myself up. The other guy jumped for the top. Luckily, Gale, Zipline, and Gabby grabbed by hand and pulled me up. We had won!

That however, was not our concern when Christopher climbed down the mountain. A missile hit the rock he was on. Chris let go and grabbed onto a rock much below. This time, the missile hit the rock that was underneath him which his foot was on.

“He’ll never survive!” said Hags. And he was right. Chris fell off of his rock down onto the floor below. I saw Mr. Beasly in the helicopter flying away. He was evil now. The I saw Christopher. he wasn’t even dead! He was just badly injured. They put him in the hospital van just like they did on the TV.

“Wait.” I said. “If my dream about Chistopher getting injured came true, then that means that… Oh no.”

 

Chapter 8: Look to the Leader

 

We returned to camp devastated. I just never knew something like this could happen so quickly. It was just blind flashing. Tonight was also the ending of our first semester. I went to sleep with  my 3DS, but that mattered to none. Next morning, I returned home to my unpainful lifestyle full of videogames and stuff and whatever.

“Do you think that he’s going to be OK and what not?” I asked. I don’t know I had mentioned this before, but dad and I made a deal that I’d only go to camp for one semester.

“I don’t know.” he said. “All we can do is hope.” he said. “And I could open up a can of beer for you.

“Your advice is making less sense than David’s at this point. Can’t their family pay for the damage done to him? I feel like it’s my fault. He almost died. He almost died to save me. Someone who if fell of of that clive would not live.”

“They would pay for his well being if their summer family buisness wasn’t in critical jeapordy.” said my dad. “It’s already going to take a miracle to get them out of that situation. The only way to do that would be to win next weekend’s final round which is an all camp capture the flag. But you’re not going.”

“I know i’m not, but now I feel like I should have signed up for two semesters, or even no semesters, because I was more of drag on the team than a help. I turned on the TV to watch the news. And there it was. I saw every thing that had happened that night. It was exactly as I’d viewed in jail.

“Dad.” I said. “Sign me up.” Just then, the police knocked on the door. I heard David opening it. I dove under the TV. All you could see were my eyes. Then I heard something.

“Oh yes.” said my mom. “Jake is here. JAKE!”

“Yeah?.’ I asked with my heart beating rapidly and my bladder thinking about contracting.

“Can you come up here? A police man wants to talk to you.”I ran up the stairs to get this over with. I looked suspicious because there was really nothing to get in jail for.

“May I help you?” I asked.

“Yes.” he said sternly. “I want to know if you were involved in Christopher Zelo’s injury. Did you do it on purpose?”

“No.” I said. “But I was there.” I told him the whole story of the mountain climbing incident and the helicopter that shot him.

“Let me get this straight.” he said “A helicopter shot him down while he was climbing a mountain?”

“Yes.” I replied. “He did it trying to save my life. I’m surprised he didn’t die.”

“Looks like you are off of the hook.” he said.  I wanted to sign up for camp again. When I told dad this, he of course said yes, but on one condition. I had to win the Campetition and get the money. I thought about it for a few minutes, and said yes. I had to train for it so hard. my Dad went to the camp with me a day early though.

“Can we help you guys with anything?” said my dad. “With your dad gone, you probably need all of the help you can get.

“You’re going to have to talk to my older brother.” said Mac Zelo. My father and I went over to Gale who was in a meeting with Millie and one of her friends.

“Let me just say that I’m so,so,so,so,so sorry that your father was killed.” said Gabby. “All of us, we all look to you.”

“Yeah.” said Millie. “I just know, we can win this Friday’s Campetition. We trust you so much. We know you won’t let us down.” said Millie.

“I agree.” said Gale. I know I have a lot of pressure on me, but we’ll get by. We did it before. I walked in.

“Hey guys.” I said. “My dad and I want to know what we can do to help. With your dad gone, I’m sure you need all the help you can get.”

“Oh, hey Jake.” said Gale. “Very interesting you should show up here. Does this look familiar to you?” He held up a newspaper saying “Jake, you..”.

“Oh yeah.” I said. “If my memory serves me correctly, I’d say those were the two words he said to me before he hit the ground.”

“I knew it.” said gabby. “You killed him. My eyeballs sprang open.

“WHAT!!!???”I yelled. It was the type of yelling that would make crows fly away.

“Arrest him now, officers!” said Millie. She was always so demanding. I mean like c’mon. Anyway, I was led away with handcuffs and had stones heaved at me. My dad was shocked at what he thought I had done. At least I thought that, because my dad was demanding evidence of my crime.

Ok, so I’ve been in prison for 4 days, and let me tell you, it was a tremendous travesty. I think that the cops purposely put stuff in that greul to make you sick. I hated it. On Thursday, I was having dinner, which was a shoe and a piece of meat fat. Then, I looked up at the news. It was Christopher and his accident. Could he really be dead? I know I couldn’t have been reliving my vision because I didn’t see Gale or Yoko being framed for this either, but then it occurred to me. Gale was being such a jerk. i knew others would be in here too. Plus, I was right. I saw Steeler and Zipline and went over to talk to them.

“Guys.” I said. “We have to get out of here! Now!” Zipline held me down.

“You’re supposed to be carrying the police cheif!” he yelled. “GET BACK TO YOUR POST OR I WILL!”. I didn’t want to hear what would come next, so I walked back to the police cheif. Someone however, stopped me in my tracks.

“I have come to help you, boy. Your father was my best friend until he didn’t turn in his homework. He was a bad man. But you, you’re different. You can still be a good person. I will het you out of jail, if you join my camp and help me win the Campetition tomorrow. So is it a deal?”

“Wait a minute.” I said. “You were the one who killed Christopher Zelo weren’t you.

“Yes.” he said. “Yes I was. Now, what I’m about to tell you is really important. HELP! HE’S TRYING TO ESCAPE!!!!” Cops surrounded me.

“UH oh.” I said. ‘Time to go.”

 

Chapter 9: A Fight Not to Lose

 

 

I ran and grabbed a prison cart. Riding it, I picked up Steeler and Zipline.

“You again!” said Steeler. “Will you please tell me what’s going on?”

“Yes.” I said. “We’re getting out of here. I made a left turn for a dark hallway with prisoners. Guards were chasing us. “Wow.’ said Steeler. “I guess since we’ve been in here for so long, we’ve lost our sense of freedom. Hit that button!”

“Yes sir.” said Zipline. He took a hammer and hit a button that said “Prison Release. All of the prisoners ran out of their cells. “That should hold them off.” Three minutes later, we busted out through the prison’s main doors.

“We did it!” said Steeler.

“I knew we could!” said Zipline. “ But now what do we do?”

“We should go to the hospital where Christopher Zelo is.” I said. “If there’s anyone who could help us at all, it would be him.’

“Perfect!” said Zipline. “We go to the hospital and ask for him to help us. He knows we didn’t kill him.”

“Don’t mean to be such a debbie day downer or whatever, but we are 60 miles from the hospital that he’s in, and he’s dead.” said Steeler. “Even if he does wake up, what chance do we have of getting there before tomorrow night and making sure that our camp wins the money. We have quite a reputation.” Suddenly, a van pulled up.

“I will.” said David. “I can tell, you three didn’t kill the guy.’ All three of us ran into the van.

“Start the car!” yelled Zipline. Suddenly, two cops came out.

“Come out with your hands up!” they said.

“Sorry.’ I replied. “We’re very innocent. And it’s a van, Zipline.” David immediately took off. Let me tell you, it didn’t take a short amount of time to reach the hospital. David took a major scenic route. In fact, we spent the night sleeping at a gas station and painted ou van black, so the cops wouldn’t recognize us. David has a red van to have people stop to look at it when he goes by. In the morning, we bought some food for breakfast. It tasted like heaven because of the food I’d been eating for the last four days. Finally, we arrived at the hospital. It was not fun. A cop spotted us.

“Hey you!” he said. “Get back in your jail.

“RUN!” said David. “Run for your lives!” The cop chased us. We grabbed a map of the hospital and followed the direction for his room. When we made it there, we went in and locked the door.

“Barricade all of the doors and windows.” said Steeler. “I’ll find Christopher and revive him with a shot.”

“Where did you get the shot” asked Zipline.

“Found it at the crime scene.” Steeler said. We barricaded all the doors while Steeler looked under the covers of the bed.

“He’s not there!” said Steeler. “You led us to the wrong spot!” The cops banged on the door.

“No I didn’t.” I said. “There is a duct leading to the dying room, which he’s in. We’ll wake him up from there.” I pointed at the duct. I opened it, and all four of us climbed into it. we closed it seconds before the cops burst in. I locked it too. We climbed down a few floors and ended up in the dying room. I opened the duct and we ran over to Christopher.

“On one, two, three, NOW!” yelled Steeler. He injected the shot into Chris and woke him up from a dreamless sleep, though he was in pain.

“Need to defeat Mr. Beasley and get him arrested for this.” said Christopher.

“Could you explain it in a full sentence this time?” asked Jake.

“Fine.’ He replied. “Jake, you need to stop Mr. Beasley, for causing my possible death. he is a cruel man.

“That was what you were going to say to me?” I asked. “Yes! I knew it! We have proof that we’re not behind your injury. And you’re alive!”

“Don’t mean to be such a Debbie day downer or anything, but who’s going to rescue us now?” asked Steeler.

“I will.” said a mysterious voice. “That would be me.” He walked across the tiled floor and arrived at Chris.

“Who are you?” he asked.

“I,” he replied. “Am your long lost father.” Chris’s eyes shot open. He had been told that his father had been killed in a car crash many years ago. His father piloted a chopper for a living (and still does, even at his old age).

“I can rescue you 4 and take you someplace far away.” he said.

“That’d be great, but we need to go to the Campetition to save your son’s camp and pay for his injury.

“Fine.” he said. “It’s an hour away, but I can manage it. We’ve got to go right now.’

All of us jumped through the window and into the helicopter. Our battle was about to begin

 

 

Chapter 10: This is it!

 

Some time passed.

“Okay.” I said. “Drop the three of us on the night field so we can get the flag. make it be in the middle. David and you can wait in the audience.” In 15 minutes, we were half a mile over what looked like a battlefield.

“Drop the ladder down now.” said Zipline. He dropped in down, and we climbed down it and jumped onto the battlefield looking Capture the Football game.

“Okay.” I said. “We are going to get the football and bring it back to our side. Steeler tagged a few intruders.

“And let that be a lesson to you!” he said.

“Maybe we should just try to have fun and show camp spirit.” said Zipline. Steeler was already running to get the flag.

“I think we should do the same.” I said.

“Fine.” he replied. “I’ll catch up with you in a minute. someone’s trying to steal the flag.” Then, I came face to face with Girl.

“Oh hey.” I said. “How’s it going?”

“I’m calling the cops!” she yelled. “You’re here to hurt us aren’t you.”

“No I didn’t kill him.” I replied. “In fact, they’re stealing the pin.” She turned around and tagged the guy, but I was gone. I eventually caught up with Steeler, but not before being spotted by 100 kids.

“GET HIM NOW!” said one of them. I thought I had seen his face before. I ran away from the m just in time, but it required me run up a ramp to get away from them. I met Steeler over by a tree.

“Look!” he yelled. “Gale’s in trouble! We have to rescue him before he gets destroyed!” I agreed with him, but also knew this. Gale is always the one who always wants to be a hero and get a girlfriend. I knew he  was trying to save Millie, but he now was about to die. I ran over to him, but then I saw, that it was not some kid who was  trying to get him it was…

“Mr. Beasley wait!” said Steeler. “Aren’t kids the only ones who can play? And please don’t use a staff to tag him.”

“Actually, Camp Directors are allowed to play!” he said. “Maybe you should bring yours. Oh, you don’t have one!” He went back to destroying Gale. Just  then, I grabbed him and rolled both of us out of the way. He missed.

“You’re back!” said Gale. “You three didn’t try to kill my father did you?”

“Come back here you little…” he yelled. Mr. Beasley put his staff in the ground again. In this time Zipline flew to the prison to rescue the captives using a pair of glider wings he found in the helicopter.

“You’re free to go people.”  he said.

“You didn’t kill our camp director did you.” he said.

“Of course not.’ He replied, “ This camp is love and life.”  He tried to fly away, but when he did, a  kid shot his wings.

“That’s not fair.” said Steeler.

“C’mon Zipline.’ said Gale. “I wanted to rescue Millie.”

“We’ll that’s sweet of you.” we heard her saying.

“Let’s get the pin and outta here!” I said. We ran to get it.

“Oh no you don’t!’ yelled Beasley. He threw the staff at my leg. I knew it still didn’t count as an out, luckily, but  my leg killed me. I had to drag myself. right before I was tagged, I painfully jumped to my feet I ducked my head to avoid a kids hand.

“Help!” I yelled. Zipline and Yoko ran over to me and picked me up to my feet. They dragged me back.

“I knew you to didn’t kill Gale’s father.” said Yoko.

“Gale’s dad is alive.” replied Zipline. Gale grabbed the pin and dodged like 5 hands in a row. In capture the football, you could throw the pin to get it back to your side. Steeler knew too.

“Throw it here!” said Steeler. Gale threw it and Steeler caught it. Steeler ran a few yards, and  then threw it to Girl, who sneered at me. She ran 6 yards and threw it to Zipline, who caught it. My leg was feeling better now so I let go.

“Somebody stop this madness right now!” yelled Beasley. Zipline threw it to Hags. Hags threw it to Tom. Tom threw it to Pom. The other team had trouble, but got smart.

“Everyone get someone to run after!” said one of them. This forced us to move. Yoko caught it. He  ran 9 yards and threw it but was pushed to the ground which made his throw go off.

Mr. Beasley laughed. Then, the words echoed in my head. “Jake, you must  defeat Mr. Beasley.” Of course. He knew I could win this, he knew Steeler would wake him up. I stopped standing around and ran up the same ramp I did before. This time, I jumped in front of the pin, about  to touch the ground, and did something remarkable. I kicked it up in the air, keeping it off of the ground with my still injured leg, which hurt a lot more. I fell to the ground and closed my eyes  tightly because of the throbbing pain I was in. I still heard what was going on. The ball was flying onto my side with Millie all set to catch it  and be the hero. Gale was putting it all on her. His dad, his camp, and his future. It was all in Millie’s hands. I opened my eyes. Millie had her hands out and…… she …… missed!

“That was all you could do!?” asked  Mr. Beasley. He was evilly happy and angry. He loaded  my friends up into the team jail mat.

“ATTACK!” he yelled again, causing crows to fly away. Campers busted onto our side like a swarm of bees.

“Get that flag!” he yelled. We were hopeless.

“It still going!” said one of our campers. It indeed looked like it. Now, it  was on Gabby. The pin was 5 inches away from the ground. Campers attacked her, but out of all odds …… she …… caught the pin.

“We did it!” yelled Gale. “We WON!” We Were cheering like crazy. It was done.

“NOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!” yelled Mr. Beasley. Suddenly, the cops came in.

“Nobody move!” one yelled. I suddenly jumped up and ran.

“You’re all right kid.” he said. “All three of you are off of the hook. Of course, I’m ignoring the fact that you started a mass breakout, but we caught em all.”

“The cops grabbed Mr. Beasley and dragged him away.

“What are you doing?” he said. “Take your hands off me this minute. I hate you dumb kids. You will pay for this!” The crowd booed him out of the ring, and we won the money.

“I can’t believe it!” said Millie. “I knew Gabby would have my back!” The good thing was,since badguy was arrested, we owed nothing to their awful, awful, awful, awful camp. We spent the money on the well being of Gale’s father. Dad came.

“Are you okay?” asked.

“Never better.” I said. “Just one thing. can we do this camp like every summer?”

“Yes!” he said.

“Yes!” I screamed in joy.

Epilouge:

 

So, my summer turned out pretty great. I made a lot of friends and David had a good time at the camp reception. Gale’s dad recovered within a couple of weeks. Millie ended up hanging out with Gale a lot more. Finally, when I went to my list at the end of summer, I didn’t follow my ideal list, but I completed a greater one. One I could say, I had a perfect summer with them. They were like family to me.

 

 

The Worst Sister Ever!

Chapter 1 just getting started

 

My name is Zayel Smith. I’m ten years old. I live in New York. I go to Hunter. I have four siblings, two brothers and two sisters. Their names are Kennan, Alex, Hannah, and Daniella.  Here are some adjectives about my siblings: Hannah: mean and bossy.  Kennan: thinker and chatter box.  Daniella: dumb and weird.  Alex: Focused and humorous.I’m  the youngest. Some of us do not get along. I like Alex the best because we’re almost twins and he’s very funny.Hannah is the worst because she’s the oldest. She’s bossy and annoying. For an example, one time Hannah stepped on my ankle because I stepped on hers by ACCIDENT and then she stepped on mine ON PURPOSE. Sometimes she kicks me out of the room when she’s watching a show that she thinks is too inappropriate for me.

When summer comes, I want to go to sleepaway camp because I want to get away from most of my siblings. I like my mom and dad because they don’t get mad at me that much. But it’s fall, and that means it’s three more seasons to go! The good thing about fall though is that I get to do things that my older sister doesn’t get to do, like tennis practice, and Hannah is old enough to walk home by herself, so I get time away from her. Like we go to a different school. I like my school because I really like math and they give a lot of math and their food/lunch is very good. But lots of the time the math is really easy. At school I have a lot of friends. My best friends are Isabella and Caroline. We get along pretty well. It’s different from my older sister because they’re not bossy to me and they don’t do things that my sister would do. Isabella is forgiving and Caroline shares.

Right now I’m having dinner and so far it’s been pretty good, and we are eating burritos. And we haven’t been fighting.

“Today we found out all the mistakes we made on our math test, and I got two wrong,” I said.

“That’s horrible,” said Hannah. That made me feel mad.

“But you got four wrong and that’s even worse,” I said.

Then Hannah said, “But our math is harder and I’m only four years older.”

Mom said, “Let’s talk about something else.”

But we didn’t listen to Mom.

Mom said it again then Hannah had an idea and then went silent because she was thinking if she would do her idea or not.Her idea was…

 

 

Chapter 2 bad for Zayel and good for Hannah

 

Hannah went in my room when I was in my bed (i’m the youngest so I go to bed first.)Looked around my room and then saw what she was looking for. She tiptoed to my desk and gently picked up my homework and ripped it! Then she tiptoed/ran out of my room. Then she pretended to be like she didn’t do anything. Then she did some of her own homework and then went to the living room to watch a show. The next morning, I woke up and started getting dressed. I was walking to get out of my room and I realized that I saw strips of paper on the ground. Then I looked on the back of some of the strips and it looked like it had some typing on it and some handwriting on it. I didn’t realize that it was my homework until it was the afternoon. I looked around in my desk and I couldn’t find it and I asked my mom and dad to help me find it, then they couldn’t find it. Then I asked my sister where it was and she said, “I don’t know where it is but I went in your room to check on you.” Then I still didn’t realize that it was my homework and Hannah had ripped it up. When the school day was over, I came home with a bad attitude because that was the homework that I had finished and it was due today. Then I went to the living room and my dad and my mom were on the living room couch. I told them about my day and they almost forgot to tell me where my homework went. They said that it’s on the floor because I don’t think you realized it because the scraps of paper on the floor are the ripped up homework.

“But I don’t know who ripped it up.”

“Ask all your siblings if they know who ripped it up and tell them to be honest with us or else they will get punished.”

I went to all the rooms and looked for all my siblings. I found three of them but I couldn’t find the last one. I found Alex and I found Kennan and Daniella. Alex was in his room. He said he didn’t do it. Kennan was in the living room watching TV and he said, “I didn’t do it!” Daniella was in her room. I asked her, “Did you rip up my homework?” Daniella said, “I don’t know what you’re talking about.” I believed her because she usually tells the truth.

I still didn’t know who it was. I counted on my fingers and said out loud, “Kennan, Alex, and Daniella but not Hannah. Now I think it might be Hannah.”

 

chapter 3 getting closer to the end of the homework mystery

 

I looked around the whole entire house and couldn’t find Hannah, but then I finally found her. And I said, “Did you rip my homework?”

And she said, “I’m too old to do things like that.”
Then I walked away and then I remembered that the adjectives that I think of all my siblings are Daniella – dumb and weird, Kennan – a thinker and chatter box, Alex – focused and humorous, and Hannah… mean and bossy. I went back to my mom and dad and told her that I think it’s Hannah.

“I think you should go talk to her,” I said to my parents.

“we’ll go talk to all your siblings, just in case,” they said.

“I think that’s a good idea,” I said.

Then I went to my room and looked in my desk. I found more ripped up homework. I looked around my room and I found more. Then I went back to my parents and said, “I found even more ripped up paper.Can you come look?”

Then my parents came to my room and said, “That sure is a lot of ripped up homework. I think I should go talk to your siblings right now.”

My parents went to Kennan. He said, “No.” They went to Alex. He said no too. Then they went to Daniella and she said “No.” Then they went to Hannah and Hannah said, “I thought that was regular paper.”

“Shut up, Hannah!” said her dad.

“YOU shut up!” said her mom to her dad.

My parents kept on arguing. In that time Hannah snuck out of her room and went outside to play. I didn’t see.

I tried to stop my parents from arguing. “You’re supposed to argue with Hannah, not each other!”

Then I pushed my parents aside. When I did it I punched my parents by mistake! I ran into my room and went under the covers of my bed. I heard my parents’ footsteps coming closer and closer to my room. Then I finally heard the door open and I heard my name being called.

 

 

Chapter 4 Actually getting Hannah in trouble

My parents came into my room and they picked up the blanket that I was hiding under and threw it across the room. I was surprised that they didn’t get me in trouble. Instead, they were actually looking for Hannah.

They asked me, “Do you know where Hannah is?”

I said, “No. I didn’t see.”

So my parents went in all of the rooms and hiding spots. As many places as they could possible find. But they didn’t find Hannah. Then they started to get a little bit worried. Then they went downstairs and asked the doorman to see if he saw Hannah come out.

“Yes, I did see Hannah,” he said. “I’m pretty sure that she went northeast, which is the way to the park.”

In the meantime, I called Caroline to see if she had the homework and she could email to me. Caroline came over and brought me a few pieces of the homework that I needed.

Caroline said, “I’m sorry I didn’t bring all the homework that you needed but I brought a few pieces.”

So they both called Isabella and Isabella came over and brought her the rest of the homework that I needed.

I said thanks to both of my friends for bringing me my homework.

Downstairs my parents went northeast, knowing that was the way to the park. Then they found Hannah. Hannah was running and playing soccer with her friends. My parents ran onto the field that they were playing on and grabbed Hannah out of the game.

“Let go! I’ll walk by myself if you let go!” Hannah screamed at the top of her lungs.

They let go and as she started to walk by herself she went back to her game. My parents ran back and grabbed her again and didn’t let go this time. Then Hannah felt embarrassed because her friends saw.

Hannah said, “I’ll say sorry if I can go back to my game.”

“No,” said my parents. “First apologize to Zayel. And we might let you play with your friends.”

Back at the house, I was playing with my friends, and I heard a knock on the door. I got out of the room and went to the door and said, “Who is it?”

My parents replied, “Your parents.”

I opened the door and there were my parents and Hannah. Hannah apologized and then tried to go back downstairs to the park. But my parents didn’t let her go. They grabbed her arm. In the meantime, I was making a sign for her room that said “Hannah Keep Out!” But this entire scene took a long time.

Hannah’s behavior got better and better as the year went by. She stayed out of my way. For example, Hannah always left my room when I was ready to do my homework. I ended up getting a good grade in math class.

And now it’s finally summer! Now I get to go to sleepaway camp! But I might miss my family a little bit. Even Hannah.

 

The End

 

 

The Dead Walk Again

“We got another fever, Taylor!” the doctor said. I sighed. The Fever had been going on for a while. So many people had gotten it. No one knew how it started. We couldn’t stop it. Many people had gone insane because of it. There was so much grieving and sadness. Everybody thinks it’s the apocalypse because no disease has ever been so bad. The Fever was worse than the Spanish Flu. It spread worldwide.

The Fever is so dangerous, because it burns you out. It takes a long time to burn you out, but then it wakes you up and turns you insane. We think that The Fever has such a high temperature that it actually burns a little tissue of your brain and makes you insane. I had been treating it for three years.

After work, I headed back home. I walked because my house was only three blocks away from the hospital. As I was walking home, I saw an explosion. Then, everything went black.

I woke up in the hospital. My right leg was in a cast. I saw a pair of crutches next to the bed. I called out for my nurse, but no one came out. I stumbled out of bed. Turns out my leg was not broken. It had healed over time. I wondered how long I had been asleep. It takes a long time for broken legs to heal. I was very thirsty and hungry. I felt sick. Like I had a cold or a cough. My hair was probably sticking out and tangled. I slipped on the clothes next to my bed. There was a glass of water on the table and I drank the whole thing in one gulp. After I took off the cast, I walked outside my room. For some reason my door was boarded. I kicked it open. Were they trying to kill me?

I regretted coming out of my hospital room. One of the patients of The Fever was out running about. He turned towards me. His mouth was foaming and his skin was decayed. Part of his mouth was ripped. His leg was partially eaten which made him limp, but he was still sprinting towards me.

“Calm down, yes I know you’re hurt but sprinting will only make it worse,” I said, trying to calm him down, but it only took me a moment to notice that he would not listen. I ran back inside my hospital room and locked the door. I climbed out of the window. Too bad I was on the third floor. My hands were the only thing that was keeping me up. I was scared. I didn’t want to fall. The ground seemed 300 feet away. I climbed carefully down the side of the hospital and when I got back on the ground I collapsed. I was so relieved to be on the ground. I saw that the other side of the hospital was destroyed. I went home to find out that the explosion had also taken my house.

I knocked on my neighbor’s door but nobody answered. I called my younger sister but she didn’t answer either. I decided to drive to my parent’s house in Atlanta. They were the closest family to my home in Roswell. It took an hour to get there. It would usually take a long time but no one was on the road.

Then I saw a piece of paper on the floor, I picked it up and read it aloud.

The explosion has blown up half the hospital, the infected got out and infected most of the people in Georgia. I’ve been hiding in my basement for days now and I haven’t seen anybody pass by my house. If anybody is reading this I will be out of the state by now and on my way to California. I need to get out of Georgia before the infected go to other states and to different countries. My wife and kids have been infected. I don’t have anything else to do but run. I have a house in Atlanta I might stop by there for a while,” the page said. I stuffed the piece of paper in my pocket. I figured I might meet the person who wrote it later on.

Once I pulled up into my parent’s driveway, I took their key from under the mat and opened the door. No one was home. I searched the tiny house, but my parents were nowhere to be found. I tried calling them. I tried texting them. They wouldn’t respond to anything. I decided to stay there until they got back.

After a few days, my parents still hadn’t gotten back. I went to the 99 cent store for groceries but it appeared that no one was there. Someone was actually there. It was the cashier, who had The Fever too. I ran to the back of the store. Someone had the idea of hiding there too. It was a man named David. He said that he had been hiding back there looking for food. When he found out the zombie……

“Wait, zombie?” I asked.

“Yes, zombie. Have you not figured that out yet? This has been going on for a month. Ever since part of the hospital exploded in Roswell and the infected got out, there have been zombies all over,” said David.

“Wait, a month?!” I asked.

“Yes, a month! Were you not listening? Do you want me to explain it to you again?” asked David impatiently.

“No, sorry. It’s just that I woke up in the hospital after the explosion,” I said.

“What? Well then, you would’ve been bit by now,” said David.

“Well I woke up in the hospital and the door was boarded,” I said. The cashier was banging on the door and trying to get in! David handed me a hammer.

“Hold this,” he said. David kicked open the door which made the zombie stumble back. “Give it to me, NOW!” I handed it to him and he took it and hit the cashier in the head with the hammer. It went through his skull and into his brains. We walked out of the back. We locked the store’s doors and helped ourselves to all the food in the store.

“Are you sure it’s not stealing?” I asked.

“It’s not stealing if there’s no government around to stop us,” David said while chewing on a Snickers bar.

“One cop is probably around to stop us,” I said.

“Trust me, they’re doing the same thing as us,” he said.  He finished the last bite of the candy bar. He threw the wrapper into the bin. He was acting very calm. But I was about to cry.

“What was your life like before the virus spread? Did you have a family? Kids?” I asked.

“Are you always this nosy? That’s my question for you,” David replied. “What’s your name anyways?”

“Taylor,” I said. I grabbed all the water in the refrigerator section and dumped it in a shopping cart.

“You have to keep your inventory light, because you’ll have to carry it all,” he said staring at the water in my cart.

“If you wanted some you could’ve just said so,” I said while handing him a pack of water. When I got home David followed me.

“You have to move around or else the zombies will catch your scent,” he said.

“Well I’ll take that chance,” I said. “You can stay over if you want I have an extra bed.”

Once nightfall came, David said to turn off all the lights because the zombies are attracted to light. I wondered when parents were going to

get home. Will they ever get back? Are they dead? Falling asleep to thoughts like this will make you toss and turn. I scolded myself. Eventually, I fell asleep.

I woke up to David shaking me. “We have to get out of here! Come on! The zombies got in!” he yelled.

“They’re not zombies!” I argued.

“We have no time for this! We need to grab as many supplies that we can and get out!” he pushed. David dragged me out of bed and started getting supplies. I packed some clothes and put on fresh clothes. I rushed into the kitchen and stuffed food and water in my suitcase. I rushed out of the kitchen and while I was running out the door I saw my parents. They had been infected.

I almost started crying when we got out of the door, but we needed to get out of there. I got into my car and rushed out of there. How could I concentrate on driving when I just figured out the reason why my parents weren’t coming home?

David drove to a nearby motel which didn’t look so clean. The signs were falling down. One of the numbers above the doors fell off. We picked a random key on the wall in the lobby. We went to the room that the key fit in. When we went inside we noticed that someone else had the same idea. David pulled out his hammer and walked up to the zombie.

“I’m not a zombie!” the not-zombie yelled.

“What?!” questioned David.

“Oh my god it’s a kid!” I exclaimed.

“Hey! I’m turning 18 in September!” he said.

“What are you doing all alone in this motel?” I asked.

“Oh, I ran away before the apocalypse. What great timing isn’t it?” he said.

“Your parents must be worried sick!” I said.

“No they hate me,”he shrugged.

“I’m sure they don’t,” I said. “What’s your name?” I said.

“Ned Hickery,” he said shyly.

“Ned Hickery? The kid genius?” I asked.

“This is Taylor, I’m David,” said David.

“Wow, you really need to clean this room up,” I said. I looked around the room. Posters covered every corner of the room. Dirty clothes were strewn across the room. Gadgets of all kind were covering the small desk. A suitcase was laid on the bed, it was overflowing. The room smelled like dirty socks and I could hear a movie playing from the computer.

“Yeah, you should see my room at home,” Ned said. Then, out of the corner of my eye I saw a suitcase under the bed. I bent down and pulled it out.

“What’s this for?” I asked.

“That is none of your business,” Ned said and he pulled the suitcase out of my arms. I was suspicious. Why would he be hiding a suitcase under the bed? Why didn’t he let me open the suitcase? I was so engrossed in my questions I didn’t notice David pulling my arm.

“Come on Taylor, there’s nothing here let’s just pick another motel room,” David said.

“Wait! Don’t you want to see what’s in the suitcase?” he asked.

“I thought you didn’t want us to see what’s in the suitcase,”I said.

“I just didn’t want you to open it, it sets off an alarm if the fingerprints don’t match mine,” he said. He opened the case. It had one vial with a clear liquid inside.

“I’ve been working on a cure for Zombitis,” he said.

“It’s originally called The Fever,” I argued.

“You’ve been working on the cure? Why haven’t you used it yet?” David asked.

“Oh I did, it just made the zombie look human, it still had the virus,” Ned said. “I need you to take me to the lab in Monroe, then I can finish the cure.”

“We’ll help you,” said David. “As long as you cure my kid and wife first.” No wonder he doesn’t want to talk about his family, I thought.

“Okay,” Ned said. “Let’s get on the road now!” We packed some food and stuffed it in the trunk.

“You’re almost 18. Can’t you drive?” I asked.

“My car broke down at a gas station, I had to walk to the motel,” he said.

“Then you drive,” said David. He stopped the car and Ned went up, turned on the navigation system and started the car. After thirty minutes we were only a few minutes away from Monroe. Since there were no more cars on the road we could go as fast as we wanted. Then, suddenly, the car jerked.

“We hit something!” I exclaimed. Ned stopped the car and I jumped out. I ran to the back of the car. We had run over a zombie. I heard a groan coming from behind me. It was a zombie! I screamed. Ned and David rushed out of the car. They saw what it was. David grabbed his hammer and smashed the zombie’s head. The zombie fell to the ground and I recognized that it was my younger sister.

“That was my younger sister,” I stammered.

“Really? Oh wow, we could’ve-”

“Shut up, Ned,” said David.

Once we got inside the lab we noticed that the place was totally zombie-infested. David locked up some zombies in a huge display case in the lab. Ned took samples from the infected and locked ourselves in a tiny room with vials and ingredients. While Ned worked on the cure, me and David sat down and talked.

“Hey, are you okay?” David asked.

“Yeah, I just don’t know what to do,”I said.

“Well, sometimes it’s just good to run,” David said. David said something familiar. He wanted his wife and kid to be cured. What he just said. I pulled out the piece of paper that I found on the street.

“What’s that?”asked David. He ripped the piece of paper out of my hand. “Hey, that’s my writing, I wrote that! You found the piece of paper?”

“Yeah, I guess so-”

“Guys! I got it!” Ned exclaimed.

“Ned, be careful before you-” Ned slipped and the vial in his hands had been broken. “Slip.”

“Ned! What have you done! You finished the cure but then you broke it!” David yelled. “Do you remember how to do it?”

“No, but I do have a copy of the ingredients at home!” Ned said.

“And where is that?” I asked.

“California,” he said.

“Oh great, this always happens when somebody finishes what I need,” complained David.

“David? Do you know how to fly a plane?” I asked.

“Yes, but I’m a little rusty,” said David.

“I don’t care, let’s get that cure!” I exclaimed.

David drove us to a nearby airport in Monroe. We boarded a plane, after David checked to see if there was enough fuel.

“I usually fly jets,” he said.

“Just fly the plane,” I ushered. All of us sat in first class.

“I’ve never sat in first class,” I said.

“I have,”said Ned.

“Of course you have, you’re the most smartest kid in America,”I said. Ned helped himself to all the snacks in the cart. I drank some water just to keep myself occupied. Ned almost scared me to death when he had a spaz attack, I thought he caught The Fever!

Finally the plane took off and while it did Ned was going to the restroom. “Ned! Get into your seat! We’re taking off!” I yelled. Ned scrambled out of the restroom and sat in the seat next to me.

After a while, I decided to get some food. Ned ate all the snacks for the first class passengers so I headed to the back of the plane to grab a snack. As I headed to the back of the plane I noticed that there was a sound coming from the back of the plane.

“Ned! I think someone’s at the back of the plane. Grab David’s hammer,” I said. Ned handed me the hammer and followed me to the back of the plane. When we got there I opened the bathroom, no one was there. I opened the curtain the back, no one was there.

“Well I guess no zombie is here then,”I said. I turned around and a zombie was right in front of my face! I took out the hammer and smashed the zombie’s head. I kicked it aside.

“I’m not that hungry anymore,”I said. We got back into our seats. The ride wasn’t smooth, David wasn’t kidding when he said he was a little rusty. When the plane landed we noticed that the plane was a little dented and that he must’ve not have landed well.

“David, you destroyed the plane,” I said.

“Yeah, I haven’t flown in a few years,”he said .

“We can see that,” I said. Me and Ned started chuckling. “We saw a zombie in the back of the plane.”

“Wow, quick change of the subject,” he joked. “Are you okay?”

“Yeah, it was just really surprising,” I said.

“It nearly bit Taylor,” said Ned.

“Yeah and I wouldn’t brag about it,” I said.

“Why wouldn’t you? It would be a very interesting experience,” said Ned. “We have the cure anyway.”

“No we’re here to get the cure right?”I said.

“Oh I already have the list right here, I grabbed it while you guys were talking, you really need to shorten your conversations,” Ned said.

“Wait what? You were here with us the whole time,”I said.

“No I wasn’t, I used my hologram,” he said. He showed us the disk in his hand.

“How did you? Holograms haven’t been made yet!” I exclaimed.

“Oh yes they have, I’ve spent my whole childhood trying to make holograms and I succeeded,” he said.

“Well then, let’s go back into the plane, but maybe a different one this time,” I said.

When we got back to the lab we noticed that the zombies in the display case were gone.

“Where did they go?”I asked.

“I have no id-” A zombie had jumped onto David’s neck and bit him!

“Ned! Work on that cure!” I commanded. I smashed the zombie’s head with a hammer.

“Put me in the display case! Now!” David yelled.

“Okay,”I said obediently. I dragged him into the display case and locked the door. Then he started shaking. It looked like he was having a seizure but much worse. His skin turned pale and his eyes turned bloodshot. He started banging on the glass and I looked away. I couldn’t stand to see my family or friends a zombie. He started shrieking, and I heard banging all around us, we were surrounded by zombies.

“Hurry up Ned!” I commanded.

“Here,” He handed me a vial of clear liquid. “Don’t use it yet, we need to go to a machine in the lab that will copy the cure.

“This is going to be hard,” I said. “Grab a weapon Ned, we’re going to get to that machine the hard way,”I said.

“Are you sure about this?”Ned asked.

“Yes,” I said.

“Because there is a tunnel right there that leads to the machine,” he said.

“Well that tunnel is still infested with zombies,” I said.

“Oh well, here goes,” said Ned. I kicked the door open and all the zombies turned around and started sprinting towards us. We aimed for their heads. When all the zombies were dead we ran to the machine and copied the cure.

“C’mon, let’s go back to the lab,”I said. Then when we got across the tunnel we noticed that the zombies had gotten in.

“Let’s take a bowl of blood on put the cure inside,”Ned said.

“Where are we going to get the blood?”I asked.

“Did you not see the floor?” Ned questioned. So Ned and I put the blood on the floor and poured it into a bowl. And then we poured the cure into the bowl as well. Then we laid the bowl out for the zombies. They slurped it and turn back human.

“Eew! What’s that smell?”

“Why am I slurping blood!”

“Mommy! Where are you? I wanna go home!”

Me and Ned walked into the room and noticed that David got out of his display case and was cured!

“David!” I exclaimed.

“Taylor! We did it! You guys did it!”

“How did it feel being a zombie? What did you think?” Ned bombarded  him with questions.

“I actually didn’t feel anything at all. It’s like waking up from a dreamless sleep,” he said.

So after that we cured all the people in Georgia we worked on other states. David got his kid and wife back and Ned reunited with his parents.

Me, I rebuilt my home. My parents were cured and pretty much every person was cured except the people who were killed. So in the end everything turned back to normal and we all went back home safe and sound. For now…….

THE END

Dawn of the Flamingo

Chapter I

1ntr0duct10n

Hello, my name is Chris. I am a 38-year-old writer and I am a tall American with brown hair and brown eyes. My works are published and popular. This is my story.

It all started when I walked back home from lunch. There was no home to go back to. It was stolen. Everything around the home was normal: no pulled wires, no signs of trucks, no signs anything had been destroyed. In fact, it looked exactly the same. But the most strange thing was that all of my possessions were in a pile, sorted neatly. A nice criminal, never heard of that.

Later that day I put up signs with pictures of my home in case anybody saw it. That night I slept in a hotel. Luckily, insurance would pay for the home, but it was sort of weird.

The police came over to look for evidence, but they found nothing but a pink feather. Why would anybody want to take my home, you ask? Well, because it’s the nicest home on the block. It even got featured in a magazine. It had everything somebody would want: a nice pool, a tennis court… All stolen! They could get replaced, but my dog couldn’t! She was just a babe, smaller than a little dog, but she was stolen when they stole the house.

Now I had to put up double the amount of wanted signs!

At least the milkman came, poor man, always delivering milk while doing several other jobs. He delivered milk to our family since we were kids, and he never said a single word to my parents. He was a tall man who just lost his kids so he always looked glum back then, and he is still glum right now. The only reason I think he makes money is because I pay him a little bit extra.

He called to ask where my house was, and I responded, “Stolen.” He then asked what hotel I was in, and I said which one I was in. A minute later he delivered the day’s milk. I paid him and drank the milk while I wrote my stories. I then fell asleep to awake another day.

Chapter 2

Dawn Of The Flamingo

Thinking back on that day, the most suspicious thing was a custom pickup truck. It was obviously custom and had the slogan, “Custom Trucks.” Well, that doesn’t matter, I guess. I was driving to get some coffee, when I saw one of the same trucks about 10 cars over. I tried to get to it, but the traffic was ghastly and seemed like it didn’t want me to see the license plate. But I did see; it was “2cool4sch00l.”

I then did my normal work. Maybe if I could find that license plate, I could find my house. I asked the police chief if I could look at the database of license plates, and he said, “Yes.” I looked through them and I found one that was what I was looking for, and it was located on my street! I found the house where it was. The car was there but the house wasn’t, and then I thought for a moment of another crime. I waited to see if somebody came to the car, and several people did carrying wood and cement. The person who was obviously the leader was wearing a flamingo-like dress. I remembered to make a mental image of it. I then proceeded to call the police chief and the flamingo’s phone rang. He picked up his phone and said, “Hello, Joker speaking.”

I said “Who’s Joker?”

He answered, “What goods you want? Materials, help, revenge?”

“No, it just seemed I had this number.”

“Oh, I just borrowed it for a while.”

“From who?”

“None of your business.”

*beep*

He hung up, and I looked at the news on my phone: “Local Police Chief Brutally Injured in Attack from Unknown Suspect”

Chapter 3

At least he was ok, but I thought this Joker character had done it. He had his phone, and he was most definitely a bad guy. I went to look around the neighborhood since he probably lived there.

I walked and almost immediately I heard dogs barking. I followed the noise, and it lead me to a huge house painted in an assortment of colors.

I looked through one of the windows to see Joker, but it was not Joker. It was somebody else. It was the second-in-command. I saw him and realized that he would be the chief in no time.

But then before that, I was handcuffed by two police officers. I said “I was just looking at the house!”

Then the first police officer said, “Thats what they all say.”

“But I am telling the truth!”

“Really I doubt that, you even have the air of a criminal.”

“Oh come on, do I wear a ski mask?!”

“No, but–”

“You just want to arrest me because he told you to, I’m not doing anything wrong!”

“Here, we will let you go if you don’t tell anybody about this conversation.”

I didn’t go to jail, but I realized how corrupt the police were going to be if I didn’t get Joker out of the position of chief. I then asked the in-term chief to let me look at his call logs. After about two hours I found what I was looking for. It was a call saying, “Let’s go steal some houses.” Joker was saying this to an unknown person.

Just then Joker walked into the room. “Delete the records or that pretty little face will be not so pretty anymore,” he said.

So I got rid of the police files, and he left the room. But I had the number of the person he called, so I called it.

“Hello, Family Deconstruction speaking.”

“Hey, it’s Joker. I forgot how to get to your house.”

“Oh, no problem, it’s just 12345 Nowita Place.”

“Ok, coming.”

*beep*

I went to the house, but before I got to the lawn, I felt stunned for a second. I doubled over. I looked at my leg and blood was oozing out. I then started feeling a little bit woozy then finally fainted.

Chapter 4

I woke up. I was really cold, and my leg was bandaged. I was in somebody’s cellar; there were cases of wine and they looked incredibly old, but other than that the room was sweaty and smelled like dead things.

I tried to leave the cellar only to find the door locked.

I took a crowbar that was lying there and tried to open it. The crowbar got stuck in the wood and wouldn’t come out. Then after a little bit more searching I found a relatively new axe and smashed the door open. The crowbar then dropped, smashed my foot, and left it almost broken.

I crept around, trying to find the frontdoor of the house nearby. It was a cold, windless night so I could be easily heard.

“Hello, my nosey little friend,” said Joker.

I didn’t make any noise. I saw blood coming from underneath the front door. I opened the door and Joker was there. So was a dead man.

The body was bloody and several wounds were stabbed onto it. Joker stood there with a bloody knife.

Instantly, Joker lunged at me. I caught his arm and held it firmly. We struggled for a little bit. My arm was sweaty and he was going to kill me.

I shoved Joker away and quickly rolled and found a pistol on the ground. I pointed it at Joker’s head. I started sweating. It felt like we were there for an hour.

I shot and his body lurched backwards in pain. Then he coughed up some blood and fainted.

I then saw if he had some keys and he did. I ran and ran for what seemed like an hour, trying every car on the street. I finally found his car and plugged in the engine. It took a few minutes but eventually it woke up. Then I drove, but I didn’t know where I was, so I called the chief.

*Ring*

*Ring*

“Hello, Police Chief Daniels.”

“The Second just murdered a man, 1384 Windton Ave.”

“What?! I will be there immediately!”

*beep*

Afterword

Its been two years since the incident and I have mostly forgotten it.

I walked to the cafe, ordered some coffee and left. I was walking back home from work, when I strolled through my front door, and my dog greeted me. I got a blanket and watched T.V. I switched on the news for awhile. It was just some political nonsense when suddenly some breaking news came on: “Jail Break at Local Jail. High Class Inmates Escape.”  I thought, ‘Oh that’s horrible. I better lock my doors and close my windows.’ Sort of reminded me of Joker, but nah that couldn’t be.

I went to get some ice cream. They had rounded up most of the prisoners and so the neighborhood felt somewhat safe. I ate the ice cream and went back home. Yes my home.

I sat down and fell asleep. I woke up to a text: “I’m coming.”  I got another text: “That face won’t be so pretty when I’m done with it. Say goodbye.” I looked at the news, and I had a feeling I knew what had happened. “Local Police Station Blown Up, Police Chief Dies.” Then, suddenly, I heard a knock on the door.

THE END

Life in a Closet

I have a secret. A really important secret. Nobody can know. My secret? I live in a closet. A small closet, with a door in the back. Behind that door hides a world full of adventures. And that world, that’s where I live. In a closet.

Once you realize you have a Closet World accessible closet, a robot is created to make it look like you’re not a crazy teenager locked in a closet.

Other people live there, too. My best friend’s name is Hannah. She lives in a closet in Arizona, but she practically lives in Closet World.

Anyway, today Hannah asked me if I wanted to come back to Arizona with her. Apparently she found her closet key and is able to swap places with her robot so it looks like I’m a friend from school. Hannah’s one of those techy kids who can figure everything out.

When we get to her house, she holds onto me and swaps places with her robot, who’s right outside her house. Hannah walks to her front door with my arm still cuffed in her hand. Her front door is freshly painted a soft shade of purple, with a gold and shiny doorknob.

“It’s real gold,” she informs me as I stare in awe. “You can feel it.” I slowly tap the smooth gold. It feels just like Hannah’s shiny light brown hair with natural blonde highlights that’s currently in a tight bun. She’s been growing it out since she was 10, and that means 6 years worth of hair! When she sits, her hair is down to her knees. My hair is nothing compared to hers, 8 inches of dark brown hair, faded blue dip dye at the bottom, leaving the bottoms bleached.

“You can open it.” Hannah says, interrupting my thoughts. I reach for the shiny knob, then I turn it, but it stops me.

“Locked.” I say. I feel the knob as she pulls out her keys from her bag.

“Sorry.” She says. She unlocks the door and we go inside.  We go down a long hallway painted paper-white that has drawings of trees that have labels for grades K-10th.

“I draw one every year,” Hannah tells me as she sees my amazement towards the pictures. “I enter them in the Arizona National Tree Drawing Contest. I’ve won every year.”

“There’s a-” I pause while making my voice all goofy “-tree drawing contest?” There’s a brief moment of silence, then we burst out in laughter. Our friendship just works that way.

“What’s all the racket down there?” an older woman’s voice says from the top of the staircase. Hannah leads me to the top, revealing her mother. Her mom has straight blonde hair that goes a bit past her shoulders. Her eyes are icy blue with anger. Her nose is long and narrow with a point at the end. Her freckless face is pale as the white painted walls.

“Mom, this is a friend from school,” Hannah says as if it was true. She’s such a great actress.

“What’s your name, dear?” Hannah’s mom asks politely. I don’t know what to say. Should I reveal my identity to this stranger I just met, or should I lie?

“Um, I’m Violet,” I say. Hannah glares at me and I shrug.

“But everyone calls her Ivy, right Ivy?” Hannah steps in. I nod even though it isn’t true. My real name is Ivy. It’s not that everyone called me that as a nickname, it’s just that it’s my real name.

“Flowers,” Hannah’s mom says. “Pretty. So, Ivy, where are you from?” I stop myself from saying Closet World, and I take a minute to remember where I’m from.

“California,” I say. “Yeah. In Hollywood, actually.” Hannah’s mom’s smile fades into a frown.

“Oh, what’s the story with that?” she asks.

“Um, I was raised by 2 movie stars… ?” Hannah’s mom doesn’t seem too flattered. She just fakes a smile at me.

“Well, you two can go to Hannah’s room. Oh, and by the way, my name is Mona.” Hannah’s mom, who now has a name, says.

Hannah leads me down a long hallway with lots of doors. We reach one door that has lots of signs. “NO TRESPASSING!” one says. “Property of Hannah B. Middleton” says another. My eyes light up to a handmade one that reads, “Yep, keep going down the hallway. Nothing to see here.” I laugh out loud at the humor of it.

We go into the room painted purple with blue and green lines trailing across the room, overlapping at parts, but also going in opposite lengths of the room. What I like about the lines are that they always are united, even if blue’s at the floor and green’s at the ceiling. I look over behind me and see a flower painted on the wall, every other petal blue, and the ones in between green. I see that the two lines generated from that flower. It’s almost like they’re siblings, two lines coming from the same flower, like two children coming from the same parents.

“So…” Hannah says. “What do you want to do?” I scan the room, looking for games I want to play or books I want to read. Then I look through the open door and see the long hallway.

“A tour of your house would be cool.” I say casually. But in my mind I’m begging, just thinking how cool it would be.

“That’d take HOURS.” Hannah says, exclaiming the hours.

“I’ve got all day.” I remind her. She thinks for a second then finally makes her decision.

“No,” I sigh and sit down on her bed. “We have to get back to Closet World by 9:00. We’re known there, people will start worrying.”

She’s right. Both of us were known for basically just being people. We always say hi to people (on the bus, on the streets, in the elevator, etc.).

“So…” Hannah says. “what do you think of Max?”

“Max?” I ask with disgust. Hannah nods. “No way.”

“What about Theo?”

“Not my type.”

“Ryan?”

“He’s creepy.”

“Will?”

“Socially awkward.”

“Bryan?”

“Doesn’t know I exist.”

“Austin?”

I pause at the sound of that name.

“Okay…” Hannah says. “Guess Austin’s the one.”

“No no no,” I say while stopping her from taking out her phone and calling him. “I paused because I was debating whether to barf or slap you. Austin. Ugh.” There’s an awkward moment of me staring at Hannah and Hannah staring at me for like 5 seconds, then she decides it ‘s about time to speak up.

“I can tell you like him.” her straight face turned to a smirk. I roll my eyes.

“I already told you. I hate him.”

“Sure you do.” She smirks.

“I don’t!” I throw a pillow at her. It had some kind of band on it.

“What’s…” I take a minute to read the front of it. “Glowing in the Day?” I squint while reading it.

“Oh, right…” Hannah says while snatching the pillow off the ground. “You’ve been trapped in a closet for 3 years. They’re a band, idiot.” She whacks me with the pillow.

“Well I’m sorry I’m not a techy nerd like you!” I whack her back.

“Well I don’t mean to rain on your parade, but I graduated college with a masters degree in technology. Oh, right, I’m sixteen. Wanna look at my Harvard acceptance letter from 5 YEARS AGO?” Suddenly I start sobbing uncontrollably. My best friend got into a great college when she was 11, and I dropped out of high school after 10th grade.

“What about those pictures up on the wall, the trees. Aren’t you supposed to be going to 11th grade in 2 months?”

“I skipped a bunch of grades,” she says softly while putting a hand on my shoulder. “After 10th, which was supposed to be 5th, I went straight to college.”

“You know what, I’ll just leave. I’m not a help in your life. This was all a mistake. Our friendship was a mistake. Bye.” I skim the room for her closet, then finally find it.

“Ivy,” I turn around. “Sorry. I know you’re still gonna leave me, but I just want you to know. I’m sorry.” I see real tears in Hannah’s eyes. For the first time in years, she cries real tears. Real, salty tears.

“I’m sorry too. Here’s this 20 dollar bill,” I pull out my last bit of money from my wallet. “You can have it. Though it won’t be much in your million dollar house.” I look around the room at all her expensive things.

“Ivy I didn’t think-”

“Keep it.” I say and then walk to the closet in the left corner farthest from the door. I slide open the door on the right side.

“Ivy,” Hannah says gently. I turn around. “Here’s the key,” she tosses me her key to the door in the back. “I won’t need it.” I wipe a tear from my left eye.

“Thanks for being a friend.” I say then walk to the closet. I see her creepy robot waving goodbye at me. I wave back only because I’m scared it’s gonna kill me.

I move some clothes out of the way and go to the door. I put the key in and twist. When I get through the tunnel, (which is much like the ones leading to airplanes) I see Hannah’s door, blending in with the purple polka dots and black background theme for today. Every day we have a theme, and everything in closet world just turns into the theme. Today the theme is rather dark, black with royal purple. My favorite theme was lilac and teal vertical stripes, mainly because those are my favorite colors. I look down at my skin. Black with white polka dots. In those 20 minutes I spent back on Earth, it was strange to have my olive colored skin back. To be different, and stand out. And my hair, it was brown again. With the bottoms bleached. My hair’s now black with the thick purple polka dots that cover the city from head to toe.

I decide to look behind Hannah’s door. See if there’s a connection to Earth. But there’s just a door. But now I need to find my way back to town, so I can be in my own house again. Not this storage closet with a bunch of doors. It’s not even a closet, just a narrow hallway with doors in the back. I decide to go all the way to the end of the hallway. Maybe I can make some sort of connection to Hannah. Maybe I can tell her I’m sorry for overreacting about the tiniest things. Maybe I can tell her that I really DO like Austin, and that I was just embarrassed. Maybe I can tell her that I want her to be my friend again.

I suddenly feel the need to sit down and start crying. What kind of person am I? Dumping my best friend because I was embarrassed? You overreact way too much, Ivy. A little voice in my head convinces you. I bet Hannah never wanted to be your friend in the first place. Another tells me. More voices with negative thoughts join in, increasing the speed and volume so that all I can hear is negative thoughts.

“STOP!!!” I scream at the top of my lungs. For once, they stop. I lay down on my right side. I hear a cracking noise, then remember the keys Hannah gave me. Well now, they’re broken. Thanks to me.

I wipe my eyes and get up to start my journey to the end of the hallway. I walk for minutes. Hours. I finally come across a door with the name, “Ivy Sinclair” imprinted on it. Out of anger, I rip the door out of the socket. My vision starts to go black. Then all at once, it vanishes.

 

 

Three Short Words

Before We Get Started

“Ready?” Aliyah Goldstein asked her co-worker, Dennis Root. They were partners on the designing job for Verizon, using Dennis’s big imagination and Aliyah’s artistic talent. They were the perfect team. But we must go back to deep, deep history.

On the first day of ninth grade, Dennis saw her baby-blue eyes and that hair, the brown beachy waves and the natural, blonde highlights, oh, how he loved her hair. Her olive-colored smooth skin along with her makeup-free face. Her best feature, in his opinion, was her clean language, but her soothing voice (it reminded him of honey) wouldn’t make sense any other way.

“Okay, let’s see,”  said the busy tech designing teacher, while looking down at his many paperworks. “First we’ll have… Aliyah Goldstein and Dennis Root?” the teacher looked up. “Stand up if it’s you.” The two nervous teens nervously stood up, unaware of what they would be in for. Let’s go into deeper history.

Aliyah was born on February 4, 1978. Her parents loved her with their whole hearts, but one day she heard something about some sort of car crash, and refused to hear more. Her father always wanted her to be an electrician, no matter what kind of electronic she was making. To this day, she still remembers her father’s exact words: “Grow up. Do something with your life. Become an electrician, for any kind of electronic.” It wasn’t the kind of, “Oh, grow up. Just go do something with your wasted life.” It was encouraging, and made her believe that even if they WERE dead, her father would still be proud.

Dennis was born on July 7, 1978. His parents are both 100% alive and healthy. His mother is a nutritionist and his father is a doctor, so he has no choice but to be healthy. His parents will make him. Still, at the age of 35 (as of April 2014), he lives with his parents. They want him to take on a profession other than designing cell phones, but — unlike Aliyah — he stuck to his profession. Now, back to ninth grade tech.

“Okay, Aliyah and Dennis will be partnered-up since they’re  both new. Everyone else, find last year’s partner.” From then on, it’s history. The two naturally clicked, and then got a job working for Verizon.

“As always,” Dennis replied. Their rule: improv. No scripts for who says what or anything like that. Improv.

“This,” Aliyah said while displaying the new phone model, “is the Veri Tech Smartphone-” she paused. “-slash  Hologram Mini-Tech. The device folds up so it can fit in somebody’s pocket. ” It went on, and at the end of the presentation they got a standing ovation for their presentation.

Dennis was happy about the ovation and noticed all the smiling faces, but what he didn’t notice was the CEO talking to Aliyah.

Chapter 1

That night, Dennis went home and was excited to tell his parents about the ovation. They were happy to hear, because the duo’s work didn’t really get used. Ever.

“Know that girl, Aliyah. She seems pretty nice. How’s the relationship going?” his father, or should I say, Dr. Root asked.

“Well, there isn’t much of a big relationship. We’re friends, just that,” Dennis confidently replied. Although, deep, deep down inside, he did have some feelings for Aliyah, he wasn’t going to admit that anytime soon.

“Aliyah seems nice. We should invite her over and get to know her. We’re sure she is a great designer,” his mother genuinely told him.

“Yeah, well the creativity is mainly my part, and the art is mainly her part,” Dennis was a bit ashamed that it was sort of  like that he was making the great ideas and she was just doing all the work.

“Well, it looks like it’s time for rest, Dennis,” Dr. Root let him know.

“Aw, but pa! It’s only 9:30!” Dennis complained like a 7-year-old. He hasn’t exactly grown out from childhood.

“We’re gonna have a big day tomorrow, and sleep is what we need.”

Dennis wasn’t going to argue, his parents would just win. He stumped into his room, not dropping the 7-year-old act. In fact, he basically was a 7-year-old. He had posters of super heros plastered on his walls and had a spiderman bed set. A superhero-loving 35-year-old (as of May 2014), that’s Dennis Root for ya.

***

“Please welcome our head designers, Aliyah Goldstein and Dennis Root.” The CEO presented the duo to the board of Verizon to present their new design. Aliyah basically presented the whole model, since Dennis was staring at her the whole time. She had the same 14 year old face: baby blue eyes, brown beachy waves with natural, blonde highlights, olive-colored skin, but now with some lip gloss and brown eyeliner, and a voice like honey.

At the end of their, er, Aliyah’s presentation, they got a standing ovation from the board members. Dennis was surprised that they were the head designers; none of their work had even gotten a single clap before this. But a standing ovation from the CEO, that was a big deal.

At the end of their 10:00 p.m.-6:00 a.m. shift, Aliyah spoke to Dennis about some very important business.

“There’s a job offering up for us, and even though they’re good and everything, it might not be exactly what we want, we’re a team, and we have to agree.”

“What’s the job?” Dennis asked.

“It’s in the building department; we build what other people design.”

“How much more money?” Dennis was all questions. Though, he didn’t care about money that much.

“They said they’ll get back to us on that.”

“How about we think about it for now.”

“Ok.” And there, then they both simply left.

That night at dinner, Dennis spoke to his parents. He explained every detail of it, them not knowing how much more money, and the building department, everything.

“Dennis, if it’s more money, then take it. Money is very important, and we don’t want to miss our chance of getting more.” Dr. Root was a very selfish man, and sometimes Dennis was ahamed they were related.

“Dad, not everything is about money. If we take it, we’re closing up a spot for the less fortunate to make money. And we’re pretty good designers.”

“Dennis, sweetie. Your father makes a point. Money is what we need right now, and we both made the mistake of early retirement, so please. Take it.” Mrs. Root just agreed with her husband.

“Why do we even bother asking their advice? My parents just want money, money money, that’s all they care about. What about what makes their son happy? What about helping others? But no, it’s just money,” Dennis spoke to himself, although his parents were listening closely. “Goodnight.” Dennis spoke directly to the selfish relatives of his who shall remain nameless. He left the conversation at a negative note and went towards his room.

“But Dennis, it’s only 9:30!” his father called after him. It really depended on the conversation that decided what happened at 9:30.

“Well that’s too bad!” Dennis yelled without turning around. He heard a loud bang on their old wood table. Dennis remembered what people said about his father when they were young: David bangs the table when he’s mad. Now that brightened up his day.

I stepped down the stairs to the restaurant. Of course, to meet Aliyah. We had been dating for five years now, and it was about time. I tried not to look like an amateur, dressed in my younger brother’s suit. At the age of 41, I don’t think I should stay forever alone. Besides, we were meant to be.

“Hi,” Aliyah shyly said. She was so cute like that. I pulled out one of the wood chairs for her to sit. I sat in my own chair, and we discussed the menu.

“I want the caviar,” I said to nobody in particular. I was paying. I wasn’t telling her what to get me.

“The bouillabaisse looks good,” she commented. After we were almost done eating our French cuisine (forgive me I didn’t take French), I decided to do what I’d be waiting for since the first day of ninth grade. I got down on one knee and-

“Aliyah Goldstein, will you marry me?” I let the words quickly slip out of my mouth. An awkward silence fell over our table for two.

“So… will you?” I asked again. She better say something.

“No.”  Her hushed tone was part of what was so heartbreaking.

“Aaaaaaaaaahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh!!!!!!!!!!!!!!” Dennis sat up in his bed, breathing very, very heavily.

“What the hell is going on up there?” he heard his father ask from downstairs.

“Sounds like Dennis had a nightmare,” his mother said. He heard her rush up the stairs to his room.

“Dennis sweetie, what happened?” Part of what he thought was so annoying about his mom was that she was so kind. Even though he liked kindness, it was too much for him to handle.

“Aliyah… said… no,” was all he managed to let out of his mouth. His mom did NOT need to get into his personal life. Even between all the heavy breathing, little miss smarty-pants was able to figure out what he was talking about. Exactly. You don’t want your mom to know that you woke up screaming because the love of your life said no to your proposal in a dream, now do you. Well, Dennis didn’t.

“Aw Dennis, it’s ok. Aliyah is a very beautiful, and awesome, and lovely, and way too out- of-your-league girl.”

“Well, dayum. Duh lady!” Dennis screamed.

“And she definitely doesn’t deserve a stupid little nerdy crybaby, take yourself for example.”

“Goddammit mom!” Dennis screamed, and before she could do anything, he ran out of the house.

Chapter 2

Dennis stormed out of the house, wishing for a bunch of things. In fact, he made a list:

Want to have…

-a better mom

-a better dad

-Aliyah

He couldn’t believe he wrote that. But, being Dennis Root, he continued the list.

-a dog

-a wedding by 40

-my own place 😉

He stopped there. He couldn’t think of anymore. Since he had nowhere to go, he decided to go home. His parents were probably worried sick about him. But then he thought, This might be worth the walk. And boy, he was right.

Walking about the streets of Hoboken, New Jersey, Dennis turned onto Washington. Ah, Washington. The original “main street” of Hoboken. But he wanted to go past Washington, to the river. He walked down to Pier A Park, a pier that wasn’t much of a park, that was Pier C’s job. Walking towards the water, he looked at Sinatra Park, and then at New York City, where he worked. Aliyah lived there, in her own apartment with her dog. Oh, how Dennis loved her dog, Lucy.

Lucy was a 2 year old pug that was going to be killed after her 6 months of puppyhood. Thankfully, Aliyah rescued her just in time, along with her 6 brothers and 3 sisters and her parents. After 6 months of that, on the young dogs’ birthdays, she let them go to their forever owners, only keeping Lucy.

Dennis walked south, so he could see Aliyah’s city better. He heard the clock strike midnight, and a bunch of people cheering. The Empire State Building was red, white, and blue. Of course, Dennis thought. It’s the Fourth of July, 2014. That’s 3 days until my birthday. He decided to start walking to fifth street so he could go on to Jefferson and go home. But somewhere along Washington Street he ran into a blue-eyed someone named Aliyah.

“Aliyah,” Dennis said.

“Dennis,” Aliyah said. “this is a pleasant surprise. Fourth of July in Hoboken. Wow. Just, wow.”

“We put on a real show, us Jerseyans,” Dennis joked, and to his surprise, Aliyah laughed. Her neck crouched over and she pulled her hair out of her face while rising back to her full height.

“The view of the skyline is just amazing. Should we go get a better look?” Aliyah asked.

“Sure, follow my lead.” They walked back downtown, and Dennis was a bit disappointed that he couldn’t stop at 7-Eleven or Subway, but that was okay because he was going to be coming home on the same path.

They walked back right in front of the pier. Dennis walked into the park, but then he realized Aliyah wasn’t following him. He turned around and found Aliyah with her arms crossed. Dennis raised his eyebrows and stuck his head out as if he were asking why she wasn’t coming.

“Why can’t we go over there?” Aliyah pointed to Pier C Park. “It seems funner. Yes, everybody knows, funner isn’t a word, but it’s funner to say funner even though funner isn’t a word.”

“Fine,” Dennis grumbled while walking over to Pier C. “That doesn’t mean there’s a better view or anything, all it has is a playground and it’s a bit more West, er, uh. North, er, uh…” He wanted to impress Aliyah with his geography skills, except for the fact that he didn’t really have any…

“North,” Aliyah corrected, realizing he was having a bit of trouble.

“Yeah… right… that…” Dennis awkwardly said. “So,” he said after an awkward silence. “My birthday’s in 3 days.”

“And mine’s in 8 months,” Aliyah sighed. “36 years and almost a half with still no response from my parents,” Aliyah sighed and continued walking. Dennis ran up to her to catch up to her speedy walking.

“Aliyah,” Dennis sighed as she turned her left foot to face him while picking her right one up. She planted her right foot onto the hard concrete. “They’re alive. It’s guaranteed. Trust me.”

“No it’s not, Dennis. None of us know that.”

“Al-”

“They left me 27 years ago!” Aliyah screamed. “Do you know how hard that was? Living on my own at a young age was the most stressful part of my life, Dennis. You’re lucky your parents are there for you. Oh, there’s one thing that was left out about the promotion,” Aliyah told him. They stopped walking.

“Okay, what is it?” Dennis asked confidently, knowing there still would be no way for him to take it.

“It’s in Canada.”

 

 

 

Chapter 3

“Canada!?” Dennis exclaimed. “Ok, now we definitely CAN’T take the promotion. Sorry, Aliyah.”  He started walking faster and faster and faster until Aliyah caught up right in front of the entrance to Pier C Park.

“Think about it,” Aliyah said while putting her right hand on his left shoulder, causing him to turn around. “We’re both in our mid-30s, single, and we don’t have enough money. Think about it, Dennis. We could have a future in Canada. Living in New York City is a bit… much. Plus, I’m all alone. You’re with your parents.” And that’s what the forming tears of loneliness in Dennis’s eyes were for. He paused for a minute waiting for a good reply. Then it hit him.

“Then I’ll feel thankful for being one of the 50,00 cramped into a square mile.” Was all he managed to say with a broken voice. And just like that, he walked in the other direction to go back to his house.

***

When Dennis arrived at home, his parents were asleep, so he could go straight up to his room and go to sleep. But there was only one problem with that: he wasn’t tired. He looked around to find his green iPhone 5c (it came with the job), but it was nowhere to be seen.

Great. Dennis thought. Just great. It’s 1AM, I’m fully awake, and now my stupid phone is missing. He kicked his twin-sized bed and his phone came out from in between the mattress and the frame. He picked it up and layed down on his bed. He opened Wipeout and started playing until, well, Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz…

“Hello I can’t really read this it’s really small but I guess I sorta can read it but like not really, I mean, it’s small but I’m not old yet so I can read it how about you?” squeaked a tiny little mouse on a bright green field. “I really need to have normal dreams,” Dennis said as he scratched his head.

***

“Aaaaaaahhhhh!” Dennis screamed as he woke up. He rolled off of his bed and thumped on his head. “Ugh,” he said shortly after, he felt the large bump on his forehead. Then the little mouse from his strange dream came back to him. He pictured her little gray face with her blue eyes and big ears until he realized: the mouse was Aliyah. Her soft face, and those beautiful, sparkling, blue eyes. Though her voice wasn’t as squeaky as a mouse, Dennis could still feel a bit of resemblance between both their voices. Like how she pronounced syrup, sort of taking the y away and leaving it sounding like “surup.” And although the mouse never squeaked out the word syrup, Dennis could tell that she’d pronounce it the Aliyah way. He was certain.

“I have to do something about this,” Dennis spoke to himself while rolling out of bed. “I have to get Aliyah before she goes off to Canada.” But somewhere in his confused mind, a voice doubted him. Why would you even think Aliyah would take you? You’re a 6 and she’s a 10. Just forget it.  Dennis thought about those 2 last sentences. The longer he thought about it, the more true it felt.

“I’m a 6, she’s a 10. Forget it.” He repeated that over and over again, and then he started to have some fun with it.

“I’m a 6, she’s a 10, she’s so fit, I’m insecure, but she’s comin’ back for more. How did we end up here, in the first place, ya said ya had your…” By the time he got to that, Dennis realized he was singing End Up Here by 5 Seconds of Summer.

At once, he stopped, and heard his phone playing it. After about a second, he sang along with it again. About 6 seconds later, the music stopped. He walked over to his phone and clicked the home button. There was one notification that read: Missed Call Aliyah Goldstein

“She called me! She needs a call back!” So Dennis went and called Aliyah. She picked up immediately.

“Hello?” Aliyah asked.

“Hey, um, there was a call with your name, just wanted to check in and see if everything’s okay.”

“Yeah, everything’s great. Though your voice sounds very tired, or maybe it’s just the phone.”

“Um, let’s just say my bed has been recently slept in by someone named Me.”

“Really, there’s a person named Me? Just kidding. But seriously, check the time! It’s noon!”

“So, what was the missed call supposed to be?”

“Oh, it was probably a butt-dial. Sorry.” Aliyah hung up before Dennis could respond. But how would she butt-dial him? He was Dennis Root. Contacts went by last name. R was pretty close to Z.

But then Dennis realized that there were other loners in the world. People who had only a few contacts. And as cool as Aliyah seemed, he had to accept it: Aliyah was a loner.

Chapter 4

Since the 4th of July was a Friday in 2014, the next time Dennis saw Aliyah was on Monday, July 7th. The 36th turning of Dennis. He got a cake and The Board Of Decision (yes, they capitalized the o in “of.” That’s how serious Verizon workers are) came to celebrate.

Dennis walked over to Aliyah as the red velvet 3 layered cake was being passed out. As soon as the two made eye contact, Aliyah rushed out. Dennis followed her. They went down the block, took a left,  Jay Walked through every road, and then they were at the pier. Pier 26, more specifically.

“What’s all this? It’s my birthday, we’re eating my favorite cake.”

“Dennis,” Aliyah weakly spoke. “My boat’s here. It’s taking me to Canada. You know, because they say a boat instead of about. Goodbye.” Dennis chuckled then turned around to look at, well, something besides his dream girl leaving. When he turned around the boat was far away.

“Aliyah, wait!” he called. But it was too late. The boat had already left. “I love you.”

 

The Explosion of the World

Henry had to sneak into the store and break into it at night. They had to prepare, to make weapons, like spears and guns. They were all busy working into the middle of the night until they broke in. They went to the orphanage and they started building these things in secret so that way the guardian didn’t see them. They were molding and making metal and very busy melting it, getting supplies to melt it. All of this stuff. They took the radiators out and put them under and started them working again.

They were all super tired by the middle of the night.

Henry said, “It looks like we’ll have to break-in tomorrow night until the fourth day comes.”

His friends said, “Yes, we must do that. We are too tired.”

“We can all sleep in my bed since we’re in my room,” said Henry.

 

The next morning, somebody starts to scream because they find out that there are guns in Henry’s room. They think that a robber broke in and that the boys killed the robber. So, the guardian ran out of the room and went to go tell the headmaster of the orphanage. While she was away at the office, they picked up their guns and spears and thought there was a robber in the house. The boys heard screams coming from the office. They ran to the office and the headmaster said, “What are you doing up? You know it’s only 6:30am. You know you’re only supposed to stay in the rooms until 7am!” He was super surprised, his mouth was dropped wide open because they had guns and spears. And the headmaster said, “You naughty boys, did you make them?”

“Yes,” They all said.

“Give them to me.”

“No! After we break into the computer store, we’re going to leave earth.”

“Ha ha ha, you’re not going anywhere until you turn 18. You crazy boys! Get back into your rooms, right now, before we start picking you up and throwing you in bed! Now leave!” yelled the headmaster.  “Now!” So, they left Henry’s room through the window, and the guardian made them throw them out the window. Then, when the guardian left, the boys bent and stretched to get through the window. They got their weapons.

“Why do we have to wait until then tonight to rob the the computer store? It’s still closed,” said Start.

They all agreed because it was only 6:40 AM and it was still dark out because it was winter. It was snowing, and they had white snow coats, so no one would notice them. They painted their weapons white, so they would look like snow falling, too.

They had to use the A train to get to the computer store. They used their white-painted hammers to bash into the windows. The alarm did not sound because it was too wet and the snow got into the alarm. The electric circuits went out.

The security guard said, “Halt! Who goes there?”

“It is us. The new security guards!” said the boys.

“Well, while you’re the new security guard, fix that window!”  The security guard yelled. “A robber must have broken in last night.”

“Do we have to?” said the boys.

“Yes you have to,” said the security guard. So they picked up the blow torches from the security guard’s room which were there to fix the window if somebody broke in and started working.

After they fixed the window, John said, “Let’s just steal the computer when the security guard’s not looking.”

And Henry said sarcastically, “That’s a great idea. We’re here to rob the store, not fix a window!”

Then they took the computer off the shelf and out the door so they didn’t have to fix the window again and took the train back to the orphanage. And then they looked up how to build a rocket ship to get away from Earth. They took their big pot out to make the metal for the rocket ship. They took out the radiators once again and started melting their guns to turn them into flat pieces of metal and that was enough metal to build the engine, but they still needed more metal. They snuck into people’s rooms to steal their radiators to melt more metal. And then they got to work hammering the metal, bending it into shape, making the pipes for the rocket ship, and putting in the leftover radiators so that it wouldn’t get too cold. They went to the water room and they took a bucket with them and they took out scoops of water to make steam to heat up the rocket ship, and then they went to go get some paint at the corner ‘cause there was a paint shop there. They bought red and white paint with the money they took with them that they had earned doing chores. Then they took some wood and ashes to make the fire and it became morning and they were allowed to come out of their rooms, but they had already come out of their rooms 33 times that night and they were so tired because they had been roaming around all night that they went to sleep. The maid woke them up an hour later and said, “Time to get up, lazy bones! You know you have to go scoop some water. Your buckets are right on your night tables.” The rocket ship was safely hidden in the closet. They had drilled holes in the ceiling so that it could extend out to the roof. And then they went out and got their buckets and did all of their chores. They got $10.  They said, “We’d better go to a different place, now, because it’s the 3rd day already.

“Ok, 3…2…1…blast  off!” said the boys.

As they were flying away, they felt the rocket ship shake because the Earth had blown up. It shook the whole universe. They knew that Earth was gone. The boys weren’t sad about the people, but they were sad that their homeland was gone and they had to go to a different land.

So, they blasted off to Planet OOsiki BOOsiki. They met some aliens. They landed on the most scary place on OOsiki BOOsiki. There was so much fog, and aliens saying, “We need your braaainnss,” like alien zombies. They looked like human zombies except that they looked like a Hershey Kiss, and they’re made of chocolate like a Hershey Kiss. They said, “We are the rottenest chocolate in the worrrldd!!”

Start says, “I have a great idea! RUN!” So they start running as fast as they can with the rotten chocolate right behind them. They found a little cave and they hid in it. The rotten chocolate ran right past them.

They said, “Phew! That was close. What’s that hole over there?” They went to check it out and they accidentally fell into it! That’s where all the good, yummy, delicious chocolate was.

“Let’s eat,” said John.

And they dove right in. But then, the general said, “What are you doing in that ice cream house?”

And then the general said, “Not another mistake or else you’re gonna go to the dungeon.”

And they said, ‘We can’t go to the dungeon, we’re only 17 years old!”

“No, you’re going to the dungeon. Right now, actually, ‘cause you just complained to the general. Guards, take them away!”

Then, they were locked up in the dungeon. They didn’t really care because the walls were made of chocolate. So, they said, “Eh, we’ve got plenty supplies of chocolate. I don’t know why they call it the dungeon because the candy cane bars look so delicious!”

Little did they know, that the aliens were actually alive there and they would be baked if they tried to bite into one of the walls. The aliens that live there are made of that wall, so they were looking at the boys every single second. John was about to bite into the dungeon, but Henry stopped him and said, “These walls look like they’re trying to look down at us. Do not eat them, no, no, no!” Henry saw a pair of eyes on the ceiling.

“At night we will chomp through the candy canes. We can eat those because they are just stabilizers,” said Henry.

It was getting darker and darker, until finally it was night. The boys hadn’t slept for 33 hours and they were feeling tired and gloomy, but they still said they needed to escape. They chopped into the candy cane bars and they began to escape, but then the guard came. Then they said, “Attack! Eat the guard!”

And Henry said, “We should wipe this place clean and we’ll make it safe for us to live on! We’ll eat every single alien on this planet, including this general. Three, two, one, attack this place!” said Henry and John and then they  tried to attack, but they failed and got sent back to the  dungeon with their rocket. They had a saw in their rocket.  And John said, “these  Ooskee Boosceeins  are stupid.” Start and Henry agreed and said, “We should cut a hole in the top of this dungeon.” Then John said, “You know that’s a bad idea, you know all the rotten chocolate is up there. We need to make weapons out of the candy cane bars if we want to go up there.” The reason they didn’t get sent back to their other dungeon was because it had a loose candy cane. This dungeon didn’t have any hershey kiss things that had ovens looking down at them.

“Okay,” Henry said. “But we don’t have anything to make the weapons.”

John said, “Henry’s right. We don’t have anything to make the weapons with.”

And all the boys agreed. They said, “Let’s make fire, we can burn bars in there.”

And then John said, “We have enough candy cane bars that we can start a fire with them.”

“Okay,” said Henry. “But, we need to build the fire circle. We’ll make a fire circle out of dirt.”

They said, “But, we have to choose somebody to be the fire tender.”

John said, ‘I’ll be the fire tender.”

“Let’s get this fire started!” they said.

They took away the candy bars and rubbed them together until they made a fire and then they took chunks of candy cane bars, about ten or twenty in it, and then they melted it and they had good spears. And John put in another chunk of candy cane and they went to their rocket. They opened the door to their rocket and they blasted off the planet Ooski Booski. They killed all the rotten chocolate and they were out of Ooski Booski.

They were in the middle of space, where they didn’t know where anything was. Their water supply was low. They needed to find another planet fast. Their food supply was freezing.

John said, “What do we do? We don’t have any food or water! We should use the radar.”

They used the radar to look for a planet. They plugged it in and turned on the switch that makes it spin super fast and send vibrations out to find planets. There was a vibration right away. They found a planet, one mile away.  They went to the planet. It was called Hazzumidoom. There was a sign that said, ‘Welcome to Hazzumidoom.’

And they went all the way to the middle of Hazzumidoom until John said, “This planet looks deserted. Does it have another hole like Ooski Booski? I hope not.”

It was cloudy and foggy and there were no people to be seen except for them. Nothing to be seen.

“Now how are we supposed to find food and water? It’s time we took out the super secret supply of food and water. I know we shouldn’t use it, but we have to use it now, we don’t have any food and water.                        ”

But then, they were walking all the way to the middle and they accidentally fell down a hole.

“Ahhhh!” they all screamed.

And then they fell down to the real planet of Hazzumidoom. It looked like it had so much food and water.

They said, “This is the perfect place! Better than Ooski Booski!”

There were red trees and milk streams. There were honey puddles and water bottle trees.

They said, “This is the most perfect ever, perfect, perfect, perfect place in the whole world.”

“Well, much better than Ooski Booski,” John said.

They found a town, a village, that looked very weird. It was in the middle of the forest and there was only a stone house.

There was a person standing outside in the middle of the woods.

All of the boys walked over to him and said, “How are you doing? What’s your name?”

He said, “My name is Mooshi.”

He was an alien that looked human. They knew he was an alien because he was from three galaxies away.

He said, “Welcome. Come in. Have a drink.” His voice sounded like a person that had just choked on a duck. “You shall be my pets.”

John said, “Okay. Um, we don’t want a drink.” He turned to Start and Henry.                           “Anybody have good ideas?”

Start said, “RUNNNN!!!”

They ran and ran until they found the best supply of everything they needed. The guy just let them run. They took some mangoes that were growing on a tree nearby, and then they went back to their rocket.

 

Chapter 2: Searching for the World

“I think we should really take out the supplies and the secret food,” said John. “But we don’t know the password. The only person who knows it is the headmaster because it’s the heating code to make the heat go.” The boys stole the headmaster’s lock to his office door and made this secret supply cabinet.

Next at the rocket, they found another person looking at it. The person was peering through the window. The boys were freaked out.

“Ahh, help me, save me!” They thought it was the same alien, but it wasn’t.

“Maybe we should blast off,” said John.

“No,” said Henry. “We’re not going anywhere until we get everything that we need.”

The person knocked on the rocketship, and John said, “Maybe we should blast off into the hole.”

Henry agreed. They went to the hole of Hazzumidoom. They went back up to the hole where they went last time. But, this time it had a sign that said, “Hole of Hazzumidoom.”

“How did that sign get there?” They said.

“Maybe it was that person we saw!” John said. “Let’s just go in the hole anyway.” They went back down because there were no food and supplies on the upper level, so they had to go back down, and when they got back down the hole, they decided to go far away from the house with that evil person alien. Now, they arrived at a pond with a duck. The duck could eat them in one little slice. It had sharp teeth. It had laser eyes. It was chopping down a tree with his eyes.

They got out of the rocket and dodged the laser eyes. There was a golden beak behind the duck. The golden beak would do any wish they wanted. They read about it in a book. Then, the duck tried to bite them. It shot out its razor teeth, still attached to the gum. The boys went behind the tree to hide.

John said, “That was very weird.”

“I agree, that was so weird,” said Henry.

Then, the duck was sitting peacefully in the pond.

“We should get that golden beak. One of us can distract the duck in the pond and the other can get the golden beak,” said Henry. “Two of us will be on one side, and Start will be distracting the duck because he’s a very fast runner.”

“No way, no how, I’m not going even near that duck!” said Start.

“You’re doing it or else I’ll throw you into the pond with duck,” said Henry, mad at Start.

Scared, Start said, “Okay.”

So, Start went right over to the duck and said, “Hey Duck, here I am, bet you can’t catch me!”

It glared its eyes at Start and ran after him. Start said, “Come on, you’re too old to play the game ‘Try and Eat the Human’, you waddley old duck!”

By now, it was so angry, it didn’t use its gum technique, it ran after him and tried to use its laser eyes at him.

The two boys stuck around the pond and went in the water and got the beak, and sneakily made their first wish.

“I want that duck to be gone.” And it was gone forever.

Start got safely back to the boys. But then, the golden beak disappeared. They didn’t notice the writing that said, “If you make the duck disappear, the beak will disappear with it. It will wither away to dust!”

“Oh my gosh, this is horrible! I wanted a wish that I could be king of Hazzumidoom!” John said. He was going crazy.

“That’s not important right now. What’s important is that we go lie and down and find some supplies before night,” Henry said.

They had to relax, they sat in the shade of palm tree, sweaty.

John said, “Hmm, it’s been a long time since we’ve been away from earth. I wonder what happened to that spicy korean food that we used to eat Saturday night.”

“Yeah, I wonder what ever happened to the movies we used to watch,” said Henry, sadly.

“I sure miss the video games!” Start said.

They all sighed.

“And I miss the animals,” Start said, as they ate a mango.

They stood up, and Henry said, “We should maybe get a fire going, it’s almost night.”

They made the fire. They cut down a tree with what was left of their saw, and they sat by the fire.

“Are there any animals on their planet? I haven’t had meat in so long,” said John.

Henry volunteered to go hunting. The other two started getting pails of water and getting fruit. When Henry came back, he had a sheep in his hand and said, “I found it over a hill. Let’s roast it.” Then, they all roasted it. They used the wool of the sheep and make beds and they slept all night.

 

Chapter 3: Exploding Every World

 

The next morning, they found something very particular. They found footprints on the ground and followed them all the way back to the stone house.

Henry gasped and said, “We can’t go back into this house again! We know it’s haunted by that creepy person who is standing right outside the door like last time.”

John said, “Maybe we should just sneak in the back and he’ll never know we were in and steal the supplies.”

Henry said, “We’ll have to put new supplies in so he doesn’t notice.”

John said, “Whatever, he’s never going to notice that we stole the supplies.”

They saw the person standing right outside the door. He didn’t notice them because they were hiding behind a tree. They took their hammer and broke in. They shattered glass of the window. It looked like a normal house but with lots more food! They took food supply, the guy’s bed, and they snuck off with it.

“Okay guys, I think it’s time to leave Hazzumidoom.” John said.

They went to the top of Hazzumidoom and went out!

 

They took the radar again, turned it on, and looked for another planet. They went to the planet called Razamkidam. But a cat alien stopped them with slime balls shooting at their rocket! It had an antenna and it was green with no hair. It was about the size of a sheep.

When they saw the cat, they were so surprised that they jumped out of their seats and fell on the floor!

“Get the missiles ready!” said John. “Get ready to fire in 3, 2, 1, fire!”

Then they saw a whole army of cats!

“Uh oh, we’re going to need a lot more stuff,” Henry said.

John said, “No we don’t. We have a lot of water bottles and cats are afraid of water!”

“We don’t know that. These are alien cats, not pussy cats!”

Henry gets so mad at John for always bragging about himself that Henry finally punches John.

John said, “Oh! So you’re being a smarty pants. You get back here and I’m going to punch you in the face again.”

“No you don’t!”

Start yelled, “Stop! You guys stop it now. You know there’s an army of alien cats trying to shoot slimeballs at us! Get… to… your… stations!”

Henry and John stopped fighting and went back to fighting the cats. They saw so many more cats. John decided to blow up the planet Razamkidam in midair. It blew up in a circle and asteroids came flying out.

“Oh no! We just made another asteroid field,” Henry yelled, mad at John for firing the missiles at the planet.

“Oh, somebody’s mad at me for firing missiles at a planet, you big idiot!”

“You are the one that’s stupid for exploding the planet and making the asteroid field!”

“Okay, that’s enough!” Start yelled. “You’re both getting thrown off this rocket!”

Henry and John both stopped fighting.

They steered their way out of the asteroids and the boys started fighting with each other again.

“Okay, if you’re going to be idiots, then get out of this rocket,” said Start.

“Oh? You want to join the fight?” Henry said. “You get out of the rocket, you fatty!”

“Maybe you’re wrong, Henry. And he’s good, you’re bad.” John said.

“You’re the worst one! You’re worse than him, idiot.”

“You think that you’re going to throw me out of the rocket?”

“You’re such a big idiot that you’re going to be thrown out of the rocket, and you’re so faaat,” said Henry in a mean voice and stuck out his tongue at John.

Start said, “You boys! You stop it now! Now! Now! Now! There’s another planet on the radar called Razamkikalagam. We’re going to see if it’s good. We need to stop fighting if we’re going to find another planet.”

When they see the planet Razamkikalagam, they see an army of happy people. They look like they’re smiling and that’s their worst and meanest faces, smiling. The boys try talking to them, but it doesn’t work.

The happy people say, “You will be killed!” The happy people wanted to kill the boys because the boys weren’t smiling which means they weren’t happy.

The happy people saw them, flew over to them and the boys said, “We’re going to take you down with our high-tech guns!”

They shoot the happy people and go onto the planet. The planet looks like a cherry with a stem and lots of red. Everybody on the planet is a cherry except for the happy people.

They talk to one of the cherry people, the wisest of the cherry people and the wise one said, “You can only turn into a cherry if you do not smile. You turn into a happy person if you do smile.”

“But there’s so many cherries and smiley people, I really think this is not the planet for us,” said John.

“Yup!” said Henry. “I think we should leave.” And they left the planet.

 

They found another planet in the shape of a donut! They landed on the planet, but all they saw for food was donuts. They saw the biggest donut tower in the world. It was 30,000 feet tall. One of the donut people welcomed them to Donut Land and said, “This is a place of donuts. All you can eat is donuts!” He was smiling.

John groaned. “Oh no, I can’t take all that sugar…”

Henry said, “We cannot last off these donuts. We have to get off this planet right now!

They blasted off. Then John said, “Maybe we should go back and see if they have some fruits and vegetables.” They got back on the planet and then they saw their little donut friend walking around the streets. He saw them and he recognized them at first sight. He was jumping up and down.

“Ooh! Welcome back!” he said. “Maybe you should have a donut, because that’s the only thing on the planet.”

Henry said, “We can stay at your house, but we’re not gonna eat any donuts.”

“Okay, fine, go ahead, leave, I don’t need you here anymore…” He was frowning and his hands were hanging below him. “Get off the planet…I guess I’ll just go to being alone again…”

Start said, “Maybe we should help him…”

And John said, “No.”

And Henry said, “No.”

They blasted off the planet. They found a new planet in the shape of Earth. It looked like Earth, it had things on it like Earth, and it was just like Earth.

Henry said, “Hey, I think we should stay on this planet.”

The people on the planet said, “That spaceship looks very weird with three boys that look seventeen.”

When the boys got off the spaceship, the people asked, “Where did you come from in that rocket?”

The boys said, “We’re from Earth!”

The people said, “You can’t be. This is Earth! We’re the biggest planet in the solar system.”

The boys gasped.

“Welcome to Earth,” said the people. “Since you are human, you are allowed to come on this planet.”

They stayed on the planet forever.

 

THE END

 

coming soon…

THE RETURN OF THE DRAGONS

 

Add Two Eggs and A Cup of Charming

Prologue

I’m Mandy Simon. I’m thirteen, I have brown hair, green eyes, I’m tall, I’m thin, shy, quiet, creative, calm, smart, and a witch.

What? You need me to repeat what I just said?

Oh. Okay.

I’m a witch.

I know it makes no sense, but it’s true. I have the power to bake a boy. All witches have one main power and a bunch of other little ones, and my main power is to bake a boy.

What? That doesn’t  make sense?

Fine, fine. I’ll explain it.

Thirteen years ago, I was born. As the daughter of a wizard and a poor baker, I became a witch. And because I’m boy crazy and a hopeless romantic, I have the power to create a male human through baking. Like, I can turn vinegar into bravery, and sugar into strength. Just tell me your ideal male human, and I’ll bake him! And don’t worry, I’ll do it great. I’ve been mixing up beaus and cooking up guys since I was three. So, sit back, relax, and let me create your perfect bachelor.

Just stop by my family’s Matchmaker Bakery and we’ll turn flour into falling in love!

And, you’ll get to hear about a crazy adventure I had a few months ago.

Or you could read this book.

But don’t tell my mom,  I’m writing this, I’m supposed to be making flyers right now.

(Evil Laugh).

 

Chapter 1.

Okay. First of all, you should know a little bit about my family. I’m the youngest of ten kids, for one. My siblings are Olivia, Talia, Tara, Fanny, Felicia, Sam, Sarah, Emily, and Nina. Olivia and Talia are twins, and Fanny, Felicia, Sam and Sarah are quadruplets. Emily and Nina are fraternal twins. I don’t understand WHY my parents were willing to have ten kids. Or why they had two sets of twins, a set of quadruplets, Tara, and me. And why did all my siblings end up having white blond hair and crystal blue eyes, just like my mom, while I have dark brown hair and green eyes like my dad, who by the way, ran off somewhere when I was two. So I have nine siblings, only one person to take care of us, no father, and no friends. Oh yeah, I forgot to mention I’m friendless ‘cause everyone at school thinks I’m a weirdo. My mom calls it quirky, but I know I’m just a weirdo. Good thing  me and my sisters got pulled out of school.

The only friend I have is Fanny. Of course, the rest of my siblings love me and are nice to me, but Fanny’s the only one who gets it. She’s the only one who realizes how hard it is to be the youngest of ten kids, to look nothing like them, to not have a father, and to be bullied and friendless. She also makes me happy and brings out the best in me. I’d say she’s the best sister ever, but I have eight others, so I can’t. Let me tell you about them. Olivia’s the brains. Her main power is having a brain twice the size of a normal human’s brain. She read War and Peace at three, and Pride and Prejudice at six. To kill a Mockingbird came at eight. She’s been doing physics and chemistry for as long as I could remember. She’s won awards and prizes and trophies for everything in academics. She could walk at six months. Her first word was “obstreperous. ” Honestly, Olivia’s smarter than Einstein. His IQ was 160, Olivia’s is 200. She is smart.

Now I’ll tell you about Talia. She’s the athlete. Her power is being good at sports. She does Track, Soccer, Basketball, Baseball, Swimming, Dance, Golf, Bowling, and Croquet. You name it, she does it. She’s Varsity in all of those sports and all her coaches say she could go to the Olympics now, if she wanted, even though she’s only fifteen. That girl is strong.

Now I’ll tell you about Tara. She’s the creative one.  Her power is the arts. She paints, acts, sings, dances and plays seven different instruments. She does concerts, plays, and art galleries all the time. Her voice is like angels, her dancing is incredible, her paintings are amazing, her acting is perfect, and when she plays her instruments, it’s like an orchestra. She’s so talented that I don’t know any person more talented than her. Honestly, I don’t.

Next is Fanny. She’s a comedian. Her main power is making people laugh. She does corny jokes, adult jokes, kid jokes, bad jokes, weird jokes, prop jokes, knock knock jokes, riddle jokes, you name it, she does it. She has a joke for every person she meets. Like our pediatrician. “Laughter is the best medicine!” she always says. She’s performed skits and stand-up comedy and anything that will make you laugh. With Fanny, nothing’s ‘not funny’. With Fanny, there’s always time for a joke.

Now you’ll hear about Felicia. Felicia is a psychologist. She’s really smart and wise, and she totally understands people. (That’s her main power, understanding people). And she will always listen if you’ve had a bad day.  And she knows lots of metaphors and exercises. She could be a therapist right now. No PhD needed.

Now it’s Sam’s turn. She’s an engineer. She can build clocks, mechanical toys, blenders, she can even fix a car. She’s got a gift with mechanical things. She could totally fix a car, if she wanted to. Her power is understanding how all these things work and being able to build them. She’s really smart.

Now here’s Sarah. She’s a designer. She can make shirts, bottoms, accessories, you name it she can make it. That’s her main power. Clothing design. Who’s next? Oh, yeah, Emily. She’s a baker. She’s the only one of the family who has more of a normal talent, right? Wrong. She can bake cookies in two seconds, cakes, brownies, and cupcakes in one, and honestly, her pastries are the best thing you’ve ever tasted. There’s nothing better than her cupcakes, and her cookies are heaven in my mouth. If you don’t want to believe me, then fine, but you’re the one missing out on her INCREDIBLE, AMAZING, STUPENDOUS, DELICIOUS HEAVENLY SWEETS!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!! Okay, I’m calm now.

Now I’ll tell you about Nina. Last but not least, Nina. She’s a copper. Out of all the weird talents, my sister knows about how to be a cop. She’s a genius at finding clues, a prodigy at seeing if people are speeding, and if you put one toe out of the line of the law, she’s got you. My sisters have straaaaaaaaaange powers. Okay. Now that I’ve told you about my sisters, I can get on with the stor-

Uh-oh. Gotta go. I’m supposed to have two hundred flyers for the bakery, and my mom’s really mad I was writing this book instead of making flyers. Gotta run!

Chapter 2.

Okay, now that I managed to get my mom off my back, I can keep writing. But I’m not sure what to write next, because I don’t exactly remember that well what happened at this time. Oh! I remember now! This is when the real fun began: I had just finished a long, hard day of baking boys, and I was exhausted. People had wanted all sorts of kind of guys, and the more you ask me to bake, the more tired I get. So at that time, I just wanted to flop on a bed and do nothing. But when I did flop on my bed, I realized something.

All the time, every day, people come into my family’s bakery and ask for their ideal man. I bake it for them, and they go off and live happily ever after. Meanwhile, I just work and work. But then I realized that I don’t ever think about the kind of guy I would like.

“Oh, wow,” I said to myself. “I can’t believe I’ve never realized this before.” So then I thought, well, what kind of guy would I like? “Well, he’d be tall. With dark brown hair and green eyes. He’d have freckles, too.” Then I thought some more. “He’d be funny, sweet, passionate, sensitive, and romantic.” Then I thought a little more. “He’d be kind and honest, too. He’d also be open-minded and understanding.” Then I thought one last time. “He would also be sympathetic and caring. And going out with him wouldn’t be awkward. And I would be able to tell him anything. I could always confide in him. And when I have a bad day, he’ll bring out my favorite movie, or give roses or chocolates. And most of all, he’d care about me and accept me, flaws and all.” Then, before I knew what was happening, I’d fallen asleep.

The next morning, I’d completely forgotten what I thought about the night before, so I just sleepily stumbled out of bed and pulled on some clothes. I brushed my teeth and my hair and went downstairs. Nina was sitting at a table, using her magnifying glass to look at something on the table. Olivia was at a booth, reading a book about advanced Physics. Emily was in the kitchen, taking out a tray of cookies from an oven with one hand while balancing a bowl of brownies on her head and taking out a tray of cupcakes with another hand out of another oven. Sarah was in a corner, working on our bakery’s uniform on a dress form. Talia was outside, kicking soccer balls. And Fanny was trying to tell a joke to our Yorkie, Cutesicle. (Sarah’s idea, not mine).

“Where are Tara, Felicia and Sam?” I asked my mom, who was sitting on a stool behind the counter in the kitchen.

“Oh, good morning, sweetie! Talia’s painting in her room. Felicia has a meeting with a client that has a fear of clowns. And Sam’s asleep. Why do you ask?”

I looked around at all my weird sisters using their crazy talents. “Oh, I was just curious.” Then, before I could go over to Emily and ask her for a brownie, the wind chime that plays when the door opens tinkled.

I turned around. A tall, brown haired, green eyed, freckle-faced boy walked in. I almost passed out. He walked toward me.

“Hi, I’m George. Are you Mandy?”

For a split second, my jaws seemed to be seared together with cement. “Y-yes,” I stuttered.

“Well, I was wondering if you would want to go out sometime.”

Fanny looked up and scanned George from head to toe. She raised an eyebrow and crawled behind the counter so he wouldn’t notice her. She popped up from behind the counter next to me.

“She’d love to go out sometime!” Fanny said. “Right Mandy?” Fanny said.

“Um-um-yeah,” I muttered.

George beamed. “Great! I’ll pick you up tomorrow at six. Will you be here?”

“Yeah, I’ll b-be here.”

“Awesome. See you soon.” Then he walked out of the shop.

Sarah, Nina, Olivia and Fanny all crowded around me. “What was that all about?” They said in unison.

“I don’t know! He just came out of nowhere.”

“You have any idea where he came from or how he knows your name?”

“No! He just-” I stopped.

“What?” Fanny said.

“Well, last night, after work, I just went up to my room and realized that I have the power to bake a boy, and I bake boys for other people, but never thought about  the kind of guy for me. So I thought of my perfect boyfriend and went to sleep. Then he just… showed up!”

“Mandy! When a fantastical sorceress born with the blessing of engineering a male human through pastries, that fantastical sorceress can never create a male of her own through the power of imagination, or the male she invented through imagination will be born out of magic and wonder!” (Of course, this was a comment from Olivia).

“WHAT?” We all said in unison.

Olivia sighed. “A witch that has the power to bake a boy can’t dream up her own or he’ll come to life. It’s a side effect of having a non-magic being for a parent.” Mom glared at Olivia. “I mean…a wonderful little quirk! Right, Mom?”

Mom shook her head and drove her attention back to me. “So…you just made up the perfect boyfriend for you and he just showed up and asked you on a date?”

I nodded.

“I do not understand magic,” my mom said, and walked away.

My sisters drove their attention to me again. “I can’t believe a guy asked you out! We have to help you pick an outfit! Oh my gosh, can I do your hair?”

“Well, if this is going to be a conversation about sexist and superficial face goop, I’m going to do some algebra problems.”

“I’m going to the highway to see if people are speeding,” Nina said.

“Well, I’m going to help Sarah help you get ready!” Fanny squealed.

So Fanny and Sarah steered me to where Sarah keeps her makeup and hair stuff. Fanny wanted to give me clown face paint in case George had a sense of humor, but Sarah wouldn’t let her. Sarah gave me purple eyeliner and curled my eyelashes with some eyelash curler thing and put on some blush, but I don’t know what affect any of that stuff have. (I might be boy crazy and a hopeless romantic, but that doesn’t mean I understand makeup!) Then they put three hundred different kinds of lip gloss on me for an hour until they decided that they liked the first one. After that you would’ve thought they would be done, but they had barely started. They spent nearly four hours trying different hairstyles on me before realizing they hated them all and that I should just wear my hair the way I wear it everyday. Then the actual important part: the clothes.

I went into my closet and emerged with a short, light green tank top and jeans. Sarah took them into her room and returned empty-handed.

“Where are my clothes?”

“Mandy, don’t tell me you seriously thought I would let you keep those? Oh my gosh, why do you think I hate you? Sweetie, relax, I burned those clothes. Literally burned them.”

I frowned at my sister. “Fine, what would you prefer, Miss Queen of Fashion?”

Sarah inspected my closet. “I think it’s time I show you my closet.”

I didn’t breathe for a full minute. “Your clo-clo-closet?”

Sarah nodded. She gently tugged my arm in a dark room. She shut the door and flicked on a light. For years, if I stepped within even six feet of Sarah’s closet, she would give me an electrical shock for two minutes. (We’re witches, so it doesn’t kill us, but it still hurts. A lot.) So obviously, this room was off-limits. You go in without Sarah’s permission? You just signed your own death warrant. And now, after thirteen years, I was in it. And being in it now, I suddenly felt sorry for Dorothy when she found Oz, because she couldn’t find Sarah’s closet instead. It was fifty times bigger than six football fields put together. The walls were painted in order of the colors of the rainbow, in a wavy pattern. It had 500 different kinds of televisions all over the walls with beanbags of every color of every shade all over the room on the floor, with a pool table in the back and a ginormous basketball court. There was also a Mcdonald’s and a KFC. And there was a escalator that lead to a room two hundred times bigger than the room with the Mcdonald’s, the KFC, the pool table, and the basketball court. The entire room just had clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes clothes CLOTHES! Every single inch of it had clothes. Not one part was empty. All there was was clothes, clothes, clothes.

As I gazed around, not moving, breathing, or doing anything else, Sarah disappeared into a corne. When she came back, she was dragging a rack of clothes behind her.

“Okay, Mandy. These are all the clothes I have that are good for first dates. Pick one.” There was a pleated denim dress, a strapless light blue dress, a red knee-length dress, a jade blazer with a denim bellbottom, and a flower patterned skirt. I looked at all the clothes thoughtfully. I didn’t really know which outfit to pick. I don’t know anything about fashion, so I was kind of stuck.

But finally, FINALLY, I decided that I wanted the blue strapless dress with the jade green blazer. So I put on the outfit I chose with the makeup Sarah wanted to put on me and I put on my favorite high-tops. Sarah thought I looked perfect, and Mom said I was stunning. Olivia said that according to a recent study at Stanford University, I appeared to be what the male population desires. And Fanny, of course, said: “Sarah’s done it! She’s waved her wand, said Bippity, Boppity, Boo, and changed you into a princess! Or, a really pretty teenage witch. You look good either way.” Then she gave me jazz hands.

 

Chapter 3.

Everyone who’s had or has a boyfriend/girlfriend knows that your first date can turn into your worst date in two seconds. That’s why the best thing to do on your first date is go to a movie. It melts anxiety and you can say you only have the money for one popcorn bucket as an excuse to hold hands in case you reach into the bucket at the same time. So George and I went to see The Amazing Spider-man. It was awesome and we both loved it. And, luckily, we held hands in the popcorn bucket! Yes! And while he walked me home, he let me wear his jacket when I was cold. And then, when we were at my door, he asked me out to play mini golf next Saturday. I said yes and dreamily walked inside.

Olivia, Nina, Emily, Talia, Tara, Sam, and Felicia were totally weirded-out and did not understand, but Sarah, Fanny and my mom totally got it. We spent hours giggling, whispering, and squealing. I know that sounds girly, but I’m not really like that. I’m a little girly, but most of the time I don’t act all sexist. Sure I’m boy crazy and a hopeless romantic, but what I wear is totally tomboy, and my favorite hobbies are using my power and playing soccer. Not to mention I don’t understand fashion or makeup. But when you have your first date, being girly is allowed.

So I went to Sarah’s closet and decided to wear a red peplum with jeans and my favorite hightops. Then I resumed giggling, whispering, and squealing with two of my sisters and my mom. The next day, I didn’t pay attention to the customers at the bakery. I kept talking in this high, soft, floaty voice. Everything I saw was pink and had butterflies flying around it. And I don’t remember one thing a person said unless it was about George.

All my sisters tried to stop me from acting all weird, but nothing worked. But then, Mom had an idea. She took an enormous bucket of ice water and dunked my head into it. Then she shouted “SNAP OUT OF IT!” in my face through a bullhorn. I jumped about a foot in the air and then fell on the floor and fainted. When I woke up, my nine sisters and my mom were staring at me, confused and worried. (Well, Olivia wasn’t really confused. She never is.)

“Hi-hi guys,” I mumbled, shakily standing up.

“Are you okay?” Mom asked.

“Yeah, I think so.” Everything was back to normal. I wasn’t all weird and gross and day-dreamy.

“You’re sure okay?” Sarah asked. I nodded. “Great, Mom. She was finally perfect, after thirteen years, and you broke her!” Sarah stomped off in anger and frustration, and my mom and all of my other sisters but Fanny followed her. Fanny and I looked at each other for a few seconds, and then laughed. Then we went to Sarah’s closet and watched TV while sitting on Sarah’s beanbags. We laughed and joked around and didn’t mention George once. And, to tell you the truth, not thinking about George made me really, really, really, happy. Whenever I did, I started to have a panic attack. So Fanny thought was it was a good idea to pretend George didn’t exist. And it was a good idea. Well, it was a good idea at the time. Later, I realized that it was one of the worst ideas ever.

Chapter 4.

Sorry last chapter was so short! But I had to rush because Mom was on my case about writing this book instead of working. Anyway, this chapter is about my cliché, gross, and totally TV three-week relationship with George. My second date with George was only a couple days after our first date, so didn’t have a long time to prepare. Before the date, I was a nervous wreck. I couldn’t breathe normally, my heart was going at the speed of sound, and my voice kept cracking. Even Fanny, who always knows what to say, couldn’t help me. Mom told me there’s no reason to go crazy over a boy. Nina, Sam, Talia, Tara, Emily and Felicia didn’t care. Olivia told me that most teenage girls feel uneasy with a handsome male specimen, so what I was feeling was normal. And Sarah — shallow, gossiping, self-centered, drama queen Sarah — said: “Mandy, I know what you’re going through. On the first couple dates you have, you feel stressed. But the best thing to remember is that boys aren’t worth you feeling unhappy. You’re supposed to be dating George because he makes you happy, right? So break up with him if you need to, okay?” Shocking, I know, coming from Sarah. But I realized she was right. So was Mom. If George made me feel anything but happy, I should break up with him. Besides, life is more than boyfriends and crushes.

So when I heard somebody ring the doorbell, I marched straight to the door, prepared to break up with George.

I flung open the door and said: “George, we need to-” Then I saw it was a mailman with a package.

“Delivery for Mandy Simon.”

“That’s me,” I said. I signed something and took the package. I brought it to Sarah. Fanny and her were in her closet, playing Air Hockey.

“Hey guys, look what I-” I looked at them closely. “You guys didn’t tell me you had an Air Hockey table!” They blushed. I decided to ignore and I continued. “I got a package from… George.” The two stopped playing. I ripped open the package. Inside was a brand new Windows 8 computer. I pulled it out, opened it and turned it on. There was a video on the screen. I pressed play. It was George.

“Hi Mandy! Sorry i couldn’t play mini golf with you. I got busy at the animal shelter. You see, I volunteer with orphan animals. Anyway, I’m going to be pretty busy for a while, so I was wondering if we could date through videos on this computer. Email me if you want to do it!”

And the video ended.

I looked at my sisters. “No. I say no. I’m not going to date him. He can have his computer back. I don’t want it.”

“Um, Mandy, there’s something else in here,” Sarah said. I looked in the box.

“An opal necklace?”

“That’s real opals,” Sarah said. I believed her, because if anyone knows about accessories, it’s Sarah. “So are you going to do it?”

I took a deep breath, sighed, and opened my Gmail account.

 

The next few weeks dating George through a computer was really weird. I would have to go on a romantic picnic by myself and talk to a computer, or go on a horse carriage ride by myself with a computer, and it was fun, but really weird. It was the strangest (and only) relationship I’d ever been a part of.  I got to get to know George, and he got to get to know me. It was cool, but a little (okay, a lot) cliché. We would giggle constantly, and he would keep sending me presents, and I felt like some sort of girl in a TV sitcom. You would’ve thought it was perfect, but in reality, it was the worst. Talking to a computer screen just makes you feel weird, and I felt like I wasn’t really getting to know George. I felt like a weirdo with a computer. So, after a while, I realized that I had to break up with him. So one day, I started a Facetime chat and then started to say, “George, I’m really sorry, but-we-we have to-”

“Break up?”

I turned around. I was in the bakery at the time, behind the counter, so how could somebody be behind me? Well, you tell me, ‘cause George somehow was there. “George, how…”

“I had to get into the bakery sometime. How else would I be able to hack into your family’s files and destroy your business?”

“Hack-into-my-bui-what?”

“You see Mandy, you didn’t create me. I was born the son of two convicts, who happened to also be magic. I wanted to get a good job, but with my parent’s reputation, it was impossible. So, I knew I had to break some rules.” George gave me an evil smile and continued. “Then I found you. You, a very smart, kind, sweet girl with a rare talent and a great business, who also believed I was a good guy. So, I went along with it and tricked you. I was secretly learning all about your family’s business, planning to destroy it. And then, one day, I managed to get in, and collapse the system. And now, all of this is mine. Say goodbye to this bakery, Mandy. ‘Cause I’m going to take it over and wipe you and it from existence!” I stared at him, stunned.

“But-how did you know so much about us?”

“That opal necklace had video cameras in the gems. I could watch your every move. That’s right, sister. My  power is evil.” Then he started laughing a really creepy laugh. I shook my head and punched him in the face.

“Guys! Come here! Now!” My nine sisters flashed into the bakery. They read my mind and understood what was happening. “You know, George, you may have collapsed the bakery’s system, but guess what? Nine witches against one jerkface equals one jerkface loser.” I gave him a little smile. “GET HIM!” We all flew up into the air at the same time, and our powers went into action. Sam threw gears, screws, and other mechanical stuff at him. Sarah threw some accessories at him. Fanny threw prop comedy stuff at him. And I pelted him with eggs. “Okay, this is not so effective. Switch to elemental powers mode!” We all breathed fire, water, and ice. (Those are witch powers we use for emergencies.) We lifted him up in the air and threw him around with fire. Then we threw him to the ground. “Oh, and by the way, George, we have a backup system. So you did nothing to us. Ha.” We lifted him with ice, froze him, and threw him to the ground. “Turns out two can play at the jerk game, huh? Well, eleven, actually.” We lifted him up and threw him out the door. “And don’t come back!” we all said in unison. Then Mom came in through the back door. “I’m back from town — oh, good you’re all here, I got dinner, and snacks, oh, and unfortunately, Sam, they didn’t have a build-a-car-starter kit-” Mom stopped. “So, did you girls have a nice afternoon?” We flew down. “Yeah, Mom. We had a great afternoon,” I sighed.

Chapter 5.

I know you’re mind is blown after the last chapter and everything, but there’s more of the story. So I’ll keep going.  In the next three days after my breakup with George, I tried to focus on working at the bakery and nothing else. And it kind of worked. My mind was completely into baking the boys people requested. And, after a little while, I felt better about the whole situation. I mean, there was no point in crying over George. He was a jerk and I didn’t need him. And there was one good thing that came from his arrival: I got eight new friends.

 

 

EPILOGUE

The eleven Simons lived in harmony. The girls fought from time to time, but that was all. They enjoyed running their bakery and all became good friends and sisters. And one day….

Emily was going through the bakery’s records in their family’s computer files, and she saw something odd. She squinted at the screen. She felt confused. Then, it hit her like a ton of bricks.

“OH MY GOD.”

 

 

To be continued…

 

Dr. James Leonard

Chapter 1.

“I have never heard such a thing before!” I said.

My first name is James, but my whole name is James Leonard Olshansky. But I just prefer Dr. James. The sound I just heard is a type of Frankenstein-ish thingy but instead of Frankenstein I am resurrecting my daughter Clementine. She died in a roller coaster accident *sniff*. Her head got hit, so I made a “magical” machine that will make her live exactly 89 more years. She is twelve years old *UHG* I mean she was twelve years old.

The “magical” machine is made out of the finest metals, wires, circuit boards, and technology. I called the machine: Resurrector 10,200. I hope it works; I spent weeks trying to make this and it will break my heart if it doesn’t. The sound is a tingly sort of fairy sound. I thought the Resurrector 10,200 was working, but I think that the used tungsten, the rusty, cracked wire is broken. The used wire of electricity, the tungsten, just a tiny little filament, wouldn’t make such a huge difference, you would think. But I need it. *Sigh* Think, James think! Of course! The used tungsten from that scientist usually fails with light bulbs! I was supposed to use a new tungsten! Anyway, I talk to myself a lot, but I just think it helps me focus.

 

Chapter 2.

I think I should get something to eat, I said to myself. Maybe a turkey sandwich, or chicken, eh whatever, I like turkey, but my daughter likes chicken! Maybe I’ll just do eenie minee mo and pick whatever.

*********************** **************************************

“Ooh! Just what I need, a tungsten!” I said out of nowhere, in front of maybe a good 16 people (it’s a small town). I found the part I needed for my “magical” machine in the window pane of the town’s hardware store.  Running to it: “Ah! *pant, pant* here *pant* it is!” I panted.

“Thanks, I appreciate your business,” said a British stranger, starting to walk out the door, with the machine part I need for the light bulb. “NO!!!!! THE ONLY ONE LEFT!” I screamed with a feeling of never hearing my daughter’s sweet voice again, the light bulb can heat up the machine making her warm as soon as she wakes up. I live in Iceland, a very cold area, even though you can just find a hardware store in North America almost everywhere, a little town in Iceland is very different, and the light bulbs just got sold out. Tungsten is also rare, so I guess I cannot hear my daughter’s sweet voice and the funny jokes she made up.

Wait! I found a receipt on the dusty floor of the  hardware store. It says:

1297 Skaroseyri Road

Akereyri, Iceland

11116

1 tungsten: $26.89

Subtotal: $26.89

signature:

Terry M.

Chapter 3

Who’s Terry M.? I thought over and over, wondering if that was the person who bought my tungsten. Maybe I should just ask everyone if they have that name, but at the same time I will see if they have a British voice. ”Smart idea!” I said out of nowhere.

*********************************************************************

“Excuse me, but is your name Terry M.?” I asked.

“Sorry, no,” said the stranger I had asked.

I was starting to think that after the 35 people I asked with all the same answers, no, there’s almost no possible way there can be a person with a British voice called Terry M. in this town.

The millisecond after I thought that, I heard a faint British voice saying “Of course,” in front of an old lady’s house.

”Yes!” I whispered excitedly,”finally!”.

*Pant*, *pant*, I run across the street to the British man while panting, “Wait! *pant* wait!, is that you Mr.Terry M.?”

Now I am following this annoying man asking, “Did you buy the tungsten?!” repeatedly.

Finally an answer:“Yes.”

What’s with the attitude? I thought. Maybe he was answering me all along and I was interrupting him with all of my excited questions.

******************************************************************

 

We were now in Terry’s house. Then he started the conversation.

“I need this tungsten for my sixth cousin, Corie. She was in a car accident and I need her to be alive again, so I need the tungsten for the only remaining light bulb I have, do you have a problem?” the man explained. I was starting to think that we are alike in that way of wanting our loved ones to re-live, or get resurrected.

“I need it for the exact same reason, so do you understand?” I replied.

“Well, I do. But I have spent thousands for my resurrector, and I accidentally used a dead tungsten for my light bulb and it broke, so I need them so I can warm her up and not let the chemicals and the cold weather of Iceland make her get hypothermia.The chemicals I use are very cold and cannot be interacted with the human body when resurrected.”

“Okay,” I replied, freaked out that the man had almost the same reasons to get a new tungsten as I did.

“Well then, you can go get some in the hardware stores of the United States of America,” the annoying man said.

“I’m not going to go to the United States just to get something at the hardware store that will probably not be found!” I said with an impatient sort of voice.

“Well then, I guess you won’t resurrect your loved one after all, as I am keeping the new tungsten for myself only.”

I paused with silence. He really wants me to go to a hardware store in America, maybe I can get a lightbulb, and just get this over with, or maybe I can just deal with my daughter’s loss—wait! I can just order the light bulb on the internet!

***************************************************************

4 weeks later.

 “Dad?…”

*Gasp* “It works!”

“Father! You made me die! How dare you let me go on that rollercoaster!” my daughter said, so angry to the point that she was turning red.

“Honey, I have waited so long to hear your sweet voice! And you just scream at me?!” I screamed angrily at my daughter. “Do you know how much I missed you?? Isn’t heaven nice though?” I said, feeling guilty for some reason, while fixing my hair (so she doesn’t think I’m a maniac).

 

“Father *cough* heaven is beautiful, but I kept on falling through clouds *sniff*. I got some bruises,” Clementine said.

I was starting to think that she was going a little crazy, falling through clouds in heaven.

“Qwertyuiop-asdfghjkl-zxcvbnm-whejyuiop-asdfghjkl-zxcvbnm-jjsj!!!”

“Oh my god!” I said in fear, ”my daughter’s having a seizure!!”  “Hey-irebgierfw-dad-dad-adad-eeeeeeey!!!” screamed my daughter.

 

1 week later.

 

“Dad, can I get out of the hospital?” my poor daughter said. I felt guilty somehow. I think it’s just the thought of me bringing her back, then having to be dragged into a hospital. I even hated them, the lights make me lightheaded, and other annoying things like that. “Father!”

“Yes?!” I said, so surprised and scared at the same time that my shoulders were tense.

“You didn’t answer me when I asked you if I can get out of the hospital, seriously, all I have been eating is cold powdered mashed potatoes,” my daughter said in a depressed way. “Don’t you worry, we will get you out of the hospital,” I said. “I’m going to ask Dr.Sandler,” I said in a low voice, so my daughter could relax.

***********************************************************************

I left the hospital and told my daughter I would be back soon, before the argument with Terry M.

“I cannot believe that you resurrected your daughter! I was going to do it first!” the insolent man said. I held my breath and closed my mouth shut, before I was going to punch him so hard that it would leave him a mark for years. I bet I was the only one to actually shut him up, he just kept on talking with no sense on how his sixth cousin, Corie, should have been resurrected first, before my daughter. I was starting to think that he is sick in the head and I was wasting my time on this person.

“Bye,” I said. I opened his front door, then walked outside.

“Wait!” said Terry M. His sentence ended with a door slammed shut.

”That’s it,” I said, I may be crazy (just slightly) but I am not spending any precious time on this person.

 

                                                          Chapter 4.

I was now back at the hospital, BING BING BING BING

“All patients stay put,” an alarming microphone said a couple of times after the bings.

“Daddy!” Clementine screamed with all her will.

“Honey!” I screamed back, ”It’s okay!“

I ran as fast as I could. “No,” said an insolent ‘guard.’ More like, ‘I want your daughter to die again’.

“I. Need. To. See. Her!” I screamed.

“Sorry, I don’t want to do this but, in your daughter’s shape, we can’t let her get out,” said the stupid, insolent man. *Crack*.  I gave the stupid man an uppercut and he passed out.  Perfect, I thought, I can sprint right past him.

 

 

Chapter 5.

I was now holding my daughter in my arms, she passed out because she got really alarmed and was not feeling well.

***********************************************************************

I was at my house, and I put my daughter on her bed, I kept her impression on the bed. I do not know why, but thank god she wasn’t paying any attention to it.

“Dad?” she said tiredly.

“Yes, honey?” I ran to her bed and was surprised that she woke up.

“Um, where am I?” I was astonished.

“Honey, you are in your house, remember?” I said, terrified that she completely lost her memory.

”Oh yeah, it’s just that I kind of forgot, but you don’t have to worry.”

I was ignoring her attempts to calm me down. I was actually worried, but I said: “Of course I don’t have to worry,” just so she could not be anxious.

I had a smoked chicken sandwich for lunch, moist with mayo, and just wonderful, it was one of my daughters favorites.

***********************************************************************

“And here we meet again,” said Terry M.

I tried running across the street, trying to get away from the man, hair up, British accent, I cannot stand him, not to mention that he was…(let’s just say, “off.”) I was going to the grocery store, but after, I’m going to my lab. I think my machine is messing my daughter up. Thank goodness Terry M. wasn’t trying to follow me, but that was odd, he usually tries to follow me, maybe he just has mood swings or something.

*************************************************************

I am at my lab, and for no apparent reason, the machine is acting up. Now all I have to do is turn it off, or destroy it because my daughter is not going to die again, I said to myself, proud that I accomplished the dream of bringing my daughter back.Hallo! Hallo Hallo!” screamed the resurrector 10,200.

“Oh lord!” I screamed,”what-are-you-and-who-are-you!” I screamed, the resurrector actually had teeth, red eyes, and large creepy crawly legs.

“I am going to kill all of your loved ones in life—as in your…daughter!” Life kind of froze, and I was stuck, feeling faint, I collapsed.

Chapter 6.

>CLEMENTINE’S POINT OF VIEW<

 

So enough about my father, I am Clementine, and even though my father gave a sort of definition of me, he doesn’t know much. I actually love turkey sandwiches, but for some reason, he just forced me to have chicken, he said it’s healthier for you. Anyway, after that incident with the roller coaster, someone in their right mind would never do that again. I just hated the feeling of being in that roller coaster. After seeing my  best friend on a different ride, my father always thought I should (imitating his voice) “go by the tradition of going on a roller coaster in the summer.” Then guess what happened—I was in the middle of a free fall, one of the most exciting things on a roller coaster ride is a free fall, or at least it’s supposed to be. Then I fell out of my seat and bam! But anyway, back to the story:

After I heard a robot say that he was going to kill all of my father’s loved ones, such as *gulp* m-m-me. I just heard a thump, then that was it, I called the number 911 (I think I am starting to remember certain details, and remembering how to use gadgets). I wished I didn’t panic or had anxiety, or think that there was a robot that my teacher Mr. Dannie Mendenhall made to make my father pass out and take my unfinished homework that I kept under my bed. He is a teacher from before I died, but I am not going to school now, because of my memory, but I am going to go soon. Anyway, here is what I said to the police when they came, and here is what happened:

*************************************************************

“After I forgot about where I was, my father was going to the grocery store,” I explained to the officers.

“Ye sure this happened?” Replied the Southern-ish accented officer, I wasn’t sure what the accent was.

” Yes, I am sure (for some reason I remembered that,but nothing else) I think my memory is definitely getting better,” I said  sarcastically.

“Okay child, y’all are gonna get into trouble once I know you are lying. I know you remember, you just don’t wanna tell me,” said the officer. It was sad because he didn’t know my tragedy, and didn’t know that I kind of lost all of my memory, but it’s getting better slowly. You just need the right amount of patience and enough to

let the days when you forgot where the bathroom is just pass.

**********************************************************

“Ooh!” I said in excitement, I spotted macaroni and cheese in one of the cupboards in the kitchen. I love macaroni and cheese, so while the officers are looking at the creepy machine that I was basically born out of, to look for clues of how it made my father pass out, I’m going to eat. Such an ordinary life, I thought sarcastically to myself. *Sigh*

“CLEAR!” an officer said out of nowhere, at least for myself- I had no clue on what they were doing with all of the rooms and the machine, all they told me was, “Don’t worry, we will find your father and then we will see what that machine is used for.” I was holding my breath at the last nine words: we will see what the machine is used for. I didn’t answer because I know what the machine is used for- but my father will never forgive me if I give away the magic of resurrecting.

Here is what the machine is made out of: even though it is made out of the finest metals and blah, blah, blah-it still had a turkey tray, strapped onto another turkey tray with duct tape, and it had a light bulb, under the two turkey trays, with a whole bunch of sciency stuff, like tubes and wires and circuit boards. It was like a mix of cheap and sciency, did I also mention the toothpicks?

My father picks his teeth, because he says it helps him concentrate even better when his teeth are clean, so he can do his work, I just don’t understand him sometimes.

“The man’s waking up!” an officer said surprisingly, I was surprised too, my dad is waking up from a monster machine making him faint, I ran down the steep stairs of the basement, breathing in the grimy air (more like 90% dust,and 10% air) “AAH!” I tripped and I was now rolling down the stairs-feeling faint, like my father. I fainted.

 

Chapter 7.

>Clementines point of view<

 

“Honey! Are you alright?!” my father cried. I never saw him with so many tears. I could make out him crying but… “It’s okay honey! Daddy’s here, I’m okay!” my father interrupted my thinking.

“I don’t know, the girl just started running down those stairs and fell, I didn’t know what to do, thank god you woke up,” said one of the officers.

”Yes, thank  god  I woke up-by the way, how did you find out that I fainted?” my dad asked another officer,

“Oh well—(UGHUM)—I just found out because your daughter called 911, and I just (the officer started having a British voice) UGHUM and I certainly heard the robot scream and…” said an unfinished officer.

“Wait, did you have a British accent?” asked my father, “because I just heard a similar voice and…”

“NOOOOOOO!” said the officer. BING BONG BING PING PING. The officer was shooting all over the place. I think my father angered him.

”NO,NO NOOOOOOOO!“ screamed the angry Terry M. I was terrified and hid in one of the corners of our large basement.

 

 

Chapter 8.

>Back to Dr.James Leonard<

 

I was so terrified by the fact that Terry M. was shooting all over the basement, I think Terry M. is trying his best to kill my daughter.

But he didn’t know how much my daughter and I can fight, he doesn’t know us, and he is just a crazy, sick man that is trying to ruin our family, he also mentioned that he wanted his sixth cousin Corie M. to get resurrected before my daughter. But really, who cares if my daughter gets resurrected first or if my daughter gets resurrected after his cousin?

“Let’s go,” said the demanding Terry M. “we shouldn’t care about these people, I know them. The man just knocked out himself for attention, and his daughter is just fine. Plus, who bloody cares about these turkey trays! It just doesn’t make sense!” Cops these days, they bloody care about a sick daughter and an insolent man who just knocked himself out, Terry M. said to himself.

The other officers looked shocked, and were  so scared that they just followed the commands. One was even shaking, and saying “Y-y-yes sir” and “o-of -course officer Terry”.

“Wait- wait!” I cried. I really wanted the cops to discover why this machine is trying to kill my daughter and why it is going crazy, but I was too late, they left the house, and slammed the door while they were at it.

“Daddy! Daddy! I missed you so much! I have no idea why you got knocked out!” said my daughter. I ran to her, and grasped her in my arms, it made me cry. I was terrified also, but I quickly wiped my tears away, and said: “you don’t need to worry, we won’t let that crazy machine knock me out again. I have a plan.”

“What is the plan?” She replied,

“Well, I am going to destroy the Resurrector and everything will be fine,” I said, not saying my thoughts, but what I was thinking is that Terry M. must have controlled the resurrector. I am certainly baffled by the thoughts of Terry M. trying to, I guess, get revenge for what I did—but what I am wondering is if he’s ever even had the time to resurrect his sixth cousin, but I am not quite sure. I should spy on that crazy man and find out the hard way, instead of asking him, but it would probably be even harder to ask than to spy on him. Because he’s not quite sane, and the man will probably just ignore me or say that it wasn’t fair that I resurrected my daughter before his cousin, and even then ignore my question.

I was overly thinking, and thank god my daughter asked if I could braid her hair, or else I would’ve kept on thinking about Terry.

I was not so sure on how to braid hair, but Clementine taught me how, and I got it after a while.

*************************************************************

“Pot roast!” I said to my daughter. It was the next day of the incident, and we are having pot roast for lunch. I thought it should just be an easy day after everything that had just happened. Halloween is on October 31st, and it is a month away, so it is pretty cold, about 39 degrees Fahrenheit. In the middle of my pot roast I heard the phone ring, brriiing! brrring! Then I picked it up, but Clementine interrupted me.

“Daddy when is the pot roast done?”asked my daughter.

“I don’t know honey!” I tried screaming across the room, then finally I hear an answer on the other line.

“Hi, you are invited to our secret society, and we are going to have a meeting,” said Terry M. “Be there and I will tell you everything, even the reason why I was shooting all over your basement and screaming ‘no.’ There is a reason for everything and it’s a better reason than your reason of resurrecting your daughter first before my cousin,” Terry said under his breath.

I felt like a kid; I wanted to hide under the covers, he wanted to meet me in a “secret society” and “explain” why he did everything but I didn’t know what he was going to do, and I did not know what to say. But I am going to go there anyway, I thought.

“Can you answer me? I am inviting you to a secret society!” screamed the impatient Terry M.

“Yes, I hear you,” I answered. Then hung up, sighed, and thought, this situation is never going to end.

 

Chapter 9.

I do not even know how he got my house phone number exactly, but I am a little anxious, maybe I just told him what the number was when we were still “friends” for about a week, before everything turned to heck (or as my daughter would say, when  everything went to mush).

********************************************************

I am on my way to the secret society (using the address Terry—you know what? Instead of saying ‘Terry M.’ I should say ‘Terry Mad’. It sounds better, don’t you think?)

*******************************************************

I am waiting at the front door in the underground secret society. I just really hope he is going to go through another mood swing, just so he doesn’t feel like shooting all over the place, that’s if he even has a gun. I am starting to feel nauseous, and extremely worried because I have no clue what he is going to do after he opens that door. Screeeech I hear, and I see the door open. I am terrified because I am face to face with Terry (Mad).

“H-hi” I say to him.

“Hello” Terry replies,”come in, and I will explain everything.” Terry said this in a disturbing voice, sort of like an evil British voice.

I was now in a seat, and Terry was standing up right in front of me staring down right at my eyes, my face was numb, I was shaking-and I was terrified.

“I know you’re shaking, and I know why. You’re scared, you think I am terrifying, but I like that. I feel like I’m in control” Terry M. said, he started to stare at me.

“So what was the reason for you to shoot in my basement?!” I screamed.

“It was for a good reason!” Terry screamed back.

I jumped off my chair in anger, and screamed: “Then what was the reason!?” I was turning red, and I grasped Terry’s neck collar.

“Okay! Okay! I will tell you once you stop doing that!” Terry screamed, but I held his neck collar a little longer for revenge. Then I finally let go, and I waited for him to explain why he did such a thing in my basement. “The reason why I did that is because my cousin never got resurrected, and my family is blaming me for everything. They are depending on me to resurrect her, and I didn’t, so I thought that I should knock out your daughter, hide my cousin’s actual body, and just say that the resurrector kind of changed her a bit. Then take your daughter home.”

I was bright red, and I was ready to end this. “Trying to use another human body is cruel,” I said and punched his face repeatedly.

He struggled and screamed, “YOU’LL END UP IN A VERY HOT PLACE AT THE END!” screamed Terry, “AND I WONDER WHAT THAT PLACE IS!” he screamed sarcastically.

I just kept on, for revenge, and for anger, until he collapsed, and said:

“I now cannot see my family, they will find out and you-you’ll end up in jail for this.”

“I JUST WANT TO STOP THIS!” I cried with dozens of tears running down my cheeks, and making their way down my chin. I sobbed and kept on wiping my tears, ”I DON’T WANT YOU TO STEAL MY DAUGHTER AND I DON’T WANT YOU IN MY LIFE!” I kept on punching, then I stopped, and I left him on the floor, looking at him, I kept on looking at him. He wasn’t breathing. I was still crying.

“I DIDN’T NEED TO KILL YOU!” I cried. Blood was running down his face like tears, and I felt so angered at myself and had feelings of guilt.

 

Chapter 10.

I drove home

*************************************************************

My daughter asked what happened and I answered : “It’s dealt with, don’t worry.”

“Okay!” my daughter smiled. “How about we have that pot roast?”

“Okay” I answered, and I felt a huge relief off my chest, and that was it.

 

BREEONG BREEONG NEEEER NEEEEER NEEEEEROOOOOOOOO. I saw the flashing colors of America, red- white and blue, “Wait a sec!” I told my daughter. I walked down the 12 steps of of house and opened the door,then I was shocked because I heard a police officer say: “Are you Dr.James Leonard Olshansky?” Is this about Terry M.? Am I in trouble? I was asking a whole bunch of questions in my head.

“Y-y-yes I am, do you have a question?” I answered  “Do you know this person?” said the officer, he showed me a picture of him.

 

 

THE END

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Yorkout, Part 1

CHAPTER ONE: The Water Wheel

 

On top of Mount Forgetfulness, a hooded figure looks down to the bottom. He is looking through the Ultimate Water Wheel, which is just like a regular water wheel except it has scoops on it and uses lava instead of water. The lava travels down and curves around to a place called Town Town where the lava is used in furnaces to make something for a secret government project called Pain. I’m not going to tell you what Pain is yet… because it’s a secret government project.

This is a time where aliens live among humans. A lot of the humans don’t like it and are trying to destroy the aliens. They do not like the aliens because they think that these beings are more intelligent and they want to be the most intelligent beings on earth. Although humans or Yorks are not the most intelligent beings on earth. Humans are only the third most intelligent beings on earth. Number two is dolphins and I haven’t finished reading The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy so I don’t know what number one is. There is a growing resistance of people with the organization but plotting against it.

The hooded figure’s name is Jongon. He is part of the resistance. He is going to tell officials from Yorkout – the name of the government organization – that Pain has finally been finished. Though as he gets there, he does not only find government officials…

 

CHAPTER TWO: The Meeting

 

Jongon is like an acrobat spinning through the wheels. He puts his foot on the top of the wheel so that he never touches the lava. At the bottom there is an abandoned warehouse to his right. The door is blocked off but that doesn’t seem to stop him. He ducks into a nearby grove of trees where there is a secret entrance. Inside, the government officials, Eamon, Honmon and Sumamon, are waiting and all wearing cloaks.

“Son says Pain is done. I have seen it myself,” says Jongon.

Son is another government official. Jongon is his messenger. Son is one of the few government officials that knows about the resistance but he doesn’t know that Jongon is a part of it.

“We saw,” Honmon says.

Sumamon had his tongue cut out. That’s another story. Eamon was having a panic attack. She has those.

“It’s so…” says Eamon

Jongon and Eamon zeta. I don’t know what zeta means so I need to get a dictionary. I’m back and here it is…

Chapter 2 ½ : The Dictionary

 

zeta – when two people are able to read each others mind.

zoom – to go fast.

 

Okay, it’s missing a few words, but it has what I need.

 

 

Chapter 2 ¾ : Meanwhile back in the book…

“You sure you want to say that?” says Jongon.

“Yeah no,” Eamon says.

“Let’s go!” says Jongon.

And so they set off to the balcony around the corner overlooking Pain. Pain is a lopsided idea to have humans mate with Yorks, but there was an accident in the lab (they thought that they were hostile so used DNA). Somehow insect DNA was mixed in and the result was the basis for Pain. Yorkout thought they could use them to intimidate the Yorks. In short it yorked.

 

Before Jongon can say something, Eamon turns into her normal look, a York, and flies away. He never sees her again. A York is an alien that can fly and has four points at each of the corners of its body with claws on the ends and a flap of skin connecting the four together which work like wings. They have whiskers and their eyes are red parallelograms, points facing in. The only noise it makes is a kind of high-pitched mechanical raspy screech. Yorks can also shape shift to look like humans wearing cloaks as long as they don’t take their cloaks off, because the cloaks turn into their skin, so they can’t take their cloaks off, because taking their cloaks off would be like taking their skin off. They have a chrome finish to their body except for a small rhombus on their chest. The top triangle is red and the bottom triangle is blue.

 

As Jongon turns to go he hears a thwomb. It sounds like an arrow being fired out of a bow. He does not turn back. That was no ordinary arrow. It was an arrow with a net at the end, capturing Eamon! Cue dramatic music. Dramatic muuuuusic? All right, skip the music.

 

 

CHAPTER 3 by Jongon

 

A little chat with the governor of Pain: uh, I don’t like to write, so I’m using a recorder thing. And then Mr. Narrator can just write it in for me.

 

Jongon: Pain is doing well!

 

Governor: Good. Recently, we caught a York flying in from the balcony overlooking Pain.

 

Jongon: What have you been doing with him?

 

Governor: Actually, it’s a girl that goes by the Eamon.

 

Jongon: Hey, I saw her turn into a York! Guess I forgot to sound that blare alarm that you gave me.

 

Governor: Then you shall have to oversee the workings of Pain near the balcony for one day. Also, that’s where the York is going.

 

Random Guy Walking In: I’m gonna use this mind reader to read Jongon’s mind!

 

 

CHAPTER 3 ½

Random Guy Walking Into Mind-Reading Device

 

He is currently thinking: “Oh yeah! I get to save that girl that I met! I wonder if she likes me!

 

CHAPTER 3 ¾

 

Meanwhile, back in the conversation recorded on the recorder thingy owned by Jongon:

 

Jongon: I told you never to use that mind reader thing on me! Let me see that! (Jongon destroys mind reader thingy).

 

Governor: Great. Now you have to be there for an extra ten seconds!

 

Narrator: Cue dramatic music.
Governor: Hey, narrator! What are you doing in our meeting?

 

Narrator: I have a name, ya’ know.

 

Governor: Yeah, what is it?

 

Narrator: Uh… narrator.

 

Jongon: Alright, alright. He’s narrator and you’re governor, and can we just get on with this meeting already!!??

Governor: For that, just go straight to your sentence. And mind-reading guy? Fix the mind reader thingy already!

 

End recorder thingy recording.

 

CHAPTER 4

Let’s Rescue Eamon!

By Game Show Host

 

First off, Jongon, you can either rescue Eamon or would you rather have a neeeew caaaar?! Now let’s get serious, and start working and as Jongon’s back at his job still rescuing Eamon (even though I’m pretty sure a new car would be better). In Pain, there happens to be a bunch of chains hanging from the air, which I was planning to use to lower his new car, and there happens to be a space where you drop stuff in where I was thinking of dropping in his new car, and – the best part is – there’s a Toyota dealership in Town Town. And Jongon is making sure everyone is working as hard as they can, waiting for Eamon to come around, and probably thinking, “Man, I wish I had taken that new car. Then I could’ve used it to get Eamon out of here.”

Ok, out of his mind now… And look! Eamon’s shift is coming around and she happens to be holding the car keys to a new car that she did take, which happens to be parked in the York prison parking lot right next to the Mazarati of Esasopa.

Jongon has just swung into action, taking Eamon’s chains off. And now all of the creatures created for Pain are chasing them, and I’m pretty sure Jongon is thinking, “Man I’m pretty sure I really wish I had that new car now.”

Eamon says, “I’ve been studying you for the last twenty five minutes I’ve been here and I realize they’re afraid of fire and I know where the other Torturons (that’s what they call themselves even though we all call them Flaming Webions) keep all their self-igniting flaming whips.” They are now running to the small cabinet with the flaming Webions next to the chocolates. Time to get my Toyota. I’ll get them. I have picked up them and I am escaping. We are now at Yorkin headquarters. I have handed the mike to Eamon…

 

CHAPTER 5

Agent Time

by Eamon

 

So I have escaped Pain. Yay! Yay! Happy day! Somebody get out the cupcakes! I hate it in there. There was, like, zero light except for those, like, Flaming Webions. By the way, have you ever felt a mixture of the lash of a whip and the burn of fire? It’s not a very pleasant feeling.

Now that Game Show Host guy is flying away on his car, which has magically turned into a pony, he has left us with the leader of a secret government project within a secret project within a public government organization. In other words, lots of these people work in Pain except for the people who worked to make Pain and now try to destroy Pain. The man says that if we manage to take out Pain we would take out much of Yorkout. Pain is the new center of the bull’s eye. I am in human form because these chairs are too small for a York to sit in. Plus we can’t really sit. We can just waddle around in York form. This man is trying to employ us as partners to try to destroy Pain and thus destroy most of Yorkout, except for Panic and Anger. The leader of Yorkout is a man named Son.

We obviously say yes and are immediately taken to agent training.

 

To be continued in Part Two…

 

 

The Book of Awesomeness

There is a ten-year-old girl, her name is Brittany. Brittany lives on a planet named Mars and she is a vampire. She has blonde hair, blue eyes, and if you can imagine her, she would have pale skin. Sometimes, she gets mad and angry and she gives people bad, bad dreams on her planet. Giving people bad dreams is beyond her control. These people don’t know that she has powers so they just don’t bother to say anything about it because they don’t know.

Her mom is also a monster, and her dad has many brothers. They have another child named Alex. He is a werewolf. Brittany always does experiments on Alex. Her experiments are games for them. One of the experiments is blowing him up. She goes to the store and gets potions.

So Brittany one day Brittany went to the store to get potions. When she was going to the store, she sees a six-year-old girl. She was crying because she was afraid of the dream she had. And she said, “I wish I never had bad dreams.”

Brittany was really sad about it.

So Brittany finally got to the store. She felt bad that she couldn’t do anything about giving people bad dreams. She said to herself, “I wish I didn’t give people bad dreams.” She was sad when she came to the store.

When she was at the store, she bought some potions for her experiments with her brother. And then she saw another monster. He was bluish greenish with yellow in the middle. He was six feet tall! He wasn’t from her family.

She asked, “Who are you?”

And then he said, “I’m a kidnapper,” and he kidnapped her.

He had four arms, he had six eyes, and he had a huge mouth. Brittany was screaming and screaming. The monster put duct tape on her mouth.

So finally he got home and he taped her to a chair. And he wanted to steal all the powers from her family and all the money. That’s all he wanted, and then he would let her free.

She said, “No!”

The monster said, “Huh?” He was very mad. He let her watch TV and then when she got distracted, he pulled her hair and put her in a box she couldn’t escape from the box. She used her magic. First she kicked the box and punched the box, then she pushed the box with both hands and accidently burned the box. She got out, but then she saw the monster walking by.

She had to fight the monster. She was feeling angry because she had two obstacles. The monster was very hard to fight. Since he had four arms, she had to grab onto his arms and swing him around so he could fall. She needed to throw all his air out of him so he could die. She tried to use her powers. It worked. She destroyed the monster and she felt for it and she was mad that she felt bad for it. Once again she gave people bad dreams. And she said, “Oh no, oh no!”

She went back and she got cornered by the monster. She had a knife and she used it to slice all his eyes open. It was very painful and disgusting. It made her feel awkward. She grabbed all four arms and swung him around. When he fell, she put her foot on him and he didn’t have any air left in his body.

So then she went home and saw the magic hourglass in her room. She said, “What can this do?” A crystal ball surrounded the hourglass. She had to wait until the hourglass flipped over three times. Each time it was done, she flipped it over. Then she finally got the most powers in her family and she used her powers to take away one of her powers that was giving people bad dreams. Then she moved to a planet named Mn and she loved it so she could control her powers.

 

THE END

 

 

A Caveman’s Life

Chapter 1

Grunt listened to the boring story. Grunt wanted to be outside playing with the big, loud wolves rather than staying inside a dusty and dark cave. He knew that the reason why his parents were staying in the cave was because they were scared of the outside world. They only went out when they had to hunt. The rest of the day was spent just sitting down and sharpening rocks on the cave walls or drawing pictures with the tar.

Grunt was nibbling on the raw lamb that he, Grunt, had caught. The family knew that since Grunt was not afraid of the outside, he could just get the food for them and they could just stay in the cave for as long as they wanted like a bunch of overfed pigs. Grunt was hardly listening to the scary story. Everyone in the tribe except him was listening. Grunt was laboring and making spears and making tents for the hunting party who hardly ever went hunting. Grunt was so good at hunting because he tamed a couple of the wolves to help him hunt. He was also known besides Grunt as Friend of the Wolves because every other caveman’s enemy was the wolf. Man and dog were not best friends; they were the worst of enemies.

Grunt came to the conclusion that he would rather be listening to the story than doing all the dirty work for the tribe. He crawled over to the fire and listened to the Old Caveman tell the story. Grunt laughed when the people shivered and drew back in terror and surprise. It seemed like the same story kept them being afraid. The same old story led them to the same reaction. He thought that it might be reasonable for them to be scared the first time, but why be scared if you heard it all your life? The cavemen knew every word of the story and they were still shrieking at some of the violent parts. He then grunted in caveman dialect. It roughly translated to, “I want to learn how to shiver.”

The old man said “If you can’t shiver, you don’t qualify as a true man. You have  always been odd. You have not learnt how to shiver by now. All these men and boys who are shivering have gone out into the world to do so. If you want to learn how, get off the floor and go out into the world!” That day he vowed that he would learn how to shiver.

Grunt wondered that maybe his life could be more scary than this story. Maybe doing that would teach him how to shiver. He was starting to think that maybe if he made his life interesting, he could teach himself how to shiver. So he snuck toward the boulder at the cave entrance which was blocking the way out. He squeezed through a tiny crack beneath the boulder.

Outside, the light was fading. The sun was lowering and it was beginning to snow. In the distance he heard a wolf howling at the edge of the moon on the horizon. Within five minutes, the sun was gone. But so was Grunt. He was wondering where the sun goes after it sets, so he headed west. He was running, trying to keep up with it. He wondered what would happen once he got to the other horizon. So then he stopped. He knew he had reached the next horizon. But he didn’t see anything different. He just saw an icy stretch of water, showing the last rays of the day. He looked around. He was standing at the top of a very tall, chalk cliff. The sun was there, on the freezing water. It was glinting like gold under torchlight. Grunt knew he could go no further, so he turned back. Then, his eyes widened as big as the sun. The pack of wolves had smelt him out!

The wolves were cornering him. He tried to calm them, but these wolves looked far from taming. Then, he pulled out his crude stone knife. Grunt knew that the chances of surviving with a mere stone knife against a pack was very small. He didn’t rush towards the wolves. He would wait for them to come to him. The wolves realised that if he was not afraid of them, then he wasn’t a weak target. The wolves backed off.

He tried to shiver about this close encounter, but he didn’t shiver. He stomped his foot on the icy rocks.

When he returned home, he received a lot of scorn. Grunt said, “I was just trying to learn how to shiver.”

But the Old Man said, “If you want to learn how to shiver, go out into the world. Then you will learn how to shiver by the end of a day.”

Chapter 2

So, for the second time in half an hour, Grunt was out in the bitter cold having no idea where he was going. He just kept walking south. He knew that if he went down it would get warmer, so he just kept walking and walking and walking and walking. Then, he fainted. He was extremely cold. He woke up in the morning under six feet of snow. He continued his journey south, determined to learn how to shiver.

Soon, winds from the west were whipping up the snow, so he had no sense of direction. The snow was thickening in his eyes, and his hand and tongue were red with cold. In the distance, he saw a cave. The cave was pitch black, blacker than night.

Grunt, without thinking of the consequences, stepped in the cave. Then, a wolf jumped out of the darkness!

Grunt realised that he either would have to become friends with this wolf or he would have to invade the cave and push him out into the snow. The wolf snarled at Grunt, and Grunt snarled back. No, he could not make friends with the wolf because the wolf would not give him enough time to before the wolf consumed him. Grunt realised that he was becoming less patient for the wolves. Anyway, now that he was out in the wild alone, everything was his enemy.

Grunt was a very strong caveman. He was not an adult yet, so he didn’t have the strength to throw the boulder at his cave into the air, but he was still very strong. He got to high-ground, which in this case was a rock. The wolf could not get up there. The wolf was ready to jump into the air a soon as Grunt would.

Grunt jumped, and kicked as he did. This resulted in a couple of shattered teeth for the wolf. The dog left the cave, limping. Grunt could see the red stain of blood pouring from his mouth on to the fresh snow. Soon, the wolf disappeared into the cloudy blizzard.

Grunt realised two problems. He had no idea where food would be at this time, because he had never hunted in those condition and where would he get water. In his old home, there had been a cool mountain spring. Grunt set his sights on exploring the cave. To do that he needed to find a fire. He knew how to make fire. He had a chunk of flint in his pocket. He saw two thick logs at the edge of the darkness.

The logs were lit, and the fire that was roaring was nice and cozy. The cave was huge, and the fire shone upon a waterfall. This waterfall was going into a hole in the cave below, which was were the water flowed into a deep, dark, ravine. After a long day of exploring, Grunt fell asleep.

 

Chapter 3

Grunt realised that he had still not learned how to shiver. He had heard absolutely horrible stories about the south. He had to go there. He heard that there were these strange and wicked creatures called “Humans”. The humans called them Cavemen. That was offensive, thought Grunt. They were the Neanderthals. He would prove to them that these tricky and cunning people would make him shiver, and he, Grunt, would conquer all the land. Grunt smiled a toothy, evil, grin. He had traveled miles away from home. Cavemen can travel at a surprisingly fast rate: 20 miles per hour. The cavemen literally powerwalk.  Grunt had traveled something around 300 miles. He had left his cave back in the area where the city Oslo is to Stockholm. Stockholm is where Grunt was sitting in his cave.

Grunt got up from the ground and picked up his flint and headed outside of the cave. He started journeying South. Then a stampede occurred.

It was no regular stampede. Today our stampedes resemble that of wildebeests charging across the African country and buffalos charging across the fields of America. Back then, the stampede was of huge, bulky mammoths. Their great horns were very dangerous and in the north they were aggressive to cavemen.

Grunt realised that he had no choice but to run for his life. The beating of the feet got louder from the mammoth and they were crashing into one another and having fights amongst themselves. Grunt stopped running. He looked at the mammoth. Two huge mammoths were fighting to become the leader of the tribe. The biggest mammoth executed a blow upon the other mammoth. The other mammoth attempted to get the mammoth which had hit him back but that mammoth simply deflected it. That is exactly what the biggest mammoth did until the other mammoth was so exhausted that he felt on the ground. The mammoth comrades moved on with the new leader leaving him in the snow to get up.

The mammoth continued on to stampede. Grunt got out of their way and cautiously went to the mammoth. Grunt held back with his hands but then quickly he touched the ivory horn of the mammoth. The mammoth was suddenly alert. His eyes fluttered open. But when the mammoth saw him, to Grunt’s surprise, the mammoth did not attack.

The mammoth picked himself up and stared down at Grunt with huge black eyes. He softly cooed to Grunt to come and touch his horn. Grunt did not know that the mammoth had asked this but he still thought that the cooing sound was inviting him to touch the mammoth. So he did. Grunt had an idea. He could ride on the mammoth to get to the South and conquer the humans. Then he tried to climb up to the mammoth. The mammoth showed no resistance. So then he kicked the side of the mammoth gently and the mammoth went roughly on the same direction he wanted to go. South. They rode for hours and hours. Finally Grunt saw something memorable. He saw a huge unfrozen ocean and in the distance he saw what is

today mainland Europe.

 

 

CHAPTER 4

Grunt realised that he could not take the mammoth with him. Grunt also realised that he had a problem. He had no idea how to swim.

 

Sophie Style 1: The Big Move

Hey you,

Do you want to hear a story about a girl (me) with an extremely pathetic life? If yes, you have come to the right place. So sit back and relax, and make sure to strap on your seatbelts because here we go.

 

 

Hi, I am Sophie, and let me tell you some things about me:

 

  1. I live in a family of four kids.

 

  1. My dad and mom passed away.

 

  1. My best friend lives far away so I email her a lot.

 

  1. Nothing is more important to me than my pet puppy named Sweetie Pie.

 

So anyway, I was sitting on my bed Friday night petting Sweetie Pie and listening to the song “22” on my newest edition record player, until I heard my grandpa call, “Dinner time kids!” and we all came down to dinner. Here are my siblings, all in order, and how they act: My big brother, Andrew is so lucky. He is nineteen and hasn’t moved out yet. He will go to college late because no one accepted him. He is lucky because:

 

  1. He has a girlfriend. (Hey, I tell you, it is kind of fun to have a girl in the house that is not my annoying big sister.)

 

  1. He is the oldest. (You know, being the oldest sounds cool. If I didn’t know my grandpa any better, I would think he liked Andrew the best.)

 

  1. Because my grandpa MIGHT like him best. (He can be bossy, yell, get what he wants, break the rules, etc.)

 

My big sister Talia, is, like, so annoying! She can really bug me. And worse, she doesn’t REALLY care. If she did care, she would blame it on Andrew when she does something wrong like drop me on the stairs when I was a baby. Andrew and Talia. The thought of them in the same sentence makes me say, “Uh-uh.” Anyway, all she cares about is her BFF Georgia, boys, and makeup. She is eighteen and will attend college soon. She is going in the middle of the year. Grandma wants to carry on the tradition because our dad moved in the middle of the year and so he attended college late, so we are doing that to Talia.

My brother, David, is, like, just there to be there. In my own words, I just call him selfish. All he does is eat, sleep, talk (not much), feel things, and talk on the phone. He is not a normal person at all. He is seventeen and is wierd.

Then comes me, the awesome sibling, who saves the day and turns the saddest day into a happy one. Who makes Grandma smile and Grandpa laugh. And yet, they don’t do it to anyone but me. Except when Grandpa mumbles, “Dangit, Helen, do I have to be nice to this brat?” and I don’t know why. I’m fifteen. The age of all ages. Taylor Swift even wrote a song on it.

“Sophie! Dinnertime now,” Grandpa yelled. I grunted. He was not – N-O-T – in a good mood.

“Why Edward, was all good in business at the corner store today?” asked Grandma.

“Eh! Barely made fifteen dollars,” whispered Grandpa. I ran down the stairs. Not that I was interested in their conversation, but I was hungry, very hungry.

“Hi, Sophie,” smiled Grandma. See? I make it work.

“Hi, little mouse,” frowned Grandpa.

“Hey, Soph. Soph, what’s up, girlfriend?” shouted Talia.

“Umm, hi?” I said.

“Smooch!” Whoops! Not a scene I want to look at. Andrew and his girlfriend, Valerie, were kissing. I wasn’t in the mood for some love and cracka-lackin in my meal so I acted with attitude and groove. As Talia says.

“Kissy kissy! Is that my hello?” I asked with attitude.

“Oh. One second Val, I need to greet my sis. Hi Sophie. Kiss kiss,” he said. Sometimes, I just HATE that guy. Smoochin away.

“Pork is dinner,” announced Grandma.

“Thanks for the quote-unquote ‘announcement’ but I got a diner date,” Talia said sarcastically.

“Alright if no one will ask me ‘who?’  then I’ll say it. Since no one bothers to ask what happened in summer school you missed the excitement that I am president of student council. I am interviewing someone. I am pretty upset that even Sophie, the obnoxious one, didn’t ask me what I am wearing,” whined Talia.

“That’s wonderful, Talia,” smiled Grandma.

“Except the part where you accused Sophie and Andrew of being obnoxious. What did they do wrong? So grow up,” frowned Grandpa. See? He’s got my back. In a good way. I ate my dinner.

“Okay, guys, I’m leaving. Love you, Grandma. Grandpa, I’ve got to say, for your second granddaughter. Give a woman her respect.” And with that she turned around. Grandpa raised his eyebrows.

“Yeah, I’ll give you respect. I’ll hold the door open so any time you want,  you can exit the family,” snickered Grandpa. Did I mention that it’s tradition that when Grandpa raises his eyebrows it means he is mad? Oops! “Helen, do me a favor. Prepare some mulligan stew so I can crush my anger away?” asked Grandpa.

“Coming right up,” smiled Grandma.

Whoops! Not the scene I want to see. This means we will have a family talk.

“Valerie,” I bugged.

“Hi, Sophie. What’s up?” answered Valerie.

“Hey, Sophie. Could you do me a favor? Just stop bugging my girlfriend?” chuckled Andrew.

“Oh, I like it,” smiled Valerie.

“I like it,” changed Andrew. Well, that was odd. We went upstairs. Oops! I forgot to tell you my secret. Before Valerie and Andrew were boyfriend and girlfriend, me, my bff Gina, and Valerie were all BFFs. Just to not upset Andrew, hahaha! We haven’t told him.

“Whenever Grandpa asks for mulligan stew he wants to discuss something. I have a secret device where I can hear what he is saying without getting an angry face at me,” I explained.

“Cool. But Andrew?” she asked.

“We’ll let him suffer,” I answered.

I took my special two-person earphones, plugged them in to the phone, and we listened to his conversation.

“Guys, please put Talia on the phone,” we heard on the secret device and guessed that was Grandpa talking.

“Hey guys. You know, it’s my job as interviewer to…” we knew that was Talia.

“Take her off,” Grandpa commanded.

“That’s the face I don’t like to see,” I nodded.

“So we have some exciting news for the family,” Grandma announced. We couldn’t believe Andrew and David (not really David) weren’t talking. They were probably speechless. Since when is family talk exciting?

“Your grandmother got a job in California as a waitress!” we thought that was Grandpa again.

“California.” We guessed it was Andrew’s voice. “No, Grandma, don’t leave us in Westport,” he whined.

“Guess what? You are moving with us!” Grandma said.

I unplugged my earphones immediately.

“Gina!” Valerie and I both shouted. She lived in California! If we were moving there, we could all see each other!

“Pinch me,” I cried with joy. She pinched me. Wow, that wasn’t a hard pinch.

“Let’s email her,” I suggested.

I grabbed my laptop.

 

To: Gina Forgeive

From: Sophie & Valerie

 

Dear Gina,

Please reply immediately because this isn’t just a hello from Westport. You will NOT believe this but my grandma just announced she got a new job in California and we are moving. We love you and we can tell you the detes (Town, address eg).

Sincerely,

Valerie and Sophie

 

“Good?” I asked.

“Perfect,” she replied. Now there was only one more thing to do: call Talia and tell her the great news. I hope I mentioned I HATE my sister. But I thought it was the right thing to do.

“What are you doing?” asked Valerie.

“Telling Talia,” I answered.

“Haha funny joke. Really, what are you doing?” she asked.

“Shh. Hi Talia,” I said.

“Hey guys, you know, as an interviewer and president for city council I am sometimes busy. It would be my honor to read your voicemail. If emergency, call at 914-327-2419. Thank you.”

Ugh. So that’s the stupid voice mail my sister has.

“Talia. This is an emergency! We are moving to California because Grandma got a job. If you think you are thinking this in your mind I will repeat… we are moving to California! So bye,” I messaged.

“Let’s go,” urged Valerie.

“Shh,” I whispered as we headed down the stairs. They were still talking. We listened.

“We are moving in August to Los Angeles and I feel bad that the two people not at the meeting are Sophie and Talia because their friends live in the same neighborhoods,” smiled Grandpa.

I gasped. Valerie gasped. We ran upstairs and emailed Gina again.

 

To: Gina Foregeive

From: Sophie

 

I am moving to Los Angeles on August 1st. Looking forward to seeing you.

 

-Valerie and Sophie

We went downstairs.

“Hi guys,” I smiled.

“I’ll email you and Talia the big news,” Grandma assured.

Then, after a little chitter chatter, this is the story of us playing monopoly. And somehow Grandpa always makes us play his way. Rules of his way:

 

  1. Jail:

If Grandpa gets put in jail, he can pay one dollar to the bank. If anyone else goes to jail, they have to pay fifty dollars to the bank.. If Grandpa wants to automatically pass jail three times, he puts ten dollars in the bank. Anyone else pays two hundred dollars.

 

  1. Properties:

If Grandpa wants to buy a property but he has no money, he doesn’t have to do any type of math like mortgaging. He may just grab 200 dollars from the bank. Anyone else has to mortgage.

Mortgage:                           

If anyone but Grandpa would like to buy a property, they must do the math of subtracting their properties on the board to find the exact amount.

 

Houses/Hotels

When you buy a property, it will give you the information of the cost. If you have a monopoly, you may put on a house or hotel. The cost depends on the property. It will say it on the card. However, for Grandpa, he may put houses without a monopoly for only the brown, blue and orange properties.

 

What Grandpa needs:

Three dice

20 of 1, 5, 10, 20, 100, 100 of 500

He always is the money bag

 

What you need:

Two dice

5 of 1, 5, 10, 6 of 20, 100 1 of 500

Multiple choice pieces

 

I know, right!?!? He is so unfair. I don’t even have to tell you who always wins. Whenever you know who wins first he shouts, “Monopoly!” and then he says “Go to bed kidlets.” But to top all that, at the same time Talia came running in.

“Hey Grandma, congrats to the job! So psyched to move!” smiled Talia. I had never seen her so happy since… ever! Except. well, maybe when I was born. And I always love to hear the story when she was so loving that she was having a baby sister that when I was one years old, she put eye-shadow on me and told my mother that I should get the hang of it because when I’m older I should be a make-up freak like her.

“What are you guys playing? Some Grandpa monopoly?” asked Talia.

“Yes, Lia, now put your stuff down and you can tell us all about the meeting,” chuckled Grandma with joy.

“Okay, I guess I will hear all about the meeting,” I fakely grinned.

“Go to BED!” screamed Grandpa. I went to bed. Upstairs I could hear Andrew watching the football game and Valerie was sitting there eating popcorn. I felt bad for Valerie. She could do so much better picking a boyfriend. If I had to pick someone right now you know who I would pick? I always love to prove my friends wrong inside my head so to be funny I took out the list of my dream man and started to stare at it:

 

Notes on dream man:

 

Dreamy blue eyes+

Wavy blonde hair+

Cute smile+

Good sense of humor+

Likes me as much as I like him+

Can take my pathetic life and flexibility even when I goof = Eric

 

Eric IS NOT my crush but we share some pathetic coincidences. He fits all these details and I know they are very rare to fit (at least the last two sentences). I mean, he is a prince and I’m a girl who has fantasies about him. But to Eric, I am a princess in disguise. I think. But I am in the mood for fantasy. “Me and Eric kissing in a tree, goodnight, princess me,” I muttered.

“Buzz! Buzz!” Ugh! Shut up computer. I needed to sleep. My eyes flickered open. Sweetie Pie licked me. “ Love you, Sweetie Pie, but why did they ever program it to do that?” I asked myself. When I was younger, me and Gina programed my computer to say when I got an email, “Buzz! Buzz! You got mail! You got mail!” now I regret it. Speaking of Gina this was her email:

 

To: Sophie Resnick

From: Gina

 

OMG! So sorry for late response, there is this boy, Theo, and he can’t stop emailing me so I decided not to bother checking my email. So psyched. My same neighborhood! Email me the following when you can:

What time is the flight:

Which airport will you land in:

What is the address:

When I know all that, we can visit each other. Also, I meant to tell you someone named Rosa will call you. Don’t ignore. She is my BFF in my California school. But when you move to my school, we can all be BFFs!

Love,

Gina

 

With all that in my brain, wow, was I really confused! Reasons:

 

  • I think she forgot it was not all about her.
  • She is too obsessed with me (I kind of want her to take a chill pill so we can hang out).
  • Who is Rosa and did she replace me?

 

I quickly called Valerie.

“I have news,” I said.

“Ugh! Sophie! It’s 6:00. What’s up? Good news or bad?” she asked.

“First of all, Gina responded. So at 7:00 come over and read it. Second of all, we might be replaced by someone as BFF,” I told her.

“Sounds like an emergency. See you in a few! Also, when I get there, I will have to spend time with Andrew. He is feeling left out. Okay? I’ll get to you,” shouted Valerie.

I hung up on her. Whatevs. She was not seeing the point. Suddenly, I got a call from Rosa.

“Hi,” Rosa said with what sounded like a smile.

“Hey,” I answered.

“So I hear you are Gina’s OLD friend. I feel so bad. I felt like I was teaching a dog to talk. You probably told her nothing about the real world,” she said sarcastically.

“Oh, okay. Gina is such a good friend. She told me about you. She talks about you a lot,” I smiled back.

“I know, right? I am so cool as a friend. I think you are now her and my BFF. When we were doing our handshake, which is so clever of Gina to make up, boom chicka BFF, right?, so anyway, she said she missed you but I remind her of you. And to get over you, she has me as a replacement,” boasted Rosa.

I started to cry. I made up the boom chicka BFF for me, Valorie, and Gina! I was being replaced. I quickly said, “Talk to you later. Got to go,” and hung up. I cried and cried. I went into Talia’s room and knocked on the door.

“Yes,” answered Talia.

“I need advice,” I whispered.

“Braces look better than retainers,” interrupted Talia.

“No! Have you ever been the third wheel?” I asked.

“Yes! I have never been a second wheeler on a bike for like ever. You know I have training wheel difficulties. Don’t bug me Sophie!” answered Talia.

“No like in a threesome of friends,” I explained.

“Math and friends in the same sentence? You must really need advice,” smiled Talia as she FINALLY let me in!

“So I have two friends,” I started.

“Ugh! Are you and Sammie STILL friends!” interrupted Talia.

“No! Not since kindergarten. Talia, listen. So my friend Gina moved to California and she met a girl named Rosa. Now I am being replaced,” I explained.

“Two questions. First of all, what does this have to do with Sammie and Gina?” asked Talia.

“It doesn’t! Just my other friend and her were all friends,” I whined.

“Okay. Number two, why do you need advice? Great, Rosa sounds like a foolish name and is not very punctual but I don’t see MY part in the story!” answered Talia.

“Ugh! What should I do?” I asked.

“I say be BFFs with Rosa and forget Gina. It sounds like she forgot you!” suggested Talia.

I shrugged at her. It wasn’t a bad idea. But again, she didn’t know who she was talking about.

“GINA? No no no no no she is my best friend. But thanks,” I smiled.  I emailed Gina.

 

To: Gina Forgeive

From: Sophie

 

Got the call from Rosa. Call me when you can!

 

-Sophie

 

I wanted to tell Gina how coconuts she was that she even thought about talking to Rosa at all. She so betrayed me. I couldn’t believe it, so to express myself I wrote her a letter in the mail.

 

Dear Gina,

 

I got Rosa’s call. I thought the ‘boom chicka BFF’ was OUR handshake. For starters, you replaced me and told her all of me, you and Valerie’s secrets. I know it is rough stuff in California but could you please, please, please tell me why this is happening?

 

Love,

 

Sophie

 

I tried not to cry. Sweetie Pie barked. “Oh good girl!” I sniffled, grabbing a tissue. Sweetie Pie went over to my desk and grabbed a piece of paper. I turned it over. It was a picture of me, Valerie, and Gina. I crossed Gina out and put the words “With Rosa” under her name.

“Sweetie Pie! You want me to walk you, don’t you?” I guessed.

“Arf!” barked Sweetie Pie. So I grabbed her leash and went for a walk.

Along the walk, Sweetie Pie saw a dog, the same breed as her. They looked so similar.

“They like each other!” exclaimed the owner of the other dog.

“Her name is Sweetie Pie. What is yours?” I asked. The owner looked exactly my age and was so pretty.

“Her name is Angel Pony. And I am Lily. What school are you going to this fall?” she asked.

“Hi Lily. I am Sophie.  Are you new in the town? I am going to be going to this school called Rumbling Acres. You?” I asked.

“I am new! I am also going to Rumbling Acres! Gee, I thought I would never make a new friend but here I am,” explained Lily.

Angel Pony licked me. Sweetie Pie licked Lily.

“Hey, what’s your email? Mine is LilyLargsburg@yahoo.com,” she said.

Sophie922@gmail.com,” I answered, smiling.

“I’ll email you” said Lily.

“Okay, bye Lily!” I grinned walking back towards my house. I was so happy that I wanted to scream. When I got home, Valerie was with Andrew.

“Hey Sophie,” greeted Valerie. I pulled her towards the stairs.

“So what’s this Gina business?” asked Valerie. I told her everything that had happened today.

“And she was so friendly to me, her name is Lily” I explained.

“Lily? Largsburg? You have got to be kidding me! I know a Fifi Largsburg I met just yesterday and wow! She seems so cool!” shouted Valerie. My computer buzzed.

 

To: Sophie Resnick

From: Lily

 

Dear Sophie,

 

What is your address! I might be able to come for breakfast tomorrow morning? Nice meeting you with Angel Pony and Sweetie Pie. Your dog is the cutest! Since this is my first year at Rumbling Acres, could you help me out with answering these questions?
Who are the kids I should watch out for?

Who should I sit with at lunch?

 

What are the classes that I should pay attention to?

 

Do I need lunch money?

 

-Lily Largsburg

 

Valerie read the email and I wrote back,

 

Dear Lily,

 

My address is 1245 Ocean Beach,  Solana Beach Cove.

  1. Don’t worry who you sit with. I am always open.
  2. Don’t ask me! Whichever subjects interest you. Just pay attention in math because they have this test and I got a C for not paying attention.
  3. Luckily, our cafeteria lets us use our accounts or gives checks on our lunch. No money needed.

 

-Sophie

 

P.S My friend knows your big sister

Jackson 5

Chapter 1

The Buying Day

 

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon Jackson wanted to get Nerf water Super Soakers and frisbees so they can take a break from singing but all the Nerf water guns were sold out/expensive. The frisbees were so big that they only had a big size. And it’s too expensive.

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon Jackson were looking for another thing. They were looking at some nerf super soakers. They wanted to buy them so they could have a water gun fight. One was little, one medium, and one was big. You could take off the bottom and the back of the big one. The bottom was where you put the water and the back just made it look bigger or smaller. The small one looked like you could do it with the trigger but you couldn’t. You just pump it and water comes out. You put water in at the very top and back. The medium one had a very long aimer. It also shot with the pump. They all did. It had effects that made it look long.

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon Jackson wanted to buy the guns but they ran out of money. They spent all their money on the Xbox 360. It was $249.99. That’s like nine hundred dollars!

 

Chapter 2

Aladdin’s Cave

 

The Jackson 5 left the store. Their voices hurt. That was good because they wanted to buy water guns because it hurt to talk. They were going to a cave that was rich so they could find Aladdin. If they found Aladdin, he could get them money so they could buy all the toys in the mall. They went to a cave near the store and found a magic mirror that said, “To Aladdin’s Cave”. Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon jumped through the magic mirror and it came with them. Michael picked it up. When he pushed it against his hand it shrunk.

“It could do that?” said Michael.

Michael picked it up and put it in his pocket.

He was looking for Aladdin in the cave with the Jackson 5. It was full of treasure and they were looking all over the cave. It was 300 miles wide and deep. Then they walked 300 miles deep and 150 miles, because of a magic mirror. They saw a magic lamp. Michael picked up the lamp and poured it out like a magic teacup and Aladdin came out. He said,” You can only get three wishes,” in French.

They found a speaker to translate English into French. The speaker was in an emerald and Michael got a pickaxe so he could pickaxe the emerald. He got it.

They all made their wishes. Everyone wanted at least $300. So they wished for all that money. The second wish was a ginormous frisbee. Their third wish was a big castle.

They became king, king, king, king, and king and knight, knight, knight, knight, and knight, and bishop, bishop, bishop, bishop, and bishop, and prince, prince, prince, prince, and prince.

 

 

Michael, Jackie, Tito, Jermaine, and Marlon played with the frisbee. They played fetch. They all took turns throwing and fetching.

When they had finished playing with the frisbee, they went to the mall and bought every single super soaker.They brought all the toys from the mall to the castle. Yo it’s big, it’s rad, it’s brown and it’s made out of everything. It’s a thousand feet in every way, high to the side, wide… The castle can teleport. They went inside and played frisbee.  They were hot from playing frisbee, so they used their nerf super soakers to have a water gun fight. Everyone lost and everyone won.

They were having so much fun they didn’t even miss singing.

 

Chapter 3

The Breaking Toys

 

The Jackson 5 were playing with their toys. They had a cloning machine they bought with all the money they had and then when they were playing with their toys, something very, very, very, weird happened. The toys came alive! They all went in the cloning machine, even the Jackson 5. Then all the clones were doing the same thing as the people who cloned them were. They had a big fight. One person got hurt. It was Marlon, because he broke his bone. The frisbees were throwing themselves like a blade in the sky! The water guns were shooting like a bullet!

They were glad they cloned themselves. They wanted to get out because they missed singing. They wanted to go back to Aladdin. The toys were trying to block them so they couldn’t get out the door!

 

Chapter 4

The Happy Ending

 

They couldn’t get past the door. They went up to the tippy top of the castle and they found a secret ladder. They tried the lamp up at the tippy top of the castle and the only words said, “too high up. You can only do it in Aladdin’s cave.” They tried to go down the ladder and it was Aladdin’s cave! The same as they always went in. But Aladdin moved the cave under the castle. They used the lamp and it worked. They wished that all their toys would not be alive anymore. And for a thousand parachutes so they could freefall. And their last wish was all their voices back!

Once they got their voices back they went on a concert stage and sang.

“ABC! Easy as 123! Simple as do-re-mi, ABC, 1-2-3, baby you and me, girl!”

 

The End!!

 

 

The Adventures of Hillel: Going Nuclear

Hi everybody, Hillel here. I’m going to tell you about another war. We had to arm and train an army so we could destroy the rebellions of the cat war. See we destroyed the cat army but the regular cats on the planet of cats apparently were armed by the government and were prepared to fight if the actual army lost, which they did, so we had to fight a bunch of untrained citizens. There was a council meeting of what else we should do. As I am the head of the CIA, I was invited so that’s where I was going. Finally, I got there. “Hello General Hillel, take a seat,” General Avraham said, “We were just about to discuss a nuclear attack on the planet of cats.”

“Why would you do that? We know that there are some innocent cats who do not support the war we can not kill them,” I said.

“War calls for some sacrifices,” said General Avraham.

“I will not have the military kill innocent people,” I said. I was getting worked up by then.

“I will not kill innocent people,” I repeated. I could tell by the looks that I was getting from the other Generals and Admirals at the meeting that I was reddening at the ears, which happens to me when I am getting mad.

“It would be barking mad not to plan a nuclear attack on the cat army,” replied General Avraham.

“No. What would be barking mad would be to plan a nuclear attack. There are thousands of innocent cats who didn’t have anything to do with the cat war or what is going on with us and the cat army. We can’t just kill them all,” I said.

This was really getting out of hand. You cannot just go around killing innocent civilians. I thought that when I got home, that I should tell my mom and dad all about this conversation I had with my brother. My mom and dad thought that I was right. They said they would talk to my brother and make him see sense.

Most of the Generals and Admirals agree with me. Now, with the Generals and Admirals at my side, I went to another council meeting. And now the council board finally saw me right and we did not bomb cat world. Little did I know that General Avraham was with his closest members of the army and the CIA right then planning a secret nuclear attack, even though the council had denied his request for a nuclear attack. I did not even notice when he didn’t show up for the next few Council Meetings, I just had too much on my hands.

I’ve been having to think up ways that I can attack the cat army without having to bomb them. I’ve been talking to some of my highest-ranking generals and most of them say that that the best idea would be to do what we were doing then and there: use our army because even if they have more soldiers than us, they are untrained. For instance, General Mcgeorge was saying that we were beating them as it is, why stop now. But my conscience told me that they were going to start training as well.

I was going to visit my brother (We made up. Avraham gave in.) and have lunch with him. We were in the middle of chicken when the phone rang. brrrrrrrrrrrring. “I’ll get it,” said Avraham.

I headed to go to the bathroom. But then I overheard my brother on the phone.

“Okay, we’ll do it next week,” my brother whispered.

There was a pause where I couldn’t hear anything.

My brother answered back, “We will secretly bomb the cat planet two weeks from now.”

I knew what was going on. I had thought that my brother has seen sense, but then again, I should have remembered that he was always a stubborn man.

I grabbed my coat and raced out the door. I got home and quickly informed my closest

colleagues. And we decided we would build a secret bomb shelter for all the normal citizens.

Meanwhile Avraham had not been showing up to work which probably meant he

knew that I knew that he was going to bomb. But I could not deal with that now, because we needed to secretly, as not to be attacked, build a bomb shelter. We sent a team of builders and a good 500 tons of bedrock, tools and supplies. We loaded them all to a big spaceship with a bunch of little capsules because if we took just the big spaceship down, the cat army would definitely see. We had to take the tools in one capsule. The bedrock took up seventy capsules. All the people went in one capsule. I couldn’t think straight. My brother was maddening me. I didn’t see how I could be related to this oppressor.

My Admiral came to me. “I hacked into your brother’s phone calls,” he said. “Your

brother’s plans are going faster than your brother thought would happen.”

“So we have to accelerate,” I said.

“Yes, but that was what I was also going to tell you. Some of our builders also got attacked by the cat army, but they didn’t find out about what we are building.” he said.

“I can not believe it. How did the cat army find out?!” I said.

He did not have time to reply, because we just saw Avraham’s big warship. It was huge and there was a nuclear bomb. Oh-No! He’s attacking! I had an idea. I turned on the microphone. “Avraham surrender or we will open fire!”I say into it.

“No!”I heard Avraham’s voice say.

“I am landing my ship! You will have to kill me, too!” I say while landing my ship!

I waited for Avraham to fire but he didn’t. “I will let you build your bomb shelter and then I’ll bomb.”

I couldn’t believe it.

 

The

End

 

 

 

 

 

The Question Mark Asks One Question

First a question mark went to work and got one hundred dollars a day. Then he asked everybody one question, and everybody kept getting it wrong. The question was, “What candy cannot go anywhere on time?” The only one who got it right were the presidents. Everybody else on earth got it wrong.

Then, he asked a kid a question. The kid’s name was Jacob.

“What candy cannot go anywhere on time?” the question mark asked.

The question mark also said, “If you get the answer right, you will get a lot of dollars!”

Jacob said, “Can I have all the dollars?”

But, question mark said, “No! You have to figure out the answer first.”

So, Jacob didn’t answer it.

Then question mark asked all the other kids, but they got it wrong.

One kid said, “A candy cane because he can’t walk.” But, that was not the right answer, because he could get on a wheelchair and go on a school bus and go to the school so that was not the right answer.

Another kid said, “M&Ms but he can slide.” The third person said, “Air heads, but he can fly.” Then the question mark asked a parent and the parent said, “Taffy. But, the taffy can get wheels and then he could drive like a car.”

“That was not the right answer. You do not get a lot of dollars. It’s time to say bye-bye.”

Then question mark asked another parent and said, “Ice breakers. He’s a wheel, so he could just use one wheel to get there.”

The third parent said, “Gum. But he can make an airplane.” So, the question mark said “That was not the right answer.”

So he asked the presidents and all of them said, “Chocolate! Because at the end it says l-a-t-e. Late!”

Then the question mark gave an equal amount of money to each of the presidents. He felt good because the presidents should know everything because they had a good education.

 

The End

 

Emily Spivonson no. 1, Emily’s Full Name

Chapter #1  No! Not Ruby!

It was Saturday, and Emily was tired. “Emilia!” cried one of the orphanage ladies. The orphanage ladies mostly spoke spanish, which was very difficult for the orphanage girls. Emily was 8 years old, her birthday was September 12, and she lived in an orphanage. It was the year 1890. She’d been there since she was 2. Her parents were killed by the latest invention, the hair dryer. It fell in the bath and her parents had forgotten to unplug it. The name of the orphanage was Ragged Orphanage. The orphanage was in New York City on the Upper West Side. The orphanage lady always woke her up very early to do her chores. She needed to sweep the floors and scrub the windows.

At the orphanage, all the girls had to wear the same clothes. Their clothes were gray dresses. All the girls slept in a big room on beds made of itchy wool.

Emily got out of bed groaning. She got dressed and went to go fill her bucket with water. She watched as the other orphanage girls went to fill up their buckets. Emily was friends with all the orphan girls except for one girl. Her name was Joanna. Joanna was bigger and older than Emily. She had red curly hair and brown eyes. Emily was always being bullied by Joanna.

“Hey!” yelled Joanna. “Thats my bucket!”

“No, it’s mine!” Emily yelled.

“Niñas!” cried one of the orphanage ladies. All of a sudden the door opened. Everybody stared. Somebody walked in the door. Not many people came to Ragged Orphanage. It was a lady in very nice clothes. She was wearing a big yellow dress and a big hat with flowers on it. She had lots of freckles and very blonde hair. She was also very tall.

“Hello,” she said. “My name is Jane Wreath.”

“Hello!” said the girls in unison. They all wanted to be the one to be adopted that day.

“I want a girl with blonde hair,” said the lady.

Half of the shoulders in the orphanage dropped.

“And I want the girl to have curly hair and blue eyes,” said the lady.

Did Emily have blue eyes? But curly hair? No. Emily was very sad. The lady looked at Emily’s best friend Ruby. “That one!” she said. “I want that one!”

Emily felt her heart stop with pain. When somebody got adopted at the orphanage, the girls had to clap, but not many of them felt like it. Ruby smiled.

“Go pack your bags!” said the lady.

All the girls came with her as she went to pack her bag. When they got up to the room, Emily said to Ruby, “I’m so sad you’re leaving!”

“It’s okay! I’ll come to visit,” said Ruby.

But Emily was not so sure. Many of her friends had said that but never came to visit.

“Well, I really have to go now,” said Ruby. Then Ruby, carrying her bag, went downstairs. After a moment, Emily followed. Everybody clapped as she left. Joanna gave Emily a long, mean, smile. She could tell what Emily was thinking. Emily was thinking that she would never see her best friend ever again. Tears started to well up in her eyes.

“I guess it is time to start my chores” whispered Emily. She picked up her bucket and her mop and started cleaning.

Emily was mopping the floor of the bedroom that all the girls slept in, when one of the orphanage girls, named Haddie, stopped what she was doing because she saw that Emily was really sad. She came over and gave Emily a hug.

“Thanks,” said Emily.

“Sure,” said Haddie.

Haddie was new to the orphanage and she didn’t have many friends yet. Haddie was 6 and she was a small girl with very blonde hair and blue eyes, just like Emily. She had a small squeaky voice, too. She was very shy, but she was also very kind. They hadn’t really talked much before.

“You know, you’re not so bad,” said Emily.

None of the girls were really fond of Haddie. They all complained that she was so small, but Emily didn’t mind. They thought it was strange that she was the one that had to clean the high windows and not the tallest girls. It was harder for the taller girls, but Haddie was so small and light that it was easier to climb on the ladder to the higher windows.

“What do you mean?” said Haddie. “All the other girls like me, too, don’t they?”

“Well, honestly, they’re really jealous that you’re the one that gets to clean the high windows and not them.”

“Oh,” said Haddie in a small voice.

“But don’t worry, I’ll be your friend,” said Emily.

 

All the other girls were jealous of Haddie because when somebody cleaned the high windows, the orphanage ladies prized them by giving them their own bed for the night. Because not only did all the girls sleep in one big room, but two girls had to sleep in one bed. But for Haddie, sleeping in bed with two people was no big deal. The other girls tried complaining to the orphanage ladies that they needed the bed more than Haddie, but it didn’t work. The orphanage ladies just sat there, nodding their heads no, while munching on chips.

During the day, all the other bigger girls tried to trip Haddie and make the orphanage ladies think that Haddie was clumsy.

“Stop tripping me,” Haddie would say.

And then, the orphanage ladies would come and the bigger girl would say, “I didn’t do anything.” The orphanage ladies still didn’t believe any of the bigger girls. The bigger girls were Sophie, Casey, and even Joanna. Joanna was the worst of all. She wouldn’t just trip Haddie, but when the orphanage ladies came, she would pretend that Haddie had hit her.

She would moan and clutch her hand to her arm. She would yell, “She hit me, she hit me!”

The orphanage ladies would just yell in their Spanish accent, “Back to work!”

Emily was very tired of Joanna. She tried explaining to the orphanage ladies what really happened, but the orphanage ladies could not understand a word and thought that that meant she wouldn’t listen and so they yelled at them, “Back to work!”

One day, when the girls were all taking a stroll in the park, as they did every day, except for in the winter, Emily found a little lizard. Emily had a brilliant idea. She put the lizard in her pocket and they headed off back to the orphanage. They ate their dinner and then Emily went upstairs to master her plan before Joanna came up.

The next morning, Emily woke up to Joanna screaming, “There’s a lizard in my pillow, there’s a lizard in my pillow!” Her face was so red, it was like a very ripe apple.

Joanna ran downstairs screaming to the orphanage ladies, but since they always knew that she was faking Haddie hitting her arm, they didn’t believe her. Joanna came back upstairs stomping. “I’m going to get you back,” she said to Emily. Joanna knew it was Emily because in Joanna’s opinion, everything that went badly was Emily’s fault. But Emily didn’t believe she would do something just as bad.

They did all of their chores and went to the park again that day. Then, it was time to go to bed. Emily knew that Joanna was planning something bad, because right before she went to bed, Joanna gave her another one of her long, mean smiles.

 

Emily woke up in a pile of the orphanage ladies’ pickle chips. She was so angry at Joanna because Joanna knew that Emily was allergic to pickle chips.Emily knew that Joanna had done this because there were crumbs all over her face. Emily’s face was covered in red and her arms and legs stuck out into thin air. Emily got out of bed and stomped over to the bed where Joanna slept. Well, at least it seemed like she was stomping to Emily, but she was really limping on one foot.

“Joanna!” She screeched.

Joanna woke up, pretending to act normal. “I didn’t do anything. Oh my goodness, look at you! What happened?”

“You know what happened,” Emily said. “You were the one who did this.”

All of a sudden, the orphanage ladies came into the room.

“Emily!” They yelled. “What were you thinking?” They said again in their Spanish accents.

Emily pointed one wrinkly finger at Joanna. Joanna gasped in a very unreal way. The orphanage lady shook her finger ‘No.’ Emily gave a sour look to the orphanage lady. The other orphanage lady pointed toward the bathroom. Emily knew what they meant. Everytime she got all weird because of the pickle chips, she had to take a bath with not water, but tomato juice. She thought the tomato juice was so stinky that she always had the orphanage ladies give her a clothespin to put over her nose.

They had Emily sleep in the backyard that whole week while Joanna got to sleep in Emily’s bed and the person who slept in the same bed as Emily had to sleep with the person who slept with Joanna, so that Joanna got her own bed. The orphanage ladies were mad at Emily because they thought she was blaming it on Joanna, but they didn’t really know that it was really Joanna’s fault.

Just then, Emily had an even better plan. After she took the bath in tomato juice, she went and got a paper and pen. Then, she wrote on the piece of paper. At the top, she wrote: Advertisement. Then, after that, she wrote: Joanna (orphanage girl, $ 1,200) Hurry! Before she gets sold to someone else! When she was done, she went downstairs laughing and pinned the sign up to the pole next to the orphanage. Surprisingly, the next day a tall, plump lady came to the orphanage.

“I saw the sign, and I want to adopt this Joanna. Here is the money, now give me the girl.”

Emily had done it. She was so surprised and she was so happy. This time, she was happy that Joanna would leave, and so she did not clap, even though the orphanage ladies said they had to. This whole time Joanna was pale in the face.

 

Chapter #2  Carrie

The next few days were a dream come true. But not for very long. A couple of days later, a new girl was delivered to Ragged Orphanage. She was very tall and skinny. She towered over Emily. Her hair was very curly and blonde. She had very sharp, brown eyes. Emily knew she would be competing with this girl too.

“Hello,” said the girl in a very sharp voice. “I am Carrie Brown.”

“Why do you have two names?” Emily asked.

“What do you mean?” said Carrie. “Everybody has two names, a first and a last. Don’t you know that? Everybody knows that.”

“I don’t have a last name,” said Emily. “But I might get one when I’m adopted.”

“What do you mean, ‘adopted’?” said Carrie. “I was told I was coming to a palace. Not an orphanage! Lead me to my room, immediately.”

Emily led Carrie up to the big bedroom where all of the girls slept.

“Well, where’s my room?” said the girl.

“Well there’s your bed. You’re going to share a bed with me now.”

“What?! This is the worst place I’ve ever been to. How long have you been here?”

“Six years,” Emily said.

“Well, I’ve been here six minutes.” Carrie took her large suitcase and unpacked her beautiful clothes that many of the orphanage girls didn’t have.

“Here’s your uniform,” Emily said, handing her a grey dress.

“I don’t wear uniforms,” she said.

“Well, you do now,” Emily replied.

Carrie snorted. “Fine,” she said.

“What is that?” Asked Emily, pointing to a pile of coins that Carrie had.

“Money! Doesn’t anybody have some here?”

“I’ve never seen it before.”

“Well, I’m rich,” said Carrie. “Or was. I come from London. My building burnt down. I lived in one of the most beautiful houses in the whole country. Now, I’m in an orphanage in New York. This place is filthy! You use this money to buy things,” said Carrie. “For example, food.”

“I get my food at the orphanage by paying with these,” Emily scooped up a handful of the buttons she had in her bag. Carrie looked disgraced.

“This place should be better by the time I get adopted,” said Carrie.

“Mind if I give you a new nickname?” Emily asked,

“Like what?” Carrie replied.

“Mrs. Fancy Pants.”

“What do you think?”

“Um, yeah?”

“No!” Carrie yelled.

“Oh, and here are your buttons,” Emily said, smiling. That night Emily fell asleep watching Carrie sleep in her very formal way. For her first day, Carrie was not so bad. Emily woke up to find Carrie sewing a flower on her grey dress. Now Emily liked Carrie even better. After a few days, all of the other girls were sick of Carrie and Emily, because every day they only hung out with each other. Every time one of the orphanage girls saw Emily and Carrie, they groaned and buried their heads in their hands. Emily just smiled while Carrie went red with rage. The next day, when the girls went on their stroll through the park, Emily found the most cutest thing she had ever seen. It was small and fussy. Then Emily realized it was a hampster. She scooped it up in her hands and pet its head.

“I am going to name you Mis. Alice Fur…”

“— KK!” (Emily had nicknamed Carrie). “When you have two names, what do you call the last one!?”

“A last name.” Carrie replied.“Anyway, I am going to name you Miss Alice Furball.” The little hamster squeaked. “I am going to have to sneak you in,” Emily said again. That night Emily woke up to find the hamster running around like a mad dog all over the orphanage bedroom. It was squeaking like the loudest hamster she had ever heard. Everyone else was awake staring at Emily. Everyone knew it was Emily. It was so obvious because as soon as she woke up she gasped, “Miss Alice Furball, my hamster!”

Carrie was frowning the most out of all of them. As soon as she glanced at Carrie, Emily saw how upset Carrie was. She gave Carrie a little smile that made Carrie even more upset. All of a sudden, things got even worse. The orphanage ladies came into the room. The hamster all of a sudden jumped on Carrie. Carrie screamed and hollered. “Oh, what have you done, this hamster, ow ow ow!”

Now the hamster was going mad like all he ever wanted to do was jump in the orphanage and scare all the girls to death. All of a sudden, the hamster leaped on one of the orphanage ladies and bit her right on the finger. The orphanage lady shrieked and hollered in pain, just as Carrie had done. The orphanage lady fainted; all the orphanage girls except for Emily rushed over to her. The other orphanage lady walked over and grabbed Emily by the neck. Then, she noticed why the orphanage lady knew it was her. Carrie was pointing with her trembling finger straight at Emily. Emily burst into tears. She wished that it was still 8 days ago when Joanna was there. She wanted things to go back to normal.

The orphanage lady tossed Emily out the window. “Run away!”

Emily had damaged her leg very badly from falling out the window and could not walk. All of a sudden, the orphanage lady was still watching out the window, this other lady came over. She leaned over Emily. “Are you hurt?” she said.

Carrie came racing out the door to Emily’s side, as well. “Are you okay?” she added as well.

“I’m fine,” Emily said. “But, who are you?” she said, looking up at the other lady.

“My name is Mrs. Victoria Spivonson.”

Emily smiled up at her. “My name is Emily. I”m from the orphanage up there.” It seemed to be very high because Emily was lying on the ground because she couldn’t get up.

“I know,” Mrs. Spivonson said. “I watched that lady throw you out the window. I will take you if you like.”  Mrs. Spivonson decided to adopt Emily because she saw how badly the orphanage ladies treated her. “I will take you both.” Emily and Carrie both smiled at each other. They had very big smiles.

After a couple minutes of silence, Emily added, “Can I bring Miss Alice Furball, too?”

Mrs. Spivonson gave her a questioning look.

“Oh, just the hamster I found in the park.”

“What side of the park?” Mrs. Spivonson said.

“Umm, the West side, I think,” said Emily.

“How did you ever find her? And how did you ever guess her name?”

Emily gave Mrs. Spivonson a questioning look in return.

“Oh, that hamster belongs to me. I lost it in the park yesterday. But, you can have her now. Well, now I found my hamster and two girls while I was looking for my hamster,” Mrs. Spivonson said.

Mrs. Spivonson went inside the orphanage to adopt them. Carrie turned to Emily, “I”m sorry,” she said. “That just really hurt when that hamster bit me. And why didn’t you tell me about that hamster?”

“It’s okay, Carrie. I should have told you about the hamster sooner. I was just afraid that you would tell the orphanage ladies even then.”

“You know I wouldn’t do something like that,” Carrie answered.

 

That night, Emily and Carrie found themselves on their own beds in their own room. They said it was the happiest day of their lives.


The End

The Return of the Dragons

One day, in a land far away, there was the spookiest town of all. The town of Dendrum. There was a person named Doctor Heesagam. He was the most evil person in the town. He used to run around and steal from people. But then one day, a dragon lived in a mountain just around their town. Doctor Heesagam couldn’t go outside as much as he used to because the dragon was looking for meals every day. When someone would go outside, he would snatch them up for a snack. The dragon was evil and red with blood all over his teeth. He had blood-red eyes. He always had a good view from the top of the mountain. So, whenever people went out, he would go snatch them up with his dripping blood teeth. He used to be a nice blue dragon until somebody tried to kill him. It turned blood over his teeth, blood over his eyes, and he turned red. Then he started attacking people.

He would always fly around the city, looking for something to eat. His bloody teeth used to make puddles of blood. Then, one day, in a graveyard, a zombie came out from a grave. It was climbing out of the dirt and went into the town, but the dragon saw it and ate it for dinner! Nobody in the town ever saw the zombie.

Then, one day, out of nowhere, came another little thing. It was the most scariest thing, a green thing with wings. Another dragon! When the red dragon saw the green one, it flew down and said, “This is my territory. Run off. Get another town.”

The green dragon said, “No! I called it. I saw it first.”

“I’ll battle you for it!” said the red one.

Then they had a fight. The green one turned as red as the red one, and as bloody as the red one. The people in the town saw from their houses and said, “Woah, that is so cool!”

“I wonder who will win?” said one of the town’s people.

They both were as strong as one another. So they said, “Hmm. I think it’s time we bring out some weapons.”

They brung out some dragon weapons. Dragon missiles, dragon everything. They had a fight with those, but neither of them won.

The green one said, “Ugh. You made me so bloody. I’m leaving!” The green one left and the town’s people learned that the dragons were hurt, but not very much hurt. But they had more blood than ever. They were making the lakes blood red.

Doctor Heesagam said, “This is so bad for the town! I can’t even go outside until the blood dries up. Which is going to be a million years because of these fighting dragons! They’re not even dead and look how much blood they’re making!”

Doctor Heesagam went outside and the red dragon swept down and took him to his cave.

“I’ll go get the carving knife ready,” said the dragon.

“Hmm… nice place here,” said Doctor Heesagam. “I wonder if the dragon has any jewels for me to steal.”

The cave was dripping water because there was a lake right on top of the mountain. There was lots of rocks hanging down from the top of the cave. It was kind of spooky because there were bats flitting around everywhere– vampire bats!

Doctor Heesagam was very scared because the dragon said he was going to get his carving knife. He was shivering. He was running from wall to wall but he was not screaming, so that way the dragon didn’t know what he was doing or what he was up to. He said, “Hmm…” and ventured into the dragon’s part of the cave. He thought that maybe he should jump out of the cave, but it was 3,000,000,300 miles down to the little town. “I can risk getting hurt, or getting eaten,” he thought. “I’d rather get hurt than be eaten!” Then he jumped down.

The dragon came out and said, “What! Where’d he go? Oh, whatever… I’ve had enough meals today.”

While the dragon was talking to himself, Doctor Heesagam was falling at a very intense speed for a very long time. He fell for about an hour and then he hit the ground. He wasn’t hurt because his coat was like a parachute. “Oh boy, I better get inside right now!” he thought. He went to his lab where he was experimenting with lava. He was trying to make iron with this lava but the materials kept melting. So he said, “I guess I’ll just experiment with lava just to see if it can melt every single thing in the world! `Hmm, what if I test it on one little scale?” He found the scale of the dragon outside and he dropped it in the lava. It melted faster than 1000 and 25th notes! “Hm,” he said, “I wonder how long it would take to melt the whole dragon? I can’t climb the mountain, because it’s 3,000,000,300 miles high! It’s too high. It’s a google plex. How am I ever going to get up there? The hovercraft won’t get there… The engine would be out of gas once I got to the foot of the mountain! So I just have to climb. And I don’t know how to do this but I’m going to do it.”

Doctor Heesagam went and tried to find the elevator in his humongous underground house and he found it in his closet and it was buried underneath a pile of dust; a dustinator which makes people sneeze! He took the dustinator and he said, “Won’t need this again!” and threw it in the lava. There was a secret passageway in the closet that leads to above ground. He found the escalator and said, “Up you go!” He pushed the tub of lava on the escalator and the escalator did the rest of the work. Outside he said, “Oh boy, now I have to pick up an escalator… like that’s going to be easy! I don’t even have my grappling hand anymore, it’s buried in the cemetery somewhere…” Then he realized that he didn’t have his remote to make the escalator shrink! He said, “Well, the tub of lava won’t help… so I guess I just have to pull it up.” He took it step by step. First, he took the leather off the escalator, then he took the metal. Then he put it all back together again by the side of the mountain. It was the middle of the night, so Doctor Heesagam knew the dragon was sleeping, because he could see the smoke from the dragon’s snore. He put the escalator next to the mountain and pulled up the lava. It took him about 30 minutes to get up the mountain on the escalator. He poured lava all over the entrance of the cave and said, “Nighty nighty, dragon. It will be your last!”

It was daytime and one of the dragon’s legs burned off because of the lava. “Ahhh! You got to be kidding me! I am going to destroy the whole town until I find the person that did this!” screamed the dragon. He gets a peg leg made of diamonds and gold and he starts flying. “I feel like a bat that’s carrying a zebra. Ugh, this has got to be the worst day after. I am going to get the person who did this! And I think I know who it was… Doctor Heesagam!” Then he dove into town and said, “Hmm, maybe I should start with this house.” He ripped open this shack that had nobody inside, just these old logs. “This must be a lumber place. Looking for the person that did this could be very hard… I need a better searching team.” The dragon had no friends, but he knew he needed help to find Doctor Heesagam. Doctor Heesagam was down in his lair, sitting and relaxing on his nice warm, sofa. Meanwhile, the dragon was out in the town ripping up all the buildings.

Dr. Heesagam thought, “Wonder what all that noise is? Maybe I should use my telescope. Eh, whatever… it’s Saturday. Relaxing day. And hobby day. Maybe there’s something I’m forgetting… Oh yeah, I have to send the bomb to space to blow up a satellite. Hm, I think that maybe I’m not so sure about this, but I think I should send a missile to the dragon’s cave. Oh yeah, that’s perfect.”

He aimed the missile right at the mountain while he was still sitting in his chair.

The dragon was like, “Hm, I wonder what that is?” He flew toward the missile but dared not touch it because he was afraid it would attack. “I wouldn’t want to touch it on the tip, but look! There’s fire coming out of the back, oh wait, that’s air. It’s probably not a dragon, probably just human technology.” The dragon flew down, but little did he know that the missile was heading for his cave! Once it hit, the explosion was so loud, the army thought that they were being attacked so they got out their tanks and missiles and aimed it right at the dragon. 3, 2,1, and all the tanks fired at the dragon! But the dragon flew off just time.

The dragon was, flying, flying, flying. Dr. Heesagam saw him and fired another missile but it missed him again! But it hit his cave again.

The dragon wasn’t too upset because his usual home was up in space. But this cave was his summer home, so he said, “Let that cave be blown up! At least I still have a home on Planet Reese.”

The dragon was so mad because he saw another missile going toward the cave, so he picked up a tank and threw it at the missile. The missile split in half and all the explosives fell out.

Dr. Heesagam was walking outside. The dragon saw him and was like, “THIS IS THE LAST TIME YOU WILL SEE PLANET EARTH AGAIN.” The dragon’s voice was so deep that it froze Dr. Heesgam’s blood. He was so nervous that he nearly fainted. But he had something in his pocket: it was a shrink ray. He took out the shrink ray, and although his hands were shaking, he pointed the shrink ray at the dragon. But it missed! It hit the mountain and shrunk the mountain to the size of an ant. The dragon picked up the mountain and said, “How am I supposed to live on this thing! It’s the size of an ant and it has a steaming spot on it.” The dragon threw away the mountain and it flew up in the air and landed on a satellite which destroyed the whole town’s radio, television, and lights. Everything went out; it was a blackout.

“What have I done now?” Dr. Heesagam groaned with his hand on his face.

The dragon was stomping around but he couldn’t see anything because it was midnight and now the town had no lights. So it made it super hard to see Dr. Heesagam. Then Dr. Heesagam tip-toed away from the dragon. He was shivering when he got inside his house and he sat on his sofa which was freezing!

“This is the worst blackout ever.”

The dragon was stomping around saying, “Why do I have to walk around? But it’s the only thing to do…” He was walking in circles. He was so mad that he almost crushed a house! He was walking, walking, and then he found this little house that had not been crushed. It wasn’t Dr. Heesagam’s house, but he thought it might have some supplies, so he crushed the house and saw what was inside. There was a humongous axe that was about 5 feet long, with a blade that was about 7 feet long.

“Hmm, this could do,” he said. And he walked and walked and found a small patch of the town which had not been destroyed. It was sitting there perfectly. He said, “One of these two homes are Dr. Heesagam’s.” So he opened up a house that had nothing in it, it was just a wood supply store. He opened up the next house, it was just cement. He didn’t know this, but he thought that underneath those 5 layers of cement was Dr. Heesagam’s house. Though he was underground, Dr. Heesagam had plenty of air.

The dragon thought, “What is a layer of cement doing there? This must be Dr. Heesagam’s roof, because if there’s nobody on top, he must be on the bottom!”

He starts digging. His claws dig up five feet of dirt. He sees something creepy. A skeleton! Just a skeleton with handcuffs on it. He didn’t know, but he was digging up a house that used to be an old prison. He saw 15 people that had handcuffs and were dead.

“Ugh, I dug up the wrong house.” But little did he know that under the prison was Dr. Heesagam’s house.

So the dragon walks along the road, stomping around like a maniac, so angry that he breathes his fiery breath. He sees something, a commercial sign that says, “Kill the Dragon! Go to the Army and sign up now.” He got so mad that he picked up the sign and threw it at a tank. Of course, the tank exploded. But then another tank came and fired at the dragon’s diamond peg leg. He screamed, “Ahh!” and falls down.  “You will be killed, Doctor Heesagam, once I get my claws on you! You shall never be alive. You shall not be in the cemetery. You will be in my mouth!” The dragon was so mad that he nearly destroyed the whole town. He seized this other town that was sitting there peacefully, and they were even more scared than the other town. The dragon thought that Doctor Heesagam was hiding in the other town, but really he was under the jail cell.

All Doctor Heesgam was doing was sitting in his ice chair and trying to go to sleep but he couldn’t because it was too cold. The lights came back on and the heat came back on.

“Oh that’s great,” said Doctor Heesagam. “Now my ice chair turned into a molten lava chair. Well… I better get working on the invention that I must finish.”

He took a tube of lava from his lava tub and he poured it into a gun.

“This gun will be good, because it will be called The Molten Lava because it will turn the dragon into molten lava.”

He left his house and went in to the woods to find the dragon. He couldn’t find him in the woods but he could find him in the next town over. He saw the dragon ripping out the houses.

“That silly little fool dragon… he has no idea what he’s doing. He’s just ripping up his own strength. I’ll aim this gun at him…”

He aimed it by accident at a house and he shot it. It hit the house. It turned into molten lava.

The dragon said, “Hmm maybe Doctor Heesgam’s mansion finally blew up and now he’s dead!”

But little did the dragon know that the house was abandoned and nobody lived there. So  all the explosion did was burn off the dragon’s skin and turn it into a blue dragon.

“What? I’m blue?” The dragon said. “Now I have to be nice… And eat vegetables.”

Doctor Heesagam was like, “Hmm, I didn’t think he would turn blue. But now I can’t kill him.” He walked home very mad.

THE END

The Epic Adventures of Chloe Cochle

The eerie music started to play. That’s how it all started. It was all downhill from there. And then I couldn’t believe what I saw: a piano appeared in the middle of the room. I can’t remember what happened next, but I had a strange vision that an alien came into the room and started playing the piano. I woke up in a hospital bed wearing a blue and white flowered hospital gown in a room with a guy who was wearing a white lab coat and with hair that looked tossed about, like the hair of a mad scientist. Suddenly he started hitting me with questions.

“What is your name?!”

“Where do you live?!”

“Who are your parents?!”

“How old are you?!”

I tried to speak. I really did. But nothing came out.

“Speak!!! Tell me everything!!!”

Then I remembered that I had been taking sign language at Corral Academy for the past three or four years. Corral Academy is a private school specializing in sign language. My grandfather is deaf, and it was the closest sign language school around. And the best.

“Do you speak sign language?” I signed.

And he signed back, “Of course I do. Where do you think you are?! The land of the English-speaking people?! Now, tell me EVERYTHING!!!”

My name is Chloe and I am fourteen years old. My mother disappeared in 3021 when I was 7 years old in a mysterious incident with aliens.  Or maybe it was yesterday. I am not thinking straight right now. Ever since, I have been terrified of aliens and unexpected things. Then it was my turn to ask the questions.

“Where am I? Who are you? Why am I here? Now you have to tell me everything.”

“Please!! Do you know why can’t I talk?” He just stood there, staring at me like I was the craziest person he had ever seen. I stared back at him. Then I went crazy.

“Why aren’t you saying anything about it?!!!!!!!!!!!?!”

I started chasing him around the room with flailing arms.

“YOU PROMISED!!!!!!!!!”

“Yes, but—”

“NO BUTS!! THERE ARE NO EXCUSES!!!”

“Calm. Down.”

“YOU WANT ME TO CALM DOWN?  TELL ME EVERYTHING THEN!!!!!”

“Okay, okay fine.”

“You are at the Inner Galaxy Hospital, address 1563 Inner Galaxy Way, Bunchen, Yilo Galaxy. I am a psychologist, sent by the board of the galaxy.  You are here because the aliens you saw captured you because you saw them at work, trying to get samples of humans to clone them. Your mother came here seven years ago because she saw them as well.”

“So then why didn’t the other people who saw it come here?”

“There were other people who saw it?!  AND YOU ARE ONLY TELLING ME NOW?!!!!!!!!!!!”

“Take over the world.”  He said into a thingy that looked a little like a walkie talkie as he left the room, “And do it quickly.”

 

Ok. I know that there is a possibility that  my mom is somewhere in this building. If she is, she would probably know exactly what to do. I remember when I was little she used to give me all the advice I could ever want. She was the best. Just the thought of getting her back got me  excited… But right now I had other things to think about… I looked out the window, thinking  about the day mom disappeared. It was a really nice day out and I woke up thinking that everything would be perfect. When I got home my mom was nowhere to be found. My dad said that she went to the basement to do the laundry and never came back. The security cameras got fogged up mysteriously, but you could faintly see the shape of  what looked a little bit like aliens, like the ones that I saw. I wonder what mom would say the story was. It would probably be different from her perspective. Why am I thinking so much?! I HAVE TO FIND HEEERRRRRRRR!!!

I started looking  for the psychologist.  I needed him to find out why I couldn’t speak.  Anyway, it felt like there was a wool sweater around my vocal chords. I hated it. I saw the front door that he went through and tried it to see if I could get through it. It was locked. Great. Ohmygosh!!! There was a grate that I could go through maybe if I tried… No, that’s a pathetic Idea. My friend, Violet, taught me how to pick locks once. She said that one day it would come in handy, but at the time I didn’t see how it would ever come in handy. Now I understand what she was talking about. I took out a bobby pin from my messed–up bun and started to fiddle with the lock. This one seemed to be harder than the rest I had done. Maybe it required some other kind of password in addition to a key. Since this was in another galaxy completely different from the one I’m used to living in, maybe they had completely different crazy technology that we do not have so maybe this lock was going to be much harder than all of the rest that I’ve tried. Probably. But I hope not. This would be so easy if I could have just undone the lock, found my mother immediately standing out the door waiting for me, and we could just talk out a plan to escape here and come back to our world. That would just be so much easier. But, unfortunately, this is not a fairytale, where everything turns out perfect in the end and everybody lives happily ever after. There is no such thing as happily ever after to me because there is no such thing as perfect. If only. Click. I heard the sound of the door opening, only to find that there was another door, waiting for me like a prize for getting one door open. Who knows how many other doors there could be. This was going to be a hard thing to accomplish.

“What is your password?” A robotic sounding voice said.

Passwords  are usually something that the person who thought up the password thinks about very often, or something that is close to their heart. Or maybe a number combination, like the address or something. Let’s see. 1563galaxyhospital. Yes. Maybe that would work. Let me try it.

“What is your password?” a robotic voice repeated.

“1563 galaxy hospital,” I said.

“Wrong password,” the robotic voice repeated.  I wondered what the password could be, if that wasn’t it. 1563. Maybe that’s it. Let me try.

“1563.”

“Password correct.”

Great! Now I needed to unlock who knows how many more doors. This door had a keypad on it for a lock with numbers on it. I typed in the numbers 1563 and the door didn’t budge. I knew that it was a four-number combination, definitely. I wondered if it was a word and numbers corresponded to the letters in the word. Let’s see. I knew that the galaxy is Yilo galaxy, whatever that was. The Y is the 25th letter of the alphabet.  The letter I is the 9th. L is The the 12th and O is the 15th. Now I take the first number of each number, and I have my password. Let’s see. 2911. I immediately punch the code to the robotic voice. I silently cheered as I saw the door open. Inside of the small room there was a strange painting done with ultra-color technology. I took it off of the wall to look at it. Beautiful.  I noticed for the first time that there was a small safe that had a clue pinned on it — ”Think of your mother.”

I thought of the nickname that I called her—Mamaw.  I typed her nickname in and it opened and inside there was a note. It said, “I am in a la, come to save me!! If you do not, the whole human race will be in danger!!! – Mamaw.”

Great! Now I had a clue!  I couldn’t wait for the happily ever-after. Inside of the room there was also a keyboard that looked like it had wires that connected to the door.  The door looked like it was unlocked, so I tried it to see if it was open.  No. It was not open.  I turned on the keyboard (I play piano in music class at my school) and started fiddling with it. Suddenly I got an idea. What if you had to play a certain melody on the keyboard and that was the pass code to get through the door?! I thought of the address again. 1563. If A was one, B was two, C was three, and so on, then that could be the key!!!!!! That meant that the melody must be AEFC!!!!!!!!  I played it on the piano. Wow. That is such a strange sounding melody. Yet, it sounds strangely familiar. I was trying to think where I had heard it when suddenly it struck my mind. The sound that played on the piano when they took over my house! I was so happy I found this melody. It was probably the key to open the door I played it over and over again at the fourth time, the door opened. I went through the door to find a small room and in that room there was a boy, about my age, standing there, looking trapped.

He had long black hair, he was tall,  and he was wearing the same gown that I was wearing, except mine was much more dirty and ripped by now.  He hadn’t noticed me at all.  I wondered if he could talk, unlike me.  He looked as if I had seen him before, like the melody on the piano. So strange and familiar, it was scary. I didn’t know what to think, but I better do something.  But what?  I finally decided to get his attention by going in front of him and signing: “Can you talk?” So I did, and he signed back.

“No, I can’t talk.”

“Where are you from?” I asked.

“I’m from here. Aren’t you?” he asked.

“I’m from planet Earth,” I said.

“I heard about that. In my school, they talked about that,” he calmly signed to me.

“How old are you?” I signed.

“54 moons old,” he signed.

“How long is that in years?” I asked.

“I don’t know, but one moon is about 1/4 of a year, I think.”

“Oh cool we are about the same age!!!”

“Cool!”

“How did you get here?”

“It’s a long story. You?”

“It’s a long story.”

There was a door with a metal lock that looked easy to pick. This one looked easier than the rest I had already picked. They probably made it easy to pick because if we got through all the other locks, we would probably get out from this one somehow.

“Do you know how to pick a lock?” Jacob signed.

“Yes. Do you want me to pick this one?” I signed

“Yes.”

“Ok.”

I fiddled with the lock with my bobby pin.

“Uhhhhhhhhhhh… Got it!!!!!!!”

I stared at the vast universe that I could see. It was amazing. It was like standing in the middle of the Universe. It was the most beautiful thing I have ever seen. There were so many colors. It didn’t look like this in all of the pictures that I had seen. It was mostly green. It looked more like the Northern Lights than what it actually was.

I signed to him. “Is this where you lived?”

“Yes, but there’s more to it than that, but I’m not sure if I can tell you. I have to get to know you a little bit better before I tell you.”

My hands hurt from signing all the time. I wished I could have my voice back. It was so weird not to be able to talk. I was starting to forget what it was like to talk.

We started to walk around and look at what was around me instead of the sky. It looked like it would never end, like I was on top of the world. The sky was endless. I was going to find where my mom was. I thought about the clue that my mom had left me.

“Jacob, there is something I have to tell you,” I signed.

“Yes?” he signed.

“My mom is somewhere outside here. In a lab somewhere. She is trapped and she needs my help. You live here, so you should know. Do you know of any labs around here?”

“Yes, I do. There are two in the area. The closest one is about 5 quims away.”

“Okay. That’s not that far. I can do that. Come on let’s go.”

We started walking and walking and finally, we reached somewhere that looked like the end of the Universe. It was fast, black, nothingness. There were hundreds of parachutes stacked next to it.

“You have to jump,” signed Jacob.

“I don’t know if I can do this,” I signed back.

“Here I’ll show you,” and he jumped without a parachute.

“Wait, you forgot a parachute.” I was longing to be able to talk because I didn’t want to lose my companion. We were starting to be friends.

Great, now I had lost two people along my adventure. I guess I had no choice. I had to jump in order to get to the lab and find my mom. I grabbed a lime-green parachute, strapped it on my back, and jumped.

I landed on a tiny island of isolation. There was one teeny building. I suppose that was the lab. It was a 5-foot, modern building, kind of like a teeny, tiny version of the Empire State Building. I circled the building once or twice to try to find a door. There was only one window stretched around it like a band. I decided to try and break in. Hopefully, this was the right lab. I wished Jacob was here. He  might know a better way to get in. Luckily, I had my pen knife with me; I never leave home without it. I used it to cross an x on it and then I broke it with my fist. Ow, that hurt. I wish I hadn’t done that. Maybe my mom would have some ointment or something. The last time she had taken care of me when I was sick or helped me when I wasn’t feeling well was 7 years ago.

There was good-sized hole for me to go through. I climbed through it and the inside was so much bigger than the outside. I was amazed. There was something that looked like a full-size ferris wheel. There was nobody in there. I climbed on the ferris wheel, thinking that maybe it would lead me somewhere. The second I set foot on the first gondola, it started to move, fast. I climbed inside frantically as it was moving. I was hooked on by two-feet, but my head was hanging down. This was the scariest thing I have done, even scarier than the parachute. It stopped when I was at the very top.  For the first time I saw a secret door in the ceiling. I pushed it to see if it would open, and it did. I climbed up there and inside was a room that looked like a lab. Inside strapped up in a chair was… my Mother!!!

 

 

Chapter nine:

 

 

I wanted to scream SOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO BAD!!!

I could see from the look on her face that she could see me. I frantically started  to untie the knots in the rope that was tying her in the chair.  I undid the cloth that was tying her mouth shut. I hope she could talk. “Can you talk?” I signed. My mother went to the same school I go to, therefore she knows sign language.

“No” she signed. She frantically started to sign to the aliens. “Give us our voices back or else I will tell the whole world about your evil plot!!”

“Yeah right. Nice try, but no way.”

“And we are not kidding. I have my all-galaxy cell phone on me.” I signed to them. “I am a close friend with the ruler of the world’s daughter!!” I said to the aliens. I hadn’t told them before because I wanted to know that my mother was safe first. All of a sudden, I didn’t have that feeling like there was a wool sweater around my neck! “Mamaw?” I stood in shock for a moment. I never realized how great it was to be able to talk!! “Come on, Mamaw!!!!!!  Lets get out of here!!!”

And so we ran, faster than the wind, onto the ferris wheel, out through the broken window, and onto the island and the vast, neverending, universe above us.  I strapped into a parachute and I started soaring. “Mamaw, strap into that parachute!” She did, and she quickly caught up to me. “So, mamaw, tell me everything!!!  Starting from when you left, long ago.”

“Some aliens kidnapped me, because I saw them. They made me mute, so that I wouldn’t complain. I then learned, by eavesdropping, that they were going to use me to make evil clones that appeared human but were evil to use against us. They have been trying for years now, without succeeding. I have been messing up their equipment and they have not figured me out. Thank you for coming to get me. I can’t believe you found that note. It was the only time the aliens left me unsupervised.”

I then told her what happened to me, every single little detail. I was so happy. I felt this sort of descending feeling. I looked down and saw planet earth below me. How did the parachutes know where to go? Our city was getting closer and I could see our building.  Suddenly our parachutes disappeared and we were free falling. Finally we landed, safe and sound. We walked up the stairs to the third floor and we went into our apartment. The first thing we saw was my dad.

We automatically all embraced each other in a big hug. “What happened to you guys? It was scary—my wife disappeared and then my daughter—what was I supposed to do? Where did you go?”  So we told him the whole story, and it was a happy ending for everybody.That night was scary though. I put on some music to listen to, and suddenly all that I heard was that creepy melody. I tried to stop the music, but it wouldn’t stop. It just kept playing on and on.  Finally I just threw it out the window and I never heard that melody again.

Now I am 21 years old, and I recently thought of something. What ever happened to Jacob? So I looked his name up on the computer and it said that he was the youngest person ever to go to outer space but disappeared mysteriously. Then they said he recently appeared again, and was asked many questions for that matter, but he refused to answer any of them.  I am glad he is safe. That was what he wanted to tell me.

The Candy Thief

Chapter 1

Once there was a boy named Josh who lived in a house in Beverly Hills with his parents. His  mom’s name was Dana and his dad’s name was David and they were very nice people. He also had a sister named Olivia, and a guinea pig and a turtle.

When his parents weren’t home, Josh liked to chase people around and hit them in the head with a baseball bat. He was very naughty and a little kookoo. He had a few friends, but they were also pretty crazy.

Besides hitting people in the head, Josh’s favorite thing to do was eat candy. And so it was a huge surprise when he got home one day to discover that all his candy was gone!

Josh cried and cried, but he couldn’t find the candy anywhere. He sniffed around the air and smelled the candy in Olivia’s room, but it wasn’t there. When Josh asked her if she had seen his candy, Olivia said, “I haven’t. Maybe you should check the news to see if there’s a candy thief on the loose.”

“Thanks a lot, Meanie-Sister,” said Josh. And he stormed off to the living room to watch the news.

Chapter 2

Josh was in the living room watching the news, but it didn’t say anything.

So he said to Olivia, “There’s no thief on the news.”

“Well, maybe call Mom and see if she knows where the candy is,” said Olivia.

“Maybe I will, Meanie-Sister,” said Josh. And he went to the house phone to call his mom.

Ring ring!

Josh’s mom answered the phone.

“Mom, who stole my candy?” said Josh.

“I think the gardeners did,” said Josh’s mom.

“The gardeners are still here! Let me go talk to them,” said Josh. “Bye, Meanie-Mom!” Then he ran outside to talk to the gardeners.

When he got outside, Josh saw the gardeners. They were cutting branches and cleaning up leaves and mowing the lawn. It was a very very hot day and all the gardeners were very sweaty.

Josh ran up to the gardeners and said, “Hey, Meanie-Gardeners! Did you steal my candy?”

The gardeners looked at Josh like ‘what’s going on?’ and then one of them said “Nooooo….”

Josh got very frustrated. “Thanks a lot, Meanies!” he said and stormed off again. ‘This is going to be harder than I thought,’ Josh thought to himself.

Josh was tired of running around so he went to the kitchen to get a snack. That’s when he saw one of the wrappers in the garbage. He wondered if there were more wrappers in the garbage.

Dana and David just got home. Josh asked, “Mommy,  do you know where my candy is? I checked everywhere. It’s not on the news, none of the gardeners took it, I checked in Olivia’s room but it is still gone.”

There were tears coming down Josh’s eyes.

Chapter 3

There were chocolate footsteps leading from the kitchen out into the yard. So Josh followed them outside.

When he got into the backyard he discovered a whole bag of candy wrappers on the swing set.

He said, “Who ate my candy?” He was screaming.

Just then Josh saw the garbage truck covered with candy wrappers. So he said, “Come back here, you thief! You stole my candy!”

“No I didn’t,” said the Garbage Man.

The garbage truck drove away and Josh ran after him.

He kept on running until he fell on his head. There was a car behind him but it stopped and called an ambulance and Josh’s parents.

The ambulance came and took Josh to the hospital.

When Olivia and Dana came to the hospital they said, “whoops!” Then they asked how long Josh would be there for. The doctors said a few weeks.

Chapter4

Josh was still in the hospital. The doctor said, “He will need surgery tonight. He will be home tomorrow morning.”

Josh said, “Mommy, I’m very scared. How long is the surgery?”

She said, “One hour.”

And Josh’s dad said, “It’s not that bad. I got surgery too. You don’t feel it at all because they put you to sleep.”

“Okay, fine, I’m trusting you,” said Josh.

So they did the surgery. In the middle of the surgery Josh said, “Who stole my candy,” and then the nurse went to get Dana and David to tell them what was going on with him.

The nurse said, “He’s going to be a little kookoo today. He will say ‘Oh Mom, my head is hurting like two times.’ But you just say the doctor is coming. Also one of you have to sleep here.”

“Can the whole family sleep here tonight?’’ asked Dana.

“Sure. It’s up to you,” said the nurse.

Dana asked David and Olivia, “Can you go home, and bring me a shirt and a skirt and sweatpants?”

“Sure,” they said.

“I will make sure Josh is ok,” she said. “He will be out in an hour. I need to talk to my friends Laura and Stephanie to tell them that Josh got surgery, and we can’t go out tonight because we are sleeping here.”

“Bye. I will see you in a little bit,” said David.

“Shall I get food?” said Olivia.

“No, they will give us food here. But bring saltines. Josh loves them. Also get him a balloon with an animal on it.”

David and Olivia left and Dana stood there alone. She decided that she wanted some air, so she walked over to the window. It was a dark and windy night. It looked like New York. And that’s when she saw the garbage truck.

Chapter 5

Josh got out of the surgery and it went well.

Dana said, “Joshy, are you ok?”

“Yes, Meanie-Mommy, I’m ok,” said Josh.

“Guess what, the whole family is sleeping here with you tonight,” said Dana.

“Meanie-Mommy, where is daddy and Olivia?” said Josh.

“They went to get clothes to sleep here tonight and they are going to get you a balloon,” said Dana. “Um the nurse said that she’s going to come and give you two shots in 10 minutes,” said Dana.

“Ok, Mommy. I mean, Meanie-Mommy,” said Josh

David and Olivia just came back and her face was full of chocolate.

“I think I know who the thief is. I think it’s Olivia and Mommy because Mommy was really quiet and she didn’t talk about the candy at all,” said Josh.

“Fine, it’s us,” said Olivia and Dana.

“You guys made me get surgery,” said Josh.

“Yes, sorry,” said Olivia and Dana.

“Thanks a lot, meanies,” said Josh.

“You know what, if you stop calling us meanies, I will take you to Dylan’s Candy Bar to get as much as candy as you want.” said Dana.

“Deal.” said Josh.

“Ok, the nurse said you don’t need the shots anymore and we don’t have to sleep here but you have to take a quick X-ray,” said Olivia.

“So after we can go to Dylan’s Candy Bar?” asked Josh.

“It’s up to Mom,” said Olivia.

“It’s up to Dad,” said Dana.

“Its up to Olivia,” said David.

“Yes, Josh, we can go today,” said Olivia.

“You are the best sister ever,” said Josh.

“You’re right, I am the best,” said Olivia.

The End

Annie and the Cat

Once there were two mice. The wife was Japanese and her name was Fumi and the  husband was Nepali and his name was Hasan. They were always arguing about whose culture they should live by. And since they lived in a Buddhist temple, every morning they saw people in the temple who were always dressing in robes.  They wondered what they were doing in the temple. The mice always heard people talking in their native language.

So, one day they went to a library and when they were looking around they saw an abandoned pup (a baby mouse) in a basket! So Fumi freaked out, and said to Hasan “We need to save that little pup, please Hasan please!’

So when Hasan said okay, Fumi jumped up and down, then picked up the pup.

She ran home and started buying a crib, blankets, and toys for the pup at Mice ‘R’ Us. While Hasan was still looking for the books in the library to translate the languages that the people were talking. Fumi loved how the pup looked. She was beige and white.

When Hasan came home with the books (How to Speak Chinese) he said, “Why don’t we keep the baby for a little while and then we give her up for donation?”

“How dare you say that! This is my pup now. You have no say to give it up for donation, especially since she’s a live pup. Not a toy! Why don’t you want to keep the pup?” said Fumi.

“Because it’s too much responsibility. If we do keep it, when it grows up, it’s going to be Nepali, not Japanese.”

“Stop calling her, an it. And she is  going to be Japanese, not Nepali when she grows up,” said Fumi.

“Are you even going to name it?” asked Hasan.

“Yes. She is  going to have a Japanese name, not a Nepali name,” said Fumi.

“How dare you name this pup a Japanese name” and then Hasan just got so mad that he stormed out of their little hole and right into the big temple.

When Fumi saw that Hasan stormed out, she quickly put the pup down in the new crib, that she bought yesterday. Then she ran to Hasan, and grabbed his tiny arm. But as soon as she grabbed his arm, a big person saw them and screamed.

“Ah, a mouse!!!”

So when Fumi heard that she ran back to their hole, still gripping onto Hasan’s arm. When Fumi and Hasan got in their little hole Fumi said, “We have to get out of here so the humans don’t call someone to kill us, and find a new place to live.”

So Hasan started packing his bag, Fumi’s, and the baby’s bag. Hasan and Fumi put on their bags, and Fumi also put the baby’s bag on. He put the baby in the baby carrier on Fumi’s chest. Then they quietly walked out of the temple. then they walked quietly in the shadows so people can’t  see them.  They were trying to find a place in one of their friend’s houses for a little while until they could find a park to make a burrow in to take care of the baby, and live in.

They started to walk to their friend’s house, which was in a grocery stand in Japantown.

“Why do we always have to be in Japantown and not go to my friend’s house who is Nepali?” said Hasan.

“Let’s stop arguing. We have to find some place safe to keep the baby,” said Fumi.

“How about now we just name the baby?” said Hasan.

“Okay. How about we name the baby Chika.”

So Hasan said okay.Then started to get settled in to their friend’s house.Then Fumi said “This is my friend Annie.”

But then Hasan said in a loud voice “Annie only has Japanese things.” Then Fumi said “Stop screaming Chika’s sleeping.”

“Okay,” said Hasan, “why don’t we start unpacking”

“Okay,” said Fumi in a low voice. So they started unpacking. Then Fumi said “You know i think we are going to live in the library.” Right then, a cat heard them squeaking. He stuck his hand inside of the hole and tried to get Annie.

He caught Annie in his paw. Annie screamed for Fumi and Hasan to help her while the cat laughed evilly.

“Help me! The cat’s got me! Fumi! Help me!” Annie screamed.

Fumi picked up baby Chika and put her back in the baby carrier. The baby was crying. Hasan started packing their bag again with their clothes, books, food, papers, blankets, pillows and all of the stuff that they had in their house in the temple.

Instead of Hasan only putting on his backpack, he put on Fumi’s and Chika’s too.

Then, they started running after Annie. Annie was still screaming for Fumi and Hasan to help her. Her screams became faint because the cat had her in his mouth and the cat was going further and further away.

The cat screamed, “You will never get her back. I am going to feed her to my kittens.” Then Fumi screamed “NNNNNNNNOOOOOOOO!!!!!!!”

At the cat’s house, which was a dome made out of a whole bunch of leaves in Central Park, he put Annie in a cardboard box and put a rock on top so that she wouldn’t come out.

“We will have her for breakfast tomorrow,” said the cat to his kittens.

“Why can’t we have her now? I’m hungry. I didn’t like the dinner we had. Robin legs make me nauseous,” said the youngest kitten named James.

“Well, you can have some of the leftover crow from yesterday.”

“Okay, fine,” said James in a sad voice.

“Okay, good because I was planning on making scrambled eggs with mice tomorrow,” said the father.

When Annie heard that, she knew she had to do something. Once she heard that all the cats were sleeping, she chewed a hole that was as big as a dime, squished through it, and ran away. Then in the morning the father cat went to take Annie to make her into scrambled eggs, when he saw she was not there.  Then he saw the little hole she made, and screamed, “Aaaaaaahhhhhhh!”

“Where is that mouse??” said the dad cat.

Then James said, “Dad, we are going to have mice scrambled eggs today yyyaaayyy!!!!!!!!!!” Then the father cat said in a small voice.

“Well the mouse some how ran away”

James said, “Wwwwhhhhhhaaaaattttttttt!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!”

Then the father cat said “James don’t talk to me like that! You’re in time out.”

Then James said, “Okay” in a sad voice.

Now back to Fumi and Hasan.

Now, they were in a library. They looked for Annie for a day, but couldn’t find her. They looked in people’s houses to see if the cat was there. They looked in playgrounds and office buildings.

“I hope it wasn’t my fault that Annie got caught by a cat,” said Fumi. “I hope she is not dead,” said Fumi, holding Chika and rocking her back and forth. Fumi was chirping really loudly.

“I don’t think she is dead. Maybe she escaped somehow and is alive,” said Hasan. “Think of the good stuff that’s happening. No cats can come in the library so no cats will kill us.”

“Okay, but I’m still worried if she is dead or alive. Okay, that makes me feel a little better”said Fumi.

“See, there’s always good in bad times,” said Hasan.

Fumi said “Wow, Hasan you have not said a word about our culture.”

“Oh yah” said Hasan. Just as Hasan said that, Annie’s voice called out, “Fumi, Hasan, can you hear me?!”

“Oh my gosh Hasan, that’s Annie!! Annie! Annie! Annie! Annie! We are here!”

“Fumi, Hasan is that you?” yelled Annie.

“YES! It is me Annie, we are in the library!” So, Annie started running to the library. “Is Chika safe?”

“YES!”said Fumi.

“Hewo” said Chika, as Annie ran into their hole. As Fumi jumped on Annie and hugged her, Hasan said “YAY”.

Then Annie said, “Wow, you guys you have not said anything about your culture”

“Oh yah,” said Fumi and Hasan together. Then they all sat on the sofa and started talking about their adventures.

 

 

THE END

 

The Aldrins

Siblings bring each other closer together

and learn from each other every day, this story is an example of that.

Hope you enjoy.

 

Everyone has a story. Mine starts off in New York City. At a house — my house. My house is cozy and appropriate for four children, my little brother Owen, my older sister Brooke, my oldest brother Logan, my little brown cockerspaniel-poodle doggie named Maggie, and me. We all live together as a family. But there was only one thing missing in our happy, crazy little, well, big family. Our parents.

 

***

The morning started off a usual. Owen complaining to me: “Lilyyy I wanna play, I don’t wanna go to school. Its boring!” he would scream. Then meanwhile Maggie jumped on my lap I would complain to my sister: “Brooke, will you stop brushing your hair? Its already brushed! Help out with the others!” And Brooke would complain to Logan: “Logan. Please don’t be so messy! There are other people in this house look around, this place is a mess!”

And Logan had no one to complain to, so this is what he would say: “ Owen, you will have fun and learn at school, Lily, help Owen get ready since you already are, Brooke please stop brushing your hair and help me clean this house.” So we would do what Logan said, eat breakfast, and head to school. I wonder how it would be if an adult were in charge.

 

***

I get off the cab and head to my school,  John A. Lowan Secondary, I get out my ID card I need to enter my school:

Lily Aldrin

Birthdate: 2-18-01

8th Grade

I hand it over to the secretary, Dawnica, she’s actually pretty nice. Then again, I have no friends so I guess talking my school secretary is the only option left. Although there is this girl, Jennifer Blue, who is nice to me, but she is best friends with this this other girl Emma Greenbaum. Like I care. Okay maybe I am a little jealous.

***

“You are lucky you have Mr. Sheeler,” says Dawnica. as I start to enter the school.

Let me explain. I go to private school.  Ever wonder how we have enough money for that, and for food, and for our apartment? Mr. Sheeler was great friends with our parents. So when my parents left, Mr. Sheeler did not move in with us, but gave us the money that we needed in order to live.  And Dawnica being my “friend,” I told her about him. I smooth-out my uniform: a white blouse, navy blue skirt, and nude tights. I quickly say bye to Dawnica and head to my homeroom.

***

I guess now’s the time I should tell you about my parents. When I was about one year old, my father Theodore Aldrin went off to Haiti to study fossils that were found. Unfortunately, when a tsunami  occurred my father drowned and died, my mother was in a horrible position in life with four children. Things got worse a year later. She found out she had breast cancer. Luckily, it did not affect her too much. Until she found out she was pregnant. When Owen was born my mom died.

***

When I got home, Maggie jumped onto my lap as I sat down and started doing irritating science homework. Soon, when I finished, my brother came into the living room. He dropped his backpack and waved a letter in the air.

“What’s this?” I said.

“It’s my acceptance letter,” he said.

I replied to him “for what?” even though I knew what he was talking about.

“For Yale,” he said.

“Logan, I know this means a lot ot you, but you can’t just leave us here.”

“Lily, I”m not just going to leave you here. You have Brooke and Mr. Sheeler,” he said.

“But we need you!” I said, then stomped to my room.

 

***

When I got to my room, I threw myself on the bed and started crying. First, my two parents are dead and now my oldest brother who is basically like my dad? It’s all so unfair. Why me? Why not some other red-head?

“Ugh, keep the drama to William Shakespeare.,” Brooke whined when she heard me crying.

I sit up on my bed and said, “Brooke, ugh, why do you have to be such a teenager girl? Won’t you for once see how life is for me? For us?”

“Logan’s leaving!” I screamed at her.

Then I broke down into tears.

“He’s going to college!” I sobbed.

Then for the first time, Brooke took her headphones off, looked up from her computer, sat down next to me and hugged me.

***

Friday, December 25th, the day of Christmas, was the day Logan started packing. Most kids would start next September, but Yale invited him to start in the second semester January 5th. Packing would be quick for him. Being himself, Logan packing up means quickly throwing everything in his room into old Fresh Direct Boxes that he found in the basement. Mr. Sheeler had bought us a Christmas tree and bought each of us a present. Owen got a stuffed dinosaur, I got a sock monkey for my collection, Brooke got a pair of headphones, and Logan got a laptop. Of course. Everything was going by so quickly. Logan was leaving in less than a week.

I woke up to the smell of pancakes and Maggie licking my face meanwhile jumping around in my bed.

“Breakfast is ready!” Logan called. When we were all sitting down, Brooke said, “Now, who is going to make our pancakes?”

Logan rolled his eyes, again.

“Aren’t you gowna miss us? Why you woll your eyes?” said Owen playing with his pancakes.

“First, Owen, don’t play with your food, eat it. And second, I wish you guys would understand how exciting is is that I’m going to college. You haven’t even said congratulations once!”

There was silence.

“Congratulations,” said Brooke sarcastically.

***

That night, Mr. Sheeler called. Owen picked up the phone.

“Helwo-o, Who iiis it?”

“It is Mr. Sheeler,” said Mr. Sheeler with his typical German accent.

“I want to play with my stuffed dinosaur. I’ll give it to….Lilyyyy,” Owen yelled.

I rushed to the living room to grab the phone. I grabbed the antique phone sitting on the desk right next to the Christmas tree. Owen would always call my name when Mr. Sheeler called because I was Owen’s favorite. I answered the phone. “Hello Mr. Sheeler,” I mimicked his German accent.

“Hello Lily. I just wanted to let Logan and your family know that I have paid for Yale. And tell him congratulations…”

Quickly, I said, “Okay, bye.”

Usually, I have long conversations with Mr. Sheeler about when he and my father were searching for fossils in Germany…Boring! But this time, I hung up quickly because Logan was leaving in 5 days and I just wanted to get the thought out of my head. I swing into Logan’s room and said, “Sheeler paid for Yale,” then I sat on my bed and thought I’d had enough, I had to get out of here. I put on my shoes, my coat, and went out to Central Park. The snow was falling. I fell onto my back and just rolled around. I looked up and thought about where I was right now. I was thirteen. I had three siblings. My parents died and my oldest brother was going off to college. I started to cry. Then I stopped myself. I mean, I should be grateful that I have three siblings and I have a German man supporting my family financially. And I mean I guess it wouldn’t be so bad if my brother went off to college. Eventually, I’m gonna go to college. I lay there in silence. Then I got up and went home.

 

It was January 4th, the day Logan left. Everyone had said goodbye to Logan and I went with him to Grand Central station. What I felt was so hard to explain. My heart hurt and I felt like I wanted to cry, but when I tried I just couldn’t.

Before I knew it Logan said, “Oh! There’s the train!”

I saw it in him that he felt like jumping around. Meanwhile I just wanted to fall back and pretend that I was in a world where my parents never died and Logan never went off to college…

The sound of the train woke me. I just had to face reality. Then I looked over to Logan, finally I saw the sadness in him I had been waiting for. Logan looked at me. I looked right back at him.

“Logan, um, good luck,.” I said.

He smiled at me. “Thank you, Lil… Ill miss you,” he said softly.

“Ill miss you too,” I said, looking up to hold in my tears.

He hugged me, then picked up his bag and got on to the train. Just as the train left I forgot to say something. I started running after the train. I stopped myself. Then I shouted at the top of my lungs,

“LOGAAN! CONGRATULAAATIONS!”

 

The Banana Man Candy Lizard Mix-up

Once upon a time there lived a banana man. He was stuck in a swamp. It was muddy and slimy and squirmy. It smelled dirty and mushy. He wanted to get out. Then suddenly he saw a big lizard and he was so scared that he wanted to jump out of the swamp right away and behind him was a whole pile of candy. So he wanted to stay in the swamp for a little bit longer. He was nervous to jump over the lizard, because it was so big and had sharp teeth.

Banana Man wanted to eat the candy and the lizard wanted to eat him. He tried to go around the lizard but he couldn’t move that fast. He tried going under the lizard, but he couldn’t see anything and then the lizard got stuck too so he couldn’t eat the banana man and the banana man couldn’t eat the candy. Then the lizard pulled on the ground so he got unstuck and then almost caught the banana man. But the banana man got unstuck too and grabbed the candy and ran out of the swamp. But the lizard was still following him. The lizard caught the bag of candy but not the banana man. The banana man caught his tail but he didn’t catch the candy.

“I don’t think that’s a regular banana afterall,” said the lizard and he heard the banana man scream and then he grabbed the candy from the lizard’s mouth and jumped off the lizard and ran. “Oh man,” said the lizard putting his hands down, touching his feet with his tail curled up.

When the banana man ran, some of the candy fell out and when the lizard ate the candy he realized that it was better than a banana man. And the banana man realized that the lizard thought he was a regular banana but the lizard did not care because he had candy.

Mouse Story

Isabelle likes cheese and she is a white mouse. She wants to be the best gymnast in the world so she can get a cheese trophy. It is real cheese and you don’t have to peel the wrapper off first because it comes off for you. And then you could eat it yum yum yum.

There is a competition one day and you have to jump over the obstacles to get to the trophy. If someone gets stuck in the obstacles they can’t win so whoever gets there first wins. The mouse thinks she will win because she’s already done something like that and she knows how to do a full back handspring with no mistakes.

Some people think she’ll win like her family and her friends.

This is what the obstacle course looks like: there’s a spring board at the beginning and one person stands on one side and one person stands on the other side and when someone jumps on it the other one swings up. After that there are the bars and after that you have to swing on the rings  and after that you have to get on the first ledge and then you have to stand up and climb the rock wall and then you get to the cheese trophy!!! But there is another part where you have to do whatever they tell you and if you don’t you are out.

Isabelle has been practicing for five years.

On the day of the competition Isabelle felt excited. She stretched and warmed up. Her family and friends came to the competition. Isabelle thought she would win, but there were other mice there that were good gymnasts. At first the judges tell them all to do a round-off. Then they told them to do a back handspring. She made no mistakes! Then she started, and swung up on the springboard. she did a good job. The mice clapped! When she got to the two bars on the side that you had to push up on, she got up. But then when she got to the rock wall, she fell! She had gotten to the fourth rock, and her hand slipped. She fell onto her feet.

Isabelle still thought she could win. There were rock walls on the side so she could climb up the rock wall and they’re very short so she got up and she went again. She finally got up the wall! She was so happy! She won, even though she’d fallen! People clapped! Her family stood up and cheered and yelled her name.

Then she smelled cheese. The trophy was as big as a mouse! She was the same height as it! She took it home. That day, she had it for lunch.

She was going to do gymnastics next year, too.

 

THE END

Home of the Aliens

BOOK ONE: The Endless Fight

 

There once was a planet called Bobo, and the planet was a very happy planet and everyone there had a lot of fun but there was this other planet named Nani that only had junk on it and wanted to take over Bobo.  However, the Bobos were the bad guys and the Nanis were the good guys.  Bobo didn’t have any heroes or anything but Nani had a hero called X.  He had all the powers you could think of, so Bobo decided to make a fighter robot and it took them a year to make it.  But the Nanis saw the robot so then the Nani king called Nani declared war.

They had a huge fight but more of the Bobos got killed than the Nanis because X was more powerful than the robot.  So then they made a bigger robot that could fit all the people on Bobo. They called the robot BoboBot. It was bigger than X though he was still more powerful.  The robot blocked all of X’s strikes so X made this machine that shrank someone, so he shrunk the robot and all the Bobos still in it. But the robot could still do a lot of things but its strikes were too little.  X was going to step on the robot but it could move very fast, so X was busy chasing the robot but the people started to get tired of using their hands to move the controls. X trapped them in a corner and he crushed them but Bobos ran out all over the place.  X killed so many that there were only 15 left so the ones that were left made a huge invisibility cloak and they put it over all of them and they shot at X with invisible bullets.  But X was still too powerful so he made something so that if you hit him with a powerful bolt he gets stronger, so he defeated the 15 Bobos and the Nanis won.  The Nanis went to war because the Bobos stole all their gadgets and everything because they wanted to be powerful. But a pregnant woman who was special because she could glow in the dark had had X as a baby, but then the Bobos captured X’s mother and they killed her so that’s why the Bobos are the bad guys.

After the Nanis defeated the Bobos, they rescued X’s mother and X gets married to a superwoman whose dad is Nani. So X becomes a prince. Nani is a powerful planet, and Bobo blows up.

 

The End.

 

BOOK TWO: A New World Is Born

 

The Nanis lived happily ever after but what they didn’t know was that the Bobos had put a little seed in the equator of their planet that would make another planet grow when Bobo blows up.  As a consequence that became a very powerful planet, almost as powerful as Nani.  So Nani built a lot of robots in case X died, because the planet, called The Underworld, was very powerful. X prayed to God that he wouldn’t die, then he went out and fought without anyone noticing and he blew half of the planet up with his powers. But X’s servants were really mad because he didn’t let them know that he was going to fight the planet on his own, and he got badly injured and they sent in their Xbots. They could fly, and they had so many gadgets and they have 1000 lives and there were a million of them. They all went into battle but the Underworld didn’t know that the second half of their planet was going to be blown up, so while the Xbots were heading toward the planet, the king – called the Evil Lord – saw them in his tower. His tower was so high and you don’t know how high it goes. Up high, he saw the Xbots and he crawled into a secret cockpit and then he took 2 machine guns in his hand and he blasted all the Xbots.

Luckily, X had a great idea; he put force fields around Xbots. Chunks of the other half of the planet started falling and many people died.  No one was ready, except for the Evil Lord, so the whole planet blew up and X got 1000 more wives and they had a big party with a lot of food and all the people became fat.

 

The End.

 

 

BOOK THREE

 

After everyone gets fat—the only person who wasn’t fat was X and the Nani king—everyone just kept eating more and more so they blew up. After that, there were only two people on the planet; the Nani king and X, so it was a very lonely planet, and other planets thought that Nani was an evil planet. They thought it was a junkyard planet. They threw all their junk on half of the planet.  X and Nani were in trouble so they had to come up with a plan because even though  X had a lot of powers, he did not have enough to destroy all the other aliens on the other planets.

Unluckily, they found a baby left right next to the equator, but then X touched the baby but it rolled into the equator and all of a sudden the equator blew up and there was only 3/4s of the planet left.  Nani and X kept searching for the baby for 12 years until they came to a piece of light which got bigger and bigger until it was a person made of fire, so he became X’s son. Soon Nani died and the planet was no longer called Nani; it was called                            because it didn’t have a name.  That planet would explode in 10 minutes because it had nothing on it, so X and his son named Lava Boy left the planet when it was about to blow up. But then they found a planet that was captured and it was called Lava World.  All the people were made of lava so X took over the world, and then one of the scientists freed the world so nobody was locked in cages. They thanked X for rescuing them.  They turned him into Lava X.  They had a big celebration and the planet was renamed Lava Nani.

 

The End.

 

End OF Series!

 

The Little Dolphin

Chapter One

Once upon a time, there was a dolphin that lived in the sea. Her name was Ginger. Then she saw an octopus coming close to her. Then she saw a bunny on the shore. And then she went back under water. She looked for seaweed. She couldn’t find any. She didn’t have any breakfast, so she was going to starve if she didn’t get this seaweed. She dug all the dirt on the ocean floor, but she still didn’t find any seaweed. Then she looked up on the surface to see if there’s any seaweed, but she still couldn’t find the seaweed. Then she saw a stingray. Stingrays were her enemy. She swam far away from the sting ray. And the stingray couldn’t find her.

“Maybe I’ll go back to the stingray and talk”, said Ginger. She wanted to talk to the stingray because she wanted the seaweed first. Then she talked to the stingray.

She said, “Can I have the seaweed first?” But the stingray already found the seaweed. The stingray ate half the seaweed, and put all the others on the ocean floor. He just put them on the ocean floor. Then Ginger ate the other half.

And then Ginger swam back to her parents. She wanted to have a sleepover with her friends, but her parents said no. Then she asked five more times, and her parents still said no. They said no because they thought she needed to wait a little more to go to a sleepover. She could only go to a sleepover with her cousins. She was disappointed. Then she went back to bed.

Then the next day came. Then she asked her mom again, and dad again. It was her birthday. She turned five. Her grandma and grandpa bought them food. She didn’t want her mom and dad to see that she was getting food then, so she took it to her friend’s house. If she was gonna go with her parents then she was gonna tell them that she wanted to go to her friend’s house, so she wanted to use the new food to lure her parents. She ate her breakfast, and she played a puzzle. And then she went to the playground. She ate her lunch. Then she got her mom and dad’s favorite food, to lure them to her friend’s house. Mom and Dad’s favorite foods are salad and spaghetti and meatballs. They recognized it was the friend’s house and they take her back home. Then she got her mom and dad’s favorite food and tried to lure Mom and Dad to her best friend’s house again. But Mom and Dad recognized it was her friend’s house, so then they took her back home again. Then she ate dinner. Then she went to bed.

Then she saw a shark, and she ate her breakfast quickly. Then she ran away from the shark quickly. The shark chased her when she tried to sneak over to her friend’s house. Then the shark chased her back to her house. Then she tried again but the shark chased her back to her house again. Her parents were eating breakfast and they didn’t see it happening. Then she tried to chase the shark away but the shark kept chasing her away. And then she gets her mom but her mom was talking on the phone. Then she asked her dad but her dad was having some coffee. Then she tried to chase the shark away again but the shark kept chasing. Then she swam away from the shark and the shark kept chasing her. So then she tip-toed quietly and the shark didn’t see her.

So then she went to her friend’s house. She already packed all her stuff so she could go. Her mom already called her friend’s mom so she could go but had to wait two more years. But Ginger didn’t want to wait. So she went to her friend’s house and when she got there she said hello to her friend and her friend’s mom asked, “Are you seven yet?” and Ginger said no.

“I thought your mom told you you have to wait till you’re seven.”

“But I already packed all my stuff!”

Then she said, “Go back home and keep your stuff till when you get to be seven.”

 

Chapter Two

 

Ginger’s friend was already seven but they were still friends. Then Ginger’s friend’s mom said, “Just go back to your home now.”

Then Ginger said, “What about I stay here until I’m seven. I have all my clothes here.”

“Just go back home now!” Ginger’s friend’s mom said.

Then Ginger went back home. She felt really disappointed. Then she asked her parents if she could go again.

They said, “No no no, wait until you are seven.”

So she tried again, but her parents just said, “No, no, no wait until you are seven.”

Then she ate lunch. She had carrots and celery. So then she tried to tell her mom and dad she’d do all her chores but they said no no no. Then she promised she would clean her room and she would do everything for her mom and dad.

And they said,”Yes but clean your room now.”

But she didn’t want to clean her room and they said, “Then you will not go unless you clean your room. If you clean your room right now you will go the day after tomorrow and you will stay for three nights.

So she cleaned her room and her mom said, “In neat piles not under the table and over the table.” Ginger cleaned her room and made it into piles. Her mom said, “Don’t put piles on the pathway to your bed.” Then Ginger put them on the place where no one will check not on the pathway to her bed. And her mom said, “You can go to the sleepover. But here are the rules: no tickling under their chin, no running and pretending to get hurt, no ripping their pillows when you want the feathers of the pillow to come out, and no jumping on the bed. And those are the rules you have to follow. If you wanna go stay with rules if you don’t want to go then don’t stay with the rules.”

Then Ginger said, “I’ll stay with the rules.”

Then she went to the playground. Then had naptime. Then had playtime. Then had snacktime. Then she had dinnertime. And last but not least, she had bedtime. She slept very well. Then she woke up her mom and dad.

“It’s the day! It’s the day!” She said.

“Not today,” her mom said,” tomorrow is the day.”

“Hooray hooray!” Ginger said.

Tomorrow.

“But that takes too long!

“It won’t take so long,’ her dad said, “just a double 24 hours.”

It was five o’clock in the morning then five o ten and five o twenty and five o thirty one.

Then Ginger said, “But I don’t want to wait too long.”

“Don’t worry,” her dad said, “I promise you will be going to your friend’s house tomorrow.”

Then she got very disappointed. Then she talked to her baby sister. Her baby sister’s name was Valentina. Her baby sister was six months old. “Ga ga ga” she said to her sister.

Her sister said back, “Ga ga goo goo.”

Then her dad drank coffee and her mom talked on the phone. Then she shook her rattle.

 

Chapter 3

 

Then she ate breakfast and then she played with the puzzle. It was a safari puzzle. After the puzzle she read a book. The book was about nursery rhymes. She liked Twinkle Twinkle Little Star and The Wheels on the Bus. Then she went to the fair with her mom and dad and baby sister. There was apple juice and seaweed. You had to grab the seaweed out of the apple juice. She lived in a cave.

She went on the ferris wheel. Then she went on the roller coaster. She was not scared at all and she went on a ride called Tornado that was spinning a lot and spun really fast and then she went to eat ice cream. Her baby sister ate ice cream in a cup. Ginger got banana ice cream. Her baby sister got lemon sorbet. Valentina was scared of some rides but some rides she wasn’t scared of. Then she had lunch. After lunch she went on more rides. Valentina went on the little truck ride. Valentina’s favorite color was purple. Ginger’s favorite color was yellow. Then Valentina went on the little Indian Beach ride. Then Valentina went on the car ride. Then Valentina went on the train ride. Then Ginger went on the rollercoaster again. Then the mommy and daddy went on the little truck ride with Valentina. Then they went on the rollercoaster with Ginger. And then they went home. Then they ate dinner. Then Ginger went to bed. When she went to bed, she thought about the sleepover. She was so excited.

 

Chapter 4

 

Then it was the day of the sleepover. Ginger was going to stay at her friend’s house for three nights. Then Ginger’s mom and dad put Valentina in her high chair. Then her mom and dad ate breakfast. Then Ginger put her stuffed animal in her bag. Then she went outside.

Her mother said,”Not yet. At three o’clock.” Then it was one o’clock. Then it was two o’clock. Then it was three o’clock. Then Ginger’s dad took Ginger out to the car. And he drove Ginger there. Ginger’s mom was sitting next to Ginger’s dad. And Valentina was sitting next to Ginger. Then they arrived at Ginger’s friend’s house. Then Ginger opened the door. She said bye bye to her parents and bye bye to her sister. Then Ginger’s parents took Valentina to the car. Then she went up the stairs.

Then she saw her friend, and Ginger’s friend’s mom asked,”Are you seven yet?”

And Ginger said,”No. But my mom said that I can stay three nights here.”

“Unroll your sleeping bag,” Ginger’s friend said. Ginger’s sleeping bag was green with yellow polka dots. Then they played tag you’re it outside. Then they swam in the pool. Ginger’s friend had a pool. She felt happy. And her friend felt happy. She was excited.

 

Chapter 5

 

Then they ate lunch. She felt happy and excited, but sometimes she had to go to bed and not play in the pool. It was bedtime, so she couldn’t go to the pool. Then it was the next day. She ate breakfast. She had cereal for breakfast. Then they played with the puzzles.

Then they went to the fair. First, they went to the bouncy castle. Then they went to the ferris wheel. Then they had two snacks. Then they went on the roller coaster. Then they went to the obstacle course. Then they went to her friend’s house. Then they ate lunch. Then they played in the pool. Ginger felt happy and excited. And then she played with five more puzzles.

She felt happy about the sleepover, but she also wanted to go home, because she had a jacuzzi. She missed her family, and she had a backyard. Then she had dinner and then she went to bed. Ginger already knew that she had a family, and she learned that she wanted to go back to them, and to play with the jacuzzi.

Injustice

Once upon a time, there was a boa constrictor with fangs as sharp as swords, and he had wings that could make him fly. He lived in a secret fortress. He wanted to destroy everything and rule the world. He wanted everyone to follow his orders. His name was Pythor.

There were a bunch of seeds and a special plant in an enchanted garden – a lot of those special plants. But Pythor asked his army of snakes to destroy all the plants. But he and his army didn’t notice one seed that was not cut, and then the seed started growing and it turned into a boy who could fly. He could disappear somewhere and reappear somewhere else, and he had laser-eyes. His name was Nightwing. Nightwing had a lot of gadgets and weapons because he found materials to make them. He found leather and then he made leather pickaxes and leather swords in case some broke, and he dug for diamonds and then he went right back up and crafted the diamond into a diamond sword. Also, one time he dug for iron so he could get enough iron to make iron leggings, iron boots, an iron chestplate and an iron helmet. And then he built a diamond mansion in the enchanted garden.

Nightwing knew about Pythor and his army. After he had been born from the seed, he watched Pythor and his army as they left, and saw all the destruction they had caused. He decided to put a disguise on, pretending to be a pizza man, and he delivered pizza to them, and then he asked to go to where all the remote controls and weapons and gadgets were. They said, “If you give us eight slices of pizza for free.”

And then Nightwing gave them all the pizza for free and he went to the remote control, weapons and gadgets room, and then he turned off all the remote controls because they were on and that was charging all their computers so they could look at whichever place they wanted to destroy next. Also, he put a pizza in the remote controls and it jammed the machine so you couldn’t turn it back on. Then he disappeared and reappeared in his diamond mansion.

Meanwhile, Pythor was eating his pizza. He was thinking of his next step. He pulled out a map for back-up. He didn’t feel like going to his remote controls. He was tired. He thought he could take over the USA. And he wanted to use all his weapons and gadgets to hypnotize the president to help destroy the USA.

Nightwing was having a baby. He used some of his powers to put into the baby’s heart. Nightwing named him Redhood. He wanted the baby because he was lonely. He had no one else like him. Redhood quickly grew into a boy. Then Nightwing put a forcefield around the galaxy, and his son was busy protecting the president. He traveled to the US and went to the White House in Washington, DC. He disappeared from the enchanted garden and reappeared in the President’s office. And he told the president to put on super spy binoculars. The president said that he would because he heard about Nightwing and Redhood in the newspaper and he knew that they were good and that they were trying to fight for justice.

Meanwhile, Pythor was launching his ships to the White House and Redhood was protecting the president. But then the president’s army attacked Pythor’s army. Pythor’s army was using weapons like swords, shields, and daggers. They were using all their vehicles. Meanwhile, Nightwing was looking at the battle and he knew he had to help, so he went over to the White House and used his weapons to help the president’s army and Redhood. Afterwards, Nightwing had a big battle with Pythor, and they were fighting with all kinds of weapons like swords, shields, and daggers. Nightwing took his steel rod and let him have it! Then Pythor hypnotized Nightwing. He told Nightwing to kill Redhood. But then one of the guys from the president’s army knocked Nightwing out and he wasn’t hypnotized anymore. Nightwing tripped Pythor and electrocuted him, so then he said, “I must regroup, but I’ll be back someday!”

Then he disappeared forever.

 

Excellent Adventures

One day a girl named Alice and her mom wanted to go for a walk. They saw an ice-cream truck.

“Can I have ice-cream?” she asked nicely.

“No way we haven’t even had dinner,” said the mom.

“Can we have ice-cream after dinner?” she asked nicely.

“Maybe if you eat all your dinner,” said the mom.

The girl believed her and so she ate all her dinner. They had mashed potatoes, spinach and spaghetti.

“Now can we get ice-cream?”

“No,” said the mom, “let’s go to the playground, maybe while we’re going if there’s an ice-cream truck, we can get some ice-cream and eat it at the playground.”

 

But on the way, there was no ice-cream. She looked everywhere. She saw an ice-cream truck but it was too far from where she was. Maybe I’ll get ice-cream tomorrow, she thought.

 

So they went to the playground for one minute. They only played on the swings. She felt ok about not getting ice-cream because she might get ice-cream on a different day.

 

They went home. She went to bed.

 

The next day, after they ate breakfast they played in the playground. They played for one hour. They went on the slide and the swings and the monkey bars. She was tired and she went home and took a nap.

 

They ate lunch: peanut butter and jelly with broccoli and mashed potatoes. After lunch, her mom said, “Let’s go out for a walk.”

 

They saw an ice-cream truck and started walking toward it, but the girl thought they were going somewhere else.

 

“Surprise!” said the mom and dad.

The little girl got mint-chocolate chip and the dad got cookies and cream and the mom got double chocolate. They went to the playground and ate their ice-cream. When the dad was done, he went home and got a blanket for a picnic for dinner. After they were done with dinner they had mashed potatoes again and then they got ice cream again. They got different flavors. The little girl got double chocolate. The mom got mint-chocolate chip and the dad got cookies and cream again. They went to a different ice cream shop. The mom and dad didn’t surprise the little girl, she knew they were getting ice-cream. They all got the same flavor. They all got strawberry. No one had stomach aches because they said yes, because they didn’t get ice cream yesterday.

 

They went home and had no more ice cream. The girl felt happy. They had a happy time. They went to bed.

 

The next morning they ate breakfast and they had pancakes with waffles.

 

“I don’t want ice cream today,” the girl said.

“Good,” said the mom, “because you’re not getting ice cream today after yesterday.”

 

The End

 

 

The Epic Gorilla

Gorilla EX knows every single karate move in the world. He does this special move where when he lays his finger on someone they turn into stone. He has a lot of muscles and all the girls like him. He has a six-pack and abs. He lives in a mansion with a pool and water fountain, and he is very rich, and he’s awesome at a lot of sports like basketball and baseball and snowboarding. When it’s winter he turns his place into a hockey rink. He got rich even though his parents were very poor. In his childhood the only thing he could do was inventing. So he tried out for inventing because inventing was the cheapest thing people could do in those times, and he was very young. But he learned how to invent and he invented this thing that makes people’s mind turn on him. He could control them.

As a high school student he went to visit India for a summer vacation, but there were a bunch of bandits and he didn’t know what to do. He got trapped with a bunch of bandits and fell off a cliff, but luckily he always carries a parachute with him. He fell to a surface and he found his way back to the hotel. But then he checked in his closet where he kept the machine and he saw that it was gone and that’s when he found out about the bandits. They had turned only five people’s minds on them, so now there were fifty-seven bandits (there used to be fifty-two). Now the whole world was going to be filled with bandits, so Gorilla EX started practicing so many karate moves in his mansion and he got stronger and stronger, until he actually looked like a real gorilla. He started inventing a machine that makes him stronger so no one could defeat him. He made a hypno-ray that makes him stronger so he just types in how strong he wants to be and what he needs. So he typed in “Ultra-Strong Gorilla EX” and then he got so strong that when he punched through diamond or brick or bedrock with his bare hands it doesn’t even hurt and it just goes straight through.

The bandits made a villain that was unstoppable. When he touches lightning all of a sudden it zaps and breaks apart and there’s no more lightning. He can control the lightning. The villain looked exactly like Gorilla EX so then everyone started liking him instead of Gorilla EX, and he had an even better mansion with a hockey rink inside and even if it was the summer you could still go on the hockey rink. It made Gorilla EX even more jealous. The villain’s name was Evil X, but everyone thought he was Gorilla EX.

Gorilla EX wanted to find out who was under that costume. He had to spy on him, and when he was spying he saw a poster on Evil X’s mansion that said, “If Anyone Wants to Fight Gorilla EX Then Step Right Up Because Gorilla EX Will Pound Them To Death.” The fight was supposed to happen in his mansion in an arena made of gold.

Gorilla EX got ready. Soon enough he was stepping onto the arena, but there was no Evil X. And then, all of a sudden, something whacked him in the face and almost knocked him out. And then he found out that Evil X could turn invisible, but Gorilla EX couldn’t. So Gorilla EX had to keep his hands up at all times so he didn’t get another punch to knock him out. After a while Evil X got tired of punching and fighting Gorilla EX. Gorilla EX felt that there was no one punching him and kicking him anymore so then he started punching air and feeling if there were any objects in the air. Soon he punched out and all of a sudden he heard a “yowl,” so he started punching to knock Evil X out. All of a sudden he heard Evil X fall to the floor so he felt around for a body. He grabbed him and then he felt his belt and then felt what does what and he turned Evil X back so he wasn’t invisible anymore. He took him to his mansion and put TNT in his mansion and it exploded, and all the people who were rooting for Evil X died. So now it was Gorilla EX’s turn to find out who was under that costume.

He took off all the clothing. He pulled it off and he saw that it was a robot, and then he took his shoes off and saw on the bottom of his foot, “Signed by the bandits of India.” After he found out it was the bandits, he took Evil X’s belt and turned invisible. He snuck into the crooks’ lair because he found out on his belt that it said “Go to lair.” There was a portal that opens up and sends you right to the bandits’ lair. So then, all of a sudden, he got the bandits and then he tied them up and then the bandits were like, “Who the heck did this to me?” As they lay in confusion, he used a special move and turned all of them into stone except for the robot. He sent them flying into an Indian volcano with a thousand pounds of dynamite all around them and they were attached to a man-eating shark. They were sent into the volcano and when the lava touched the shark – which they shot on a rocket – the sharks would eat them because they were sharks that when they get in the lava it makes them meaner. They would eat the crooks when they were all covered in lava. So he sent them off. He also put some lava jellyfish with them so jellyfish would sting them to death if the shark didn’t find them. So the bandits and the robot got double beaten up.

But the people still liked Evil X so he used the mind machine that he got back from the bandits of India and he turned all the people’s minds back so they liked him. And then Gorilla EX became popular again.

The Epic Story

King has a money machine and everyone likes him. He’s really good at sports, like basketball. He’s even better than Lebron James. Usually people want Lebron James’ signature, but Lebron James wanted King’s signature. He has more than enough money to make a robot or a rocketship that has a stink bomb and also there’s green smoke that blasts out when it’s launching that stinks. It’s like skunk stink. He has a ferrari that can change into four things: a jet plane, a battleship, a submarine with harpoon missiles and a car that goes in the sewers without being stinky. He can also race the dead. He chooses wisely who he raises. He also has special powers like being invisible and running faster than a speeding bullet, and flying.

Before he got the money, some people were alive before him that were crooks and criminals. By the time he was alive, though, a ghost told the crooks and criminals that a person would have all the money and that he would defeat the crooks and criminals. So then the crooks and criminals went away and became good people. His parents were rich and they bought a money machine, and they let him have it for his birthday. He made a chewable tablet and he gave it to everybody so everyone could live forever.

But there was another team of crooks that didn’t hear the ghost’s warning. They had another team captain. They were worse than bandits. They had special powers. For example, one crook can turn into ice. One guy can disappear some place and reappear somewhere else. And another can shoot fire at heroes. The crooks heard about King and they wanted to destroy him because they knew that he had a lot more money than anyone else had, and he would never give away his money machine, and they wanted all the money in the world. They had money, but they wanted more.

Some people knew they were coming, and they told King and he was not scared. He went to a place where they teach karate and he learned all the karate moves. He even punched a hole in a punching bag without a boxing glove. With just his bare hand.

The crooks lived on another planet. The whole population came to King’s planet. The spaceship landed somewhere near the end of the world. And then they came to fight King at the end of the world, but he had a machine that makes things in one second and he just typed something in and it made a big sword. The big sword cut off the end of the world and the crooks fell down, and he made a replacement of the part he cut off. And all the crooks were falling down and they couldn’t reach. They had hooks that when they push a button it goes on something. They go far, but there was nothing for them to grab on to. They fell to the end of the universe, and they died.

King built a forcefield and he put it around his whole planet to protect everybody forever.

 

 

The Candy Baby

I like sweets because I’m three. My mom never lets me have sweets because I’m only three. She really does not want me to have sweets, but when I grow up then she will let me because she won’t know if I’m walking by the street and there’s a candy shop and I want some. And then I will keep walking until I find the biggest candy and then I will want to eat it. I like candy because I’m a candy baby. I’m a baby that loves candy so much that that’s the only thing I eat.

I’m on the street and I see a big a piece of candy, as big as a giraffe. It’s pink and it smells like candy made of chocolate and lollipops and sugar and gum. It’s a giant gummy. And then I want to eat it, but there’s bad people that stop me from eating it. They are the owners of the candy. They want to stop me from eating it because it’s their candy and they don’t want to share. That’s why they’re bad.

Then, when they’re gone for a second, I carry it home and eat it. My mom doesn’t see me because I’m in a locked room. It tastes like a gummy, sweet as an orange. I eat the whole thing and I don’t get sick. And then I shrink and then I’m only a one-year-old. I turn from a three-year-old to a one-year-old, and then I eat my mom’s gum. The candy made me shrink! Now that I’m a year old, I will stay in my candy room forever so my mom doesn’t see me.

Then I go on another adventure. I’m in New York and I go on an airplane to Disney World and it is so fun. I just enter and I walk five blocks and I take a car for two hours and I find a man holding a giant piece of candy in Disney World. It looks like it is made out of gum, which is my favorite thing. The man is also made of gum, so I eat the man and the piece of candy. And then I come home and eat it all, and then I stay home and then I go to Long Island. I find the biggest piece of candy in the world, bigger than all of the other candies. It is also made of gum, but then it shrinks. It is tinier than a butterfly. It is purple. It has candy glass, and then I eat it and it is better than all of the candies. It is smaller. It tastes like cotton candy. And it is so good! And it turns me back to three years old!

Then I want some of the best candy. There is such a big piece of candy on the street. It is very dirty. I never knew it was dirty. The people who own the candy will give it to me because I act very old but I’m really little. I act like I’m fifteen.

“Can I please have some candy?”

“Yes.” And they give it me for free because I act like I’m an old lady. I’m three but I act like I’m fifteen and I look like I’m older. I have powers to look like I’m older. My mom gave them to me. She doesn’t know I’m a candy baby because I’m always eating this candy in the special room. The dentist doesn’t know I eat candy because I brush really well. I brush really well so that nobody knows that I go to these places and eat all this candy.  Also, I have the power to never forget things. I was born with it.

The next day I go to the dentist, but I do not want to. The dentists might know that I’ve been eating a lot of sugar, and when my mom is talking to the dentist I go away to somewhere else but then everything traps me. The only shop that is there is actually a net that traps me, because the net knows that I love sugar so it closed off all the sugar. But then it traps me because it doesn’t want me to find the sugar. Luckily I had brought scissors and I cut through the nest.

I had to go back to the dentist but then I stole all the sweets from the dentist.

Then I leave the dentist and I go to Disneyworld. And I find another big piece of candy, but it isn’t real candy! So I don’t eat it. Then I go to Italy and I find not candy, but sweets. So I eat them. They are good. Then I go back to New York and I find a new piece of candy, the biggest piece in the world. It smells like gummies and fruit snacks and chocolate chips and candy.

 

One morning, I get older! I turn into a toddler. I am four! Then it is my brother’s birthday and he is 17. So I go to Disneyworld and I eat a dirty piece of candy and I get sick. I throw up. I throw up every hour for ten days!

So then I don’t like candy anymore. So I never eat candy anymore.

After that, I listen to my mom all the time. I eat broccoli, carrots, beans, and pasta. I am happy to eat what my mom tells me to. I feel better and more healthy. Nowadays when I’m sleeping and I see candy in my mind I just go and sleep with my mom. I dream about candy like every day, but I never eat it.

Then I live happily ever after.

 

THE END

 

The Lost Treasure

Once there was a goose named Gawen. Gawen worked for the king, King Basil the bear, as a guard. Gawen loved the king. But something happened a few days ago, when 28 rubies were stolen. King Basil and Gawen were the only ones that had the keys to the castle treasury. And then a couple days ago, 4 pieces of gold were stolen. And then two pieces of silver were stolen. After that, the King wanted to get to the bottom of it, so he called all the guards to tell them about the news. After King Basil had told them the other eight guards looked at Gawen with suspicious eyes. Gawen said that he didn’t do it, though. But King Basil trusted Gawen. One of the guards who was a rhino named Robert stared at Gawen for a long time and stopped to go back to his duties.

It wasn’t really Gawen because a couple of days before, a mouse named Tuck was looking around the village and found himself in the castle where his friend Gawen worked. Then Tuck found a little hole in the floor and went through. He found out that it was a mole hole that was made a long time ago. Then Tuck went right through the hole and he found himself in the treasury. As soon as he got out of the hole, he saw shining gold and silver on an old dusty table in one of the corners of the room. When Tuck saw the rubies, he thought of himself as not a thief but a small, little borrower. And he thought that nobody would notice because they were always left in there, so he took 28 of them and left. He put them near his bed. Tuck’s blanket was an old piece of Kleenex that he found. It wasn’t much. He decided to put one of the rubies at the front of the door when people came in to see them. He fixed up his house by paying people rubies. He bought a better blanket, a little table and a fridge.

The next day, Tuck went back to go see the treasury again. When he came out, he saw the treasure but there was something new there. Instead of a clear room now there were red shiny lasers. Since Tuck was a mouse, he could go through the lasers easily. He jumped over one laser and through another. He jumped over one and ducked under one. He came to a laser that was harder than the others, but behind it he could see the treasure.

Tuck said, “This is going to be harder than the others. Hopefully, I can make it through the lasers.” Luckily, Tuck made it through the lasers.

After Tuck came out of the other side of the lasers, Tuck saw piles of gold and silver. They were piled in different groups. Then Tuck saw something hidden behind a leg of a table that the gold was sitting on. Tuck ran to the yellow, shiny thing that he saw. He noticed that light was bouncing off the yellow object. The light made it look very shimmery and sparkly. Tuck pounced on the yellow shiny thing that he saw and realized that the object was a diamond. But Tuck wondered if it was fake because he had never seen a yellow diamond. Then Tuck realized that it was a yellow diamond. Tuck wondered if it was special because it was a yellow diamond, instead of a clear-whitish diamond.

 

Then Tuck thought to himself and said, “I think that I could use this myself. I doubt that the King and Gawen will mind if I take one of their precious stones for… I don’t know… myself, because I’m important, too.”

Tuck ran home to get something to carry the diamond. He brought a magic spray bottle that would help him make the alarms disappear, so he wouldn’t set off any alarms. He started to think about what he was doing because if anyone found out, or suspected that Gawen was doing it, he or Gawen would get  in trouble with the King. But then he thought that no one would suspect Gawen to do something like that because he was such a good goose.

He took the yellow diamond and took out another spray can and sprayed it in the air. The lasers appeared again. He then decided to keep the yellow diamond in a very special place. He kept the diamond in a room behind a painting. That secret room was in his bedroom. When he moved the painting aside there was a door behind, and when he closed the door the painting went back in place. Then there were stairs that went down into another room that held special things like the 28 rubies that he had also stolen. He also kept gold that he had stolen from the treasury there. Tuck wished he had someone to share his secret with, but his friend John couldn’t keep secrets.

John was Tuck’s best friend, but he couldn’t keep secrets because he was a blabbermouth. John was a lemur and they met when Tuck was running away from a mountain lion. They bumped into each other and became friends. John helped Tuck get away from the lion and that began their friendship.

The next two days after that happened, the King was getting suspicious and doubtful of Gawen because he was the only one who had the keys beside King Basil. Then the last day that Tuck stole the stones, the King was very suspicious because his mother, the former Queen, told him that she didn’t think that Gawen was trustworthy and that maybe he was the one stealing all of the precious items. She thought maybe that Gawen was trying to make King Basil look funny and bad in front of all his subjects. She didn’t want to think of Gawen as her grandchild because her son was grown up. It was just really hard for the former Queen to take all of this in.

Then the next day, an F.B.I agent came in to solve the mystery of the missing jewels. The king had told him to come and try to find the thief that stole the jewels. King Basil did not want to believe that Gawen was the one who stole the jewels. The F.B.I agent stood near the castle every day. The king told the other guards that he was just a new guard for the caste because the  jewels were stolen even though he was really a F.B.I agent working for the king. King Basil didn’t even tell Gawen that the new guard was actually a F.B.I agent because if it was Gawen he didn’t want him to know that the new guard was actually a F.B.I.agent. The F.B.I agent was a lion and a very fierce lion. The king really did want to tell Gawen but right now he couldn’t tell anybody just in case it might be that animal because then they would know to be more careful so they wouldn’t get caught. “I can’t tell anybody,” King Basil mumbled to himself.

 

Now today EVERYONE thought it was Gawen. And now the king did, too. They took him to court and everybody was there who was Gawen’s friend. They were all disappointed to see him in court because they thought he had always been such a good friend and helped them out a lot. But maybe they were wrong. Gawen could not believe what was happening to him. He had also thought he was always a good friend to all of his friends and was very nice and tried to be as helpful as he could, and polite. Gawen was also upset at the king and didn’t understand why he was making him go to court because he had always loved the king and Gawen had thought the king had always loved him.

The judge was the king, and he said, “What happened? Why are you here today? Rest your case now or there will be punishment as in YOU WILL GO TO JAIL,” yelled the king. “Confess already.”

Finally, Gawen said “ I told you I didn’t do it your highness/judge” demanded Gawen. “Why don’t I believe you, duck?” Gawen knew the king really knew his type of animal wasn’t really a duck but he had probably said that because he wanted to act rash like a judge and demanding. But Gawen said “Maybe you just don’t know what’s true and isn’t true. That’s sad king and isn’t fair that you are the king and the judge at the same time. I demand that we have a different judge to make it a fair fight,”  Gawen said strongly.

“Are you saying that I’m the one who stole the items? Or are you saying that I’m not being fair to you as a king? Because that is very rude to say to me, the king.”

“I think we have solved our case and a non-FBI agent will take care of you- as in put you in jail- because you have been rude to me and you probably stole the gems.”

His friends got up from where he was sitting and they left. They were disappointed as he was handcuffed and led out the back door by two guards. They couldn’t believe he would do such a thing.

The guards looked at him with daring and suspicious eyes while they wondered why he betrayed all of his friends and the people who loved and trusted him. As they walked out, Gawen realized that his handcuffs were no match for his awesome wings. They were slick enough to slip out of anything. He quickly, gently, and quietly slipped through the handcuffs and flew into the deepest and darkest parts back and forth. He thought that it was a trap but, when Gawen looked out all he could see was the forest. He looked back and saw the guards were following him. They gathered bombs, pitchforks, and bows and arrows to chase after him. The guard contacted the king and he looked out for Gawen at the top of the courthouse.

The king was also disappointed, yet he had this vengeful look on his  face.

The king screamed, “You will rue this day!” His voice echoed and weakened. “I don’t know why you did this. I thought we were best friends. How could you betray me and the subjects?”
He saw all of the guards and their weapons chasing after Gawen into the forest.

Tuck the mouse also wondered what he had done. He thought, “My friend will die because of me. What have I done? I am the one who is actually hurting my friend. Why!!! I betrayed my friend and I am a thief and a horrible person. Why was I so foolish? I am the dumbest person in the world. Definitely. I have to tell the king it was me.” No, I can’t because I need to tell Gawen that I was the one who was stealing and if he wants to tell the king that it was me or I will tell the king it was me.

“I will definitely tell the king what I did, even if they have to chop my head off!!!” declared Tuck. As Gawen entered forest, he could smell damp leaves because it had recently just rained near the forest. Gawen now did not know where he would stay and if he should just admit that he was guilty. He didn’t know what he should do either: if he should turn himself in or just stay there and try to stay hidden.

Gawen decided that he would stay one night to see if he could survive. He bet himself his life if he couldn’t stay alive for one night because if he was caught by the king’s guards that night his life would be over anyway. That night, he heard leaves blowing in the wind. He now knew what people felt like if they were poor. Suddenly, he heard a guard coming close to where he was hiding. Gawen’s heart sank into him.

I am dead meat, thought Gawen.

But then everything was silent. All Gawen could hear was the leaves swishing see was a tail that may have looked like a familiar tail in the leaves.

Gawen quickly scurried out of the cave he was hiding in and he poked the tail he had seen. Gawen heard a tiny, squeaky voice that he recognized as his friend, Tuck. When he looked down he did see Tuck had a cute, little sad face that stared at him with big, brown nut eyes. He wondered if Tuck  was scared of him because he thought he was accused of stealing.

But Tuck wasn’t scared. He slipped out of Gawen’s soft wings and ran up his right wing and sat on his face. “ I must tell you some …. news,” Tuck whimpered.

“If its about the king or anything like that I’m not interested,” complained Gawen angrily. Tuck just kept talking and pretending he didn’t hear that.

“Ok, I was the one who stole all of the rubies and jewels, I am really sorry but you guys are rich and I just wanted to borrow some stuff and I guess I didn’t realize I was stealing until  you were accused guilty.” muttered Tuck.

Gawen gasped as Tuck finished his sentence.

“Now you can tell everybody that I was the one who stole everything,” Tuck said, ashamed.

“I am a little mad at you but you didn’t realize it, so it’s ok. I have a idea,” said Gawen as he whispered the idea into Tuck’s ear.

“Ok,” answered Tuck. That night, Tuck snuck into the castle. Tuck had a walkie-talkie in his little pocket because Gawen had given it to him for his plan. But when he was going into the treasury he didn’t want to sneak in the treasury how he did before because now he realized that he was being a thief before.

But then Tuck heard Gawen talking to him through the walky-talky and saying, “You can do it, Tuck. Just don’t give up!” Tuck did not want to do it again, but he knew it was for his friend so he took a chance and went in the mole hole but this time when he entered it the gap was paved over with cement. Tuck though that maybe the cement guys had come in and cemented the floor in the castle to make it better looking. Tuck wasn’t going to let that bother him because he was doing it for his friend, so he decided to go in a different way. Maybe through the guard’s door. He thought to himself, “Hopefully, I can fit so I can do this for my friend so he can come back and feel safe.”

Then Tuck saw a guard near the front entrance to a door and he thought maybe that could be the treasury door. Tuck saw a bird near him and he asked the bird if he could have one of his feathers. The bird said yes and plucked out one of his loose feathers and gave it to Tuck. Tuck had an idea. He could go up and tickle the guard and grab his keys quickly or try to slide under the door. He decided to try to slide under the door first before trying to get the keys from the guard. He walked over slowly and quietly, so the guard wouldn’t see him, and said to Gawen through the walkie talkie, “Plan 1 didn’t work, so I’m going to try plan 2.”

Now he went more swiftly and smoothly and tried to slide under the door. Then he heard a voice and he looked, but quickly he put his head under the door so it didn’t hit his head.

“Wow,” Tuck said, “I almost didn’t make it, and would’ve hit my head.” This time, there were no red lasers but there were invisible baskets of poisonous food that all animals liked, so if that animal ate it, they would die. Tuck loved eating food, and smelled something, even though  he didn’t see anything. His nose led him to a delicious-smelling food. It was familiar and smelled like cheese but he thought his nose was just tricking him so he tried to walk ahead even though his nose kept smelling delicious food. Then he smelled something that smelled like the total opposite of delicious food. He covered his nose to try to get the smell away. He  thought it was an illusion because the treasury looked almost 40 miles away and before it only looked like a couple of steps away. Even though it looked really far away, he still did the obstacles that he saw ahead of him.  Now there were lasers but instead of red they were blue.

Tuck just wanted to give up because doing obstacles was really annoying, He knew it was for his friend, so he decided to not give up and try to do it even faster. He was going to try even harder and really fast. Tuck jumped over one blue laser, then another. The last two were the hardest because they were crossed and it would be hard to get through. Tuck decided to try to be a lot tougher. Then Tuck said, “I am a ninja!” and then he said, “I can do this!” He did it for his best shot and his body went through but all of a sudden his tail touched one of the lasers because he was so excited. It hit the laser because he thought he was almost through, and an alarm went off and he was terrified. All of a sudden he saw a little hole that he scampered into fast. Then he peaked out and waited to see what would happen. Then he saw the food come up and it wasn’t invisible anymore and all he saw was pastries and cheese and all the stuff he loved but it was still poisonous but Tuck didn’t know that. Tuck couldn’t help himself. He went over and took a bite of the cheese that was his favorite and then ran back into the hole and then there was a passage that he saw that now had appeared and he went in and then he saw a mother mouse and her children and then he said, “Oooo. I don’t feel so good.”

And then she said, “Oh no! Did you eat the food outside? I knew that because one of my family members once did that and got tricked! His name was Peter Fudge Cheese!”

“What poisonous food?” Tuck asked. “I just ate some good looking cheese back there. Hold on, I hear the cheese calling again!” And then he said, “I can’t be late for my date with destiny!”

The mother mouse said, “Oh no! It’s happening faster than I expected!” And then she held up a piece of cheese that was not poisonous and put it in a small box and he went in there fast but he acted very weird and he was like, “Is that you Cheese Goddess?” After he scampered into the box she closed the box tightly so Tuck wouldn’t get out.

Then she said, “Eat the cheese!” So he put his head down and started eating the cheese. It had a kind of medicine in it that made you fall asleep. When he finally fell asleep the mother mouse said, “Kids, can you go get a Kleenex blanket and put it on top of this mouse?”

The little mice said, “Yes, Mama Mouse!” and they scampered along to get the blanket. Then the Mama Mouse went in the cupboard and used her tiny paws to dig inside the cupboard because there was lots of stuff and then she said, “I found what I was looking for!” She pulled out a little, little needle that looked like a tiny, sharp staple. She took it out and waited for her children to get the blanket, then when they came back she said, “Children can you please place the blanket on top of this mouse and I will try to help him.”

Her children put a blanket on Tuck and then went into their room to go wrestle. She took out the needle and gently stuck it in him, but not too deep. She took a blood sample. Then she took it out, quickly but she didn’t thrust it out. Then she tested the blood sample to see what was happening and she saw that it was getting worse and worse, so then she took a version of a turkey baster and put medicine in it and opened his mouth and put a little drop or two drops of medicine in it. He swallowed and woke up and he was fine except he didn’t remember anything about what happened to him. He said, “Hello Miss Mouse! Where am I?”

The Mama mouse answered, “You were asleep because you ate some poisonous food and then I saved you, but you must not remember anything.”

Tuck did remember his mission, he just didn’t remember what just happened to him. Tuck realized something weird must have just happened if he was now in a mousehole that wasn’t his. Tuck went out again and said, “Thank you,” and grabbed the walkie-talkie again and said to Gawen, “plan two has partly worked. There were a couple of mistakes that I made, because I got poisoned, but now I’m okay. So what should I do now? I don’t see the light to the treasury like I did before when I stole the items.”

Gawen replied, “Maybe something’s blocking it, like a picture, so try throwing something on each wall and it’ll fall and the treasure will be behind it. Maybe it’s an illusion or something.”

Tuck asked, “What should I throw on the walls?”

Gawen replied again, “You should throw a torch or something that lights up, maybe, or just try throwing something that’s harder than a stick because a stick could easily snap.”

Tuck looked around and found that there was something hanging in the dim light and he took it down. Tuck said, “It might be the last time I’ll be seeing you if this doesn’t work because the fire spreads all over, it might burn me and the mouse who helped me.” He threw it at the wall, but sadly nothing happened and the fire started spreading. He threw it at the one next to the door but not near the door and it finally worked. A passage opened up and he walked through the passage and the passage door closed. He walked through the dark passageway and then saw the shimmering light of the treasury and took some more things to show the king it wasn’t Gawen and then went back out, and snuck out again with a couple of small things.

The next day, news spread that it wasn’t Gawen and somebody else must have stolen the jewels. Tuck was so happy to be free and alive, he ran back to Gawen, who was still in the same place that he was before. Tuck was alive and had done his mission. Tuck was very satisfied with himself.

Gawen said, “You did good. You may keep the items you just found but when somebody’s not looking, return the other items you had stolen.”

“Can I keep twelve and return the rest,  if that’s okay with you Gawen?” asked Tuck.

“Sure,” answered Gawen, happy.

Just then, Gawen and Tuck realized they had made the king aware that it was not Gawen who stole the jewels, but the guards probably had stopped looking for Gawen and King Basil was probably thinking that he would never find Gawen ever again. Gawen decided to run away because he didn’t know how to fix their problems, and also he wanted to be free and not stuck up in the castle doing duties for King Basil anymore even though he used to really like the king.

“Tuck, do you want to run away together?” Gawen asked.

“Sure!”
They both started  planning to run away. Gawen looked back at the castle where King Basil sat. Gawen wrote a letter and slipped it under the door. It said:

DEAR KING BASIL,

THIS IS FROM YOUR HONORABLE GOOSE, GAWEN. I AM WRITING TO TELL YOU THAT I AM NOT THE ONE WHO STOLE THE JEWELS. I AM ALSO WRITING TO TELL YOU THAT I DO KNOW WHO HAS TAKEN THE GEMS, BUT  I WILL NOT TELL YOU THAT INFORMATION. YOU HAVE DISRESPECTED ME AND I DO NOT WISH TO BE FRIENDS ANY LONGER. I WILL ALWAYS REMEMBER THE GOOD TIMES WE HAD AS FRIENDS. I WON’T DISCLOSE WHERE I AM GOING EITHER. TUCK AND I ARE RUNNING AWAY TOGETHER.

SINCERELY,

GAWEN GOOSE

Gawen returned to Tuck and asked, “Are you ready?”

“Let’s go.”

 

THE END

 

Epilogue

Twenty years later, Tuck and Gawen are successful scientists and heroes. They are now known throughout many lands and KINGDOMS, including King Basil’s…

 

DUN DUN DUN!

 

 

The Sword of Hearth and Fire

Prologue:

In 2013, Hearth and fire fell into the hands of Don Read. In 2014, Vladimir Putin started a war with the Ukraine. In 2015, it was declared a world war. In 2016, the Ukraine began to falter under the power of Russia. In 2017, Putin dropped a nuclear bomb on the Ukraine. In 2018, the last 7 remaining Ukrainian people were forced to evacuate the country, leaving only separatists.

 

THE ESCAPE FROM THE UKRAINE (Vladimir)

 

I have been in this hospital for over three years, so when the separatist told me I was better, my first reaction was to say that I was not really a separatist, but I thought better of it. I tried standing, however, I faltered under my own weight. The years I had spent lying in bed had gained me more than 70 pounds.

“You need to lose quite a few pounds before you can actually stand on your own,” said the separatist doctor Eiseneweir. “It will be weeks before you can stand.”

“How am I supposed to do this crap if I can’t stand?” I asked him.

I don’t hate to exercise, but I’m infuriated by the fact that I still can’t stand after all these years of lying around, bored to death.

“I can hide you from the separatist army while you get into shape.”

“W-why would you hide me?”

“Do you know that you are not a separatist?” Said Eisenewier, mocking concern.

“But you’re a separatist?” by now my hands were shaking.

“Separatist born and bred, yes,” his expression was hard to read, “but not a supporter of Putin.”

Lee Eiseneweir lived in an apartment as obviously ruined by the war as mine. A large hole in the left wall was missing, and the roof now acted as the left wall.

“You can hide in my closet,” he said, “I will feed you once a day, and eventually you can go and build your muscle. Once you do that you must leave the Ukraine immediately. It is not safe here.”

 

Being in the closet for two months is not a comfortable position to be in. It is hot and sticky, and not being able to shower makes the closet smell like 1,000 sweaty old gym clothes. Not to mention that 1 bowl of beet soup and a glass of kvas leaves you very hungry.

Exercise was not nearly as hard as lying in a closet with very little food for three months. In less than a week, I was stronger than I ever have been been. At first, my arms were sore after doing the exercise. However, I eventually got used to it and it became a daily routine.

I would exercise in the Vladimir gym, a private gym that the Doctor belonged too. The gym was founded by the separatists of Ukraine, but they had sold it Leo Eisenwiek, who purposely sold it to the anti-separatist force of Russia and Ukraine (A.S.F.R).

Now and then people would hear news of strike backs on the behalf of the A.S.F.R., but normally the group would be quiet and write google drive documents and then share them with the other person or persons that need to know this information.

The group consisted of four women and one man. This meant that there was one other non-separatist person from the Ukraine.

The group was friends with Eiseneweir, so they would be arriving at the house at 10:35 A.M. to discuss “important matters.”

Back in the closet at 10:35 A.M., two women and one man entered the war destroyed apartment. “Would any of you like some tea?” asked Eiseneweir.

One woman nodded her head curtly.

“Well, you say that you have a very important secret to tell me, and I want to hear it.”

“May I be excused?” asked the woman with the tea.

“Yes, you may,” said Eiseneweir.”Now tell me what you are doing and what the secret is.”

The woman with the tea now came back into the room. For the first time I got a good look at the woman with the tea. She had black hair and pursed lips,and a wicked smile was on her face. This was also the first time I noticed how handsome Eiseneweir was. The other woman had a warming smile on her face that made up for the expression on her friends face. As they talked, I realized that the woman with the tea kept glancing back at my closet. “Eiseneweir, you said you were hiding a local in your closet. Why don’t you bring him out.”

She pulled her hair back out of its ugly bun into a ponytail that made her big head stand out. There was another strange thing about her. She seemed to be hiding something. Every time she looked at Eiseneweir it was a look of disgust, of hatred. Whenever she looked at the other two, she looked as sly as a snake. Suddenly she reached her hand into her pocket and pulled out a gun. Then, not being noticed, she put it back into her pocket. This woman was up to something, and it wasn’t something good. She yet again took out her gun, and pointed it at the back of Eiseneweir’s head. I jumped out and pushed the doctor down. The lady shot her gun instinctively and hit the man.

The lady lunged for me as the other lady tackled her. “Run!” shouted Eiseneweir. “Out of the Ukraine! Out of any land supporting Putin!”

The last thing I saw was the lady with the gun dying, being stabbed by the man she tried to kill.

Then I ran. I ran without looking or turning back. I didn’t know where I was going, but that did not matter now. All that mattered was that I got out of Putin’s territory. I had crossed the border of Poland. I slowed down after seeing the “Welcome to Poland” sign. I ran into the woods so that I wouldn’t attract any attention.

I was so tired that I was on the verge of a heart attack. I threw up, not because I was sick, but because I had pushed my body passed its will. I had ran more than a hundred miles, and tomorrow brought more running. I was going to go far passed Poland maybe passed Germany. Anyhow, I set down my clothes and looked for water. After draining some to make sure it was clean, I guzzled handfuls of water down and dove. It had been so long since I had been in the water. It was cold, so unlike the summer heat. I had not bathed for so long. I could feel all the dirt washing off my body. I could feel all that sweat washing down the river. It was almost as if I was leading a normal life.

I turned around and swam, being washed down the river by the current. I turned onto my back and let the current pull me back towards the city. I was almost at the well of Satenboun.

The well of Satenboun was the oldest and largest well in all of Europe. It marked the border of Poland and Germany. The well was a large stone well with a pump that took  people to work it. The well was abandoned in the 6th century. The well was built in the third century, where it was said to be the final resting place of the great sword forger Weivlam De Satenboun.

Satenboun was best known for his most brilliant work, hearth fire, the fire sword. It is said that the sword kills a man with the lightest touch. The sword also finds the person who is destined to have it.

By this time, I had banged my head on the side of the well. I quickly got out of the water and got into the house of the well. It was a homeless shelter, officiated by the government in 1997. Then I dozed off.

 

 

By 7/7/20, all Ukrainian locals were either killed or in hiding. Meanwhile Vladimir Putin invaded Lithuania.

 

 

THE INVASION (Leo)

I was sleeping in the Satenboun well for the last two years. The Satenboun well is a shelter for homeless people. The strange thing about this well is that it marks the grave of Weivlem De Satenboun, the forger of the sword of Hearth Fire.

I wasn’t happy about it. Definitely not. However, it was the only place I could go.

So anyway, when I walked back into the well, I noticed two separatist men stalking me. I began to walk faster into my bunk bed. The men also walked faster. I jumped into the nearest bunk. One of the Satenboun mates jumped on to the separatists head. I recognized him as Vladimir, who was a great friend of mine as a kid. The second separatist snuck up behind me, and Vladimir Eisekoff shouted a call of warning, and as I turned and the other separatist shot me. Searing pain and everything went black.

 

“Leo Eisenweik, wake up,” Vladimir’s smooth voice instantly told me that I was safe. “Please wake up. I don’t want Putin to have killed yet another local. Leo, we are almost wiped out. We can’t let Putin wipe us out, we can’t. So muster all your strength and live. If this is too much to ask, die.”

“I’m alive,” I said, “I’m alive and well.”

I looked up to see Vladimir’s triangular face hanging from his square forehead and resting on his flat chin. He was thinner than I remember and definitely stronger. You were able to see his six-pack through his thin rags, and his knees were definitely not the hardest part of his legs. As I remember it, Eisekoff was a bit chunky and one of the weakest kids around.

I looked at my chest, there was a bandage wrapped around the part of my chest where the bullet struck. There was no fat on my body, but no muscle either. I was as thin as a medium stick, and as weak as a newborn cat.

I slowly touched my wound. The moment my finger hit my chest, I was in agony. Visions of the gun filled my eyes. I couldn’t think. I saw a doctor come in to the room. She put gas around my mouth. Everything was calm, then it went black.

I was back in the Ukraine, holding Vladimir’s chubby hand in 2006, when we were both five. We were walking down Leikof road. My separatist neighbor, Ivan Vankoff, passed us an apple. We were looking for the bathroom. We knew it was down here somewhere. It was as if it were hiding from us. We, back then, weren’t divided by separatist and non-separatist. We were all just Russians. I would like to not be Russian, but I would rather be Russian than what l am now. Now I’m a target, and that is something I do not want to be.

 

I woke up to the to the sound of nurses doing stuff to my chest. Then, as I gained energy, heard them speaking. “Do you think he will live past daylight?” one of them was asking. “I need a full report on the man with the wound.”

“His breath is ragged and his heart is slow. Other than that, he seems pretty much normal. However, I don’t think he can live another hour.”

“Does his friend know?”

“He seemed to understand me well enough. They can both speak German.”

“So, we are going to need to let his friend know that he has to leave without his friend.”

“We are gonna need to make sure there are no other Ukrainian locals in this hospital and tell them to evacuate.”

“No,” Vladimir had entered the room, “I am not letting my friend die in the hospital while I escape.”

“He will die no matter what you do,” said the nurse. “It’s in his blood to do so.”

Vladimir laid his handsome face beside mine. “It will be all right,” He whispered. “Trust me on that.”

I couldn’t help but think about how easy it would be for him to be wrong. However, I comforted myself by thinking about how easy it was for him to be right. If he was wrong, something terrible might happen to me. If he was right, I would be okay, which went against the nurse’s report. The fact was that I was pretty sure that Vladimir, smart as he is, was wrong.

I couldn’t know how my heart was acting unless I felt the beat, and that is exactly what I did. For a long time, I could not feel a single beat. Had my heart stopped?  Was I about to die? Then I felt my heart beat. I would live! However, at this speed, I was likely to have a heart attack any time now. It was just a matter of minutes.

The main nurse attached a radar system to the side of my chest. “You’re doing better now,” she said, “In about two weeks you’ll be back on your feet.”

“I thought the Russians and the separatists had invaded Germany?” I asked.

“What I said only is of any importance if they don’t check the hospital, dear.”

The nurse talked to me like I was a kid and the doctor like I was a savage. Between the two of them, this recovery was unbearable.

 

Night had set over the hospital. The lights had been turned off and the hospital was dark. I checked my heart status. It was almost normal. The floorboards began to creak. Vladimir’s figure loomed over my bed and said, “Come on. Lets get out of here.”

 

 

On 8/3/20, Don Read passed away, leaving Hearth and Fire unowned.

 

THE NEW OWNERSHIP OF THE SWORD(Vladimir)

By September, Leo and I had arrived safely in America, and had exchanged Rubles for Dollar Bills. With the little money we had, we bought clothes and classes on how to speak the American language.

By the end of November, I could speak the English language almost as well as the Russian one. Leo, in his impatience, had decided he knew enough about English before we learned verbs and conjunctions. Both Leo and I spoke to each other in Russian, since it was our original language.

Anyway, one night when Leo seemed a little antsy, since Leo was not doing anything while I was in English class, I told him the story of my birth. “When I was born,” I said. “I was in my old house, the one with the barn. My father took me away from my mother after I stopped nursing, and taped my umbilical cord to a pig.

“Me and my father were never very close after that, it was as if that put a barrier of ice around us. Even when he was killed, I felt sad, but never as sad as I probably should have.”

“I can tell you the story of my birth,” said Leo after a long laugh. “When I was born, my father had died days ago in a mine explosion. My mother died of cancer days after I was born, but she had not taken me to any orphanage of any sort, so I went to live with my uncle Therem Bersnok and my aunt Grenade. They were awful people. Then I ran to the orphanage and they took me in. Then, when I was two, the parents you knew took me in. They were nice people. They were killed in a protest against Putin.”

I couldn’t help but feel really sorry for Leo. “I’m sorry,” I said.

“Don’t be,” he said, and then he burst into tears. “I can’t believe he killed them!”

In so many ways I wanted to kill Putin. However, the stronger part of me wanted to be what I had wanted for so long. To be normal. And if I stayed in the U.S., thats what I would be. Normal.

The Journey Through the Jungle

There were three people who had a dog. One person was a kid and the other two were grown-ups. These people were the dog’s parents. The people were asleep and the dog was awake. He wanted to go for a walk because the owners were sleeping and he wasn’t. He went for a walk and he saw an elephant. He was scared, and when he looked around, he couldn’t find his way home. He saw a monkey but the elephant was in his way. He wanted to ask the monkey how to get to his house.

He asked the elephant to move out of his way. When he got past the elephant, he asked the monkey if he knew how to get to his house, but the monkey said no. He asked the monkey to carry him to the treetops to see where his house was. He saw his house but it was a long way away. To get there he would have to go down the road, through the mud, across the log, across the river, and then turn and walk straight. At the end there was a lion blocking the house. The dog was scared of lions.

The dog put one foot in the mud before he realized it was starting to sink. He took his foot out really quickly. He didn’t know how to get across. All the sides were filled with mud. The mud was as wide as a river and he had to cross a rickety branch. It was made out of thin wire that he had to step on. While he was walking across the bridge, he fell. A giraffe saw him and walked through the mud because he was tall. The giraffe picked the dog up and brought him back to land.

They went over a slippery log that had orange, gross seaweed on it. The seaweed was slimy. Under the log was a vicious crocodile. If you woke him up, he would bite you and eat you. The giraffe stepped on the crocodile, and the crocodile was about to bite him but luckily the giraffe got to the other side.

They got to the other side and saw the lions. One was nice and one was mean. They were cousins. The dog hoped that the nice one would help them get past the mean lion. The dog and the giraffe went up to the nice lion and asked if he could tell the mean lion to let them pass. The nice lion said that that was his cousin, so he would gladly help. The nice lion said to the mean lion, “Stop being mean to him.”

The mean lion said, “No, I won’t.” So then the dog bit him but it didn’t really hurt him. Then the mean lion bit the dog back, but way harder. Right after the dog got bit, he stepped backwards and a thorn got into his paw.  The dog was now mad at the lion and the lion was now mad at the dog. The giraffe walked over to the dog and picked him up. The dog was very hurt. Because the giraffe was so tall, he walked right past the lion and brought him to his house. He put the dog in the cupboard so that he could eat something. He knew that he must be hungry. When he got out of the cupboard, he saw his humans. His owners saw the thorn in his foot and took it out. They then put a bandaid on where the lion had bite him. Then they gave him a bath because he was muddy from the mud. The dog felt hungry and the owners fed him. He felt so happy to be home that he fell asleep. He dreamt about how he left in the night and he said that he would never do that again.

The End

 

Neptune’s Throne

Chapter 1: The Beginning(Sophia Mona)

 

“Once in a faraway land…”

“Wait wait wait let me tell this one Soph. So my name is Mona, I live in the abyss.       I am an octocat, a very rare species of underwater cats. Actually the only species of underwater cats still living. There used to be many but the Tower Master killed them off in his battle for power and the throne of Neptune (the late octocat king). He was a bad man that Tower Master.

Anyhow us octocats had been fighting him for a while (10 years 7 months and 21 days to be exact) but we couldn’t find his secret and without a way to find him we couldn’t actually fight him. I was the head of the Elite Octocat Fighting Evil Tower Master Plan, Pickup, Destroy, Interrogate, Unit. Shortened, it was E.O.F.E.T.M.P.P.D.I.U.  We dealt with the abyss’s greatest criminals including the Tower Master. We couldn’t figure out how to defeat him. Finally we got it after ten years of fighting and planning. The reason the Tower Master was untouchable was that he could shape-shift. He didn’t need bodyguards or armored cars, he could just pretend he was one of us. That was when the real panic set in.”

 

Chapter 2: But I haven’t had my fur dye put in (Sophia)

 

“Mona dear, let me tell this part, you know how traumatic this was for me.”

“Fine, if you insist. Reader,I am warning you this may get dramatic.”

“I was going to get my weekly fur treatment at Uni-cats Claw Salon and Fur. Adovio, my fur wizard (he’s actually just a barber), said I should try pink in my fur ‘because pink makes cats wink.’ Adovio was just finishing my conditioner when it happened, everything exploded in light. The last thing I remember saying was ‘but I haven’t had my fur dye put in!!!’”

“As I said before Soph can get a little dramatic. She didn’t die she was simply catnapped.”

“Yes but that is not the point. The point is I didn’t get to put my hair dye in and that is unacceptable.”

“And my point is that your point should not be the hair dye.”

“Well my point about your point about my point is that…Wait what are talking about again?”

“I don’t know. Well then let me continue the story.”

“But I’m not done”

“Now you are.”

“What are you? What are you writing? Stop stop stop it. Mona Mona. Mona Rose Douglass. I am not done. Stop writing right now or I’ll tell Lusinda.”

“Oh you’ll tell my Ma. I’m so scared. Come on, really.”

 

Chapter 3: Catnapped(Mona not Sophia)

 

“How could you, Mona. You stole my chapter. I didn’t fini…”

“Soph was gone for days. I worried day and night about her. One sec, reader. Hey Soph see how I’m ignoring you here. Continuing, finally the call came. Shaking, I picked up the phone. I recognized the voice; it was a local goon we had been trying to find for a while.

 

‘We want 100,000 sand dollars or our friend dies. 6:00 the sea reef. Oh oh oh and bring shark burgers we’re hungry down here.”’

‘Shush up you fool, don’t crack, I thought you were supposed to be a professional.’

‘I am a professional, a hungry professional who wants something to eat!!! You can’t just hire a goon and not feed them.’

‘I said SHUSH UP!!!’

 

 

“I remember shivering inside. I would know that second voice anywhere. That was the Tower Master. I began to plan. I took my top officers, they followed behind me, lagging about twenty fins so the Tower Master did not see them. As I swam into the sea reef I was overwhelmed by its beauty there was coral of every shape, size, and color.  I swear one of them winked at me. I turned around slowly and saw the Tower Master. I was shocked to see him in his true form. Adavio.”

 

Chapter 4: Betrayal (Sophia)

 

“My turn. So all this time I was stuck in a pet carrier. A pet carrier of all things. I may be a cat but I am no fool. A pet carrier is for untamed wild animals, I am high ranking E.O.F.E.T.M.P.P.D.I.U. officer. I told this to the goon holding me but he only laughed. He laughed at me. How dare he, the disrespectful weasel. I mean that literally; he is actually a weasel. So Mona began her bargaining and just plain blabbing.

‘Which do you think is more exciting, coral or being beaten to the ground by weasels? I don’t know. Well we don’t have to find out you could just go back home and find a nice normal job without needing to do this, yeah huh huh.’

“The goon put my pet carrier down and started walking towards Mona. I predicted she had about 30 seconds to live 35 seconds max. Suddenly I felt myself moving, I try to scream but there was a paw over my muzzle.

‘We are here to help you it’s going to be ok. This is Major Bentin we will get you out of here.’

“5 minutes later I was walking with Mona. Turns out the goons were not so bad after all they just needed to be told they weren’t that bad. I turned to Mona and said to her ‘I can’t believe Adavio would betray me like that.’

‘He’s not Adavio though I mean he is but he isn’t. It’s all so confusing.’”

 

Chapter 5: How to beat a bad guy with sandfoil and a pocket mirror (Mona)

 

“Now my favorite book is a book called How to Beat a Bad Guy with Sandfoil and a Pocket Mirror. Great book, it was the reason I became head of the E.O.F.E.T.M.P.P.D.I.U. at age fourteen in octocat years (in two-leg yeg years I was two, now I’m four). Anywho, after the goons ran away to find their new home and job, the Tower Master fled. He ran from cave to cave, hiding place to hiding place. Meanwhile we were planning how to catch him. We talked about how to find him, and how to defeat him.

At 12 o’clock sharp it was time for lunch. I headed to Bob’s Seaburgers for a quick bite to eat. I was just ordering when the door chimed I glanced behind me and nearly fainted. I saw Adavio, but I wasn’t finished planning and the officers weren’t here. Then my instincts kicked in. I grabbed a role of sandfoil from behind the counter and ran as fast as my little paws could take me. I began running around Adavio wrapping him as tight as a mummy. When I ran out of foil I took a tiny mirror out of my backpack and reflected the light of the diner off the sandfoil and into Adavio’s eyes. In 2.553 seconds he couldn’t see. I remember saying to him ‘That is how you get rid of a bad guy with sandfoil and a pocket mirror.’”

 

Chapter 6: The Beginning of the end (Sophia)

 

“Back in the E.O.F.E.T.M.P.P.D.I.U. building, the Officers and I were getting a bit impatient. Actually, we were really impatient. We had received news that Adavio may be in the abyss. If he was, we were in trouble. After twenty minutes of waiting, I finally decided to go find Mona. I knew exactly where she was; it was her favorite diner. I walked through the front door and immediately saw why she was late. It was Adavio and I had a couple things to say to him. Before I could, Mona walked in front of me and said listen to the story first.

“Adavio explained that he had just wanted to get revenge on his father and that he only ever wanted to be a hairdresser:

‘When I was little my father was always away and when he was around he was always mean to me. He would tell me I was weak and I never did anything to help the family. I just wanted him to realize that I am strong and I don’t need him anymore. He started all the talk when my mother left us. There are so many days when I wish my mom was here. But she’s not. I wanted Neptune’s Throne because it was supposed to have the power to bring people back from the dead. I thought maybe I could bring back my mom and we could be together.’

I listened and it made sense but I was still mad and I had a reason. I had my own secret. Adavio had killed my family; my sister, my mother. That was when I moved in with Mona.”

“I told Adavio all of this and he began to cry. He said he hadn’t meant to hurt anyone he had just wanted infinite power. I still don’t get that to this day. “

“Me either. You don’t just say you want infinite power in front of two officers. So Soph convinced Adavio to go back to being a hairdresser and…”

“I wasn’t finished!!!”

“Sorry in advance reader.”

“To be continued after this catfight.

———-what————–no———————-hey stop—————–ow———- ———–you’re pulling my———————–I hate——————–what the —————no the———————-stop——————————ow————-sorry———————–sorry”

“Thank you, for letting us do that.”

“So we are going to share this chapter.”

 

Chapter 6: Continued (Mona & Sophia)

 

“So Adavio had just finished talking with Sophia and it seemed like we had convinced him to return to work as a hairdresser.”

“I didn’t know if he could still do hair. I mean he was blind after all. I asked him If he thought he could do my usual blowout with blond and pink highlights. He replied quickly in his british accent similar to mine:

‘Of course darling, you remembered pink makes cats wink. Those words are words to live by.’

‘Yes they are Adavio, yes they are.’

That was when I knew my old Adavio was back.”

 

The Epilogue

 

“Now three two-leg years later we are still living in the abyss, still fighting over almostly everything, and Soph is still going for her weekly fur treatments with Adavio. He went back to being a hairdresser at the uni-cat claw salon and fur. He is surprisingly good for a blind fur-dresser. I am now working at U.C.L. Undercover Cats League. Not as interesting a title as my last league but hey what can we do.”

“I am now working as a  fashion designer. The first fashion designer in the abyss. Mona and I are going to friends therapy so we can work out our kinks.”

“Sophia where is my furbrush!!!”

“Oh you still use that thing. I got rid of it.”

“SOPHIA!!!”

“Oops.”

“Deep breath Mona, deep breath. Soph, after this you are getting me a new furbush.”

“Ok, sorry. Hey, do know what happened to Major Bentin?”

“I haven’t seen him since that goon ran off crying 14 cat years ago.”

We look at each other with understanding in our eyes. What if one of the goons hadn’t actually changed? What if the Major was in trouble?